GTXImage CAD™ PLUS 2000

GTXImage CAD™ PLUS 2000
GTX Corporation
GTXImage CAD™ PLUS 2000
By GTX Corporation
GTX P/N 31601
GTX, GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000, GTXImage CAD PLUS, and GTXImage CAD are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the GTX Corporation, Phoenix, AZ.
Microsoft, Microsoft Windows,Windows NT, and Windows 2000 are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond, WA.
Autodesk, AutoCAD, DWG and DXF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Autodesk
Incorporated, San Rafael, CA.
All other trademarks or registered trademarks are property of their respective companies.
This manual was produced using Doc-To-Help®, by WexTech Systems, Inc.
Contents
Introduction
1
General Information .................................................................................................................. 1
Learning GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000..................................................................................... 1
Using this Manual ....................................................................................................... 1
Other Help................................................................................................................... 1
Installing the Software............................................................................................................... 2
Special Sections of the Manual ................................................................................................. 2
Basic Functions ......................................................................................................................... 2
Conventions of this Manual....................................................................................................... 2
Configuring the Software .......................................................................................................... 3
Raster Files ................................................................................................................................ 3
Using the Mouse Buttons .......................................................................................................... 3
The Left Mouse Button ............................................................................................... 3
The Right Mouse Button ............................................................................................. 4
Installation
5
General Information .................................................................................................................. 5
System Requirements.................................................................................................. 5
Installing the Software............................................................................................................... 5
Running SETUP.......................................................................................................... 6
Online Documentation .............................................................................................. 11
Files Installed by SETUP.EXE ................................................................................. 11
Run HINSTALL.EXE............................................................................................... 11
Installing the HASP Key........................................................................................... 12
Authorizing your HASP Key .................................................................................... 12
Establishing a License Manager to Operate Network Licenses ................................ 13
NetHASP Diagnostics............................................................................................... 16
Uninstalling the Software.......................................................................................... 18
General Command Reference
19
General Information ................................................................................................................ 19
Using GTXImage CAD PLUS Documentation......................................................... 19
Using This Reference .............................................................................................................. 19
Executing Commands.............................................................................................................. 19
Starting Commands ................................................................................................................. 19
Using Transparent Commands ................................................................................................ 20
Suppressing Dialog Boxes....................................................................................................... 20
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Contents • i
Responding to Prompts............................................................................................................ 20
Selecting Options on the Command Line ................................................................................ 21
Using Wild-Card Characters on the Command Line ............................................................... 21
Repeating Commands.............................................................................................................. 21
Accessing Recently Used Commands ..................................................................................... 21
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes ..................................................................................... 22
References to Other Sections................................................................................................... 22
Typographical Conventions..................................................................................................... 22
Command Listings................................................................................................................... 23
ABOUT ..................................................................................................................... 23
APERTURE .............................................................................................................. 23
ARC .......................................................................................................................... 23
AREA........................................................................................................................ 26
ARRAY..................................................................................................................... 29
ATTDEF ................................................................................................................... 30
ATTDISP .................................................................................................................. 32
ATTEDIT.................................................................................................................. 33
ATTEXT ................................................................................................................... 33
AUDIT ...................................................................................................................... 34
BASE ........................................................................................................................ 35
BHATCH .................................................................................................................. 35
BLIPMODE .............................................................................................................. 40
BLOCK ..................................................................................................................... 41
BMPOUT .................................................................................................................. 42
BREAK ..................................................................................................................... 43
CHAMFER ............................................................................................................... 44
CHANGE .................................................................................................................. 46
CHPROP ................................................................................................................... 49
CIRCLE..................................................................................................................... 50
CLOSE ...................................................................................................................... 52
COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 52
COMPILE ................................................................................................................. 53
COPY ........................................................................................................................ 53
COPYBASE .............................................................................................................. 54
COPYCLIP ............................................................................................................... 55
COPYHIST ............................................................................................................... 55
COPYLINK............................................................................................................... 55
CUTCLIP .................................................................................................................. 55
DDEDIT.................................................................................................................... 56
DDPTYPE................................................................................................................. 57
DIM and DIM1 ......................................................................................................... 57
DIMALIGNED ......................................................................................................... 58
DIMANGULAR........................................................................................................ 61
DIMBASELINE........................................................................................................ 64
DIMCENTER ........................................................................................................... 66
DIMCONTINUE....................................................................................................... 66
DIMDIAMETER ...................................................................................................... 68
DIMEDIT.................................................................................................................. 69
DIMLINEAR ............................................................................................................ 71
ii • Glossary of Terms
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
DIMORDINATE ...................................................................................................... 74
DIMOVERRIDE....................................................................................................... 76
DIMRADIUS ............................................................................................................ 77
DIMSTYLE .............................................................................................................. 78
DIMTEDIT ............................................................................................................... 93
DIST.......................................................................................................................... 95
DIVIDE..................................................................................................................... 95
DONUT..................................................................................................................... 96
DRAGMODE............................................................................................................ 97
DRAWORDER ......................................................................................................... 97
DSETTINGS............................................................................................................. 98
DSVIEWER ............................................................................................................ 103
DXBIN.................................................................................................................... 104
ELEV ...................................................................................................................... 104
ELLIPSE ................................................................................................................. 105
ERASE .................................................................................................................... 109
EXPLODE .............................................................................................................. 110
EXPORT ................................................................................................................. 111
EXTEND................................................................................................................. 111
FILL ........................................................................................................................ 114
FILLET ................................................................................................................... 114
FILTER ................................................................................................................... 117
GRAPHSCR............................................................................................................ 119
GRID....................................................................................................................... 119
GROUP ................................................................................................................... 120
HATCH................................................................................................................... 123
HATCHEDIT.......................................................................................................... 127
HELP....................................................................................................................... 127
ID ............................................................................................................................ 128
IMAGE ................................................................................................................... 128
IMAGE Command Line.......................................................................................... 130
IMAGEADJUST..................................................................................................... 131
IMAGEATTACH ................................................................................................... 132
IMAGEFRAME...................................................................................................... 134
IMAGEQUALITY.................................................................................................. 134
IMPORT ................................................................................................................. 134
INSERT................................................................................................................... 135
ISOPLANE ............................................................................................................. 136
LAYER ................................................................................................................... 137
LAYOUT ................................................................................................................ 142
LAYOUTWIZARD ................................................................................................ 143
LEADER................................................................................................................. 143
LENGTHEN ........................................................................................................... 146
LIMITS ................................................................................................................... 148
LINE ....................................................................................................................... 149
LINETYPE.............................................................................................................. 150
LIST ........................................................................................................................ 152
LOAD ..................................................................................................................... 153
LOGFILEOFF......................................................................................................... 153
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Contents • iii
LOGFILEON .......................................................................................................... 153
LTSCALE ............................................................................................................... 153
LWEIGHT............................................................................................................... 154
MEASURE.............................................................................................................. 155
MENULOAD .......................................................................................................... 156
MENUUNLOAD .................................................................................................... 157
MINSERT ............................................................................................................... 158
MIRROR ................................................................................................................. 163
MLEDIT.................................................................................................................. 164
MLINE .................................................................................................................... 170
MLSTYLE .............................................................................................................. 172
MODEL................................................................................................................... 176
MOVE ..................................................................................................................... 176
MSPACE................................................................................................................. 176
MULTIPLE ............................................................................................................. 186
MVIEW................................................................................................................... 186
NEW........................................................................................................................ 190
OFFSET .................................................................................................................. 193
OOPS ...................................................................................................................... 194
OPEN ...................................................................................................................... 194
OPTIONS................................................................................................................ 198
ORTHO ................................................................................................................... 220
OSNAP.................................................................................................................... 220
PAGESETUP .......................................................................................................... 222
PAN......................................................................................................................... 226
PARTIALOAD ....................................................................................................... 227
PARTIALOAD Command Line ............................................................................. 229
PASTEBLOCK ....................................................................................................... 231
PASTECLIP ............................................................................................................ 231
PASTEORIG........................................................................................................... 231
PASTESPEC ........................................................................................................... 232
PEDIT ..................................................................................................................... 232
PLAN ...................................................................................................................... 238
PLINE ..................................................................................................................... 240
PLOT....................................................................................................................... 244
PLOTSTYLE .......................................................................................................... 249
PLOTSTYLE Command Line................................................................................. 250
PLOTTERMANAGER ........................................................................................... 250
POINT ..................................................................................................................... 251
POLYGON.............................................................................................................. 251
PREVIEW ............................................................................................................... 253
PSDRAG ................................................................................................................. 254
PSETUPIN .............................................................................................................. 254
PSFILL.................................................................................................................... 254
PSOUT .................................................................................................................... 255
PSPACE .................................................................................................................. 257
PURGE.................................................................................................................... 257
QDIM ...................................................................................................................... 258
QLEADER .............................................................................................................. 258
iv • Glossary of Terms
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
QSAVE ................................................................................................................... 262
QSELECT ............................................................................................................... 262
QTEXT ................................................................................................................... 263
QUIT ....................................................................................................................... 263
RAY ........................................................................................................................ 264
RECOVER .............................................................................................................. 264
RECTANG.............................................................................................................. 264
REDO...................................................................................................................... 265
REDRAW ............................................................................................................... 266
REDRAWALL........................................................................................................ 266
REFCLOSE............................................................................................................. 266
REFEDIT ................................................................................................................ 267
REFSET .................................................................................................................. 268
REGEN ................................................................................................................... 269
REGENALL............................................................................................................ 270
REGENAUTO ........................................................................................................ 270
REINIT ................................................................................................................... 270
RENAME................................................................................................................ 271
RESUME ................................................................................................................ 271
ROTATE................................................................................................................. 271
RSCRIPT ................................................................................................................ 272
SAVE ...................................................................................................................... 272
SAVEAS ................................................................................................................. 273
SCALE .................................................................................................................... 275
SCRIPT ................................................................................................................... 276
SELECT .................................................................................................................. 277
SETVAR ................................................................................................................. 280
SHAPE.................................................................................................................... 280
SHELL .................................................................................................................... 281
SKETCH ................................................................................................................. 281
SNAP ...................................................................................................................... 282
SPELL..................................................................................................................... 284
SPLINE ................................................................................................................... 285
SPLINEDIT ............................................................................................................ 287
STATUS ................................................................................................................. 292
STRETCH............................................................................................................... 293
STYLE .................................................................................................................... 294
STYLESMANAGER.............................................................................................. 296
SYSWINDOWS...................................................................................................... 297
TEXT ...................................................................................................................... 297
TEXTSCR............................................................................................................... 303
TIME....................................................................................................................... 303
TOLERANCE ......................................................................................................... 304
TOOLBAR.............................................................................................................. 308
TRANSPARENCY ................................................................................................. 311
TRIM....................................................................................................................... 312
U.............................................................................................................................. 314
UCS......................................................................................................................... 315
UCSICON ............................................................................................................... 320
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Contents • v
UNDO ..................................................................................................................... 324
UNITS..................................................................................................................... 326
VIEW ...................................................................................................................... 328
VIEWRES ............................................................................................................... 332
VPCLIP ................................................................................................................... 332
VPLAYER .............................................................................................................. 333
VPORTS ................................................................................................................. 334
WBLOCK ............................................................................................................... 336
WMFIN ................................................................................................................... 337
WMFOPTS ............................................................................................................. 341
WMFOUT ............................................................................................................... 341
XATTACH.............................................................................................................. 341
XBIND .................................................................................................................... 343
XCLIP ..................................................................................................................... 344
XLINE..................................................................................................................... 346
XREF ...................................................................................................................... 348
ZOOM ..................................................................................................................... 351
Raster Command Reference
355
General Information .............................................................................................................. 355
Command Overview.............................................................................................................. 355
Raster Picking Options .......................................................................................................... 359
Raster Object Snapping Options............................................................................................ 360
Command Definitions............................................................................................................ 361
gACTIVE (Active Image) ....................................................................................... 361
gADESKEW ........................................................................................................... 362
gARRAY................................................................................................................. 363
gATTACH............................................................................................................... 364
gAUTOSNAP ......................................................................................................... 365
gBURN.................................................................................................................... 366
gCALIKE ................................................................................................................ 368
gCELEV.................................................................................................................. 369
gCHANGE .............................................................................................................. 369
gCHGLAY .............................................................................................................. 371
gCONCEN .............................................................................................................. 372
gCONVRT .............................................................................................................. 372
gCOPY .................................................................................................................... 375
Copy All Images...................................................................................................... 376
gCREATE ............................................................................................................... 376
CROP ...................................................................................................................... 377
gCUT....................................................................................................................... 377
gDESKEW .............................................................................................................. 379
DrawOrder Back ..................................................................................................... 380
gECONVRT ............................................................................................................ 380
gEDGE .................................................................................................................... 381
gERASE .................................................................................................................. 382
gFRZLAY ............................................................................................................... 382
gHELP..................................................................................................................... 383
vi • Glossary of Terms
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Image Frame ........................................................................................................... 383
Image Transparency ................................................................................................ 383
gINACTIVE............................................................................................................ 384
gINFO ..................................................................................................................... 384
gINVERT ................................................................................................................ 385
gISOLAY ................................................................................................................ 385
gJOIN...................................................................................................................... 385
gLINE ..................................................................................................................... 386
gMIRROR............................................................................................................... 386
gMOVE................................................................................................................... 387
Move All Images..................................................................................................... 388
gOFFSET ................................................................................................................ 389
gOSR....................................................................................................................... 390
gPASTE .................................................................................................................. 390
gRAHEAD .............................................................................................................. 393
gRASTER ............................................................................................................... 393
gREFLCT................................................................................................................ 396
gRELIMIT .............................................................................................................. 396
gRESIZE ................................................................................................................. 397
gROTATE............................................................................................................... 397
Rotate All Images.................................................................................................... 399
gRUB ...................................................................................................................... 399
gSAVE .................................................................................................................... 400
gSCALE .................................................................................................................. 401
Scale All Images ..................................................................................................... 402
gSCAN .................................................................................................................... 402
gSETLAY ............................................................................................................... 403
gSMOOTH.............................................................................................................. 404
gSPECKL................................................................................................................ 408
gTCONFIG ............................................................................................................. 409
gTCONVRT............................................................................................................ 413
gTRACE ................................................................................................................. 415
gTRAIN .................................................................................................................. 416
gTURN.................................................................................................................... 419
gVECTOR............................................................................................................... 420
gVSKEW ................................................................................................................ 420
gWARP ................................................................................................................... 420
Getting Started
423
Using the Tutorials ................................................................................................................ 423
Following the Lessons............................................................................................. 423
Standardizing Your Environment for the Tutorials................................................. 423
Editing a Raster File................................................................................................ 423
Lesson 1: Raster Cleanup ...................................................................................................... 423
Load a Raster File ................................................................................................... 424
Open an Image ........................................................................................................ 424
Rename an Attached Image..................................................................................... 424
Enhance the Raster Image ....................................................................................... 425
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Contents • vii
Use gDESKEW to Straighten the Drawing............................................................. 425
Use gCROP to Clean Up Borders ........................................................................... 426
Use gSPECKL to Remove Speckles ....................................................................... 426
Save Your Changes ................................................................................................. 427
Edit Raster Geometry ............................................................................................................ 428
Use gCOPY to Copy Raster Geometry ................................................................... 428
Use gERASE to Remove Raster Geometry............................................................. 428
Use gSCALE to Resize Raster Geometry ............................................................... 429
Use gRASTER to Rasterize Vector Geometry........................................................ 429
Use gCUT to Save Selected Raster Geometry ........................................................ 430
Replacing Raster Text with Vector Text ................................................................. 430
Use gPASTE to Insert Cut Raster Geometry........................................................... 431
Use gCOPY to Copy Raster Geometry ................................................................... 431
Use gROTATE to Rotate Raster Geometry ............................................................ 432
End the Session ....................................................................................................... 432
Loading Your New Drawing ................................................................................... 433
What You’ve Learned ............................................................................................. 433
Lesson 2 - Raster Revision .................................................................................................... 433
Load a Raster File ................................................................................................... 433
Renaming the Raster File ........................................................................................ 434
Scaling the Image .................................................................................................... 434
Enhance the Raster Image ....................................................................................... 435
Use gDESKEW to Straighten the Drawing............................................................. 435
Edit Raster Geometry .............................................................................................. 435
Use gCHANGE to Modify a Circle ........................................................................ 435
Use gCHANGE to Modify a Line ........................................................................... 436
Converting Raster to Vector.................................................................................... 438
Use the “Edge” Raster Snap to Draw a Solid.......................................................... 438
Use the “Nearest” Raster Snap to Draw a Polyline ................................................. 438
Use gTRACE to Convert a Raster Line to Vector................................................... 439
Use gRUB to Erase all Raster Underlying Vector Entities ..................................... 439
Combining Raster Drawings ................................................................................... 439
Use gPASTE to Insert a Raster Image .................................................................... 439
Making a Frame ...................................................................................................... 440
Save the Drawing .................................................................................................... 440
Loading Hybrid Drawings....................................................................................... 440
What You’ve Learned ............................................................................................. 441
Lesson 3: Raster to Vector..................................................................................................... 442
Summary of GTX Conversion Commands: ............................................................ 442
Loading a Raster File .............................................................................................. 442
Use gCONVRT to Convert Raster to Vector .......................................................... 443
Converting Raster Text to Text Entities .................................................................. 444
Use gTCONVRT to Recognize Raster Text............................................................ 446
Converting Dashed Raster Data .............................................................................. 447
What You’ve Learned ............................................................................................. 448
Lesson 4: Using Advanced Conversion Features .................................................................. 449
Prepare the drawing................................................................................................. 449
What You’ve Learned ............................................................................................. 451
Lesson 5: Using Intelligent Character Recognition ............................................................... 452
viii • Glossary of Terms
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Preparation .............................................................................................................. 452
Configuring Text Recognition ................................................................................ 452
What You’ve Learned ............................................................................................. 454
System Variables
455
GTXImage CAD 2000 System Variables.............................................................................. 455
Dimension Variables
491
Dimension Variables Quick Reference ................................................................................. 491
Dimension System Variables .................................................................................. 491
Dimension Styles .................................................................................................... 494
Using GTXImage CAD PLUS
497
The Purpose of This Section.................................................................................................. 497
Raster and Vector .................................................................................................................. 497
GTXImage CAD PLUS and Raster Images........................................................................... 497
Product Functionality ............................................................................................................ 498
Loading Raster Images Into GTXImage CAD PLUS ............................................. 498
Scaling and Aligning Attached Raster Images........................................................ 498
Orienting and Rotating Image Entities.................................................................... 499
Creating New Raster Images................................................................................... 499
Cropping Raster Data.............................................................................................. 500
Modifying Images ................................................................................................... 500
Cutting and Pasting Raster ...................................................................................... 500
Converting Between Raster and Vector .................................................................. 501
Vector Cleanup ....................................................................................................... 502
Snapping to Raster................................................................................................................. 502
Saving Images ....................................................................................................................... 503
Migrating Hybrid Data............................................................................................ 503
GTXImage CAD PLUS Performance Factors....................................................................... 504
Automatic Save Interval.......................................................................................... 504
Swap Space ............................................................................................................. 504
Aerial View ............................................................................................................. 504
Current View/Zoom ................................................................................................ 504
Draft Quality ........................................................................................................... 504
Multiple Images ...................................................................................................... 504
Raster File Formats
505
Supported File Formats ......................................................................................................... 505
Reference Files ...................................................................................................................... 506
Rastrans Raster Format Translator V5.0 ............................................................................... 507
Windows GUI Version............................................................................................ 507
Rastrans.wri............................................................................................................. 508
DOS Version of GTX Rastrans............................................................................... 508
CAD Overlay to GTXImage CAD PLUS Translator ............................................................ 509
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Contents • ix
Configuration
511
How to Control the Environment .......................................................................................... 511
Customizing........................................................................................................................... 517
Configuration Entry Descriptions.......................................................................................... 517
Basic Configuration Parameters .............................................................................. 517
Text Configuration Parameters ............................................................................... 518
Raster-to-Vector Conversion Parameters ................................................................ 519
Other Parameters ..................................................................................................... 520
Line Width Configuration ....................................................................................... 521
GTX OSR V6.0
523
System Requirements ............................................................................................................ 523
Using GTX OSR.................................................................................................................... 523
Conversion Process ................................................................................................. 523
Main Screen Layout ................................................................................................ 524
Import Files ............................................................................................................. 524
Basic Pane ............................................................................................................... 526
Advanced Tab ......................................................................................................... 528
Vector Entity Translation ...................................................................................................... 530
Command Line Version of OSR............................................................................................ 530
Process Flow ........................................................................................................... 530
Configuration Files.................................................................................................. 531
Command-Line Entries ........................................................................................... 535
Glossary of Terms
xi
Index
xv
x • Glossary of Terms
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Introduction
General Information
™
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 contains the powerful GTX raster-to-vector and raster-to-text
conversion technology and enhances raster data manipulation.
•
Automatic Raster-to-Vector conversion. Snapping to ortho, CAD and contour conversion,
and edge vectorization are supported.
•
Intelligent Character Recognition (GTX¨ICR) feature converts raster text into CAD text.
Text represents 20% of typical engineering drawings.
•
Character Training allows users to train the character recognition system on new lettering
styles.
Learning GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Using this Manual
There are many places to look for help in using this software. This manual contains much
information about installing and learning how to use the software.
1.
Follow the step-by-step lessons in "Getting Started" to learn some of the features and
functions of the software.
2.
Look up general functions in the "General Command Reference" chapter.
3.
Look up specific raster enhancement, editing, and conversion commands and functions in the
"Raster Command Reference" chapter.
4.
Look up terms in the index.
Other Help
5.
Access online help.
6.
Help/Contents... displays a list of topics.
Help/Search for Help on... provides an index from which specific commands can be
selected.
F1 to display context-sensitive help which relates to what GTXImage CAD PLUS is currently
doing (do this during a command and Help will display a description of that command).
7.
Browse the GTX Web site (www.gtx.com/gtx) contains current product information and
technical notes on GTX software.
8.
E-mail [email protected] for additional information.
9.
Contact your authorized GTX reseller.
10. Contact GTX Technical Support (you have ninety (90) days of free technical support after you
authorize your software with GTX).
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Introduction • 1
11. Extend the value of your product with a Software Maintenance Agreement. GTX provides
extended technical support and updates/upgrades to future releases.
Installing the Software
The "Installation" section describes how to install and configure GTXImage CAD PLUS. The
"Installing the HASP Key" section describes how to configure the HASP security key, a hardware
'dongle' attached to your workstation's parallel port.
NOTE: You must authorize your software in order to obtain its full use!
Unauthorized GTXImage CAD PLUS software is limited to only 50 uses (if you have a network
license, it is limited to 120 uses). Use information provided by the CUSTOMER program to fill out
your AUTHORIZATION FORM, and FAX the form to GTX as soon as possible. The sooner you
authorize your software license, the sooner you can upgrade the software to unlimited uses!
Special Sections of the Manual
Glossary of Terms
Defines special terms used in this manual which are printed in boldface.
Configuration
Lists and describes the entire GTXRAST.CFG configuration file and
explains the parameters that provide needed information and values for
many aspects of GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Raster File Formats
Lists supported raster import and export formats. Also describes software
which accompanies GTXImage CAD PLUS.
How To
A special section – similar to a tutorial but using a more theoretical
approach to instruction. How To will quickly give you the basic principles
of working with raster and vector data.
GTX OSR
Describes the GTX OSRTM (Open Systems Recognition) program. GTX
OSR is used for batch processing multiple scanned image files, converting
them to DXF or other supported vector file formats.
Basic Functions
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the following keyboard conventions:
•
The [RETURN] and [Space] keys can often be used interchangeably to accept default
prompt values (so can the right mouse button in many cases). When GTXImage CAD PLUS is
prompting you to type text entries, [Space] types a space character.
•
The [Esc] button cancels commands in progress.
•
Transparent commands can be used within other commands. To do a Transparent Zoom,
while another command (i.e. Move Vector) is running, select the appropriate Zoom button.
•
As with most Windows applications the Focus (a dark box displayed around a button)
indicates that pressing [RETURN] would select that button.
Conventions of this Manual
The following conventions are followed throughout this manual:
2 • Introduction
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
1.
The following will always be presented in Italics:
Variables, including file names or numeric entries.
Throughout the manual you will find detail or warning notes.
NOTE: Eye Glasses mark DETAILS, indicating that you can boost your productivity.
NOTE: The exclamation point marks WARNINGS, indicating important information or
scenarios that could cause loss of data or valuable time.
2.
[RETURN] means press the "RETURN" key or "ENTER" key.
3.
Special terms, entries to be typed or buttons to be clicked will be printed in boldface.
Type: NO
Click OK
"...Each character is assigned a Confidence Level, indicating..."
Configuring the Software
GTXImage CAD PLUS receives many of its initial values from GTXRAST.CFG, which can be
edited with a text editor such as Notepad (See the "Configuration" chapter).
Raster Files
The raster files you will use with GTXImage CAD PLUS are created with a scanner. Properly
calibrating it and following its instructions will generate better images. The better the image, the
less editing will be necessary.
Acceptable raster file formats are listed in the "Raster File Formats" chapter.
Using the Mouse Buttons
The mouse buttons will have different effects depending on the mouse pointer's location.
The Left Mouse Button
The left mouse button controls all selection activities. To select a vector entity, move the mouse
pointer over the entity and use the left mouse button. To select more than one, draw a rectangle
around the entities by selecting two points in empty space away from any entities or objects. Raster
selection is done in the same way, except the command must be invoked or started before you can
select raster data.
To invoke a command from a toolbar, move the mouse pointer over the button and press the left
mouse button. Some toolbars contain fly-outs, indicated by a button, which displays a small
triangle in the lower-right corner. To access a button on a fly-out, move the mouse pointer over the
button and hold down the left mouse button until the fly-out appears. Slide along the fly-out (still
holding the mouse button down) until you find the button you wish to select.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Introduction • 3
Figure 1: On the Draw toolbar, the Dynamic Text
button contains a fly-out of all the methods of
drawing text.
As with all Windows applications, the left mouse button is used to navigate through the pull-down
menus.
The Right Mouse Button
If GTXImage CAD PLUS is prompting you for an entry, the right mouse button has the same
effect as hitting [RETURN].
While the mouse cursor is in the drawing area, holding the shift button down while clicking the
right mouse button will display the pop-up menu. This has controls for raster and vector snapping.
If you accidentally right-click the mouse pointer on a toolbar, a list of all the available toolbars in
GTXImage CAD PLUS will appear. Simply select the name of a toolbar you need and it will be
displayed.
4 • Introduction
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation
General Information
This installation may vary somewhat depending on whether you purchased a single user or
network license and depending on the software level you are installing.
After installing this software, you must Authorize your HASP hardware key for your software to
be permanently licensed.
System Requirements
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 requires the following configuration:
CPU
You must be using a Pentium or equivalent.
Hard Drive
About 70 MB free disk space required for program files.
Memory
64 MB of memory. 128 MB recommended if using exceptionally large files or
multiple raster images.
Virtual Memory Use 120 MB swap file. If using multiple raster layers you may need
substantially more swap space.
Environment Windows NT 4.0; Windows 95, 98, or 2000.
Installing the Software
Follow these steps to install your software:
Table 1: Installation Checklist
1. Run SETUP from the CD-ROM to install the
program.
2. Read README.DOC and other files for recent
changes to the installation instructions!
3. Run HASP DRIVER from the Start menu to set up
HASP device drivers. (On NT or 2000 systems you
must be the administrator to do this).
4. Write the serial number printed on your HASP
security key on your authorization form if it is not
already there.
5. Attach HASP key to your computer’s parallel
printer port.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation 5
6. Run CUSTOMER.EXE and use it to find your
HASP ID (that is not the number printed on your
key).
7. Fax your authorization form to GTX. GTX will
return fax a form with your RUS password
that you will use to fully authorize your key.
8. If using a network license, establish the
NetHASP network license manager by running
LMSETUP.EXE.
8. Run the software!
Running SETUP
NOTE: To put the GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 icons in a common program group
(available to any user of the computer) under Windows NT, run SETUP as the
administrator. To make a personal program group available only to a single user, run
SETUP as that person.
NOTE: When installing GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 on Windows NT and Windows 2000,
you must be logged on as the administrator.
6 Installation
1.
Insert the GTX CD-ROM.
2.
A navigator should start if your system is set up to handle Autorun files on CDROMS. The navigator makes it easy to browse to the product and then select install.
If a CD-ROM navigator does not start, select Run... from the Start menu…
3.
Select SETUP.EXE from the ICAD 2000 directory of the GTX CD-ROM.
4.
When the file is displayed, Select OK.
5.
SETUP will initialize and after a few seconds the opening dialog will appear.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
6.
Select Next to display the License Agreement dialog box.
7.
Read the License Agreement carefully. Select Yes to accept the terms of the License
Agreement. If you do not agree with the terms of the Agreement, select NO and the
installation will terminate. If you agree and select YES, the Choose Destination
dialog will appear.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation 7
8.
The default destination path for the GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 program files is
C:\Program Files\GTX\Image CAD PLUS 2000. To install the program elsewhere,
type or browse to the desired destination directory.
Select Next.
9.
Select the Setup Type as either a licensed version or Demonstration Mode.
Select Next.
8 Installation
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
10. Select either Metric or Imperial (US) as your primary units of measurement.
Select Next.
11. Select the default name for the new Program Folder or enter a new folder name.
Select Next.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation 9
12. The installation will begin and report a real-time status. When complete, a message
dialog will appear reminding you to run the supplementary programs hinstall.exe and
customer.exe to properly license the software.
Select Yes to if you would like to view the readme.txt file for the latest information
about GTXImage CAD PLUS. Select NO to continue the installation without
viewing the readme file.
13. The final dialog box will appear. Select Finish to complete the installation.
10 Installation
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
NOTE: If you are installing as the administrator on a Windows NT machine, SETUP will
prompt you to create a common or personal program group. A common program group will
be visible to any users on that computer. A personal program group created by the
administrator will only be accessible to the administrator!
Online Documentation
SETUP will let you read README.DOC. Please read this for any instructions updated after the
printing of this manual.
README.DOC
RASTRANS.WRI Documents this batch raster file translation program.
ICAD.CHM
Online Help.
MONITOR.HLP
Assistance with monitor, a diagnostic tool for monitoring network
licenses.
NHSRVW32.HLP Assistance with license manager installation.
Contains changes to the installation and configuration not contained in
this manual. Print and review it before proceeding!
Files Installed by SETUP.EXE
SETUP installs many files. Here are some you may want to know about:
GTXRAST.CFG Sets operational parameters for GTXImage CAD PLUS software.
HINSTALL.EXE or HDD32.EXE Installs HASP hardware lock device drivers on your
system.
SETUP will leave a few files in the temporary directory. These may be deleted.
Run HINSTALL.EXE
HINSTALL.EXE must be run on the machine running GTXImage CAD PLUS. On Windows 2000
or NT 4.0, you must be the Administrator to run HINSTALL. Select Run under the Start menu.
Under the Command Line prompt, type:
C:\Program Files\GTX\Image CAD PLUS 2000\HINSTALL /I
HINSTALL.EXE version 4.02: This is the command line version of the HASP device driver
installation program. From a command line or Windows Run line an optional 'switch' must
be applied to make this file perform. The basic switches are hinstall.exe -i to install, and
hinstall.exe -r to remove device drivers from the Windows operating system. Running
hinstall.exe without a switch displays a usage table describing all 'switch' options.
HDD32.EXE version 4.02: This is the graphic version of the HASP device driver installation
program. As displayed in the following image there are three possible modes of operating the
program. Typical and Custom setup modes will take you through decisions about the
computer hardware pertaining to computer type (NEC, IBM) and LPT port number or USB
port. GTX distributes only parallel (LPT) port HASP key hardware. The remove button may
be used to extract the device drivers from the operating system and will only be present if
previously installed drivers have been found in the operating system files.
If you are running with a network license, the HINSTALL.EXE and HDD32.EXE programs
will not be necessary for the NetHASP Server, the computer which attaches to the NetHASP
key, if the LMSETUP.EXE program is used.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation 11
Installing the HASP Key
Your serial number has been printed on your HASP key. Plug this key into an LPT port on your
PC.
Single-user license: White "MemoHASP". Plug this key into the LPT port of your PC.
Network license: Red "NetHASP". Plug this key into the LPT port of the PC where the
network licensed software will be installed.
NOTE: If a printer is connected through the HASP key, you may need to turn on the printer
for the HASP key to be recognized.
NOTE: For Novell Netware or IPX networks: when authorizing your software, plug the key
into a client, not the server. Later, you may plug it into either the Novell server or one of its
clients.
Authorizing your HASP Key
Network HASP keys will limit GTXImage CAD PLUS software to 250 uses. Single user HASP
keys will limit the software to 100 uses.
Register your HASP key ID with GTX to authorize your software for unlimited uses! GTX will
provide you with a RUS Password (Remote Update System) which updates your HASP key.
1.
Fill out your Authorization Form.
2.
Plug the HASP key into the LPT printer port.
3.
Run CUSTOMER.EXE from DOS or Windows.
4.
Select Get ID [ALT-G] to retrieve the HASP ID number. Write your HASP ID number on the
Authorization Form. To exit the HASP ID NUMBER section of the CUSTOMER program,
Select OK [ALT-O].
12 Installation
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Exit CUSTOMER [ALT-X].
5.
Complete the Authorization Form, paying special attention to the program serial number, the
HASP ID number and your FAX number.
6.
FAX the Authorization Form with your HASP ID number to GTX Corporation. GTX will
provide you with a RUS password which you will use to gain permanent access to GTXImage
CAD PLUS.
7.
Once you have your RUS password, run CUSTOMER.EXE again. This time, select Manual
[ALT-M]. Enter the RUS code, using [TAB] between the separate segments. If the RUS
password is entered correctly, a message should appear : Hasp Updated Ok. The hasp key
now allows unlimited uses of the GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Keep CUSTOMER.EXE in the GTX program directory. You will need to use it for any future
software upgrades or to add seats to your network license.
If you are using a single user license, it should be ready to run!
Establishing a License Manager to Operate Network Licenses
This section only applies if you have a red network license. If you have a white memohasp (single
license), skip this section.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation 13
GTXImage CAD PLUS has the optional ability of floating, networked licensing. It is not
uncommon for GTX software users with several licenses to broadcast those licenses among several
computers, even between facilities, on a common network. The task of setting up the floating
license involves the installation of a 'NETHASP' license manager and HASP device drivers. The
license manager will be operated on a computer that also is connected to the NETHASP hardware
lock. The HASP device drivers are installed into the operating systems of the license managing
computer and each client computer intended to receive a GTX license. The operating system of the
license managing computer may be either DOS, Windows 3.11, Windows 95, Windows 98,
Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Novell. The license is broadcast over the TCPIP, NETBIOS, or
IPX network protocols.
Note: Care should be taken to ensure the latest versions of HASP software be applied. Check
the GTX Corporation web site at www.gtx.com for any updates to this license management
software.
LMSETUP.EXE: This is the graphic version of the NETHASP License Manager installation
program for Windows 95/98/NT/2000. 'Typical' install will install the necessary license manager
file and a help file, (NHSRVW32.EXE and NHSRVW32.HLP). If the license manager is being
applied to a Windows NT or 2000 an optional 'Service' button is added which will install the
NHSRVICE.EXE file. The Custom setup procedure as displayed below, does all of the above and
includes the option of applying command line 'switches', (Pressing F1 will display the list of
optional switches). A typical switch entry would be a declaration of the chosen network protocol (IPX, -TCPIP, -NETBIOS) to distribute the GTX program license.
The HINSTALL.EXE and HDD32.EXE programs will not be necessary for the NetHASP
Server, the computer which attaches to the NetHASP key, if the LMSETUP.EXE program is
used. That is because device driver installation is included in the LMSETUP.EXE process.
The Remove button is displayed if an existing license manager installation has been detected.
Changes and corrections to the installation may be accomplished by removing the NetHASP
License Manager then rerunning the LMSETUP.EXE. Device driver installation is included as the
last step of the LMSETUP.EXE process, so that this is the only HASP related file you will need at
the license serving computer.
14 Installation
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The final result of an installed license manager running as an NT or Win 2000 service will be the
inclusion of a NetHASP icon in the Windows 'system tray' next to the desktop clock.
Double clicking the icon will open the following window, which is explained in depth in the
NHSRVW32.HLP file. Note the 'switch' applied during the LMSETUP process, in the example
above, has set TCP/IP as the loaded protocol.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation 15
Windows 95 or 98 license managing computers will not have the 'service' feature but the NetHASP
License Manager program group icon may be copied to the Startup program group which will
result in the NetHASP icon operating in the system tray.
NetHASP Diagnostics
This section only applies if you have a red network license. If you have a white memohasp (single
license), skip this section.
At times a computer network seems mysterious. Decisions must be made when any problem arises
to determine what is at fault and how well things are actually working. The start of investigation
requires diagnostic utilities that will measure functionality. The floating license used with GTX
software is designed by Aladdin Knowledge Systems. GTX provides its customers the diagnostic
tools, supplied by Aladdin, which evaluate network communication between a license broadcasting
computer and a client computer which seeks the license.
The MONITOR.EXE program, when properly installed in the version that is compatible with the
NetHASP license manager, may be run from any Windows computer on the server network. The
example below shows a frame named Protocols which displays the possible network protocols
over which a NetHASP license manager may be broadcasting a GTX program license. Double
clicking the name of the 'Selected Protocol' will cause a response in the frame named NetHASP
License Manager. The NetHASP License Manager frame categorizes descriptive identification
queues which allow the program user to identify active license managing computers on the
network, if any. As a diagnostic event the MONITOR.EXE could help a user determine whether an
individual computer is capable of 'seeing' the license server. If a GTX license server is found and
displayed in the NetHASP License Manager frame, double clicking the line describing the server
will cause a response in the frame named NetHASP Users. This frame describes which available
licenses are in use. For detailed information on this subject, refer to the MONITOR.HLP file.
16 Installation
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The HASPDIAG.EXE program is primarily intended for use on a license serving computer which
is attached to the NetHASP key. The program is installed with the GTX programs found on the
GTX compact disk, and directly on the disk in the \HASP\DIAGS folder. A useful feature as
displayed here is found under the HASP Device Driver tab. This choice may be used to determine
the status of the local HASP device driver installation. For complete descriptions of the diagnostic
program features, read the information provided by HASPDIAG.HLP.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Installation 17
Uninstalling the Software
To remove GTXImage CAD PLUS from your system, use the Windows ADD/Remove Programs
utility in the your Windows Control Panel.
NOTE: Do not run this program unless you really want to remove the GTXImage CAD
PLUS 2000 software that was installed during SETUP!
NOTE: When uninstalling GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 on Windows NT and Windows 2000,
you must be logged on as the administrator.
The uninstall process may not remove all the files that were changed or added after installation,
such as vector or raster drawings. You need to remove those files yourself.
18 Installation
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference
General Information
The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to the GTXImage CAD PLUS commands, lists
all commands in alphabetical order.
In addition to the command listings, the Command Reference covers several topics in the
appendixes: the GTXImage CAD PLUS configuration file, system variables, dimension variables,
supported raster formats as well as other useful information.
For detailed information on Raster-specific funcionality of GTXImage CAD PLUS, please refer to
the Raster Command Reference in the next section.
Using GTXImage CAD PLUS Documentation
In addition to this Command Reference, several other resources are available to help you learn and
use GTXImage CAD PLUS, both online and in print. You can access it from the Help menu.
NOTE For the latest documentation corrections and additions, refer to the Readme.doc file.
Using This Reference
The Command Reference provides detailed information on all commands, command options, and
system variables. The explanations reflect the default GTXImage CAD system variable settings
and the default prototype drawing. If you change system variable settings, the prompts on your
screen might differ from what you see here.
Executing Commands
The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using one of several
methods. For some commands, such as REGEN, no further action is required. For other
commands, you must respond by providing additional information or actions in order to complete
the command.
As you work with commands, note that right-clicking in the drawing area either acts as ENTER or
displays a shortcut menu. You can control this behavior in the Options dialog box or with the
SHORTCUTMENU system variable.
Starting Commands
You can start a command by doing one of the following:
Select the command from a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut menu.
Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press
ENTER or SPACEBAR.
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description is a command
access section, listing the specific ways you can start that command.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 19
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Pan Realtime
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Pan.
Command line: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)
The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of the
SHORTCUTMENU system variable. The instructions in the command access sections assume that
you have made the indicated menu available.
You can exit a command at any time by pressing ESC.
Using Transparent Commands
In many cases, you can start a command while using another command. The command you start is
called a transparent command. Two right angle brackets (>>) precede prompts for transparent
commands.
Command:
line
Specify first point:
'grid
>>Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>:
on
Resuming LINE command
Specify first point:
In the Command Reference, the command access sections identify commands that you can use
transparently.
Suppressing Dialog Boxes
Many commands provide both command line and dialog box interfaces. In most cases, when both
a command line and dialog box interface are available, the command line version is preceded with
a hyphen character. For example, the command line version of GROUP is -GROUP.
Responding to Prompts
If a command does not immediately execute, GTXImage CAD PLUS either displays a dialog box
or displays prompts on the command line requesting more information. Command line prompts are
structured as follows:
Command: commandname
Current settings: Setting1 Setting2 Setting3
Instructional text [Option1/oPtion2/opTion3/...] <default option or value>:
The optional current value line displays the current settings for the command or for system
variables related to the command. The succeeding prompts identify the type of input required to
complete the command and, when applicable, list the available options in straight brackets and a
default option or value in angle brackets. In some cases, GTXImage CAD determines default
options and values based on the option or value that you last specified, or based on the settings of
certain system variables.
Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take. Most command line
prompts begin with the word enter, select, or specify. These words indicate how you can respond
to the prompt.
20 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Terminology in command line
prompts
If the prompt starts with...
You can...
Select
Select objects on the screen using your
pointing device.
Enter
Enter text on the command line.
Specify
Use your pointing device or enter text on
the command line to select a point
location on the screen.
Selecting Options on the Command Line
To select one of the options contained within the straight brackets, you can enter the entire option
name or only the capitalized letters, and then press ENTER or SPACEBAR. To select the default
option enclosed in angle brackets (<>), if available, press ENTER or SPACEBAR.
You can also choose command options from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area
while the command is active. The options available on the command line appear in the shortcut
menu.
Some prompts ask you to enter data, rather than (or as an alternative to) choosing an option. To do
so, enter the text on the command line and press ENTER or SPACEBAR. However, be aware that
when the command line prompt requests an object name, SPACEBAR inserts a space on the
command line rather than acting as ENTER. This allows for the support of extended symbol
names.
Just as default command options are often provided, prompts may include default values, enclosed
in angle brackets (<>), when data is requested. For example, the POLYGON command displays
the following prompt, suggesting 4 as the number of sides for your polygon:
Command: polygon
Enter number of sides <4>:
To accept the default value, press ENTER or SPACEBAR.
Using Wild-Card Characters on the Command Line
When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name, variable name, named view,
and so on, you can use wild-card characters to specify names.
Repeating Commands
If no command is active, you can repeat the previous command by pressing ENTER or
SPACEBAR or by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing the Repeat Command Name
option from the shortcut menu.
Accessing Recently Used Commands
You can access the six most recently used commands from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the
command window and choosing Recent Commands.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 21
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes
Several GTXImage CAD PLUS commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in which
you can navigate through your directory structure and select files to open. These dialog boxes may
include the following options.
Look In - Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to view the hierarchy
of the folder path and to navigate up the path tree.
Up One Level - Navigates one level up in the current path tree.
Create New Folder - Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you
specify.
List - Displays the contents of the Files list in a multicolumn list.
Details - Displays the contents of the Files list in a single-column list with file
details.
Search the Web - Displays the Browse the Web dialog box, from which you can
access and store GTXImage CAD PLUS files on the Internet.
Look in Favorites - Sets the Look In path to your system's Favorites folder.
Add to Favorites - Creates a shortcut to the selected file or folder and adds that
shortcut to your system's Favorites folder.
Files List - Displays the files and folders present in the current path and of the
selected file type.
File Name - Displays the name of the file selected in the Files list. If you select
multiple files, File Name displays each selected file within quotation marks. If you
enter a file name in the File Name box, GTXImage CAD clears any selection. You
must use quotation marks when entering multiple file names. You can use wild-card
characters to filter files displayed in the Files list.
Files of Type - Filters the list of applications by file type.
Preview - Displays a preview image of the selected file. The Preview area is blank if
you do not select a file.
Find File - Displays the Browse/Search dialog box. You can browse through
preview images of DWG files or search for files both locally and on a network.
Locate - Uses the GTXImage CAD PLUS search path to locate the file specified in
File Name. You set the search path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
References to Other Sections
At the end of most command descriptions, you'll find a section called "See Also." This refers to
other GTXImage CAD PLUS commands and system variables related to the current command.
Typographical Conventions
To orient you to GTXImage CAD PLUS features as they appear on the screen, specific terms are
set in typefaces that distinguish them from the body text. Throughout GTXImage CAD PLUS
documentation, the following conventions are used.
Typographical conventions
22 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Text element
Example
GTXImage CAD PLUS commands
ADCENTER, DBCONNECT, SAVE
GTXImage CAD PLUS system variables
DIMBLK, DWGNAME, LTSCALE
GTXImage CAD PLUS named-objects, such as
linetypes and styles
DASHDOT, STANDARD
Prompts
Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
Instructions after prompt sequences
Select objects:
method
File names and file name extensions
Folder or directory names
Use an object selection
Readme file, .dwg file extension
Sample folder, c:\program files\gtx\Image CAD
PLUS 2000\support
Text you enter
At the Command prompt, enter shape.
Keys you press on the keyboard
CTRL, F10, ESC, ENTER
Keys you press simultaneously on the
keyboard
CTRL+C
Formal arguments specified in function
definitions
The string and mode arguments
Command Listings
ABOUT
Displays information about GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Help menu: About…
Command line: about (or 'about for transparent use)
ABOUT displays the GTXImage CAD PLUS copyright information. Another command, gINFO,
provides additional information about the version of GTXImage CAD PLUS and any images that
have been loaded.
APERTURE
Controls the size of the object snap target box.
Command line: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use)
Object snap target height (1–50 pixels) <current>:
press ENTER
Enter a value (1–50) or
Object snap works only on objects inside or crossing the target box.
ARC
Creates an arc.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 23
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Arc
Command line: arc
Specify start point of arc or [CEnter]: Specify a point, enter ce, or press
ENTER to draw an arc tangent to the last line or arc
Start Point
Specifies the start point of the arc.
NOTE: If you press ENTER without specifying a point, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the
endpoint of the last drawn line or arc and immediately prompts you to specify the endpoint
of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line or arc.
Specify second point of arc or [CEnter/ENd]:
Second Point
Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first point is the start
point (1). The third point is the endpoint. The second point (2) is a point on the circumference of
the arc.
Specify end point of arc:
Specify a point (3)
You can create a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point
Using the center point (2), draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint
that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the third point (3). The arc does
not necessarily pass through this third point, as shown in the illustration.
Angle
Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) using a center point (2) with a specified
included angle. If the angle is negative, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a clockwise arc.
Included angle:
Specify an angle
Chord Length
Draws either a minor or a major arc.
Specify length of chord:
24 General Command Reference
Specify a length
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If the chord length is positive, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the minor arc counterclockwise from
the start point (1), using the center point (2) and chord length to compute the ending angle.
If the chord length is negative, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the major arc counterclockwise.
End
Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
Specify end point of arc:
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]:
Center Point
Using the center point, draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint (2)
that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (3) through the second point specified.
Angle
Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint (2), with a specified
included angle. If the angle is negative, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a clockwise arc.
Specify included angle:
Direction
Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc, major or minor, clockwise or
counterclockwise, beginning with the start point (1), and ending at an endpoint (2). GTXImage
CAD PLUS determines the direction from the start point.
Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc:
Radius
Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is
negative, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the major arc.
Specify radius of arc:
Center
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 25
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify start point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point
Using the center point (1), draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) to a point that
falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through an endpoint (3).
Angle
Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center point (1) with a specified
included angle. If the angle is negative, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a clockwise arc.
Specify included angle:
Chord Length
Draws either a minor or a major arc.
If the chord length is positive, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the minor arc counterclockwise from
the start point (2), using the center point (1) and the chord length to compute the ending angle.
If the chord length is negative, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the major arc counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord:
AREA
Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas.
Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system variables.
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry
Area
Command line: area
Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]:
enter an option
26 General Command Reference
Specify a point (1) or
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
First Corner Point
Calculates the area and perimeter you define by selecting points. All points must lie in a plane
parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total:
press ENTER
Specify a point (2) or
Select points (3), (4), and (5) to define a polygon, and then press ENTER, which completes the
definition of the perimeter.
If you do not close the polygon, GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the area as if a line were drawn
from the last point entered to the first. To calculate the perimeter, GTXImage CAD PLUS adds in
that line length.
Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. You can calculate the area of circles,
ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids.
Select objects:
Selecting an open polyline displays its area and the polyline length. With open polylines,
GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the
first. However, unlike when you select points to define an area, this line length is not added to the
length of the open polyline.
For a polyline with wide lines, the centerline is used to make area and perimeter (or length)
calculations.
Add
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas.
The Add option calculates the individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects as well
as the total area of all defined areas and objects. You can use the Subtract option to subtract
specified areas from the total area.
Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]:
an option
Specify a point (1) or enter
First Corner Point
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 27
Calculates the area and perimeter you define by selecting points. All points must lie in a plane
parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total (ADD mode):
point (2)
Specify a
Specify points to define a polygon (3). Press ENTER and GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the
area and perimeter. Furthermore, GTXImage CAD PLUS returns the total area of all the areas
defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on.
If you do not close a polygon, GTXImage CAD PLUS closes it by defining a line from the last
point to the first. To calculate the perimeter, GTXImage CAD PLUS adds in that line length.
Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object.
(ADD mode) Select objects:
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns the area and perimeter. Furthermore, GTXImage CAD PLUS
returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was
turned on.
Selecting an open polyline returns its area and polyline length. GTXImage CAD PLUS defines a
line from the last point of the polyline to the first in order to calculate the area. However, unlike
when you select points to define an area, this line length is not added to the length of the open
polyline.
Selecting a closed object returns its area and perimeter. For wide lines, or objects with wide lines,
centerlines are used in the area and perimeter calculations.
Subtract
Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you subtract specified
areas. The Subtract option calculates the individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and
objects as well as the total area as you subtract defined areas and objects. You can use the Add
option to add defined areas and objects to the total area.
Specify first corner point or [Object/Add]:
First Corner Point
Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points. All points must lie in a plane
parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total (SUBTRACT mode):
Specify points to define a polygon. Press ENTER and GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the area
and perimeter. Furthermore, GTXImage CAD PLUS returns the total area after subtracting all the
areas defined by specifying points or selecting objects since Subtract mode was turned on.
If you do not close a polygon, GTXImage CAD PLUS closes it by defining a line from the last
point to the first. To calculate the perimeter, GTXImage CAD PLUS adds in that line length.
Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object.
(SUBTRACT mode) Select objects:
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns the area and perimeter. Furthermore, GTXImage CAD PLUS
returns the total area after subtracting all the areas defined by specifying points or selecting objects
since Subtract mode was turned on.
28 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Selecting an open polyline returns its area and polyline length. GTXImage CAD PLUS defines a
line from the last point of the polyline to the first in order to calculate the area. However, unlike
when you select points to define an area, this line length is not added to the length of the open
polyline.
Selecting a closed object returns its area and perimeter. For wide lines, or objects with wide lines,
centerlines are used in the area and perimeter calculations.
Add
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you add specified areas.
ARRAY
Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern
Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. If you select multiple objects from
which to construct the array, GTXImage CAD PLUS counts the objects as one item to be copied
and arrayed.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Array Vector
Command line: array
Select objects:
Enter the type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <current>:
Rectangular
Creates an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the selected vector objects.
Refer to gARRAY in the Raster Command Reference for performing the same operation on raster
objects.
Enter the number of rows (---) <1>:
ENTER
Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>:
ENTER
Enter a nonzero integer or press
Enter a nonzero integer or press
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice versa.
GTXImage CAD PLUS assumes the selected object, or cornerstone element, to be in the lower-left
corner, and generates the array up and to the right.
The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corresponding lengths of the
object to be arrayed.
Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between rows. GTXImage CAD
PLUS skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite corners of a rectangle.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 29
Specify the distance between columns (|||):
To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between columns. GTXImage
CAD PLUS constructs rectangular arrays along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation.
This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y
drawing axes. The Rotate option of the SNAP command changes the angle and creates a rotated
array. The SNAPANG system variable stores the snap rotation angle.
Polar
Creates an array defined by specifying a center point or base point about which GTXImage CAD
PLUS replicates the selected objects.
Specify center point of array:
Specify a point (1)
Creates an array defined by a center point.
Enter the number of items in the array:
Enter a positive integer or press ENTER
If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the angle to fill or the angle
between items. If you press ENTER (and do not provide the number of items), you must specify
both.
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for
a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
GTXImage CAD PLUS sees 0 as no response. You can enter 0 for angle to fill only if you specify
the number of items.
If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if you specify the number
of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts for the
angle between items:
Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
GTXImage CAD PLUS determines the distance from the array's center point to a reference point
on the last object selected. GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the center point of a circle or arc, the
insertion base point of a block or shape, the start point of text, and one endpoint of a line or trace.
Rotate arrayed objects? <Y>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
In a polar array, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the reference point of the last object in the selection
set for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window or crossing selection, the last
object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing an object from the selection set and adding it back
forces that object to be the last object selected. You can also make the selection set into a block
and replicate it.
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition
30 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute definition is a template for
creating an attribute; it specifies the properties of an attribute and the prompts displayed when the
block is inserted.
Draw menu: Block Define Attributes
Command line: attdef
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Attribute Definition .
If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, ATTDEF displays prompts on the .
Attribute Definition Dialog Box
Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text options for an
attribute.
When you close the Attribute Definition dialog box, the attribute tag that you specified, which
identifies the attribute, is displayed in the drawing.
When you later include the attribute tag in a block definition using the BLOCK command,
GTXImage CAD PLUS erases the attribute tag from the drawing if you have selected the Retain
Objects option in the Block Definition dialog box. When you insert the block, GTXImage CAD
PLUS displays the attribute value at the same location in the block, with the same text style and
alignment.
Mode
Sets four optional modes.
Invisible
Specifies that attribute values are not displayed when you insert the block. ATTDISP overrides
Invisible mode.
Constant
Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify
Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block.
Preset
Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute.
Attribute
Sets attribute data. You can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading blanks in the prompt or
the default value, start the string with a backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start
the string with two backslashes.
Tag
Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. The tag
can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). GTXImage CAD PLUS
changes lowercase letters to uppercase.
Prompt
Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute
definition. If the prompt area is empty, the Tag entry becomes the prompt. If you select Constant in
the Mode area, the Prompt option is not available.
Value
Specifies the default attribute value.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 31
Insertion Point
Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or choose Pick Point to use the
pointing device to specify the location.
Text Options
Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text.
Justification
Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT.
Text Style
Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. See STYLE.
Height
Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter the text height value or choose Height to use the
pointing device. If you select a text style that has fixed height (anything other than 0.0), or if you
select Align in the Justification list, the Height option is not available.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter an angle or choose Rotation to use the
pointing device. If you select Align or Fit in the Justification list, the Rotation option is not
available.
Align Below Previous Attribute Definition
Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute. If you have not previously
created an attribute definition, this option is not available.
ATTDISP
Globally controls attribute visibility.
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. ATTDISP controls whether the attributes
in your drawing are visible.
View menu: View
Display
Attribute Display
Command line: attdisp (or 'attdisp for transparent use)
Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] <current>:
GTXImage CAD PLUS regenerates the drawing after you change the visibility unless
REGENAUTO, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the
current visibility of attributes in the ATTMODE system variable.
Normal
Retains the current visibility of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed. Invisible attributes
are not displayed.
On
Makes all attributes visible.
Off
32 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Makes all attributes invisible.
ATTEDIT
Changes attribute information.
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. In the Edit Attributes dialog box, you
can edit individual, nonconstant attribute values associated with a specific block. On the command
line, you can edit both attribute values and attribute properties individually or globally,
independent of a block.
Use the following access methods to edit attribute values for a specific block:
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Special Edit Attribute Single
Command line: attedit
Select block reference:
Select a block with attributes
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Edit Attributes .
Use the following access methods to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block:
Modify menu: Object
Attribute
Global
Command line: -attedit
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays prompts on the .
Edit Attributes Dialog Box
Displays the first eight attribute values contained in the block. Edit the attribute values. If the block
contains additional attributes, use Previous and Next to navigate through the list. You cannot edit
attribute values on locked layers.
To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT.
ATTEXT
Extracts attribute data.
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. Use ATTEXT to extract the data stored
in the attribute into a file.
Command line: attext
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Attribute Extraction .
If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, ATTEXT displays prompts on the command line.
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box
Specifies the file format for the attribute information, the objects from which you want to extract
information, and the template and output file names for the information.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 33
File Format
Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data.
Comma Delimited File (CDF)
Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one
matching attribute tag in the template file. Commas separate the fields of each record. Single
quotation marks enclose the character fields.
Space Delimited File (SDF)
Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one
matching attribute tag in the template file. The fields of each record have a fixed width; therefore,
field separators or character string delimiters are not appropriate.
Drawing Interchange File (DXF)
Produces a subset of the GTXImage CAD PLUS Drawing Interchange File format containing only
block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF{bmct tm.bmp} -format extraction
requires no template. The file extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.
Select Objects
Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with attributes. When the
Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens, Number Found shows the number of objects you selected.
Template File
Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. Enter the file name in the box, or
choose Template File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog
box. The default file extension is .txt. If you select DXF under File Format, the Template File
option is not available.
Output File
Specifies an output file name. Enter the file name in the box, or choose Output File to search for
existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box. GTXImage CAD PLUS appends
the .txt file extension for CDF or SDF files and the .dxx file extension for DXF files.
AUDIT
Evaluates the integrity of a drawing.
AUDIT is a diagnostic tool for examining the current drawing and correcting errors. For every
error detected, GTXImage CAD PLUS provides a description of the error, and recommends
corrective action.
File menu: Drawing Utilities
Audit
Command line: audit
Fix any errors detected? [Yes/No] <N>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set.
However, editing commands affect only the objects that belong to the current paper space or model
space.
If you set the AUDITCTL system variable to 1, AUDIT creates an ASCII file describing problems
and the action taken and places this report in the same directory as the current drawing, with the
file extension .adt.
If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER to retrieve the drawing and
correct its errors.
34 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
BASE
Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing
Use BASE if you plan to insert the current drawing into, or externally reference the drawing from,
other drawings and you need a base point other than 0,0,0. When you insert or externally reference
the current drawing into other drawings, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses this base point as the
insertion base point.
Draw menu: Block Base
Command line: base (or 'base for transparent use)
Enter base point <current>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
BHATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern.
BHATCH first defines the boundaries of the area you want to hatch, either by computing a region
or polyline boundary from a specified point within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as
boundaries. It then fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern or a solid color. BHATCH creates an
associative hatch, which updates when its boundaries are modified, or a nonassociative hatch,
which is independent of its boundaries. You can preview any hatch and adjust the definition.
NOTE: Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can hatch, editing
hatched geometry can produce unexpected results. In this event, delete the hatch object and
rehatch.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Hatch
Command line: bhatch
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Boundary Hatch .
If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt, BHATCH displays prompts on the command line.
Boundary Hatch Dialog Box
Defines the boundary, pattern type, pattern properties, and attributes for hatch objects. Use the
Quick tab to work with hatch patterns and quickly create a hatch. Use the Advanced tab to
customize how GTXImage CAD PLUS creates and hatches boundaries.
Quick Tab (Boundary Hatch Dialog Box)
Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.
Type
Sets the pattern type.
Predefined
Specifies a predefined GTXImage CAD PLUS pattern. These patterns are stored in the ICAD.pat
and ICADiso.pat files. You can control the angle and scale of any predefined pattern. For
predefined ISO patterns, you can also control the ISO pen width.
NOTE: When you use the Solid predefined pattern, the boundary must be closed and must
not intersect itself. In addition, if the hatch area contains more than one loop, the loops must
not intersect. These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 35
User Defined
Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype in your drawing. You can control the angle
and spacing of the lines in your user-defined pattern.
Custom
Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file that you have added to the GTXImage
CAD PLUS search path. (To use the patterns in the supplied ICAD.pat and ICADiso.pat files,
choose Predefined.) You can control the angle and scale of any custom pattern.
Pattern
Lists the available predefined patterns. The six most-recently used predefined patterns appear at
the top of the list. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system
variable. The Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Predefined.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette, in which you can view preview images for all
predefined patterns at once to help you make a selection.
Swatch
Displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern
Palette.
Custom Pattern
Lists the available custom patterns. The six most-recently used custom patterns appear at the top of
the list. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The
Custom Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Custom.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette, in which you can view preview images for all
custom patterns at once to help you make a selection.
Angle
Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS. GTXImage CAD
PLUS stores the angle in the HPANG system variable.
Scale
Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the scale in the
HPSCALE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined or Custom.
Relative to Paper Space
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option, you can easily display
hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout. This option is available only from a
layout.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the spacing
in the HPSPACE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined.
ISO Pen Width
Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the pen width you choose. This option is available only
if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one of the available ISO patterns.
Advanced Tab (Boundary Hatch Dialog Box)
Defines how GTXImage CAD PLUS creates and hatches boundaries.
36 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Island Detection Style
Specifies the method for hatching objects within the outermost hatch boundary. If no internal
boundaries exist, specifying an Island Detection style has no effect. Because you can define a
precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the Normal style.
The illustrations that accompany each style show how GTXImage CAD PLUS hatches a group of
three nested boundary objects in each case.
Normal
Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If GTXImage CAD PLUS encounters an internal
intersection, it turns off hatching until it encounters another intersection. Thus, areas separated
from the outside of the hatched area by an odd number of intersections are hatched, and areas
separated by an even number of intersections are not. You can also set the Normal style by adding
,N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer
Hatches inward from the outer boundary. GTXImage CAD PLUS turns hatching off if it
encounters an internal intersection and doesn't turn it back on. Because this process starts from
both ends of each hatch line, GTXImage CAD PLUS hatches only the outermost level of the
structure and leaves the internal structure blank. You can also set the Outer style by adding ,O to
the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Ignore
Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them. You can also set the Ignore style by adding
,I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
NOTE: Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause hatching
discrepancies.
The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in
the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries.
Object Type
Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects, and the object type GTXImage CAD PLUS
applies to those objects.
Retain Boundaries
Adds the temporary boundary objects to the drawing.
Object Type
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 37
Controls the type of the new boundary object. GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the boundary as a
region or a polyline. This option is available only if you select Retain Boundaries.
Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects GTXImage CAD PLUS analyzes when defining a boundary from a
specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a
boundary.
By default, when you use Pick Points to define a boundary, GTXImage CAD PLUS analyzes all
objects visible in the current viewport. By redefining the boundary set, you can disregard certain
objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects. For large
drawings, redefining the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because GTXImage
CAD PLUS examines fewer objects.
Current Viewport
Defines the boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport. Selecting this option
when there's a current boundary set discards the current set and uses everything visible in the
current viewport.
Existing Set
Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected with New. If you have not created a
boundary set with New, the Existing Set option is not available.
New
Prompts you to select the objects from which you want to create the boundary set. When you
choose this option, the dialog box temporarily closes, prompting you to select objects. GTXImage
CAD PLUS includes only the hatchable objects you select when it constructs the new boundary
set. GTXImage CAD PLUS discards any existing boundary set, replacing it with the new boundary
set. If you don't select any hatchable objects, GTXImage CAD PLUS retains any current set.
Until you exit BHATCH or create a new boundary set, GTXImage CAD PLUS ignores objects that
do not exist in the boundary set when you define your boundaries by using Pick Points.
Island Detection Method
Specifies whether to include objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. These
internal objects are known as islands.
Flood
Includes islands as boundary objects.
Ray Casting
Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a
counterclockwise direction, thus excluding islands as boundary objects.
Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area. How GTXImage CAD
PLUS detects objects using this option depends on the selected Island Detection Method on the
Advanced tab. For example, if the Island Detection Method is Flood, GTXImage CAD PLUS
detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands and includes them in the boundary
definition. The Island Detection Style (which you also set on the Advanced tab) then determines
how to hatch the detected islands.
When you choose Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily, and GTXImage CAD PLUS
prompts for point specification.
Select internal point:
38 General Command Reference
Specify a point within the area to be hatched
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Select internal point: Specify a point, enter u or undo to undo the last
selection, or press ENTER to end point specification and return to the dialog
box
While specifying points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut
menu. You can undo the last or all point specifications, change the selection method, change the
island detection style, or preview the hatch.
Select Objects
Selects specific objects for hatching. The dialog box closes temporarily, and GTXImage CAD
PLUS prompts you for object selection.
When you define your boundaries using Select Objects, GTXImage CAD PLUS does not detect
interior objects automatically. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch
those objects according to the current Island Detection Style (which you set on the Advanced tab).
Each time you choose Select Objects, GTXImage CAD PLUS clears the previous selection set.
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut
menu. You can undo the last or all selections, change the selection method, change the island
detection style, or preview the hatch.
Remove Islands
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that GTXImage CAD PLUS detects as
islands when you use Pick Points. You cannot remove the outer boundary.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 39
View Selections
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the hatch
settings that you last previewed. This option is unavailable when you have not yet specified points
or selected objects.
Inherit Properties
Hatches specified boundaries using the hatch properties of one object. After selecting the
associative hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit, you can right-click in the
drawing area and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick Internal
Point options to create boundaries.
Double
For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines,
creating a crosshatch. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this information in the HPDOUBLE system
variable. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined on the Quick tab.
Composition
Controls whether the hatch is associative or nonassociative.
Associative
Creates an associative hatch, meaning that the hatch is updated when you modify its boundaries.
Nonassociative
Creates a nonassociative hatch, meaning that it is independent of its boundaries.
Preview
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the
current hatch settings. This option is not available when you have not yet specified points or
selected objects to define your boundaries.
BLIPMODE
Controls the display of marker blips.
Command line: blipmode (or 'blipmode for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>:
Enter on or off, or press ENTER
When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a PLUS sign (+) appears where you
specify a point.
40 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
To remove marker blips, use REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, PAN, or other commands that redraw
or regenerate the drawing.
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from objects you select.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Block Make
Command line: block
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Block Definition .
If you enter –block at the Command prompt, BLOCK displays prompts on the command line.
Block Definition Dialog Box
Defines and names a block.
Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank
spaces, and any special character not used by Microsoft® Windows® and GTXImage CAD
PLUS for other purposes, if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1.
The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.
NOTE: You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE_RENDER, RM_SDB, SH_SPOT, and
OVERHEAD as valid block names.
Base Point
Specifies a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X
Specifies the X coordinate value.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate value.
Z
Specifies the Z coordinate value.
Pick Insertion Base Point
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current
drawing.
Objects
Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected
objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 41
Retain
Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block.
Convert to Block
Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create the block.
Delete
Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block.
Select Objects
Dismisses the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the block.
When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the Block Definition dialog box.
Quick Select
Displays the Quick Select dialog box, which defines a selection set.
Objects Selected
Displays the number of selected objects.
Preview Icon
Determines whether to save a preview icon with the block definition and specifies the source of the
icon.
Do Not Include an Icon
Specifies that no icon is created.
Create Icon from Block Geometry
Creates a preview icon to be saved with the block definition from the geometry of the objects in
the block.
Preview Image
Displays an image of the preview icon you've specified.
Insert Units
Specifies the units to which the block is scaled to when dragged from GTXImage CAD PLUS
DesignCenter.
Description
Specifies the text description associated with the block definition.
BMPOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format.
Command line: bmpout
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Create BMP File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Enter the file name in the dialog box using the extension .bmp. The selected objects are saved
to this file.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method and press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS creates a compressed BMP file from the selected objects. Compressed
BMP files use less disk space but might be unreadable by certain applications.
42 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
BREAK
Erases parts of objects or splits an object in two.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Break
Command line: break
Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point
(1) on an object
The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If you select the object
by using your pointing device, GTXImage CAD PLUS both selects the object and treats the
selection point as the first break point. At the next prompt you can continue by specifying the
second point or overriding the first point.
Specify second break point or [First point]:
or enter f
Specify the second break point (2)
Second Break Point
Specifies the second point for GTXImage CAD PLUS to use to break the object.
First Point
Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify.
Specify first break point:
Specify second break point:
If you select the object using another object selection method, GTXImage CAD PLUS selects the
object and prompts you to specify the first break point and then the second break point.
Specify first break point:
Specify second break point:
GTXImage CAD PLUS erases the portion of the object between the two points that you specify. If
the second point is not on the object, GTXImage CAD PLUS selects the nearest point on the
object; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the second point beyond
the end you want to remove.
To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for both the first and
second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the second point.
Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other object types can be split
into two objects or have one end removed.
GTXImage CAD PLUS converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting
counterclockwise from the first to the second point.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 43
CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects.
If both objects you want to chamfer are on the same layer, GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the
chamfer on that layer. Otherwise, GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the chamfer line on the current
layer. This is also true for color, linetype, and lineweight.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Chamfer
Command line: chamfer
(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current
Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method]:
NOTE: Chamfering an associative hatch whose boundary you have defined by using line
segments removes hatch associativity. If you have defined the boundary by using a polyline,
associativity is maintained.
First Line
Specifies the first of two edges required to define a two-dimensional chamfer, or the edge of a
three-dimensional solid to chamfer.
Select second line:
If the two lines you select are polyline segments, they must be adjacent to each other. If they're
separated by one line or arc segment, GTXImage CAD PLUS deletes the segment and replaces it
with a chamfer line.
Base surface selection...
Enter surface selection option [Next/OK (current)] <OK>:
Enter n or o or press ENTER
Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface. Entering n selects
either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge.
Specify base surface chamfer distance <current>:
Specify other surface chamfer distance <current>:
After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges of the base surface to
chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the edges at once.
Select an edge or [Loop]:
Select an edge, enter l, or press ENTER
Edge
Selects an individual edge to chamfer.
44 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Loop
Switches to Edge Loop mode.
Select an edge loop or [Edge]:
Select an edge, enter e, or press ENTER
Edge Loop
Selects all edges on the base surface.
Edge
Switches to Edge mode.
Polyline
Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.
Select 2D polyline:
GTXImage CAD PLUS chamfers the intersecting line segments at each vertex of the polyline.
Chamfers become new segments of the polyline.
Distance
Sets the chamfer distances from the selected edge.
Specify first chamfer distance <current>:
Specify second chamfer distance <current>:
If you set both distances to zero, GTXImage CAD PLUS extends or trims the two lines so they end
at the same point.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 45
Angle
Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second.
Specify chamfer length on the first line <current>:
Specify chamfer angle from the first line <current>:
Trim
Controls whether GTXImage CAD PLUS trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>:
NOTE: Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0.
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the
endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, GTXImage CAD PLUS extends
or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0, GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the
chamfer without trimming the selected lines.
Method
Controls whether GTXImage CAD PLUS uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create
the chamfer.
Enter trim method [Distance/Angle] <current>:
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects.
Command line: change
Select objects:
Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the current user coordinate
system (UCS).
If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you get varying results
depending upon the object selection sequence. The easiest way to use CHANGE is to select only
lines in a selection set or select only objects other than lines in a selection set.
Specify change point or [Properties]:
Change Point
Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you select.
Lines
Moves endpoints of lines. When you specify a new endpoint for a line or a group of lines, the
endpoints of the selected lines closest to the change point move to the new point, unless Ortho
mode is on. If Ortho mode is on, GTXImage CAD PLUS modifies the selected lines so they
become parallel to either the X or the Y axis and their endpoints align with the specified point,
rather than moving their endpoints to the specified coordinate.
46 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Circles
Changes the circle radius. Specifying a new location changes the radius. If you selected more than
one circle, GTXImage CAD PLUS moves on to the next circle and repeats the prompt.
Specify new circle radius <no change>:
Text
Changes text position and other properties.
Specify new text insertion point <no change>:
Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing ENTER leaves the text in its original
position.
Enter new text style <current>:
If the text has a fixed height, GTXImage CAD PLUS skips the next prompt.
Specify new height <current>:
Specify new rotation angle <current>:
Enter new text <current>:
GTXImage CAD PLUS highlights the next object and displays the prompts relating to it.
Attribute Definitions
Changes the text and text properties of an attribute.
Specify new text insertion point:
Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing ENTER leaves the text at its original
position.
Enter new text style <current>:
If the text has a fixed height, GTXImage CAD PLUS skips the next prompt.
Specify new height <current>:
Specify new rotation angle <current>:
Enter new text <current>:
Enter new tag <current>:
Enter new prompt <current>:
Enter new default value <current>:
Blocks
Specifying a new location repositions the block. Pressing ENTER leaves the block in its original
position.
Specify new block insertion point:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 47
GTXImage CAD PLUS rotates the block about its insertion point to the specified angle.
Specify new rotation angle <current>:
Properties
Modifies the properties of existing objects. Use LAYER, LINETYPE, COLOR, LWEIGHT,
PLOTSTYLE, or ELEV to change the current global drawing properties.
Enter property to change
[Color/Elev/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/PLotstyle]:
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change, GTXImage
CAD PLUS displays varies as the current value.
You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change prompt is redisplayed
after each option is completed.
Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
Enter new color <current>: Enter a color name or a number from 1 through
255, enter bylayer or byblock, or press ENTER
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the object assumes the
color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter byblock, the object inherits the color of the
block of which it is a component.
Elev
Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects.
Specify new elevation <current>:
You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same Z value.
Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.
Enter new layer name <current>:
Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
Enter new linetype name <current>:
If the new linetype is not loaded, GTXImage CAD PLUS tries to load it from the standard linetype
library file, ICAD.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the linetype.
Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
48 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you
enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the
selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:
Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:
Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of property settings that is
saved in a plot style table.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>:
Enter a name or enter ?
Plot Style
Assigns the plot style to the selected objects. When you plot the drawing, objects are plotted with
the properties defined in the designated plot style. Plot style names assigned to objects can be
overridden by other plot style name assignments.
?—List Plot Styles
Lists all the plot style names defined in the drawing.
CHPROP
Changes the color, layer, linetype, linetype scale factor, lineweight, thickness, and plot style of an
object.
CHPROP changes the drawing properties of existing objects. Use other commands (LINETYPE,
LTSCALE, LWEIGHT, COLOR, and ELEV) to set the properties of new objects.
Command line: chprop
Select objects:
Enter property to change
[Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/PLotstyle]:
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change, GTXImage
CAD PLUS displays varies as the current value.
Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
Enter new color <current>: Enter a color name or a number from 1 through
255, enter bylayer or byblock, or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 49
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the object assumes the
color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter byblock, the object inherits the color of the
block of which it is a component.
Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.
Enter new layer name <current>:
Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
Enter new linetype name <current>:
If the new linetype is not loaded, GTXImage CAD PLUS tries to load it from the standard linetype
library file, ICAD.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the linetype.
Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you
enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the
selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:
Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:
Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of property settings that is
saved in a plot style table.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>:
Enter a name or enter ?
Plot Style
Assigns the plot style to the selected objects. When you plot the drawing, objects are plotted with
the properties defined in the designated plot style. Plot styles assigned to objects can be overridden
by other plot style assignments.
?—List Plot Styles
Lists all the plot styles defined in the drawing.
CIRCLE
Creates a circle.
50 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Circle
Command line: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]:
(1) or enter an option
Specify a point
Center Point
Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]:
enter d
Specify a point (2), enter a value, or
Radius
Defines the radius of the circle. The distance between this point and the center point determines the
radius of the circle.
Diameter
Designates the length of the diameter from the center point.
Specify diameter of circle <current>:
press ENTER
Specify a point (2), enter a value, or
3P
Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference.
Specify first point on circle:
Specify second point on circle:
Specify third point on circle:
Specify a point (1)
Specify a point (2)
Specify a point (3)
2P
Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
Specify first endpoint of circle's diameter:
Specify second endpoint of circle's diameter:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a point (1)
Specify a point (2)
General Command Reference 51
TTR—Tangent, Tangent, Radius
Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Specify point on object for first tangent of circle:
Specify point on object for second tangent of circle:
line
Select a circle, arc, or line
Select a circle, arc, or
Specify radius of circle <current>:
Sometimes more than one circle matches the criteria specified in the command. GTXImage CAD
PLUS draws the circle whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.
CLOSE
Closes the current drawing.
File menu: Close
Command line: close
GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the current drawing if there have been no changes since the drawing
was last saved. If you have modified the drawing, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to save or
discard the changes.
You can close a file that has been opened in Read-only mode if you have made no changes or if
you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to a read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS
command.
COLOR
Defines color for new objects.
Format menu: Color
Command line: color (or 'color for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Color .
If you enter -color at the Command prompt, COLOR displays prompts on the command line.
52 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Select Color Dialog Box
You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of GTXImage CAD PLUS objects by
selecting from the 255 GTXImage CAD PLUS Color Index (ACI) colors.
Standard Colors
Specifies a standard color for new objects. This palette contains colors 1 through 9. If you select a
standard color, the name or number of the color is displayed in Color as the current color. You can
also select colors 1 through 9 by entering the color number in Color.
Gray Shades
Specifies a shade of gray for new objects. The gray shades are color numbers 250 through 255.
You can also select gray shades by entering the color number in Color.
Logical Colors
Specifies a color whose value depends either on the color of the layer on which the object resides,
or on the color of the block to which the object belongs.
BYLAYER
Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them.
BYBLOCK
Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on your background
color) until you group the objects into a block and insert the block. When you insert the block into
a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current Color setting.
Full Color Palette
Specifies a color for new objects. The full color palette displays the available ACI colors that are
not standard colors or gray shades.
Color
Specifies a standard color name, the BYLAYER and BYBLOCK logical colors, or an ACI number
between 1 and 255.
COMPILE
Compiles shape files and PostScript font files.
Before you can use GTXImage CAD PLUS shape files as fonts or shapes in a drawing, you must
compile or convert them into SHX files. You can then use LOAD to insert the SHX files into a
drawing. Compiling PostScript font PFB files improves the loading speed of drawings that use
them.
Command line: compile
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box. GTXImage CAD PLUS compiles it
into a file with this name, and automatically adds the file name extension .shx.
COPY
Duplicates objects.
Modify toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy
Selection.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 53
Command line: copy
Select objects:
Select objects and press ENTER
Specify base point or displacement, or [Multiple]:
m for multiple copies
Specify a point (1) for a single copy or enter
Base Point or Displacement
Makes a single copy. If you specify two points, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the first point as a
base point and places a single copy at the point of displacement. If you specify one point and then
press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the selection point as the base point and places a
single copy at the specified point.
NOTE: Be careful when entering the @ sign as part of the displacement coordinate. The
method that you use to select your objects can affect the point to which the coordinate is
relative.
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point (2) or press ENTER
Multiple
Makes multiple copies. GTXImage CAD PLUS places copies relative to the base point.
Specify base point:
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
If you specify a point, GTXImage CAD PLUS places a copy at that point relative to the base point.
The prompt is repeated for placement of multiple copies of the object. If you press ENTER, the
command ends.
COPYBASE
Copies objects with a specified base point
Use COPYBASE to specify a base point when copying objects. The base point enables you to
position the copied objects precisely when pasting them within the same drawing or into another
drawing.
Edit menu: Copy with Base Point
54 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy with
Base Point.
Command line: copybase
Specify base point:
Select objects:
COPYCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard
Use COPYCLIP to copy objects or command line text from an GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing to
another Windows® application.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Copy Vector
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Copy.
Command line: copyclip
Select objects:
COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the
Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object.
NOTE: You can also use CTRL+C to run COPYCLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing area,
GTXImage CAD PLUS copies the selected objects to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on the
command line or in the text window, GTXImage CAD PLUS copies the selected text to the
Clipboard.
COPYHIST
Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard
The command line history is above the command line. Use scroll bars or open the text window to
see the whole history. You can use the Display tab in the Options dialog box to change the number
of lines that are displayed in the command line window.
Command line: copyhist
GTXImage CAD PLUS copies the text to the Clipboard.
COPYLINK
Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications
Edit menu: Copy Link
Command line: copylink
COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard
into a document as an OLE object.
CUTCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard and erases the objects from the drawing.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Cut Vector
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 55
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Cut.
Command line: cutclip
Select objects:
CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the drawing. You can
paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object (see
PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP does not create OLE link information.
DDEDIT
Edits text and attribute definitions
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute definition is a template for
creating an attribute.
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Text
Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Mtext Edit or
Text Edit.
Command line: ddedit
Select an annotation object or [Undo]:
Object Selection
If you select text created using TEXT or DTEXT, displays the Edit Text .
If you select text created using MTEXT, displays the Multiline Text Editor.
If you select an attribute definition, displays the Edit Attribute Definition .
DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to end the command.
Undo
Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. You can use this option immediately
after editing.
Edit Text Dialog Box
Modifies text created with TEXT or DTEXT. Enter the new text and choose OK to update the
object.
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box
Modifies an attribute definition's tag, prompt, and default value.
Tag
Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain any
characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). GTXImage CAD PLUS changes lowercase
letters to uppercase.
Prompt
Specifies the attribute prompt that displays when you insert a block containing this attribute
definition. If you need leading blanks in the prompt, start the string with a backslash (\). If you
need a backslash as the first character, start the string with two backslashes.
Default
Specifies the default attribute value. If you need leading blanks in the default value, start the string
with a backslash (\). If the first character must be a backslash, start the string with two backslashes.
56 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display mode and size of point objects
Format menu: Point Style
Command line: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Point Style .
Point Style Dialog Box
Shows the current Point Display mode and size. Change the Point Display mode by selecting an
icon.
GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the Point Display mode in the PDMODE system variable.
Point Size
Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units.
GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the point display size in the PDSIZE system variable. Subsequent
point objects that you draw use the new value. The next regeneration updates existing point
objects.
Set Size Relative to Screen
Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size. The point display does not change
when you zoom in or out.
Set Size in Absolute Units
Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify under Point Size. GTXImage CAD PLUS
displays points larger or smaller when you zoom in or out.
DIM and DIM1
Accesses Dimensioning mode.
DIM and DIM1 start Dimensioning mode, in which you can use the dimensioning subcommands
from earlier releases of GTXImage CAD PLUS. (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for
compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have
used a dimensioning command. Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately
return to the Command prompt.
Command line: dim or dim1
Dim:
Enter a Dimensioning mode command
The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode. In Dimensioning mode, you can use
a special set of dimensioning commands instead of the main dimension commands. The following
commands are available only from Dimensioning mode.
Dimensioning
mode commands
Command
Description
EXIT
Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command
prompt
REDRAW
Redraws the current viewport
STYLE
Changes the current text style
UNDO or U
Erases the most recently created dimension objects and
undoes any new dimension system variable setting
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 57
When you exit Dimension mode, UNDO reverses the effects
of the entire dimension session
UPDATE
Updates dimension objects with the current settings of the
dimension style and units
The following table shows which GTXImage CAD PLUS commands are equivalent to the rest of
the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these Dimensioning mode commands,
see the equivalent GTXImage CAD PLUS command.
Dimensioning mode command
equivalents
Dimensioning mode
command
Equivalent GTXImage CAD PLUS
command
ALIGNED
DIMALIGNED
ANGULAR
DIMANGULAR
BASELINE
DIMCENTER
CONTINUE
DIMCONTINUE
DIAMETER
DIMDIAMETER
HOMETEXT
DIMEDIT Home
HORIZONTAL
DIMLINEAR Horizontal
LEADER
LEADER
NEWTEXT
DIMEDIT Text
OBLIQUE
DIMEDIT Oblique
ORDINATE
DIMORDINATE
OVERRIDE
DIMOVERRIDE
RADIUS
DIMRADIUS
RESTORE
DIMSTYLE Restore
ROTATED
DIMLINEAR
SAVE
DIMSTYLE Save
STATUS
DIMSTYLE Status
TEDIT
DIMTEDIT
TROTATE
DIMEDIT Rotate
UPDATE
DIMSTYLE Apply
VARIABLES
DIMSTYLE Variables
VERTICAL
DIMLINEAR Vertical
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension
58 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Aligned
Command line: dimaligned
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify the extension
line origins (dimension points), or press ENTER to select an object for
GTXImage CAD PLUS to dimension
Extension Line Origin
Specifies the first extension line origin (1). GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to specify the
second one.
Specify second extension line origin:
Specify a point (2)
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction in which to
draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMALIGNED ends.
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. GTXImage CAD
PLUS represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix
to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use
control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension
text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can
display them by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Text
Prompts you to enter new dimension text on the command line. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the
generated measurement (for example, if you want to add a prefix or suffix), use angle brackets (<
>) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 59
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Dimension Line Location
prompt.
Object Selection
Prompts you to select an object to dimension.
Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, GTXImage CAD PLUS dimensions only the individual
line and arc segments. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the line or arc endpoints as the origins of
the extension lines offset. The extension lines are offset by the distance you specify under Offset
from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style
dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE). GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMEXO system
variable.
If you select a circle, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the diameter endpoints as the origins of the
extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line.
After you select an object, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a dimension line location.
60 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMALIGNED ends.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These dimension text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See
for descriptions of these options.
DIMANGULAR
Creates an angular dimension.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Angular
Command line: dimangular
Select arc, circle, line, or <specify vertex>: Select an arc, circle, or line, or
press ENTER to create the angular dimension by specifying three points
Arc Selection
Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point angular dimension. The
center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc endpoints become the origin points of the extension
lines.
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines.
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the extension lines from the angle endpoints to the intersection of
the dimension line.
After you select an arc object, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
Dimension Arc Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR ends.
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. GTXImage CAD
PLUS represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix
to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use
control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension
text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can
display them by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Text
Prompts you to enter new dimension text on the command line. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 61
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the
generated measurement (for example, if you want to add a prefix or suffix), use angle brackets (<
>) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Dimension Line Location
prompt.
Circle Selection
Uses the selected circle to determine two defining points for the dimension. The center of the circle
is the angle vertex. The selection point (1) is used as the origin of the first extension line.
Specify second angle endpoint:
Specify a point (2)
{bmc acw0531u.bmp}
The second angle endpoint does not need to be on the circle. This point is the origin of the second
extension line.
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines. The
extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line.
After you select a circle, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
Dimension Arc Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR ends.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These dimension text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See
for descriptions of these options.
Line Selection
Defines the angle using two lines. If you select a line, you must select a second line to determine
the angle between them.
Select second line:
62 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
GTXImage CAD PLUS determines the angle by using each line as a vector for one side of the
angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line spans the angle
between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned,
GTXImage CAD PLUS adds extension lines as needed to extend one or both lines. The arc is
always less than 180 degrees.
After you specify the extension line origins and angle vertex, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Dimension Arc Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR ends.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These dimension text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See
for descriptions of these options.
Three-Point Specification
Uses the three points you specify to create the dimension.
Specify angle vertex:
Specify a point (1)
Specify first angle endpoint:
Specify second angle endpoint:
Specify a point (2)
Specify a point (3)
The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints. If you need extension lines, the
endpoints are used as origin points.
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines. The
extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line.
After you specify the points, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Dimension Arc Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR ends.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These dimension text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See
for descriptions of these options.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 63
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimension or a
selected dimension
DIMBASELINE draws a series of related dimensions measured from the same baseline.
GTXImage CAD PLUS offsets each new dimension line to avoid overlaying the previous
dimension line. This baseline increment value is specified in on the Lines and Arrows tab of the
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this
value in the DIMDLI system variable. Baseline dimensioning is also known as parallel
dimensioning.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Baseline
Command line: dimbaseline
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
Second Extension Line Origin
Specifies the location of the second extension line. The prompts that follow your initial choice on
the command line depend on the type of dimension last created in the current session of
GTXImage CAD PLUS: no prior dimension, linear, ordinate, or angular.
No Prior Dimension
If no dimension was created in the current session for the drawing, GTXImage CAD PLUS
prompts you for a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base dimension.
Select base dimension:
Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
After you select a base dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays additional prompts depending
on the type of dimension you select: linear, ordinate, or angular. To end the command, press
ENTER twice, or press ESC. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
NOTE: For linear and angular dimensions, when the base dimension is explicitly selected,
the extension line origin becomes the extension line closest to the of the selection point.
Linear Dimension
If the previous dimension is linear, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a base dimension.
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
64 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
By default, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the first extension line of the base dimension as the
extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To override this default behavior, explicitly select
the base dimension; the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension
closest to the pick point of the selection. When you select a second point, GTXImage CAD PLUS
draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt.
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC.
If you press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a base dimension.
Select base dimension:
Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
After you select a base dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Specify a Second
Extension Line Origin prompt. Continue selecting points. To end the command, press ENTER
twice, or press ESC. The current style determines the appearance of the text.
Ordinate Dimension
If the previous dimension was ordinate, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a baseline
dimension.
Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a point, snap to
an object, or press ENTER to select a continued dimension
Undo
Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during the command session.
Select
GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the
continued dimension.
Select base for baseline dimension:
Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
After you select a baseline dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Specify Feature
Location prompt. Continue selecting points, or press ENTER twice (or ESC) to end the command.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 65
Angular Dimension
If the previous dimension was angular, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a base dimension.
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
By default, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the first extension line of the base dimension as the
extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To override this default behavior, explicitly select
the base dimension; the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension
closest to the pick point of the selection. When you select a second point, GTXImage CAD PLUS
draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt.
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC.
If you press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular
dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension.
Select base dimension:
Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
After you select a base dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Specify a Second
Extension Line Origin prompt. To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC. The
current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
Undo
Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session.
Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline
dimension. After you select a base dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Specify
Second Extension Line Origin prompt.
DIMCENTER
Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Center Mark
Command line: dimcenter
Select arc or circle:
Use an object selection method
You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size when you set up the
dimension style. See DIMSTYLE. You can also change center mark settings using the DIMCEN
system variable.
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the previous
dimension or a selected dimension
DIMCONTINUE draws a series of related dimensions, such as several shorter dimensions that add
up to the total measurement. Continued dimensioning is also known as chain dimensioning.
66 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
When you create linear continued dimensions, GTXImage CAD PLUS suppresses the first
extension line.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Continue
Command line: dimcontinue
The prompts that follow your entry of the command depend on the type of dimension last created
in the current session of GTXImage CAD PLUS: no prior dimension, linear, ordinate, or angular.
If the previous dimension was a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS
uses the origin of that dimension's second extension line for the origin of the next dimension's first
extension line.
No Prior Dimension
If no dimension was created in the current session, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a
linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the next dimension.
Select continued dimension:
Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
After you select a continued dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays additional prompts
depending on the type of dimension you select: linear, ordinate, or angular. To end the command,
press ENTER or ESC. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text.
Linear or Angular Dimension
If the previous dimension was linear or angular, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a
continued dimension.
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>:
point (1) or press ENTER to select a continued dimension
Specify a
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the
first extension line origin of the next dimension. The current dimension style determines the
appearance of the text.
Second Extension Line Origin
Draws the dimension and redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt. To end
the command, press ESC.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 67
Undo
Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session.
Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension.
Select continued dimension:
Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
After you select a continued dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Specify a Second
Extension Line Origin prompt. To end the command, press ESC.
Ordinate Dimension
If the previous dimension was ordinate, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a continued
dimension.
Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a point, snap to
an object, or press ENTER to select a continued dimension
Undo
Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session.
Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension.
Select continued dimension:
Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
After you select a continued dimension, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Specify Feature
Location prompt. Continue selecting points, or press ENTER twice (or ESC) to end the command.
DIMDIAMETER
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs.
DIMDIAMETER draws different types of diameter dimensions depending on the size of the circle
or arc, the options set for the dimension style (see DIMSTYLE), and the position of the cursor. The
dimension style controls center marks and centerlines. GTXImage CAD PLUS does not draw a
center mark or a centerline when a dimension line is drawn inside the arc or circle. GTXImage
CAD PLUS stores the setting for center marks and centerlines in the DIMCEN system variable.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Diameter
Command line: dimdiameter
Select arc or circle:
The position of the cursor determines the location of the dimension line. As you move the cursor,
the dimension moves around or inside the circle or arc.
For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the diameter line is greater than 15 degrees from
horizontal and is outside the circle or arc, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a hook line one
arrowhead long next to the dimension text, as shown in the first two illustrations.
68 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Different types of diameter dimensions
GTXImage CAD PLUS measures the diameter and displays the text with a diameter symbol (Ø) in
front of it. GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for a dimension location.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, GTXImage
CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. GTXImage CAD
PLUS represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix
to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use
control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension
text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can
display them by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Text
Prompts you to enter new dimension text on the command line. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the
generated measurement (for example, if you want to add a prefix or suffix), use angle brackets (<
>) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Dimension Line Location
prompt.
DIMEDIT
Edits dimensions.
The Home, New, and Rotate options of DIMEDIT affect dimension text. The Oblique option
affects extension lines. DIMEDIT can operate on more than one dimension object at a time.
Dimension toolbar:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 69
Draw menu: dimension Oblique
Command line: dimedit
Enter type of dimension editing [Home/New/Rotate/Oblique] <Home>:
an option or press ENTER
Enter
Home
Moves dimension text back to its default position.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method to select dimension objects
The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its
dimension style.
New
Changes dimension text using the Multiline Text Editor.
Rotate
Rotates dimension text. This option is similar to the Angle option of DIMTEDIT.
Enter text angle:
Entering 0 places the text in its default orientation, which is determined by the vertical and
horizontal text settings on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog
boxes. The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this orientation.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method to select dimension objects
Oblique
Makes the extension lines of linear dimensions oblique. GTXImage CAD PLUS normally creates
linear dimensions with extension lines perpendicular to the dimension line. This option is useful
when extension lines conflict with other features of the drawing.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method to select dimension objects
Enter oblique angle (press ENTER for none):
ENTER
70 General Command Reference
Enter an angle or press
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
DIMLINEAR
Creates linear dimensions.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Linear
Command line: dimlinear
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>:
press ENTER to select an object to dimension.
Specify a point (1) or
Extension Line Origins
Specifies the first extension line origin. GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to specify the second
one.
Specify second extension line origin:
Specify a point (2)
Specify dimension line location or
[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]:
an option
Specify a point (3) or enter
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. GTXImage CAD
PLUS represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix
to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use
control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 71
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension
text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can
display them by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Text
Prompts you to enter new dimension text on the command line. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the
generated measurement (for example, if you want to add a prefix or suffix), use angle brackets (<
>) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 90 degrees, enter 90.
GTXImage CAD PLUS then redisplays the Dimension Line Location prompt.
Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Point Specification
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, GTXImage
CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See for option
descriptions.
Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
72 General Command Reference
Specify a point or
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Point Specification
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, GTXImage
CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See for option
descriptions.
Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Specify angle of dimension line <current>:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
After you specify the angle, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Dimension Line Location
prompt.
Object Selection
Prompts you to select an object to dimension.
Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, GTXImage CAD PLUS dimensions only the individual
line and arc segments. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the line or arc endpoints as the origins of
the extension lines and offsets the extension lines by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin
in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE. GTXImage
CAD PLUS stores the value in the DIMEXO system variable.
If you select a circle, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the diameter endpoints as the origins of the
extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the north or south quadrant point,
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a horizontal dimension. When the point used to select the circle is
close to the east or west quadrant point, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a vertical dimension.
After you specify the origin points of the extension lines, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for
a dimension location.
Specify dimension line location or
[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]:
an option
Specify a point (3) or enter
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 73
Mtext, Text, Angle
These dimension text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See
.
Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These dimension text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See
for descriptions of these options.
Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the
extension lines. After you specify the location, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
Mtext, Text, Angle
These dimension text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. See
for descriptions of these options.
Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Specify angle of dimension line <current>:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
After you specify the angle, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Dimension Line Location
prompt.
DIMORDINATE
Creates ordinate point dimensions.
Ordinate dimensions display the X or Y ordinate of a feature along with a simple leader line. These
dimensions are also known as datum dimensions. GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the current user
74 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
coordinate system (UCS) to determine the measured X or Y ordinate and draws the leader line in a
direction orthogonal to the axes of the current UCS. The absolute value of the coordinate is used
according to the prevailing standards for ordinate dimensions.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Ordinate
Command line: dimordinate
Specify feature location:
Specify a point or snap to an object
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the point as the start point of the leader line and then prompts you for
the endpoint.
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]:
point or enter an option
Specify a
Leader Endpoint Specification
Uses the difference between the feature location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is
an X or a Y ordinate dimension. If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater, the dimension
measures the X ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate.
Xdatum
Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text.
GTXImage CAD PLUS then prompts you for the endpoint.
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]:
point or enter an option
Specify a
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension, and DIMORDINATE ends.
Ydatum
Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text.
GTXImage CAD PLUS then prompts you for the endpoint.
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]:
point or enter an option
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a
General Command Reference 75
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension, and DIMORDINATE ends.
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. GTXImage CAD
PLUS represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix
to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use
control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension
text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can
display them by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]:
point or enter an option
Specify a
Text
Prompts you to enter new dimension text on the command line. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the
generated measurement (for example, if you want to add a prefix or suffix), use angle brackets (<
>) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes.
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]:
point or enter an option
Specify a
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
GTXImage CAD PLUS then prompts you for the endpoint.
Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]:
point or enter an option
Specify a
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the dimension, and DIMORDINATE ends.
DIMOVERRIDE
Overrides dimension system variables.
You can specify temporary dimension variable settings that override the current settings for
dimensions. You can also use the command to clear overrides from dimensions. The command
does not change the current dimension style.
Draw menu: Dimension Override
Command line: dimoverride
Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]:
name of a dimension variable, or enter c
Enter the
Dimension Variable Name to Override
Overrides the value of the dimension system variable you specify.
Enter new value for dimension variable <current>:
76 General Command Reference
Enter a value or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If you enter a new value, GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the Dimension Variable Name to
Override prompt. If you press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to select the
dimensions.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method to select the dimensions.
GTXImage CAD PLUS applies the overrides to the selected dimensions.
Clear Overrides
Clears any overrides on selected dimensions.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method to select the dimensions.
GTXImage CAD PLUS removes the overrides. Dimension objects display the properties defined
by the dimension style.
DIMRADIUS
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs.
A radial dimension consists of a radius dimension line with an arrowhead at the arc or circle end.
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a center mark if the DIMCEN system variable is not set to 0.
DIMRADIUS draws different types of radial dimensions depending on the size of the circle or arc,
the options in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE),
and the position of the cursor. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the values of the options in the
DIMUPT, DIMTOFL, DIMATFIT, DIMTIH, DIMTOH, DIMJUST, and DIMTAD system
variables.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Radius
Command line: dimradius
Select arc or circle:
The position of the cursor determines the location of the text. As you move the cursor, the
dimension moves around or inside the circle or arc.
For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the radial dimension line is greater than 15 degrees
from horizontal, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a hook line, also called a dogleg or landing, one
arrowhead long, next to the dimension text.
GTXImage CAD PLUS measures the radius and displays the text with the letter R in front of it.
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
enter an option
Specify a point or
Dimension Line Location
Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the location, GTXImage
CAD PLUS draws the dimension.
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. GTXImage CAD
PLUS represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 77
to the generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use
control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension
text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can
display them by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Text
Prompts you to enter new dimension text on the command line. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. To include the
generated measurement (for example, if you want to add a prefix or suffix), use angle brackets (<
>) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for the endpoint.
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles.
A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings defining the appearance and behavior of
your dimensions. By creating dimension styles, you can set all relevant dimension system variables
and control the layout and appearance of all dimensions within a drawing.
Dimension toolbar:
Format menu: Dimension Style
Draw menu: Dimension Style
Command line: dimstyle
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the .
If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, GTXImage CAD PLUS presents options on the
command line.
Dimension Style Manager
Use the Dimension Style Manager to
Preview dimension styles
Create new dimension styles
Modify existing dimension styles
Set overrides to a dimension style
Set the current dimension style
Compare dimension styles
Rename dimension styles
78 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Delete dimension styles
Current Dimstyle
Displays the current dimension style. GTXImage CAD PLUS assigns styles to all dimensions. If
you do not change the current style, GTXImage CAD PLUS assigns the default STANDARD style
to dimensions.
Styles
Displays all dimension styles in the drawing. When the dialog box is displayed, GTXImage CAD
PLUS highlights the style that is current. The items in List control the dimensions displayed. To set
a different style to current, select it under Styles, and then choose Set Current.
Unless you select Don't List Styles in Xrefs, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays dimension styles in
externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally referenced named objects. While
you cannot change, rename, or make current externally referenced dimension styles, you can create
new styles based on them.
Right-click in the Styles list to display a shortcut menu that you can use to set current, rename, and
delete styles.
List
Provides options that control the display of dimension styles:
All Styles
Displays all dimension styles.
Styles in Use
Displays only the dimension styles that are referenced by dimensions in the drawing.
Don't List Styles In Xrefs
Does not display dimension styles in externally referenced drawings under Styles.
Set Current
Sets the style selected under Styles to current.
New
Displays the Create New Dimension Style , in which you can define new dimension styles. See .
Modify
Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can modify dimension styles.
Dialog box options are identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box. See .
Override
Displays the Override Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can set temporary overrides to
dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box. See .
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays overrides as unsaved changes under the dimension in the Styles
list.
Compare
Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog, where you can use to compare the properties of
two dimension styles or view all the properties of one style.
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box
Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one, and indicates the
dimension types to which you want the new style to apply.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 79
New Style Name
Names the new style.
Start With
Sets the style that you want to use to start the new one. Starting with a style saves keystrokes
because you change only the properties in the new style that differ from the properties you start
with. The styles are not otherwise related.
Use For
Creates a style that applies only to specific dimension types. For example, suppose the text color
for the STANDARD style is black, but you want the text to be blue only for diameter dimensions.
Under Start With, select STANDARD, and under Use For, select Diameter. New Style Name
becomes unavailable because you are defining a substyle of STANDARD. After you change the
text color to blue in the New Dimension Style dialog box, Diameter is displayed as a substyle
under STANDARD in the Dimension Style Manager. Whenever you use the STANDARD style
for diameter dimensions, the text will be blue. For all other dimension types, the text will be black.
Continue
Displays the New Dimension Style , in which you define the new style properties.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes
Set properties for dimension styles. After you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style
dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the
new style in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style
that you selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box.
Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify
Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog box. The content of these dialog boxes is
identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding an
existing dimension style rather than creating a new one.
Lines and Arrows Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog
Boxes)
Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrowheads, and center marks.
Dimension Lines
Sets the dimension line properties.
Color
Displays and sets the color for the dimension line. If you choose Other (at the bottom of the Color
list), GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter the color
name or number in the text box. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in DIMCLRD.
Lineweight
Sets the lineweight of the dimension line. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in DIMLWD.
Extend Beyond Ticks
Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique,
architectural, tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value
in the DIMDLE system variable.
Baseline Spacing
80 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline dimension. Enter a distance. GTXImage
CAD PLUS stores the value in DIMDLI system variable. For information about baseline
dimensions, see DIMBASELINE.
Suppress
Suppresses display of dimension lines when they're outside the extension lines. Dim Line 1
suppresses the first dimension line; Dim Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line. GTXImage
CAD PLUS stores these values in the system variables DIMSD1 and DIMSD2.
Extension Lines
Controls the appearance of the extension lines.
Color
Displays and sets the color for the extension line. If you choose Other (at the bottom of the Color
list), GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter the color
name or number in the text box. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in the DIMCLRE system
variable.
Lineweight
Sets the lineweight of the extension line. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in DIMLWE
system variable.
Extend Beyond Dim Lines
Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines the DIMEXE system variable.
Offset From Origin
Specifies the distance to offset the extension lines from the origin points that define the dimension.
GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in the DIMEXO system variable.
Suppress
Suppresses the display of extension lines. Ext Line 1 suppresses the first extension line; Ext Line 2
suppresses the second extension line. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the values in the DIMSE1 and
DIMSE2 system variables.
Arrowheads
Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads. You can also specify different arrowheads
for the first and second dimension lines.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 81
1st
Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the
second arrowhead automatically changes to match it. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the name of
the first dimension line arrowhead in the DIMBLK1 system variable.
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select Other. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box. Enter the name of a user-defined arrowhead block under
Arrow Name.
2nd
Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the name of the
second dimension line arrowhead in the DIMBLK2 system variable.
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select Other. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box. Enter the name of a user-defined arrowhead block in
Arrow Name.
Arrow Size
Displays and sets the size of arrowheads. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in the DIMASZ
system variable.
Center Marks for Circles
Controls the appearance of center marks and centerlines for diameter and radial dimensions. The
DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands use center marks and centerlines.
For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the center mark only if
you place the dimension line outside the circle or arc.
Type
Provides three center mark type options:
Mark: Creates a center mark. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the size of the center
mark as a positive value in the DIMCEN system variable.
Line: Creates a centerline. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the size of the centerline as
a negative value in the DIMCEN system variable.
None: Creates no center mark or centerline. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value
as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable.
Size
Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centerline. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value
in DIMCEN.
82 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Text Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes)
Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text.
Text Appearance
Controls the dimension text format and size.
Text Style
Displays and sets the current style for dimension text. Select a style from the list. To create and
modify styles for dimension text, select the ellipsis button next to the list. GTXImage CAD PLUS
stores the name of the style in the DIMTXSTY system variable.
Text Style button
Displays the Text Style dialog box, which you can use to define or modify text styles.
Text Color
Displays and sets the color for the dimension text. If you choose Other (at the bottom of the Color
list), GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter the color
name or number in the text box. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in the DIMCLRT system
variable.
Text Height
Displays and sets the height of the current dimension text style. (This option is not available if the
text height of the text style is set to Fixed.) GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value in the
DIMTXT system variable.
Scale Factor For Fraction Height
Sets the scale of fractions relative to dimension text. GTXImage CAD PLUS multiples the value
entered here times the text height to determine the height of dimension fractions relative to
dimension text. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the scale value in the DIMTFAC system variable.
Draw Frame Around Text
Draws a frame around dimension text. Selecting this option changes the value stored in the
DIMGAP system variable to a negative value.
Text Placement
Controls the placement of dimension text.
Vertical Position
Controls the vertical justification of dimension text along the dimension line. GTXImage CAD
PLUS stores the value of the vertical justification options in the DIMTAD system variable.
Vertical position options include the following:
Centered: Centers the dimension text between the two parts of the dimension line.
Above: Places the dimension text above the dimension line. The distance from the
dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap. See .
Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the dimension line farthest away
from the first defining point.
JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS)
representation.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 83
Horizontal Position
Controls the horizontal justification of dimension text along the dimension line and the extension
line. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value of the horizontal justification options in the
DIMJUST system variable. Horizontal position options include the following:
Centered: Centers the dimension text along the dimension line between the extension
lines.
1st Extension Line: Left-justifies the text with the first extension line along the
dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the
arrowhead size PLUS the text gap value. See and .
2nd Extension Line: Right-justifies the text with the second extension line along the
dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the
arrowhead size PLUS the text gap value. See and .
Over 1st Extension Line: Positions the text over or along the first extension line.
Over 2nd Extension Line: Positions the text over or along the second extension line.
Offset From Dimension Line
Displays and sets the current text gap, which is the distance around the dimension text when the
dimension line is broken to accommodate the dimension text.
GTXImage CAD PLUS also uses this value as the minimum length required for pieces of the
dimension line. When GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the default position for dimension text, it
positions the text inside the extension lines only if doing so breaks the dimension lines into two
segments at least as long as the text gap. If the text is above or below the dimension line, it is
placed inside if there's room for the arrowheads, dimension text, and a margin between them at
least as large as the text gap. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMGAP system
variable.
84 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Text Alignment
Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether it is inside or outside the
extension lines. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the value of these options in the DIMTIH and
DIMTOH system variables.
Horizontal
Places text in a horizontal position.
Aligned With Dimension Line
Aligns text with the dimension line.
ISO Standard
Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside the extension lines, but aligns it
horizontally when text is outside the extension lines.
Fit Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes)
Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line.
Fit Options
Controls the placement of text and arrowheads inside or outside extension lines based on the space
available between the extension lines.
When space is available, GTXImage CAD PLUS always places text and arrowheads between the
extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options. GTXImage
CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables.
Either the Text or the Arrows, Whichever Fits Best
Places text and arrowheads as follows:
When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the
extension lines. Otherwise, GTXImage CAD PLUS moves either the text or the
arrowheads based on the best fit.
When enough space is available for text only, places text between the extension lines
and places arrowheads outside the extension lines.
When enough space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the
extension lines and places text outside the extension lines.
When space is available for neither text nor arrowheads, places them both outside the
extension lines.
Arrows
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 85
Places text and arrowheads as follows:
When enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the
extension lines.
When space is available for arrowheads only, places them between the extension lines
and places text outside them.
When not enough space is available for arrowheads, places both text and arrowheads
outside the extension lines.
Text
Places text and arrowheads as follows:
When space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension
lines.
When space is available for text only, places the text between the extension lines and
places arrowheads outside them.
When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside
the extension lines.
Both Text and Arrows
When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads, places both outside the extension
lines.
Always Keep Text Between Ext Lines
Always places text between extension lines. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the
DIMTIX system variable.
Suppress Arrows If They Don't Fit Inside Extension Lines
Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. GTXImage
CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMSOXD system variable.
Text Placement
Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default position, that is, the
position defined by the dimension style. Text movement options are stored in the DIMTMOVE
system variable.
Beside the Dimension Line
Places dimension text beside the dimension line.
Over the Dimension Line, with a Leader
86 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If text is moved away from the dimension line, creates a leader connecting the text to the
dimension line. GTXImage CAD PLUS omits the leader when text is too close to the dimension
line.
Over the Dimension Line, Without a Leader
Keeps the dimension line in the same place when text is moved. Text that is moved away from the
dimension line is not connected to the dimension line.
Scale for Dimension Features
Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling.
Use Overall Scale Of
Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify size, distance, or spacing including text and
arrowhead sizes. This scale does not change dimension measurement values. GTXImage CAD
PLUS stores this value in the DIMSCALE system variable.
Scale Dimension to Layout (Paper Space)
Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper
space. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value as 0 in the DIMSCALE system variable.
When you work in paper space, but not in a model space viewport, or when TILEMODE is set to
1, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the default scale factor of 1.0 for the DIMSCALE system variable.
Fine Tuning Option
Sets additional fit options.
Place Text Manually When Dimensioning
Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the
Dimension Line Location prompt. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMUPT system
variable.
Always Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines
Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when GTXImage CAD PLUS places the
arrowheads outside the measured points. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the
DIMTOFL system variable.
Primary Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog
Boxes)
Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for
dimension text.
Linear Dimensions
Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions.
Unit Format
Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. Options to select from include
Scientific, Decimal, Engineering, Architectural, Fractional, and Windows Desktop. GTXImage
CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMLUNIT system variable.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 87
The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in
the same way that tolerance values use this system variable).
Precision
Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text. GTXImage CAD PLUS
stores this value in the DIMDEC system variable.
Fraction Format
Sets the format for fractions. Options to select from include Diagonal, Horizontal, and Not
Stacked. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMFRAC system variable.
Decimal Separator
Sets the separator for decimal formats. Options to select from include period (.), comma (,), or
space ( ). GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMDSEP system variable.
Round Off
Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all dimension types except Angular. Enter a
value in the text box.
If you enter a value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you
enter a value of 1.0, GTXImage CAD PLUS rounds all dimension distances to the nearest integer.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the precision you set in
Precision. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMRND system variable.
Prefix
Includes the prefix you enter in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to
display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the diameter
symbol. When you enter a prefix, it overrides any default prefixes such as those used in diameter
(Ø) and radius (R) dimensioning. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the prefix in the DIMPOST
system variable.
If you specify tolerances, GTXImage CAD PLUS adds the prefix to the tolerances as well as to the
main dimension.
Suffix
Includes the suffix you enter in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to
display special symbols. For example, entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to
that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes such as
those used in diameter (Ø) and radius (R) dimensioning. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the suffix
in DIMPOST.
If you specify tolerances, GTXImage CAD PLUS adds the suffix to the tolerances as well as to the
main dimension.
Measurement Scale
Defines measurement scale options as follows:
Scale Factor:
Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements for all dimension types except Angular.
GTXImage CAD PLUS multiplies the dimension measurement by the value entered here. For
example, if you enter 2, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a one-inch dimension as two inches. The
88 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
value is not applied to rounding or PLUS or minus tolerance values for all dimension types except
Angular. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the length scaling value in the DIMLFAC system variable.
Apply to Layout Dimensions Only:
Applies the linear scale value only to dimensions created in layouts. This sets the length scale
factor to reflect the zoom scale factor for objects in a model space viewport. When you select this
option, GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the length scaling value as a negative value in the
DIMLFAC system variable.
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of zeros for leading, trailing, feet, and inches. GTXImage CAD PLUS
stores this value in the DIMZIN system variable.
Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000
becomes .5000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000
becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance
is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the
distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Angular Dimensions
Displays and sets the current angle format for angular dimensions.
Units Format
Sets the angular units format. Options to select from include Decimal Degrees,
Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, Grads, Radians, and Surveyor. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value
in the DIMAUNIT system variable.
Precision
Displays and sets the number of decimal places for angular dimensions. GTXImage CAD PLUS
stores this value in the DIMADEC system variable.
Zero Suppression
Suppresses leading and trailing zeros. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in DIMAZIN.
Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000
becomes .5000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000
becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Alternate Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog
Boxes)
Sets the format and precision units, angles, dimension, and scale of alternate measurement units.
Display Alternate Units
Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. GTXImage CAD PLUS sets the DIMALT
system variable to 1.
Alternate Units
Displays and sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular.
Unit Format
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 89
Sets the alternate units format. Options to select from include Scientific, Decimal, Engineering,
Architectural, Fractional, and Windows Desktop. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the
DIMALTU system variable.
The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that
tolerance values use this system variable).
Precision
Sets the number of decimal places based on the Units or Angle format you select. GTXImage CAD
PLUS stores this value in the DIMALTD system variable.
Multiplier for Alternate Units
Specifies a multiplier to use as the conversion factor between primary and alternate units. To
determine the value of alternate units, GTXImage CAD PLUS multiplies all linear distances
(measured by dimensions and coordinates) by the current linear scale value.
The length scaling value changes the generated measurement value. The value has no effect on
angular dimensions, and GTXImage CAD PLUS does not apply it to the rounding value or the
PLUS or minus tolerance values. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the DIMALTF
system variable.
Round Distances To
Sets rounding rules for alternate units for all dimension types except Angular. Enter a value in the
text box.
If you enter a value of 0.25, all alternate measurements are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit.
Similarly, if you enter a value of 1.0, GTXImage CAD PLUS rounds all dimension measurements
to the nearest integer.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting.
GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the alternate rounding value in the DIMALTRND system variable.
Prefix
Includes the prefix you enter in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control
codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the control code %%c displays the
diameter symbol. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the prefix in the DIMAPOST system variable.
Suffix
Includes the suffix you enter in the alternate dimension text. You can enter text or use control
codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text cm results in dimension text
similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes
such as those used in diameter (Ø) and radius (R) dimensioning. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the
suffix in DIMAPOST.
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of zeros for leading, trailing, feet, and inches. GTXImage CAD PLUS
stores this value in the DIMALTZ system variable.
Leading
Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing
90 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and
30.0000 becomes 30.
0 Feet
Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot.
For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches
Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral
number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Placement
Controls the placement of alternate units. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores these values in the
DIMAPOST system variable.
After Primary Units
Places alternate units after the primary units.
Below Primary Units
Places alternate units below the primary units.
Tolerances Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes)
Controls the display and format of dimension text tolerances.
Tolerance Format
Controls the tolerance format.
Method
Sets the method for calculating the tolerance.
None: Does not add a tolerance. DIMTOL is set to 0.
Symmetrical: Adds a PLUS/minus expression of tolerance in which GTXImage CAD
PLUS applies a single value of variation to the dimension measurement. A ± appears
after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. GTXImage CAD PLUS
sets the DIMTOL system variable to 1 and the DIMLIM system variable to 0.
Deviation: Adds a PLUS/minus tolerance expression. GTXImage CAD PLUS
applies different PLUS and minus values of variation to the dimension measurement.
A + symbol precedes the tolerance value entered in Upper Value and a – symbol
precedes the tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system variable
is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
Limits: Creates a limit dimension in which GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a
maximum and a minimum value, one over the other. The maximum value is the
dimension value PLUS the value entered in Upper Value. The minimum value is the
dimension value minus the value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL system
variable is set to 0. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 1.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 91
Basic: Creates a basic dimension in which GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a box
around the full extents of the dimension. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the distance
between the text and the box as a negative value in the DIMGAP system variable.
Precision
Displays and sets the number of decimal places. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the
DIMTDEC system variable.
Upper Value
Displays and sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in
Method, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses this value for the tolerance. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores
this value in the DIMTP system variable.
Lower Value
Displays and sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value
in the DIMTM system variable.
Scaling for Height
Displays and sets the current height for the tolerance text. GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the
ratio of the tolerance height to the main dimension text height and stores this value in the
DIMTFAC system variable.
Vertical Position
Controls text justification for symmetrical and deviation tolerances.
Top: Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the main dimension text. When you
select this option, GTXImage CAD PLUS sets the DIMTOLJ system variable to 2.
Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the main dimension text. When
you select this option, GTXImage CAD PLUS sets the DIMTOLJ system variable to
1.
Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the main dimension text. When
you select this option, GTXImage CAD PLUS sets the DIMTOLJ system variable to
0.
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of zeros for leading, trailing, feet, and inches. GTXImage CAD PLUS
stores this value in the DIMTZIN system variable.
Leading
Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing
Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and
30.0000 becomes 30.
92 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Feet
Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot.
For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Inches
Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral
number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Alternate Unit Tolerance
Sets the precision and zero suppression rules for alternate tolerance units.
Precision
Displays and sets the number of decimal places. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this value in the
DIMALTTD system variable.
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of zeros for leading, trailing, feet, and inches. GTXImage CAD PLUS
stores this value in the DIMALTTZ system variable.
Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000
becomes .5000.
Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000
becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is
less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the
distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box
Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of one style. You can
print the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and then paste to other Windows applications.
Compare
Displays and sets the first dimension style for the comparison.
With
Displays and sets the second dimension style for the comparison. If set to <none>, or if set to the
same style as in Compare, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays all properties for the style. Comparison
results display automatically under the following headings:
Description of the dimension style property
The system variable that controls the property
The system variable values of style properties that differ for each dimension style.
Print to Clipboard button
Prints results of the style comparison to the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the results to
other Windows applications, such as word processors and spreadsheets.
DIMTEDIT
Moves and rotates dimension text.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Align Text
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 93
Command line: dimtedit
Select dimension:
Select a dimension object
GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for the new location of the dimension text.
Specify new location for dimension text or [Left/Right/Center/Home/Angle]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Location for Dimension Text
Updates the dimension dynamically as you drag it, if you move the cursor to position the
dimension text and the DIMSHO system variable is on. Vertical placement settings control
whether text appears above, below, or in the middle of the dimension line.
Left
Left-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear,
radial, and diameter dimensions.
Right
Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear,
radial, and diameter dimensions.
Center
Centers the dimension text on the dimension line.
Home
Moves dimension text back to its default position.
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Enter text angle:
The center point of the text does not change. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated,
GTXImage CAD PLUS keeps the orientation set by the text angle. Entering an angle of 0 degrees
puts the text in its default orientation.
94 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If the Inside Horizontal option is selected for text in the New Dimension Style dialog box, the
dimension text aligns with the dimension line.
DIST
Measures the distance and angle between two points.
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Tools Inquiry Distance
Command line: dist (or 'dist for transparent use)
Specify first point:
Specify second point:
Specify a point (1)
Specify a point (2)
Distance = calculated distance, Angle in XY plane = angle,
Angle from XY plane = angle
Delta X = change in X, Delta Y = change in Y, Delta Z = change in Z
GTXImage CAD PLUS reports the true 3D distance between points. The angle in the XY plane is
relative to the current X axis. The angle from the XY plane is relative to the current XY plane. DIST
assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordinate value.
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the distance using the current units format.
DIVIDE
Places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object.
Objects that you can divide include arcs, circles, ellipses and elliptical arcs, polylines, and splines.
Draw menu: Point
Divide
Command line: divide
Select object to divide:
Use an object selection method
Enter number of segments or [Block]:
Enter a value from 2 through 32,767, or enter b
Number of Segments
Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects.
The illustration shows a polyline divided into five parts. Point Display mode (PDMODE) is set so
that you can see the points.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 95
Block
Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object.
Enter name of block to insert:
Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing
Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>:
Enter y or n or press ENTER
Yes
Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to or colinear with, the divided object at
the dividing points.
No
Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation.
Enter number of segments:
Enter a value from 2 through 32,767
The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block consisting of a vertically
oriented ellipse.
DONUT
Draws filled circles and rings.
A donut is constructed of a closed polyline composed of wide arc segments. How GTXImage CAD
PLUS fills the interior of a donut depends on the current setting of the FILL Command.
Draw menu: Circle Donut
Command line: donut
Specify inside diameter of donut <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
If you specify an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a filled circle.
Specify outside diameter of donut <current>:
ENTER
Specify center of donut or <exit>:
the command
Specify a distance or press
Specify a point (1) or press ENTER to end
GTXImage CAD PLUS sets the location of the donut based on the center point. After you specify
the diameters, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for the locations at which to draw donuts.
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a donut at each point specified (2).
96 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
DRAGMODE
Controls the way GTXImage CAD PLUS displays dragged objects.
You can draw new objects dynamically and drag them into position on the screen. You can also
drag existing objects with many editing commands. With some computer configurations, dragging
can be time-consuming. Use DRAGMODE to suppress dragging.
Command line: dragmode (or 'dragmode for transparent use)
Enter new value [ON/OFF/Auto] <current>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
On
Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to
initiate dragging.
Off
Ignores all dragging requests, including those embedded in menu items.
Auto
Turns on dragging for every command that supports it. Dragging is performed whenever it is
possible. Entering drag each time is not necessary.
DRAWORDER
Changes the display order of images and other objects.
DRAWORDER changes the drawing and plotting order of any object in the GTXImage CAD
PLUS drawing database. In addition to moving objects to the "front" or "back" of the sort order,
you can order objects relative to another object (that is, above or below a selected object).
Modify II toolbar:
Tools menu: Image Control Display Order
Command line: draworder
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
finish selecting objects
Enter object ordering option [Above object/Under object/Front/Back] <Back>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 97
If you select either the Above Object or Under Object option, GTXImage CAD PLUS presents the
following prompt on the command line:
Select reference object:
Use an object selection method
When you select multiple objects for reordering, GTXImage CAD PLUS maintains the relative
display order of the objects selected. The selection method has no impact on drawing order.
The command terminates once you reorder an object. The command does not continue to prompt
for additional objects to reorder.
NOTE: DRAWORDER automatically turns on all Object Sort Method options on the User
Preferences tab in the Options dialog box. This can result in slower regeneration and
redrawing times.
Above Object
Moves the selected object above a specified reference object.
Under Object
Moves the selected object below a specified reference object.
Front
Moves the selected object to the bottom of the drawing order.
Back
Moves the selected object to the top of the drawing order.
DSETTINGS
Specifies settings for Snap mode, grid, and polar and object snap tracking.
DSETTINGS specifies the settings for a number of drafting aids to help you draw more quickly
and precisely. Settings include Snap mode, the grid, object snaps, and polar and object snap
tracking.
Tools menu: Drafting Settings
Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, or Otrack on the status bar and choose
Settings.
Command line: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Drafting Settings .
Drafting Settings Dialog Box
Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids in three categories: Snap and Grid, Polar
Tracking, and Object Snap.
Snap and Grid Tab
Specifies Snap and Grid settings.
Snap On
Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status
bar, by pressing F9, or by using the SNAPMODE system variable.
Snap
Controls an invisible grid that restricts cursor movement to specified intervals.
Snap X Spacing
98 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value must be a positive real number. This value
is also controlled by the SNAPUNIT system variable.
Snap Y Spacing
Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction. The value must be a positive real number. This value
is also controlled by the SNAPUNIT system variable.
Angle
Rotates the snap grid by the angle specified. This value is also controlled by the SNAPANG
system variable.
X Base
Specifies an X base coordinate point for the grid. This value is also controlled by the SNAPBASE
system variable.
Y Base
Specifies a Y base coordinate point for the grid. This value is also controlled by the SNAPBASE
system variable.
Polar Spacing
Controls polar settings.
Polar Distance
Sets the snap increment distance when Snap Type is set to Polar Snap. If this value is 0, the polar
snap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. This value is also controlled by the
POLARDIST system variable.
Grid On
Turns the grid dots on or off. You can also turn grid dots mode on or off by clicking Grid on the
status bar, by pressing F7, or by using the GRIDMODE system variable.
Grid
Controls the display of a dot grid that helps you visualize distances.
Grid X Spacing
Specifies the dot spacing in the X direction. If this value is 0, the grid assumes the value set for
Snap X Spacing. This value is also controlled by the GRIDUNIT system variable.
Grid Y Spacing
Specifies the dot spacing in the Y direction. If this value is 0, the grid assumes the value set for
Snap Y Spacing. This value is also controlled by the GRIDUNIT system variable.
Snap Type & Style
Controls Snap mode settings.
Grid Snap
Sets the snap type to Grid. The snap type is also controlled by the SNAPTYPE system variable.
Rectangular Snap: Sets the snap style to standard Rectangular snap mode. When the
snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to a rectangular
snap grid. The snap style is also controlled by the SNAPSTYL system variable.
Isometric Snap: Sets the snap style to Isometric snap mode. When the snap type is set
to Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to an isometric snap grid. The snap
style is also controlled by the SNAPSTYL system variable.
Polar Snap
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 99
Sets the snap type to Polar. When the snap type is set to Polar snap and Snap mode is on, the
cursor snaps along polar alignment angles set on the Polar Tracking tab relative to the starting
polar tracking point. The snap type is also controlled by the SNAPTYPE system variable.
Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)
Controls the Autotracking settings.
Polar Tracking On
Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by pressing F10 or by
using the AUTOSNAP system variable.
Polar Angle Settings
Sets the angles used with polar tracking.
Increment Angle
Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar tracking alignment paths. You can enter any
angle, or select a common angle of 90, 60, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10, and 5 degrees from the list.
This setting is also controlled by the POLARANG system variable.
Additional Angles
Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking. The Additional Angles check
box is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable, and the list of additional angles is
also controlled by the POLARADDANG system variable.
New
Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment angles.
Delete
Deletes selected additional angles.
Object Snap Tracking Settings
Sets options for object snap tracking.
Track Orthogonally Only
Displays only orthogonal (horizontal/vertical) object snap tracking paths for acquired object snap
points when object snap tracking is on. This setting is also controlled by the POLARMODE
system variable.
Track Using All Polar Angle Settings
Permits the cursor to track along any polar angle tracking path for acquired osnap points when
object snap tracking is on while specifying points. This setting is also controlled by the
POLARMODE system variable.
NOTE: Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and object
snap tracking on and off.
Polar Angle Measurement
Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured.
Absolute
Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Relative to Last Segment
Bases polar tracking angles on the last object you created.
100 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)
Controls running object snap settings.
Object Snap On
Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are
active while object snap is on. This setting is also controlled by the OSMODE system variable.
Object Snap Tracking On
Turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking the cursor can track along
alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command. To use
object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps. This setting is also controlled by
the AUTOSNAP system variable.
Object Snap Modes
Turns on running object snaps.
Endpoint
Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, or ray or to
the closest corner of a trace, or solid.
Midpoint
Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, solid,
spline, or xline.
Center
Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Node
Snaps to a point object.
Quadrant
Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Intersection
Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline,
or xline. Intersection snaps to the edges of regions and curves.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 101
Extended Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two objects that would intersect if the
objects were extended along their natural paths. GTXImage CAD PLUS automatically turns on
Extended Intersection when you select the Intersection object snap mode.
NOTE: You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent
Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Intersection and Extended
Intersection work with edges of regions and curves.
Extension
Causes a temporary extension line to display when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of
objects, so you can draw objects to and from points on the extension line.
Insertion
Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a shape, or text.
Perpendicular
Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray,
solid, spline, or xline. GTXImage CAD PLUS automatically turns on Deferred Perpendicular snap
mode when the object you are drawing requires you to complete more than one perpendicular snap.
You can use a line, arc, circle, polyline, ray, xline, or multiline as an object from which to draw a
perpendicular line. You can use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such
objects. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point, GTXImage CAD
PLUS displays a Snaptip and marker.
Tangent
Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc. GTXImage CAD PLUS
automatically turns on Deferred Tangent snap mode when the object you are drawing requires you
to complete more than one tangent snap. For example, you can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line
that is tangent to two arcs, polyline arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred
Tangent snap point, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a marker and Snaptip.
NOTE: If you use the From option in conjunction with the Tangent snap mode to draw
objects other than lines from arcs or circles, the first point drawn is tangent to the arc or
circle in relation to the last point selected in the drawing area.
Nearest
Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, point, polyline,
spline, or xline.
Apparent Intersection
102 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Apparent Intersection includes two separate snap modes: Apparent Intersection and Extended
Apparent Intersection. You can also locate Intersection and Extended Intersection snap points
while running Apparent Intersection object snap mode is on.
Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent intersection of two objects (arc, circle, ellipse,
elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline) that do not intersect in 3D space but
may appear to intersect in the drawing display. Extended Apparent Intersection snaps to the
imaginary intersection of two objects that would appear to intersect if the objects were extended
along their natural paths.
NOTE: You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent
Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. Apparent and Extended
Apparent Intersection work with edges of regions and curves.
Parallel
Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for the
second point of a vector. After specifying the first point of a vector, if you move the cursor over a
straight line segment of another object, GTXImage CAD PLUS acquires the point. When the path
of the object you create is parallel to the line segment, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays an
alignment path, which you can use to create the parallel object.
Clear All
Turns off all object snap modes.
Select All
Turns on all object snap modes.
Options
Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box. You cannot access the Options dialog box
from the Drafting Settings dialog box if you are running DSETTINGS transparently.
DSVIEWER
Opens the Aerial View window.
The Aerial View window is a navigation tool. It displays a view of the entire drawing in a separate
window so that you can quickly locate and move to a specific area. With the Aerial View window
open, you can zoom and pan without choosing a menu option or entering a command.
In paper space, the Aerial View window shows only paper space objects, including viewport
borders. Real-time updating of the GTXImage CAD PLUS window from the Aerial View window
is not available in paper space.
View menu: Aerial View
Command line: dsviewer
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Aerial View .
Aerial View Window
Displays the entire drawing; GTXImage CAD PLUS marks the current view with a wide outline
box.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 103
View Menu (Aerial View Window)
Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the drawing or by
displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.
When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View, the Zoom Out menu option and button
are unavailable. When the current view nearly fills the Aerial View window, the Zoom In menu
option and button are unavailable. It is possible for both of these conditions to exist at the same
time, causing both to be unavailable, for example, after you zoom to the drawing extents. All of the
menu options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the Aerial View window.
Zoom In
Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View by zooming in by a factor of 2,
centered on the current view box.
Zoom Out
Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View by zooming out by a factor of 2,
centered on the current view box.
Global
Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the Aerial View window.
Options Menu (Aerial View Window)
Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the drawing. All of the
menu options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the Aerial View window.
Auto Viewport
Displays the model space view of the active viewport automatically. When Auto Viewport is off,
GTXImage CAD PLUS does not update the Aerial View window to match the active viewport.
Dynamic Update
Updates the Aerial View window while you edit the drawing. When Dynamic Update is off,
GTXImage CAD PLUS does not update the Aerial View window until you switch click in the
Aerial View window.
Realtime Zoom
Updates the drawing area in real time when you zoom using the Aerial View window.
DXBIN
Imports specially coded binary files.
Insert menu: Drawing Exchange Binary
Command line: dxbin
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Enter the name of the file to import.
ELEV
Sets elevation and extrusion thickness properties of new objects.
The current elevation is the Z value that GTXImage CAD PLUS uses whenever it expects a 3D
point but receives only X and Y values. GTXImage CAD PLUS maintains separate current
elevations in model space and paper space. Specifying an elevation setting in one viewport makes
that elevation current in all viewports regardless of whether viewports are set up to retain their own
user coordinate systems (UCSs). GTXImage CAD PLUS resets the elevation to 0.0 whenever you
change the coordinate system.
Command line: elev (or 'elev for transparent use)
104 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify new default elevation <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify new default thickness <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
The thickness sets the distance to which GTXImage CAD PLUS extrudes a 2D object above or
below its elevation. A positive value extrudes along the positive Z axis; a negative value extrudes
along the negative Z axis.
ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects.
ELLIPSE
Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Ellipse
Command line: ellipse
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center/Isocircle]:
or enter an option
Specify a point (1)
The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP to Isometric.
Axis Endpoint
Defines the first axis by its two endpoints. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the
ellipse. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of the ellipse.
Specify other endpoint of axis:
Specify a point (2)
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]:
or enter r
Specify a point (3), enter a value,
Distance
Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc, or midpoint of the first
axis, to the point you specify.
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis. The
higher the value, the greater the ratio of minor to major axis. Entering 0 creates a circular ellipse
object.
Specify rotation around major axis:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a point (3) or enter a value (0–89.4)
General Command Reference 105
Arc
Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the elliptical arc. The
first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of the elliptical arc.
Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]:
Specify a point or enter c
Axis Endpoint
Defines the start point of the first axis.
Specify other endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]:
Specify a distance or enter r
Distance
Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc, or midpoint of the first
axis, to the point you specify.
Specify start angle or [Parameter]:
p
Specify a point (1), enter a value, or enter
Start Angle
Determines the start angle of the elliptical arc.
Specify end angle or [Parameter/Included angle]:
value, or enter an option
Specify a point (2), enter a
End Angle: Determines the end angle of the elliptical arc measured from 0 degrees.
Parameter: Determines the start angle of the elliptical arc. GTXImage CAD PLUS
creates the elliptical arc using a parametric vector equation.
Included Angle: Defines an included angle for the elliptical arc measured relative to
the start angle instead of 0 degrees.
Parameter
Determines the start angle of the elliptical arc. GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the elliptical arc
using the following parametric vector equation:
p(u) = c + a* cos(u) + b* sin(u)
where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its major and minor axes, respectively.
Specify start parameter or [Angle]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter a
Start Parameter: Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric
vector equation. The Start Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter
106 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
mode. The mode you are in determines how GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the
ellipse.
Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]:
value, or enter an option
Specify a point, enter a
Angle: Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc. The Angle option toggles from
Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode you are in determines how GTXImage
CAD PLUS calculates the ellipse.
Specify end angle or [Parameter]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter p
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis. The
higher the value (from 0 through 89.4 degrees), the greater the ratio of minor to major axis.
Entering 0 defines a circle.
Specify rotation around major axis:
Specify a rotation angle
Specify start angle or [Parameter]:
Specify an angle or enter p
Start Angle
Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc. The Start Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to
Angle mode. The mode you are in determines how GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the ellipse.
Specify end angle or [Parameter]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter p
Parameter
Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Parameter
option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter mode. The mode you are in determines how
GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the ellipse.
Specify start parameter or [Angle]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter a
Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]:
value, or enter an option
Specify a point, enter a
End Parameter: Determines the end angle of the elliptical arc. GTXImage CAD
PLUS creates the elliptical arc using a parametric vector equation.
Angle: Determines the end angle of the elliptical arc.
Included Angle: Defines an included angle for the elliptical arc measured relative to
the start angle instead of 0 degrees.
Center
Creates the elliptical arc using a center point you specify.
Specify center of elliptical arc:
Specify endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]:
Specify a distance or enter r
Distance
Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc, or midpoint of the first
axis, to the point you specify.
Specify start angle or [Parameter]:
Specify an angle or enter p
Start Angle
Determines the start angle of the elliptical arc.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 107
Specify end angle or [Parameter/Included angle]:
an option
Specify an angle or enter
End Angle: Determines the end angle of the elliptical arc measured from 0 degrees.
Parameter: Determines the start angle of the elliptical arc. GTXImage CAD PLUS
creates the elliptical arc using a parametric vector equation.
Included Angle: Defines an included angle for the elliptical arc measured relative to
the start angle instead of 0 degrees.
Parameter
Determines the start angle of the elliptical arc. GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the elliptical arc
using the following parametric vector equation:
p(u) = c + a* cos(u) + b* sin(u)
where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its major and minor axes, respectively.
Specify start parameter or [Angle]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter a
Start Parameter: Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric
vector equation. The Start Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter
mode. The mode you are in determines how GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the
ellipse.
Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]:
value, or enter an option
Specify a point, enter a
Angle: Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc. The Angle option toggles from
Parameter mode to Angle mode. The mode you are in determines how GTXImage
CAD PLUS calculates the ellipse.
Specify end angle or [Parameter]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter p
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis. The
higher the value (from 0 through 89.4 degrees), the greater the ratio of minor to major axis.
Entering 0 defines a circle.
Specify rotation around major axis:
Specify a rotation angle
Specify start angle or [Parameter]:
Specify an angle or enter p
Start Angle
Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc. The Start Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to
Angle mode. The mode you are in determines how GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the ellipse.
Specify end angle or [Parameter]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter p
Parameter
Defines the start angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Parameter
option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter mode. The mode you are in determines how
GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates the ellipse.
Specify start parameter or [Angle]:
Specify a point, enter a value, or enter a
Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]:
value, or enter an option
Specify a point, enter a
Parameter: Determines the end angle of the elliptical arc. GTXImage CAD PLUS
creates the elliptical arc using a parametric vector equation.
Angle: Determines the end angle of the elliptical arc.
108 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Included Angle: Defines an included angle for the elliptical arc that begins at the start
angle.
Center
Creates the ellipse by a center point you specify.
Specify center of ellipse:
Specify a point (1)
Specify endpoint of axis:
Specify a point (2)
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]:
or enter r
Specify a point (3), enter a value,
Distance
Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis,
to the point you specify.
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about the first axis. The
higher the value (from 0 through 89.4 degrees), the greater the ratio of minor to major axis.
Entering 0 defines a circle.
Specify rotation around major axis:
Specify a rotation angle
Isocircle
Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane.
Specify center of isocircle:
Specify radius of isocircle or [Diameter]:
Specify a distance or enter d
Radius
Creates a circle using a radius you specify.
Diameter
Creates a circle using a diameter you specify.
Specify diameter of isocircle:
Specify a distance
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Erase
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Erase.
Command line: erase
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 109
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
finish selecting objects
GTXImage CAD PLUS removes the objects from the drawing.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
A compound object comprises more than one GTXImage CAD PLUS object. For example, a block
is a compound object. You can explode blocks, bodies, dimensions, multilines, polyface meshes,
polygon meshes, polylines, and regions.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Explode
Command line: explode
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
finish selecting objects
Results differ depending on the type of compound object you're exploding. See the following list
of objects that can be exploded and the results for each.
NOTE: You can explode only one object at a time.
All Explodable Objects
Produces object geometry that may look the same, but the color, linetype, and lineweight of the
object may change.
Block
Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding
the block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its
individual objects.
Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X,
Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects.
When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that cannot be exploded, they are collected into
an anonymous block (named with a "*E" prefix) and referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all
the objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected block reference will not be exploded.
Entities in a nonuniformly scaled block cannot be exploded.
Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the attribute values and redisplays the attribute
definitions.
Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references (xrefs) and their dependent blocks cannot
be exploded.
2D and Lightweight Polyline
Discards any associated width or tangent information.
Wide Polyline
110 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Places the resulting lines and arcs along the center of the polyline. GTXImage CAD PLUS discards
any associated width or tangent information.
Leaders
Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks),
mtext, or tolerance objects, depending on the leader.
Mtext
Explodes into text entities.
Multiline
Explodes into lines and arcs.
Region
Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.
Body
Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar surfaces), regions, or curves.
Polyface Mesh
Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Two-vertex meshes explode into a line. Circle
Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block
Explodes a circle within a nonuniformly scaled block into ellipses.
Arc Within a Nonuniformly Scaled Block
Explodes an arc within a nonuniformly scaled block into elliptical arcs.
EXPORT
Saves objects to other file formats.
File menu: Export
Command line: export
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
In List Files of Type, select the format type to export objects to. In File Name, enter the name of
the file to create. GTXImage CAD PLUS exports the objects to the specified file format using the
specified file name.
The following output types are available:
WMF—Windows®
SAT—ACIS solid object file
STL—Solid object stereolithography file
EPS—Encapsulated PostScript
DXF—Attribute extract DXF® file
BMP—Device-independent bitmap file
3DS—3D Studio® file
DWG—GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing file
For the EPS file type, the Options button displays the PostScript Out Options.
EXTEND
Extends an object to meet another object.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 111
Objects that you can extend include arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D polylines, and rays.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Extend
Command line: extend
Select boundary edges...
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
finish selecting objects
Select the objects that define the boundary edges to which you want to extend the object, or press
ENTER to select all objects as potential boundaries. Valid boundary objects include 2D polylines,
arcs, circles, ellipses, floating viewports, lines, rays, regions, splines, text, and xlines. If you select
a 2D polyline as a boundary object, GTXImage CAD PLUS ignores its width and extends objects
to the center line of the polyline.
Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the polyline. If you
extend a tapered polyline segment, GTXImage CAD PLUS corrects the width of the extended end
to continue its original taper to the new endpoint. If this causes the segment to have a negative
ending width, the ending width becomes zero.
Select object to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
Select an object or enter an option
Object to Extend
Specifies the object to extend. GTXImage CAD PLUS repeats the main prompt so you can extend
multiple objects. Pressing ENTER ends the command.
Project
Specifies the Projection mode GTXImage CAD PLUS uses when extending objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>:
press ENTER
Enter an option or
None
112 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specifies no projection. GTXImage CAD PLUS extends only objects that intersect with the
boundary edge in 3D space. GTXImage CAD PLUS returns you to the preceding prompt.
Select object to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
option
Select an object or enter an
UCS
Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). GTXImage
CAD PLUS extends objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects in 3D space.
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the preceding prompt.
Select object to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
Select an object or enter an option
View
Specifies projection along the current view direction.
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the preceding prompt.
Select object to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
Select an object or enter an option
Edge
Extends the object to another object's implied edge.
Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] <current>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
Extend
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 113
Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object.
No Extend
Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it.
Undo
Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.
FILL
Controls the filling of multilines, traces, solids, all hatches, and wide polylines.
On some displays and plotters, it takes a long time to fill the interior of objects. Turning off display
of Fill can improve performance and reduce regeneration time.
Command line: fill (or 'fill for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>:
Enter on or off, or press ENTER
On
Turns on Fill mode. In order for the filling of objects to be visible, ensure that you have set the
object's extrusion direction to be parallel to the current viewing direction, and that you have not
suppressed hidden lines.
Off
Turns off Fill mode and displays and plots only the outlines of objects. Changing Fill mode affects
existing objects after you regenerate the drawing. Objects with lineweight displayed are not
affected by the Fill mode setting.
FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects.
114 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
FILLET rounds or fillets the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays,
splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1,
FILLET trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the fillet arc. If the selected lines do not
intersect, GTXImage CAD PLUS extends or trims them so that they do.
If both objects you want to fillet are on the same layer, GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the fillet
line on that layer. Otherwise, GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the fillet line on the current layer.
The same is true for the fillet color, lineweight, and linetype.
You can only fillet line segments of a polyline that are consecutive or separated by one segment,
and that converge within the drawing limits (when limits checking is on).
NOTE: Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary is defined by lines removes hatch
associativity. GTXImage CAD PLUS maintains associativity when the boundary is a polyline.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Fillet
Command line: fillet
Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current
Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim]:
or enter an option
Use an object selection method
First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet.
Select second object:
If you select lines or arcs, GTXImage CAD PLUS extends these lines or arcs until they intersect,
or trims them at the intersection. You can fillet two lines with different extrusion directions only if
the Z values of the endpoints of both lines are equal in the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Chain
Toggles from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges.
Select edge chain or <Edge/Radius>:
Select an edge chain, enter e, or enter r
Edge Chain
Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge. For example, if you select an
edge on the top of a 3D solid box, GTXImage CAD PLUS also selects the other tangential edges
on the top.
Edge
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 115
Switches to a single edge selection mode.
Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they must be adjacent or
separated by one other segment. If they are separated, FILLET deletes the segment that separates
them and replaces it with an arc.
More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. GTXImage CAD PLUS chooses the fillet
with endpoints closest to the points you select.
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.
Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Enter fillet radius <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the previous prompt:
116 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]:
Select one or more edges or enter c or r
Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet.
Select 2D polyline:
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach the arc segment,
GTXImage CAD PLUS removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc.
Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Specify fillet radius <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET commands. Changing this
value does not affect existing fillet arcs.
Trim
Controls whether GTXImage CAD PLUS trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>:
ENTER
Enter an option or press
Trim
Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.
No Trim
Does not trim the selected edges.
FILTER
Creates reusable filters to select objects based on properties.
FILTER creates a list of requirements that an object must meet before GTXImage CAD PLUS
selects that object. You can use FILTER at the Command prompt to create filter lists for use later
at a Select Objects prompt. You can also use FILTER transparently at a Select Objects prompt to
select objects for use with the current command.
FILTER finds objects by properties only when you have assigned those properties to the object
directly. If objects assume properties from the layer on which they reside, FILTER does not find
them.
Command line: filter (or 'filter for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Object Selection Filters .
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box
Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection.
Object Selection Filters
Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The current filter is the filter
that you select in Current in the Named Filters area.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 117
Select Filter
Adds filter properties to the current filter based on object properties. You can choose among
objects and logical operators.
You can enter additional parameter values depending on the object. For example, if you select Line
Start, you can enter the X, Y, and Z coordinate values.
You can specify relationships by using relative operators, such as < (less than) or > (greater than).
For example, to create a filter list that selects all circles with a center point greater than or equal to
1,1,0 and a radius greater than or equal to 1, select options in the dialog box to create the following
list:
Object
=
Circle
Circle Center
X=>1.0000
Circle Radius
>=1.0000
Y>= 1.0000
Z >= 0.0000
If you use grouping operators —AND, OR, XOR, and NOT—ensure that you pair and balance
them correctly in the filter list. The number of operands you can enclose depends on the operation.
Grouping operators
Starting operator
Encloses
Ending operator
Begin AND
One or more operands
End AND
Begin OR
One or more operands
End OR
Begin XOR
Two operands
End XOR
Begin NOT
One operand
End NOT
For example, to create a filter list that selects all circles except the ones with a radius equal to 1.0,
you select options in the dialog box to create the following list:
Object
= Circle
**Begin NOT
Circle Radius
= 1.00
**End NOT
Select
Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified type in the drawing. Select the items to
filter.
Add to List
Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list. Filter properties that you add to the
Unnamed filter remain available during the current GTXImage CAD PLUS session unless you
manually delete them.
Substitute
Replaces the selected filter with the one in Select Filter.
Add Selected Object
Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list.
118 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Edit Item
Moves the selected filter into the Select Filter area for editing. To change a filter, select it and
choose Edit Item. Edit the filter and values and choose Substitute. The edited filter replaces the
selected filter.
Delete
Erases the selected filter in the list.
Clear List
Erases the current filter list.
Named Filters
Displays, saves, and deletes filter lists.
Current
Displays saved filter lists. Select a filter list to make it current. GTXImage CAD PLUS loads the
named filter lists from the default file, filter.nfl.
Save As
Saves a filter list. GTXImage CAD PLUS saves the filter list in the filter.nfl file. Names can
contain up to 18 characters.
Delete Current Filter List
Deletes filter lists from the default filter file.
Apply
Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt, where you create a selection set.
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the filter list on the objects you select.
GRAPHSCR
Switches from the text window to the drawing area.
Command line: graphscr (or 'graphscr for transparent use)
As an alternative, you can press F2 to toggle between the drawing area and the text window.
GTXImage CAD PLUS ignores this command on dual-screen systems.
GRID
Displays a dot grid in the current viewport.
The purpose of the grid is to act as a visual reference only. GTXImage CAD PLUS does not plot
the grid, nor does it consider the grid to be part of the drawing. You can turn the grid display on
and off with the Grid button on the status bar.
Command line: grid (or 'grid for transparent use)
Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>:
value or enter an option
Specify a
Grid Spacing (X)
Sets the grid to the specified value. Specifying a value followed by x sets the grid spacing to the
specified value times the snap interval.
On
Turns on the grid at the current spacing.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 119
Off
Turns off the grid.
Snap
Sets the grid spacing to the current snap interval as set by the SNAP command.
Aspect
Sets the grid to a different spacing in X and Y.
Specify the horizontal spacing(X) <current>:
Specify the vertical spacing(Y) <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter a value or press ENTER
Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval rather than the
drawing units.
The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric.
GROUP
Creates a named selection set of objects.
Command line: group
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Object Grouping .
If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts on the command line.
Object Grouping Dialog Box
Displays, identifies, names, and changes object groups.
Group Name
Displays the names of existing groups.
Selectable
Indicates whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting a single group
member selects all the members in the current space except those existing in an alternate space or
on frozen or locked layers. When a group is not selectable, selecting a single group member selects
only that object.
120 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Group Identification
Displays the name and description (if any) of the group selected in the Group Name list.
Group Name
Displays the name of the selected group. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, and blank spaces. You can also use any special character not used by Microsoft®
Windows® and GTXImage CAD PLUS for other purposes.
Description
Displays the description of the selected group, if there is one.
Find Name
Lists the groups to which an object belongs.
Pick a member of a group:
Select one object
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Group Member List dialog box, showing the groups to which
the object belongs.
Highlight
Shows the members of the selected group. GTXImage CAD PLUS highlights the member objects
in the drawing area.
Include Unnamed
Specifies that the Object Grouping dialog box also lists unnamed groups. When this option is
cleared, only named groups are displayed.
Create Group
Specifies properties of new groups.
New
Creates a new group from the selected objects. After you select the objects, GTXImage CAD
PLUS creates a group using the name and description under Group Name and Description.
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the group name in the Group Name list.
Selectable
Specifies that a new group is selectable.
Unnamed
Indicates that a new group is unnamed. When you create a group, you can name it, or you can
specify that the group is anonymous, or unnamed. GTXImage CAD PLUS assigns a default name,
*An, to unnamed groups. The n represents a number that increases with each new group.
Change Group
Alters the properties of existing groups.
Remove
Removes objects from the selected group.
Remove objects:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Use an object selection method
General Command Reference 121
GTXImage CAD PLUS removes the selected objects from the group and redisplays the Object
Grouping dialog box.
If you remove all the group's objects, the group remains defined. You can remove the group
definition from the drawing by choosing the Explode option.
NOTE: When you remove objects from a group and then later add them back during the
same drawing session, GTXImage CAD PLUS returns them to their previous position in the
numerical order of the group.
Add
Adds objects to the selected group.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method
GTXImage CAD PLUS adds the selected objects to the group and redisplays the Object Grouping
dialog box.
NOTE: GTXImage CAD PLUS alphabetizes the order of the group names.
Rename
Renames the selected group to the name entered in Group Name under Group Identification.
Re-Order
Displays the Order Group , in which you can change the numerical order of objects within the
selected group. GTXImage CAD PLUS numbers objects in the order in which you select them for
inclusion in the group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change
the order in which GTXImage CAD PLUS cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path
pattern.
You can either change the numerical position of individual group members or ranges of group
members or reverse the order of all members. The first object in a group is number 0, not number
1.
Description
Updates the selected group's description to the name that you enter in Description. GTXImage
CAD PLUS accepts up to 64 characters for a description name.
Explode
Deletes the definition of the selected group. The group's objects remain in the drawing.
Selectable
Specifies whether the group is selectable.
122 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Order Group Dialog Box
Reorders objects in groups.
Group Name
Displays the names of all groups.
Description
Displays the description of the selected group.
Remove from Position (0–n)
Specifies the current position of the object to reorder.
Replace at Position (0–n)
Specifies the position to which the object moves.
Number of Objects (1–n)
Specifies the object number or range of numbers to reorder.
Re-Order
Changes the numerical order of objects as specified.
Highlight
Displays the members of the selected group. GTXImage CAD PLUS highlights the group members
in the drawing area, one by one, in the current group order.
Reverse Order
Reverses the order of all group members.
HATCH
Fills a specified boundary with a pattern.
HATCH creates a nonassociative hatch or fill. You can fill a boundary that consists of an object or
objects that completely enclose an area. If the boundary is made up of multiple objects, their
endpoints must coincide in order for GTXImage CAD PLUS® to create the hatch properly. You
can also fill an area that does not have a closed boundary, by defining a polyline hatch boundary
with the Direct Hatch option.
Command line: hatch
Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>:
or custom pattern name, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a predefined
Use BHATCH to create hatches and fills in a dialog box and to create associative hatches.
Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom
Specifies a predefined pattern in the ICAD.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. Enter
the name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the name with an asterisk (*) to fill the
area with individual lines instead of a hatch block.
Specify a scale for the pattern <current>:
Specify a value or press ENTER
If the drawing is in model space and you enter a scale factor followed by xp, GTXImage CAD
PLUS calculates a scale factor relative to paper space.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 123
Specify an angle for pattern <current>:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects:
Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
Select Objects
Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary of the hatching area and objects internal to
the hatching boundary. Selecting part of a block for hatching selects the entire block. Press
ENTER to end the command and create the hatch.
Direct Hatch
Uses specified points to define the boundary of the hatching area.
Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to retain the hatch
boundary or n to discard it after the area is hatched
Specify start point:
Specify a start point for the polyline boundary
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]:
option, or press ENTER
Specify a point, enter an
These options are also available in the PLINE command. When you complete the polyline
boundary, press ENTER. HATCH prompts you to create additional polyline boundaries.
Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>: Specify a point or
press ENTER to apply a hatch to the existing hatch boundary
If you specify a point, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for additional points. Press ENTER to
end the command and create the hatch.
?—List Pattern Names
Lists and provides a brief description of the hatch patterns defined in the ICAD.pat file.
Enter pattern(s) to list <*>:
124 General Command Reference
Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all patterns
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Solid
Specifies a solid fill.
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects:
Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
Select Objects
Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary of the fill area and objects internal to the fill
boundary. Selecting part of a block for solid fill selects the entire block. Press ENTER to end the
command and create the solid fill.
Direct Hatch
Uses specified points to define the boundary of the fill area.
Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to retain the fill
boundary or n to discard it after the area is filled
Specify start point:
Specify a start point for the polyline boundary
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]:
option, or press ENTER
Specify a point, enter an
These options are also available in the PLINE command. When you complete the polyline
boundary, press ENTER. HATCH prompts you to create additional polyline boundaries.
Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>:
Specify a point or
press ENTER to apply a solid fill to the existing fill boundary
If you specify a point, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for additional points. Press ENTER to
end the command and create the solid fill.
NOTE: The boundary of a solid fill hatch must be closed and must not intersect itself. In
addition, if the hatch area contains more than one loop, the loops must not intersect. These
limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns.
User-Defined Pattern
Specifies a pattern of lines using the current linetype. Enter u, followed optionally by a hatch style
code. As with predefined patterns, you can precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with
individual lines instead of a hatch block.
Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>:
ENTER
Specify an angle or press
Specify spacing between the lines <current>:
the lines or press ENTER
Specify the distance between
Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify a second set of
lines to be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
Select objects:
Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
Select Objects
Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary of the hatching area and objects internal to
the hatching boundary. Selecting part of a block for hatching selects the entire block. Press
ENTER to end the command and create the hatch.
Direct Hatch
Uses specified points to define the boundary of the hatching area.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 125
Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to retain the hatch
boundary or n to discard it after the area is hatched
Specify start point:
Specify a start point for the polyline boundary
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]:
option, or press ENTER
Specify a point, enter an
These options are also available in the PLINE command. When you complete the polyline
boundary, press ENTER. HATCH prompts you to create additional polyline boundaries.
Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>: Specify a point or
press ENTER to apply a hatch to the existing hatch boundary
If you specify a point, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for additional points. Press ENTER to
end the command and create the hatch.
Hatch Style Codes
Hatching styles control the method that GTXImage CAD PLUS uses to hatch objects within the
outermost hatch boundary. Specify a hatch style by following the pattern name with a comma and
the hatch style code. You can list the hatch style codes by following the pattern name with a
comma (,) and a question mark (?).
For example, to hatch only the outermost area of a structure with several internal boundaries using
the MUDST pattern, enter mudst,o at the Pattern prompt. To opt for a user-defined pattern and use
the Ignore style, enter u,i. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores the style by adding the comma and code
to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
n (Normal)
Specifies standard style, or normal. This option hatches inward from the outermost area boundary.
If GTXImage CAD PLUS encounters an internal boundary, it turns off hatching until it encounters
another boundary. Thus, areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by an odd number of
boundaries are hatched, and areas separated by an even number of boundaries are not.
o (Outer)
Hatches outermost areas only. This style hatches inward from the area boundary, but it turns off
hatching if it encounters an internal boundary and does not turn it back on again. Because this
process starts from both ends of each hatch line, this style hatches only the outermost area of the
structure and leaves the internal structure blank.
i (Ignore)
Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.
? (List Styles)
Lists hatch styles. Enter ?.
126 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
NOTE: Hatching concave curves using the Outer and Ignore styles can cause discrepancies.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch object.
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Hatch
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hatch
Edit.
Command line: hatchedit
Select associative hatch object:
Use an object selection method
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Hatch Edit .
If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, HATCHEDIT displays prompts on the comamnd
line.
Hatch Edit Dialog Box
Modifies the characteristics of an existing hatch. The Hatch Edit dialog box displays the current
properties of the selected hatch object. You can modify these properties using the available
options.
Quick Tab
Modifies the hatch pattern properties.
Advanced Tab
Modifies the island detection style. The other options on this tab are unavailable.
Composition
Controls whether the hatch is associative or nonassociative.
Inherit Properties
Applies the properties of an existing hatch object to the hatch object you are editing. GTXImage
CAD PLUS prompts you to select the hatch object whose properties you want to inherit.
Preview
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the selected hatch object with the specified
properties.
HELP
Displays online help.
Standard toolbar:
Help menu: GTXImage CAD PLUS Help Topics
Command line: help or ? or press F1 (or 'help for transparent use)
To display help for a menu, open the menu, and then press F1.
Pressing F1 or entering 'help while a command is active displays help for that command. Choosing
Help in a dialog box displays help for that dialog box.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 127
ID
Displays the coordinate values of a location.
Tools menu: Tools Inquiry ID Point
Command line: id (or 'id for transparent use)
Point:
Use the pointing device to specify a point
GTXImage CAD PLUS® displays the user coordinate system (UCS) coordinate values of a
location on the command line.
If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected
feature of the object.
ID defines the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by entering @ at
the next prompt that requests a point.
IMAGE
Manages images.
In the Image Manager you can attach to the drawing, or detach a raster or bit-mapped bitonal, 8-bit
gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image file. You can reload and unload images, as well as specify a
new path for the images. You can view image details such as pixel width, color depth, and
resolution of the selected image. IMAGE can combine images in a variety of formats (including
BMP, TIFF, RLE, JPG, PCX, and TGA) with GTXImage CAD PLUS drawings. You can display
more than one image in any viewport. GTXImage CAD PLUS does not limit the number and size
of images.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Image Manager
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image Image
Manager.
Command line: image
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Image Manager dialog box.
If you enter -image at the Command prompt, IMAGE displays prompts on the command line.
Image Manager
Lists all the image files attached to the current drawing. You can view the parameters and details
for selected images. You can attach new image files and detach, locate, reload, and unload existing
images.
List of Images
Displays the names of all image files attached to the drawing. You can use F3 and F4 to toggle
between list view and tree view.
List View
Lists the image definitions attached to the drawing. Each image name appears only once regardless
of how many times you attach (insert) the image. You can sort the list of images by name, status
(loaded, unloaded, or not found), type (TIFF, for example), date, size, or the saved path and file
name. By default, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the list alphabetically by image name.
To select multiple images, hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting items.
128 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a specific column, click that column's
heading.
To change the width of the column, drag the line between the column headings to the
right or left. GTXImage CAD PLUS saves and restores the settings when you reopen
the dialog box.
To change an image name, select it and then click it again, or select it and then press
F2. You cannot edit names of images that reside in external references (xrefs). Image
names can include up to 255 characters and can contain letters, digits, spaces, and any
special characters not used by Microsoft® Windows® or GTXImage CAD PLUS.
The image name can be identical to the file name, but changing the image name does
not change the file name.
Tree View
Displays all the image definitions and the levels of nesting of images within xrefs. The top level of
the tree view shows images that you attached directly to the drawing, images nested in block
references, and the names of externally referenced drawings containing images. The names of the
images attached to the externally referenced drawings appear nested within the drawing at the next
tree level. To insert a copy of an already attached image, select it, and then choose Attach.
Tree view lists the image names only (not file names) and lists the image name just once,
regardless of how many times you attach (insert) the image.
You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it again, or by selecting it and then
pressing F2. However, you cannot select more than one image at a time.
Attach
Displays the Select Image File dialog box. See IMAGEATTACH. When you unload and then
reload an image, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws that image on top. For more information about
how to control where and how GTXImage CAD PLUS places the image, see SORTENTS and
DRAWORDER. Images remain loaded or unloaded from one drawing session to the next.
Detach
Removes the selected image definitions from the drawing database and erases all the associated
image objects from the drawing and from the display.
Reload
Loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was previously unloaded.
Reloading does not control whether the image is displayed, but it ensures display of the most
current image.
Unload
Unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image objects from the drawing. It
is recommended that you unload images no longer needed for editing to improve performance. An
unloaded image cannot be displayed or plotted.
You can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of images associated
with the drawing file.
Details
Opens the Image File Details dialog box, which displays the image name, saved path, active path,
file creation date and time, file size and type, color system, color depth, width and height in pixels,
resolution, default size in units, and a preview image.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 129
Image Found At
Shows the path of the selected image. If you select multiple images, this field remains blank. The
path shown is the actual path where the image resides. If GTXImage CAD PLUS does not find the
file at the path in the Saved Path field, GTXImage CAD PLUS first searches the standard
GTXImage CAD PLUS search path for the image's saved path. If GTXImage CAD PLUS cannot
locate the drawing (for example, if you have moved the file to a different directory than the one
that was saved with the image), it removes relative or absolute path information from the name (for
example, \images\tree.tga or c:\my project\images\tree.tga become tree.tga) and searches the paths
defined in the Project Files Search Path in the Options dialog box. If the drawing does not reside in
the paths specified in the Project Files search paths, GTXImage CAD PLUS attempts the first
search path again.
Browse
Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file dialog box). The path you select appears
under Image Found At. See IMAGEATTACH.
Save Path
Stores the new path information. Press ESC while editing the path to restore the old path. If
GTXImage CAD PLUS cannot find the referenced image in the new path, the image's status
changes to Not Found. If you do not choose Save Path after editing the path, GTXImage CAD
PLUS uses the original image path the next time you load the drawing.
IMAGE Command Line
If you enter -image at the Command prompt, IMAGE displays prompts on the command line.
Enter image option [?/Detach/Path/Reload/Unload/Attach/] <Attach>:
an option or press ENTER
Enter
? — List Images
Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is attached to the
drawing, and the path where the image is stored. GTXImage CAD PLUS lists images in
alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT system variable.
Images to list <*>:
Enter * to list all images, or enter an image name
Detach
Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and erases all occurrences of
the image.
Enter list of images to detach:
images
Enter an image name, or enter * to detach all
Path
Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular image. This option is
useful if you change the location of an image file, rename the file, or replace an old image file with
a new file; for instance, you can update image01.pcx and save it as image02.pcx.
Enter list of images for path modification:
list all images
Enter an image name, or enter * to
If you enter an asterisk (*), GTXImage CAD PLUS lists the current path name for each image and
prompts for the new path.
Old path:
Lists the current path name for each image
Enter New path:
130 General Command Reference
Enter the new path name for the specified image
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Reload
Reloads the selected images. GTXImage CAD PLUS reads image data into memory, making that
information available for display and plotting.
Enter list of images to reload:
images
Enter an image name, or enter * to reload all
Reloading...
Reload image <image name>:
<hard-coded path name>
<image name> loaded and relinked.
Unload
Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed, thus improving
performance. All information associated with the image remains stored with the drawing. The
image frame of each attached image remains visible.
Enter list of images to unload:
unload all images
Enter a loaded image name, or enter * to
Attach
Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing. GTXImage CAD
PLUS displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
GTXImage CAD PLUS assigns the file name without the extension as the image name. Image
names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special
characters not used by Microsoft Windows or GTXImage CAD PLUS. If the file name is not a
valid name for a nongraphical object, the Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed.
GTXImage CAD PLUS automatically generates a valid image name from the file name and
appends an underscore and number to the name, changing the number as necessary to avoid
duplicate image names.
Image file name_1 created from file file name.bmp
If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the following prompts and inserts the image as a copy:
Image file name has already been loaded.
Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition.
Specify insertion point <0,0>:
Specify an insertion point
Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit
Specify scale factor:
Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
IMAGEADJUST
Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object
Image Adjust
Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image
Adjust.
Command line: imageadjust
Select image(s):
Select one or more images
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Image Adjust .
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 131
If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, IMAGEADJUST displays prompts on the
command line.
Image Adjust Dialog Box
Controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness, contrast and fade settings of the
selected image. Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but does not change the
image file itself.
Brightness
Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. Values range from 0 through 100.
The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you
increase contrast. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right
increases the value.
Contrast
Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the image. Values range from 0 through
100. The greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Moving
the slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider to the right increases the value.
Fade
Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The greater the value,
the more the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the image
completely into the background. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to
the new color. In plotting, the background color for fade is white. Moving the slider to the left
decreases the value; moving the slider to the right increases the value.
Image Preview
Displays a preview of the selected image. The preview image updates dynamically to reflect
changes to the brightness, contrast, and fade settings.
Reset
Resets values for brightness, contrast, and fade to default settings (50, 50, and 0, respectively).
IMAGEATTACH
Attaches a new image to the current drawing.
IMAGEATTACH opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box)
without displaying the Image Manager first. You can view and attach raster or bitmapped bitonal,
8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image files to a drawing. Attaching an image creates an
image definition, loads the image into memory, and displays the image.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Raster Image
Command line: imageattach
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Once you select an image file, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Image .
Image Dialog Box
Locates, inserts, names, and defines the parameters and details of attached images.
132 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Name
Identifies the image you have selected to attach, either from the Select Image File dialog box (an
unattached image) or from the list of previously attached images. To add another instance of an
image file that is already attached, select the image name from the list and choose OK.
Browse
Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). If Show Preview is
selected, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a preview of the selected file.
Retain Path
Saves the path of the image file with the image definition. If Retain Path is not selected, only the
image name is saved and GTXImage CAD PLUS searches the Project Files Search Path stored in
the PROJECTNAME system variable. If no paths are set with PROJECTNAME, GTXImage CAD
PLUS searches the Support File Search Path.
You can set PROJECTNAME on the command line or on the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
You can set the Support File Search Path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box. See
PROJECTNAME.
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected image. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default
insertion point is 0,0.
Specify On-Screen
Directs input to the command line or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the
insertion point in X, Y, and Z.
X
Sets the X coordinate value.
Y
Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z
Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected image. Specify On-Screen directs input to the command
line or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The
default scale factor is 1.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image. If Specify On-Screen is selected, you may wait
until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle
value on the command line. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the
dialog box. The default rotation angle is 0.
Details
Displays the Image Information section. You can view width and height in pixels, the resolution,
and the size in units (such as millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers, inches, feet, yards,
miles, unitless, and many others). The default value for unitless images is unitless. The image size
is automatically converted to GTXImage CAD PLUS units and is displayed at the default width
and height.
Image information consists of the following:
Image resolution in horizontal and vertical pixels per drawing unit
Width and height in pixels
Width and height in current drawing units
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 133
IMAGEFRAME
Controls whether GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the image frame or hides it from view.
Because you select an image by clicking its frame, setting IMAGEFRAME to off prevents you
from selecting an image.
Reference toolbar:
Image
Modify menu: Object
Frame
Command line: imageframe
Enter image frame setting [ON/OFF] <current>:
ENTER
Enter an option or press
On
Displays image frames so you can select images.
Off
Hides image frames so you cannot select images.
IMAGEQUALITY
Controls the display quality of images.
The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take longer to display.
Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the
drawing. GTXImage CAD PLUS always plots images using a high-quality display.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object
Image
Quality
Command line: imagequality
Enter image quality setting [High/Draft] <current>:
ENTER
Enter an option or press
High
Produces a high-quality display of the image. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the image more
slowly than a draft-quality image.
Draft
Produces a lower-quality display of the image. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the image more
quickly than a high-quality image.
IMPORT
Imports files in various formats into GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Insert toolbar:
Command line: import
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
In Files of Type, select the format type to import. In File Name, select the file to import.
GTXImage CAD PLUS imports the file into the GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing.
The following input types are available:
WMF—Windows metafile
SAT—ACIS solid object
134 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
EPS—Encapsulated PostScript file
3DS—3D Studio file
You can display this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS.
INSERT
Places a named block or drawing into the current drawing.
Insert toolbar:
Insert menu: Block
Command line: insert
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Insert .
If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, INSERT displays prompts on the command line.
Insert Dialog Box
Specifies the block to insert and defines the position for the inserted block.
The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the default block for
subsequent uses of INSERT.
Name
Specifies the name of a block to insert or the name of a file to insert as a block.
Browse
Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can
select a block or a file to insert.
Path
Specifies the path to the block.
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the block.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device.
X
Sets the X coordinate value.
Y
Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z
Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale
Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X, Y, and Z scale
factors inserts a mirror image of a block.
Specify On-Screen
Specify the scale of the block using the pointing device.
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Uniform Scale
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 135
Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates. A value specified for X is also reflected
in the Y and Z values.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block.
Specify On-Screen
Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device.
Angle
Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.
Explode
Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When you select Explode, you
specify only an X scale factor.
Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects having color
BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype.
ISOPLANE
Specifies the current isometric plane
Command line: isoplane (or 'isoplane for transparent use)
Enter isometric plane setting [Left/Top/Right] <Top>:
press ENTER
Enter an option or
The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap
style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if
Snap mode is off. When the snap style is Standard, the ISOPLANE command has no effect on the
cursor. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by
ELLIPSE. You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing CTRL+E or F5.
Left
Selects the left-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 150-degree axis pair.
Top
136 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis
pair.
Right
Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair.
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties.
Object Properties toolbar:
Format menu: Layer
Command line: layer (or 'layer for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Layer Properties Manager dialog box.
If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, LAYER displays prompts on the command line.
Layer Properties Manager
Makes a layer current, adds new layers to the layer name list, and renames an existing layer. You
can assign properties to layers, turn layers on and off, freeze and thaw layers globally or by
viewport, lock and unlock layers, set plot styles for layers, and turn plotting on and off for layers.
Named Layer Filters
Determines which layers to display in the list of layers. You can filter layers based on whether
they're xref-dependent, or whether they contain objects. You can also filter layers based on name,
visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, plot style name, whether they are plotted, or whether they are
frozen in the current viewport or in new viewports.
[...] Button
Displays the Named Layer Filters .
Invert Filter
Displays layers based on the opposites of the criteria you select when you are using a named layer
filter. Layers that fit the inverse criteria are displayed in the layer name list.
Apply to Object Properties Toolbar
Displays in the Object Properties toolbar only layers that match the current filter. The layer list
tooltip on the Object Properties toolbar displays the filter status of layers in the drawing. (To
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 137
display the layer list tooltip, position the pointing device over the layer list on the Object Properties
toolbar.)
New
Creates a new layer. After you choose New, the list displays a layer named LAYER1. You can edit
this layer immediately. To create multiple layers more quickly, you can select a layer name for
editing and enter multiple layer names separated by commas.
If you create a new layer, the new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the
layer list (Color, On/Off state, and so on). To create layers with default settings, make sure that
there are no selected layers in the list or that you select a layer with default settings before
beginning layer creation.
Current
Sets the selected layer as the current layer. The CLAYER system variable stores the layer name.
Delete
Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition. You can delete only unreferenced layers.
Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects
in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. Layers that don't contain objects
(including objects in block definitions), are not current, and are not xref-dependent can be deleted
by using the PURGE command.
WARNING! Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared
project or one based on a set of layering standards.
Show/Hide Details
Controls whether the Details section is displayed in the Layer Properties Manager.
List of Layers
Displays layers and their properties. To modify a property, click its icon. To quickly select all
layers, right-click your pointing device and use the shortcut menu.
Names
Displays the names of the layers. You can select a name, and then click and enter a new name.
On/Off
Turns layers on and off. When a layer is on, it is visible and available for plotting. When a layer is
off, it is invisible and not plotted, even if Plot is on.
Freeze/Thaw in All Viewports
Freezes and thaws layers in all floating viewports. A frozen layer is invisible and excluded from
regeneration, hiding objects, rendering, and plotting. A thawed layer is visible and available for
regeneration, hiding objects, rendering and plotting.
You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other operations; improve object
selection performance; and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings. GTXImage CAD
PLUS does not display, plot, or regenerate objects on frozen layers. Objects on frozen layers do not
hide objects and are not rendered.
You can freeze layers in all viewports, in the active viewport, or in new viewports. See .
Freeze layers that you want to be invisible for long periods. When you thaw a frozen layer,
GTXImage CAD PLUS regenerates and displays the objects on that layer. If you switch between
visible and invisible states frequently, use the On/Off setting.
Lock/Unlock
138 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Locks and unlocks the layers. You cannot select or edit objects on a locked layer. Locking a layer
is useful if you want to view information on a layer for reference but do not want to edit objects on
that layer.
Color
Changes the color associated with the selected layers. Clicking the color name displays the Select
Color dialog box.
Linetype
Changes the linetype associated with the selected layers. Clicking any linetype name displays the
Select Linetype dialog box.
Lineweight
Changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers. Clicking any lineweight name displays
the Lineweight dialog box.
Plot Style
Changes the plot style associated with the selected layers. If you are working with color-dependent
plot styles, (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot change the plot style
associated with a layer. Clicking any plot style displays the Select Plot Style dialog box.
Plot/Don't Plot
Controls whether the selected layers are plotted. If you turn off plotting for a layer, the objects on
that layer are still displayed. Turning off plotting for a layer affects only visible layers in the
drawing (layers that are on and thawed). If a layer is set to plot but is currently frozen or off in the
drawing, GTXImage CAD PLUS does not plot the layer. Turning off plotting for layers containing
reference information such as construction lines can be useful.
Details
Displays an extension of the Layer Properties Manager with alternative access to properties and
additional options.
Name
Displays the selected layer name, which can be edited. The name can include letters, numbers,
blank spaces, and any special character not used by Microsoft® Windows® or GTXImage CAD
PLUS for other purposes.
Color
Displays a list of colors available to apply to the selected layers. To assign a color other than those
displayed in the list, choose Other.
Lineweight
Displays a list of fixed lineweights available to apply to the selected layers including DEFAULT,
the default.
Linetype
Displays linetypes available to apply to the selected layers. To load additional linetypes, choose a
linetype in the list of layers to display the Select Linetype dialog box, and then choose Load.
Plot Style
Displays a list of plot styles available to apply to the selected layers. If you are working with colordependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you cannot change the
plot style associated with a layer. The default plot style is Normal.
Off for Display
Turns selected layers off. Turned-off layers regenerate with the drawing but are not displayed or
plotted. You can turn layers off rather than freeze layers if you frequently change layers from
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 139
visible to invisible. When you turn a layer on that has been turned off, GTXImage CAD PLUS
only redraws the objects on that layer.
Lock for Editing
Locks the selected layers. Locking layers is useful when you want to edit objects that are
associated with particular layers but also want to view objects on other layers. You cannot select or
edit objects on a locked layer, but they are still visible if the layer is on and thawed. You can make
a locked layer current, and you can add objects to it.
Do Not Plot
Prevents the selected layers from being plotted. This option affects only visible layers in the
drawing (layers that are on or thawed). If a layer is set to plot, but is currently frozen or off in the
drawing, the layer is not plotted. It can be useful to turn off plotting for a layer that contains
reference information. You can view the reference information while you work, but you can turn
off plotting for that layer to ensure that the reference information does not appear in the plotted
drawing.
Freeze in All Viewports
Freezes selected layers in all floating viewports. You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN,
and many other operations; improve object selection performance; and reduce regeneration time
for complex drawings. GTXImage CAD PLUS does not display, plot, or regenerate objects on
frozen layers. Objects on frozen layers do not hide objects and are not rendered.
Freeze layers that you want to be invisible for long periods. When you thaw a frozen layer,
GTXImage CAD PLUS regenerates and displays the objects on that layer. If you switch between
visible and invisible states frequently, use the On/Off setting.
Freeze in Active Viewport
Freezes selected layers in the active floating viewport. You can freeze or thaw layers in the active
floating viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports. Frozen layers are invisible;
they are not regenerated or plotted. This feature is useful, for example, if you want to create an
annotation layer that is visible only in a particular viewport. Thawing restores the layer's visibility.
This option is available only when you are working on a layout.
Freeze in New Viewports
Freezes selected layers in new floating viewports. For example, freezing the DIMENSIONS layer
in all new viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that layer in any newly created floating
viewports but does not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in viewports that already exist. If you then
create a viewport that requires dimensions, you can override the default setting by thawing the
layer in that viewport. This option is available only when you are working on a layout.
Named Layer Filters Dialog Box
Filters layers based on criteria you select. Layers that match the filter criteria are displayed in the
Layer Properties Manager.
Filter Name
Specifies a name for the saved filter.
Layer Name
Specifies which layers to filter.
On/Off
Specifies whether filtered layers are on, off, or both.
Freeze/Thaw
Specifies whether filtered layers are frozen, thawed, or both.
Active Viewport
140 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specifies whether filtered layers in the active viewport are frozen, thawed, or both.
New Viewport
Specifies whether filtered layers in new viewports are frozen, thawed, or both.
Lock/Unlock
Specifies whether filtered layers are locked, unlocked, or both.
Plot
Specifies whether filtered layers are set to plot, not plot, or both.
Color
Specifies the layer colors to filter.
Lineweight
Specifies the layer lineweights to filter.
Linetype
Specifies the layer linetypes to filter.
Plot Style
Specifies the layer plot styles to filter.
Add
Saves a filter and adds it to the Filter Name list.
Delete
Deletes a saved filter from the Filter Name list.
Reset
Resets all filters to their default values.
Select Linetype Dialog Box
Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.
Loaded Linetypes
Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing.
Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes , in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing
and add them to the list of linetypes.
Lineweight Dialog Box
Displays fixed lineweight values available in GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Lineweights
Displays the available lineweights that can be applied to a layer. Available lineweights consist of
fixed values that are most commonly used in drawings. Select a lineweight to apply it.
Original
Displays the previous lineweight assigned to the layer. The default lineweight assigned when a
layer is created is DEFAULT (which plots to a default value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm). The value
of DEFAULT is controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable.
New
Displays the new lineweight assigned to the layer.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 141
LAYOUT
Creates a new layout and renames, copies, saves, or deletes an existing layout.
A layout is used to compose or lay out your model drawing for plotting. A layout may consist of a
title block, one or more viewports, and annotations. As you create a layout, you can design floating
viewport configurations to visualize different details in your drawing.
Insert Menu: Layout
Command line: layout
Enter layout option [Copy/Delete/New/Template/Rename/SAve/Set/?] <set>:
Copy
Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new layout assumes the name of the copied
layout with an incremental number in parentheses. The new tab is inserted after the last current
layout.
Enter layout to copy <current>:
Enter layout name for copy <default>:
Delete
Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default.
Enter name of layout to delete <current>:
Wild-card characters are valid when specifying layouts to delete. If you select all layouts to delete,
all the layouts are deleted, and a single layout tab remains named LAYOUT1. The remaining
layout is empty.
The Model tab cannot be deleted. To remove all the geometry from the Model tab, you must select
all geometry and use the ERASE command.
New
Creates a new layout tab. If you enter a period to specify no template file, GTXImage CAD PLUS
creates a new layout from scratch using the default plot device. The layout name is automatically
generated. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is
displayed in which you can select the layout template file.
Enter name of template (or . for none) <default >:
Enter name of new layout <Layout#>:
Template
Creates a new template based on an existing layout in a template (DWT) or drawing (DWG) file.
The layout (and all geometry) from the specified template or drawing file is inserted into the
current drawing. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is
displayed. After the DWT or DWG file is selected, you can select one or more layouts from the
Insert dialog box.
Rename
Renames a layout. The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to rename.
Enter layout to rename <current>:
Enter new layout name <current>:
Layout names must be unique. If you rename a layout with a layout name already in use, the
following error message is displayed: "Layoutname already exists." Layout names can contain up
to 255 characters, and are not case-sensitive. Only the first 32 characters are displayed in the tab.
Save
142 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Saves a layout. All layouts are stored in the drawing template (DWT) file. The last current layout
is used as the default for the layout to save. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1, a standard
file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can specify a file name. The default layout
template directory is specified in the Options dialog box.
Enter layout to save as template <current>:
Enter layout template filename <current>:
You can create new drawings from standard drawing templates, or you can create a new layout in
the current drawing based on a layout in a template or drawing file.
Set
Makes a layout current.
Enter layout to make current <last>:
?—List Layouts
Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing.
LAYOUTWIZARD
Starts the Layout wizard, in which you can designate page and plot settings for a new layout.
With the Layout wizard you can create a new (paper space) layout for plotting. Each wizard page
instructs you to specify different layout and plot settings for the new layout you are creating. Once
the layout is created using the wizard, you can modify layout settings using the Page Setup dialog
box.
Command line: layoutwizard
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Layout wizard dialog box, containing a series of pages that
step you through the process of creating a new layout. You can choose to create a new layout from
scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout. If you use an existing
template, you are presented with a list of existing templates from which to select.
Depending on which plotting device is currently configured, you can select a paper size from those
available. You can select a predefined title block from a list and apply it to the new layout you are
creating. The Preview area displays a preview image of the title block you select.
When you've finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings, you can modify any of the
settings using the Page Setup dialog box from within the new layout.
LEADER
Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature.
A leader line is an object that can be composed of an arrowhead attached to splines or straight line
segments. In some cases, a short horizontal line, called a hook line, dogleg, or landing, connects
text and feature control frames to the leader line.
You can use various dimensioning system variables to format the leader line, such as placing the
text above the hook line with DIMTAD.
LEADER creates complex leader lines that can be made up of more than two line segments.
DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS create simple automatic leader lines with two line segments
for circles and arcs.
Draw menu: Dimension Leader
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 143
Command line: leader
Specify leader start point:
Specify next point:
GTXImage CAD PLUS draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt
for points and options.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>:
point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Specify a
Point Specification
Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt you for points and
options.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>:
point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Specify a
Annotation
Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be single or multiple lines of
text, a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances, or a block.
Enter first line of annotation text or <options>:
Enter text or press ENTER
If you enter text at the Annotation prompt, GTXImage CAD PLUS places the text at the end of the
leader line. GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for additional lines of text until you end the
command by pressing ENTER twice.
If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first, GTXImage CAD PLUS
displays the following prompt:
Enter an annotation option [Tolerance/Copy/Block/None/Mtext] <Mtext>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Tolerance
Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance
dialog boxes (see TOLERANCE).
You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog boxes. After you
specify the geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.
Copy
Copies text, an mtext object, a feature control frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and
connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The display of the hook line depends on the object
copied.
Select an object to copy:
GTXImage CAD PLUS places the object and ends LEADER. The value of the current text gap
(see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system variable) determines where GTXImage CAD PLUS
inserts the text and mtext objects. GTXImage CAD PLUS attaches any blocks or feature control
frames with geometric tolerances to the end of the last vertex of the leader line.
Block
Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the same prompts as the
INSERT command. GTXImage CAD PLUS inserts the block reference at an offset from the end of
the leader line and displays no hook line.
144 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter block name or [?]:
drawing
Enter a block name or enter ? to list all blocks in the
None
Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line.
Mtext
Creates text using the Multiline Text Editor when you specify an insertion point and a second point
for the text boundary.
Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets
(< >). Enclose format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]).
The units settings and the current text style determine how GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
text. GTXImage CAD PLUS vertically centers the multiline text and horizontally aligns it
according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line. GTXImage CAD PLUS
offsets the multiline text from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from Dimension
Line on the Text tab of the New, Modify, or Override Dimension Style dialog box. If the offset
specified is negative, GTXImage CAD PLUS encloses the multiline text in a box as a basic
dimension.
After you specify the text, LEADER ends.
Format
Controls the way GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the leader and whether it has an arrowhead.
Enter leader format option [Spline/STraight/Arrow/None] <Exit>:
option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
Enter an
After each option, GTXImage CAD PLUS returns you to the Specify Next Point prompt.
Spline
Draws the leader line as a spline: a smooth curve passing through a given set of control points. The
vertices of the leader line are the control points, each of equal unit weight. Such a leader line is a
nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) curve.
Straight
Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments.
Arrow
Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line.
None
Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 145
Exit
Exits the Format options.
Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. GTXImage CAD PLUS then redisplays the
previous prompt.
LENGTHEN
Lengthens an object
LENGTHEN changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs. LENGTHEN does not
affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z
axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Lengthen
Command line: lengthen
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]:
enter an option
Select one object or
Object Selection
Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object.
Current length:
<current>,
included angle:
<current>
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]:
an option, or press ENTER to end the command
Select one object, enter
Delta
Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint of the
selected object that is closest to the selection point. Changes the angle of an arc by a specified
increment measured from the desired endpoint of the arc. A positive value extends the arc. A
negative value trims the arc.
Enter delta length or [Angle] <current>:
ENTER
Specify a distance, enter a, or press
Delta Length
Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.
Select an object to change or [Undo]:
Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Object
Sets the length of the selected object.
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by LENGTHEN.
146 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Angle
Changes the angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.
Enter delta angle <current>:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]:
Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Object
Sets the length of the selected arc.
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by LENGTHEN.
Percent
Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Changes the angle of an
arc by a specified percentage of the total angle of the selected arc.
Enter percentage length <current>:
ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]:
Enter a positive nonzero value or press
Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Object
Sets the length of the selected object.
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by LENGTHEN.
Total
Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint.
Sets the total angle of a selected arc by specifying the total included angle.
Specify total length or [Angle] <current>:
nonzero value, enter a, or press ENTER
Specify a distance, enter a positive
Total Length
Sets the length of the selected object.
Select an object to change or [Undo]:
Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Object
Sets the length of the selected object.
Undo
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 147
Reverses the most recent change made by LENGTHEN.
Angle
Sets the angle of the selected arc.
Specify total angle <current>:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select an object to change or [Undo]:
Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Object
Sets the length of the selected object.
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by LENGTHEN.
Dynamic
Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. Changes the length of a selected object based on where its
endpoint is dragged. GTXImage CAD PLUS moves the endpoint to the desired length or angle
while the other end remains fixed.
Select an object to change or [Undo]:
Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
Object
Sets the length of the selected object.
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by LENGTHEN.
LIMITS
Sets and controls the drawing boundaries and grid display.
The drawing limits are two-dimensional points in the world coordinate system that represent a
lower-left limit and an upper-right limit. You cannot impose limits on the Z direction.
When you set drawing limits, GTXImage CAD PLUS restricts the coordinates you can enter to
within the rectangular area. Drawing limits also determine the area of the drawing that can display
grid dots, the area displayed by one of the scale options of ZOOM, and the minimum area
displayed by ZOOM All. When plotting a drawing, you can also specify the drawing limits as the
area to plot.
When paper space is active and either the paper background or paper margins are displayed, you
cannot set the drawing limits with LIMITS. In this case, limits are calculated and set by the layout
according to the selected paper size. You can control the display of the paper background and
paper margins from the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
Format menu: Drawing Limits
Command line: limits (or 'limits for transparent use)
Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF] <current>:
or off, or press ENTER
148 General Command Reference
Specify a point, enter on
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Lower-Left Corner
Specifies the lower-left corner for the drawing limits.
Specify upper right corner <current>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
On
Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, GTXImage CAD PLUS rejects attempts to
enter points outside the drawing limits. Because limits checking tests only points that you enter,
portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the limits.
Off
Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits
checking.
LINE
Creates straight line segments.
You can specify the endpoints of lines using two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D)
coordinates.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Line
Command line: line
Specify first point:
Press ENTER to continue from the last drawn line or arc or specify a point
Continue
Uses the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc if you press ENTER.
If you drew an arc most recently, its endpoint defines the start point of the line and GTXImage
CAD PLUS draws the line tangent to the arc.
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 149
Next Point
Draws a line segment and continues to prompt for points. You can draw a continuing series of line
segments, but each line segment is a separate object. Press ENTER to end the command.
For example, the following command sequence draws a single line segment.
Command:
line
Specify first point:
Specify a point (1)
Specify next point or [Undo]:
Specify a point (2)
Specify next point or [Undo]:
Press ENTER
Close
Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment, forming a closed loop of line
segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two or more segments.
Undo
Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.
Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them.
LINETYPE
Creates, loads, and sets linetypes.
150 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Line characteristics consist of combinations of dashes, dots, and spaces. You can use LINETYPE
to load linetype definitions from a linetype library (LIN) file, make a linetype current, or modify
linetype scales.
Format menu: Linetype
Command line: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the .
If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, LINETYPE displays prompts on the .
Linetype Manager
Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.
Linetype Filters
Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on
whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are referenced by objects.
Invert Filter
Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select. Linetypes that fit the inverse
filter criteria are displayed in the linetype list.
Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes , in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes
from the ICAD.lin file and add them to the linetype list.
Current
Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. The CELTYPE system variable stores the
linetype name.
Delete
Deletes selected linetypes from the drawing. You can only delete unreferenced linetypes.
Referenced linetypes include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and CONTINUOUS.
WARNING! Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a shared
project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype definition remains stored
in the ICAD.lin or ICADiso.lin file and can be reloaded.
Show Details or Hide Details
Controls whether the Details section of the Linetype Manager is displayed.
List of Linetypes
Displays linetypes and their properties. To quickly select all linetypes, right-click the list, and
choose Select All from the shortcut menu.
Linetype
Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a linetype, select it and then click it again and enter
a new name. The linetype name can include up to 255 characters. Linetype names can contain
letters, digits, blank spaces, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore
(_). Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=),
question mark (?), asterisk (*), greater and lesser than symbols (< >), forward and back slashes (/
\), vertical bar (|), quote ("), or back quote (').
Appearance
Displays a sample of selected linetypes.
Description
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 151
Displays descriptions of selected linetypes, which can be edited in the Details area.
Details
Displays an extension of the dialog box with alternative access to properties and additional
settings.
Name
Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited. The linetype name can include up to 255
characters. Linetype names can contain letters, digits, blank spaces, and the special characters
dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_). Linetype names cannot include the special
characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=), question mark (?), asterisk (*), greater and lesser
than symbols (<>), forward and back slashes (/\), vertical bar (|), quote ("), or back quote (').
Description
Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited.
Use Paper Space Units for Scaling
Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when working with multiple
viewports. Use Paper Space Units for Scaling is also controlled by the PSLTSCALE system
variable.
Global Scale Factor
Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. Global Scale Factor is also controlled by the
LTSCALE system variable.
Current Object Scale
Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global scale factor
multiplied by the object's scale factor. Current object scale is also controlled by the CELTSCALE
system variable.
ISO Pen Width
Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values. The resulting scale is the global scale
factor multiplied by the object's scale factor.
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box
Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file. The ICAD.lin file contains
the standard linetypes.
File
Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another LIN file or choose
File to select a different file from the Select Linetype File dialog.
Available Linetypes
Displays the linetypes available to load. Right-click the list and choose Select All from the shortcut
menu to select all available linetypes. Choose Clear All from the shortcut menu to clear current
linetype selections.
LIST
Displays database information for selected objects.
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry List
Command line: list
Select objects:
152 General Command Reference
Use an object selection method
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
GTXImage CAD PLUS lists the object type, object layer, and X,Y,Z position relative to the current
user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model space or paper space.
LIST reports color, linetype, and lineweight information if they are not set to BYLAYER. The
thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. Z coordinate information defines the elevation.
If the extrusion direction of the entry differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS, LIST also
reports the extrusion direction in UCS coordinates.
LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected.
LOAD
Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command
You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; GTXImage CAD PLUS loads it
thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing.
Command line: load
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list.
LOGFILEOFF
Closes the log file opened by LOGFILEON
Command line: logfileoff
GTXImage CAD PLUS stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file. You can
also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the
Open and Save tab to turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab to change the name and location
of the log file. The default log file name is icad.log.
A new log session begins each time you start GTXImage CAD PLUS. Sessions in the log file are
separated by dashed lines. The log file continues to grow with each session and therefore needs
periodic editing or deletion.
LOGFILEON
Writes the text window contents to a file.
Command line: logfileon
GTXImage CAD PLUS records the text window contents in the log file until you exit GTXImage
CAD PLUS or use the LOGFILEOFF command.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Maintain a Log File option
on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab
to change the name and location of the log file. The default log file name is icad.log.
A new log session begins each time you start GTXImage CAD PLUS. Sessions in the log file are
separated by dashed lines. The log file continues to grow with each session and therefore needs
periodic editing or deletion.
LTSCALE
Sets the linetype scale factor.
Use LTSCALE to change the relative length of dash-dot linetypes per drawing unit.
Command line: ltscale (or 'ltscale for transparent use)
Enter new linetype scale factor <current>:
press ENTER
Enter a positive real value or
Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to regenerate.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 153
LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
You can use lineweights to add width to your objects. Lineweights are useful for the graphical
representation of different objects and information, but they should not be used to represent
specific object widths. Lineweight can be applied to all graphical objects except TrueType fonts,
raster images (except the image border), points, and solid fills (2D solids). Lineweight is only
displayed on polylines with a nonzero width value when the polyline has a thickness value greater
than zero and is viewed in any view other than Plan. Objects to which you cannot apply lineweight
plot to a default lineweight of 0 (the thinnest possible line that the printer or plotter can plot).
Objects to which you can apply lineweight default to the lineweight value of BYLAYER, and
layers default to the lineweight value of DEFAULT (which has a default setting of 0.01 inches or
0.25 mm).
Format menu: Lineweight
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Lwt button on the status bar and choose Settings.
Command line: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Lineweight Settings .
If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, LWEIGHT displays prompts on the .
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box
Sets the current lineweight, sets the lineweight units, controls the display and display scale of
lineweights in the Model tab, and sets the DEFAULT lineweight value.
Lineweights
Displays the available lineweight values. Lineweight values consist of standard settings including
BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT
system variable and defaults to a value of 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers have a default
setting of DEFAULT. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the
specified plotting device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space.
Current Lineweight
Displays the current lineweight. To set the current lineweight, select a lineweight from the
lineweight list and choose OK.
Units for Listing
Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can also set Units for
Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable.
Millimeters (mm)
Specifies lineweight values in millimeters.
Inches (in.)
Specifies lineweight values in inches.
154 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Display Lineweight
Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If selected, lineweights are
displayed in model space and paper space. You can also set Display Lineweight by using
LWDISPLAY system variable. GTXImage CAD PLUS regeneration time increases with
lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if GTXImage
CAD PLUS performance slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing.
Default
Controls the value of the DEFAULT setting, which is the default lineweight for layers. The default
setting for DEFAULT is 0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. You can also set Default by using the
LWDEFAULT system variable. If you change the value of DEFAULT to a value that is
represented by a width of more than one pixel, GTXImage CAD PLUS regeneration time may
increase. Any objects with lineweight that are displayed with more than one pixel may slow down
GTXImage CAD PLUS display performance.
Adjust Display Scale
Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab. On the Model tab, lineweights are
displayed in pixels. Lineweights are displayed using a pixel width in proportion to the real-world
unit value at which they plot. If you are using a high-resolution monitor, you can adjust the
lineweight display scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects
the current display scale.
Objects with lineweight that are displayed with a width of more than one pixel may increase
GTXImage CAD PLUS regeneration time. If you want to optimize GTXImage CAD PLUS
performance when working in the Model tab, set the lineweight display scale to the minimum
value or turn off lineweight display altogether.
NOTE: If you save an GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 drawing in the format of an earlier
GTXImage CAD PLUS release, the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the
drawing saved in the earlier format does not display lineweights.
MEASURE
Places point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object.
Draw menu: Point
Measure
Command line: measure
Select object to measure:
Specify length of segment or [Block]:
Specify a distance or enter b
The points or blocks drawn by MEASURE are placed in the Previous selection set, so you can
choose them all by entering p at the next Select Objects prompt. You can use the Node object snap
to draw an object by snapping to the point objects. You can then remove the points by entering
erase previous.
GTXImage CAD PLUS places the markers in the user coordinate system (UCS) of the object being
measured (except for 3D polylines in the current UCS). Markers are always placed on the object,
regardless of the elevation settings.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 155
Length of Segment
Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object, starting at the endpoint
closest to the point you used to select the object.
Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one drawn).
Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle. If
the snap rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of the circle starts to the right of center, on its
circumference.
The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit distances along a polyline, with the
PDMODE system variable set to 35.
Block
Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object.
Enter name of block to insert:
the drawing
Enter the name of a block currently defined in
Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>:
Enter y or n or press ENTER
If you enter y, the block is rotated about its insertion point so that its horizontal lines are aligned
with, and drawn tangent to, the object being measured. If you enter n, the block is always inserted
with a 0 rotation angle.
Specify length of segment:
After you specify the segment length, GTXImage CAD PLUS inserts the block at the specified
interval. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included.
MENULOAD
Loads partial menu files.
MENULOAD adds partial menu files to an existing base menu file, such as ICAD.mnu. Each menu
file (base and partial) has an associated menu group name. From each menu group, you can access
each drop-down menu that resides in its associated menu file.
After you load the partial menus, you can customize the GTXImage CAD PLUS menu bar by
adding or deleting drop-down menus.
Tools menu: Customize Menus
Command line: menuload
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Menu Customization .
156 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Menu Customization Dialog Box
Controls the view of menu groups and menu bars for the GTXImage CAD PLUS window.
Menu Groups Tab
Loads partial menus.
Menu Groups
Lists the currently loaded menu files.
File Name
Specifies the file to load when you choose Load. You can either enter the file name or choose
Browse to display the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
Replace All
Removes all existing menu groups from the Menu Groups list when you load a new file menu.
Unload
Unloads the menu group selected in the Menu Groups list.
Load
Loads the file specified under File Name.
Browse
Displays the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can
select a menu file to load.
Menu Bar Tab
Adds or deletes drop-down menus for a given menu group.
Menu Group
Displays a selected menu file in the Menu Group list.
Menus
Lists all the menus from the menu group specified in the Menu Group list.
Menu Bar
Lists all the menus loaded in the GTXImage CAD PLUS window. The menu at the top of the list
corresponds to the leftmost menu on the menu bar in the GTXImage CAD PLUS window. The
menu at the bottom of the list corresponds to the rightmost drop-down menu.
Insert
Inserts the selected menu in the Menus list above the selected menu in the Menu Bar list. If no
menu is selected in the Menu Bar list, the selected menu in the Menus list is inserted at the top of
the Menu Bar list.
Remove
Removes the selected menu from the Menu Bar list.
Remove All
Removes all menus from the menu bar in the GTXImage CAD PLUS window.
MENUUNLOAD
Unloads partial menu filesUnloads partial menu files.
Command line: menuunload
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 157
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Menu Customization , which has the same options as
MENULOAD. The only difference between the two commands is in the command line prompts.
MINSERT
Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array .
Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded.
Command line: minsert
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name, enter ? to list the currently defined
blocks in the drawing, or enter ~
NOTE: You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the block's
objects during insertion, as you can with INSERT.
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box).
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its
position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or
0. If you enter one of the options, respond to the GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts by specifying a
distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation.
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the blocks.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
X Scale Factor
Sets X and Y scale factors.
Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>:
use the same scale factor
Enter a value or press ENTER to
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire
array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or
specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
Corner
Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite corner.
Specify opposite corner:
Specify a point
Specify rotation angle <0>:
158 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire
array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or
specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
XYZ
Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.
Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>:
the same scale factor
Enter a value or press ENTER to use
If you enter c, you specify a corner point. The specified point and the block insertion point
determine the X and Y scale factors.
Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>:
to use the same scale factor
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>:
use the same scale factor
Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter a value or press ENTER to
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire
array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or
specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the
specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire
array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 159
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or
specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire
array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or
specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire
array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or
specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
160 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire
array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or
specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance
between rows and between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
Rotation
Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option or press ENTER
Enter a
X Scale Factor
Sets the X scale factor.
Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>:
use the same scale factor
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a value or press ENTER to
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
a distance
Enter a value or specify
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
Corner
Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the block insertion point.
Specify opposite corner:
Specify a point
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
a distance
Enter a value or specify
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
XYZ
Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>:
press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a nonzero value, enter c, or
General Command Reference 161
You can determine the X and Y scale factors by entering a scale factor value or by specifying a
corner point. If you specify a corner point, the specified point and the block insertion point
determine the X and Y scale factors for the block.
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>:
use the same scale factor
Enter number of rows (---) <1>:
Enter a value or press ENTER to
Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>:
Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
a distance
Enter a value or specify
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ):
Enter a value or specify a distance
PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into
position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding
options under .
PX
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview X scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding
options in .
PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview Y scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding
options under .
PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview Z scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
162 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding
options under .
PRotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview rotation angle:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those of the corresponding
options under .
MIRROR
Creates a mirror image copy of objects.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Mirror
Command line: mirror
Select objects:
Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish
Specify first point of mirror line:
Specify second point of mirror line:
Specify a point (1)
Specify a point (2)
The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are
reflected. In 3D, this line orients a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user
coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line.
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
Places the reflected image into the drawing and deletes the original objects.
No
Places the reflected image into the drawing and retains the original objects.
Use the MIRRTEXT system variable to control whether text objects are mirrored. The default
setting of MIRRTEXT is on (1), which causes a text object to be mirrored just as any other object
is. When MIRRTEXT is off (0), text is not mirrored.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 163
MLEDIT
Edits multiple parallel lines.
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines. MLEDIT controls intersections between multilines.
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Multiline
Command line: mledit
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Multiline Edit Tools .
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box
Creates and modifies multiline patterns. The dialog box displays sample images in four columns.
The first column governs multilines that cross, the second governs multilines that form a tee, the
third governs corner joints and vertices, and the fourth governs multilines to be cut or joined.
You can click any of the image samples to display a brief description in the lower-left corner of the
dialog box.
Closed Cross
Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. After you select the sample image,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Select first mline:
Select second mline:
Select the foreground multiline
Select the intersecting multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS completes the closed-cross intersection and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Second Mline prompt.
Undo
Undoes the closed-cross intersection. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select First Mline
prompt.
164 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Open Cross
Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. GTXImage CAD PLUS breaks all
elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second multiline. After you
select the sample image, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Select first mline:
Select second mline:
Select a multiline
Select the intersecting multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS completes the open-cross intersection and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Second Mline prompt.
Undo
Undoes the open-cross intersection. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select First Mline
prompt.
Merged Cross
Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in which you select the
multilines is not important. After you select the sample image, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Select first mline:
Select second mline:
Select a multiline
Select the intersecting multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS completes the merged-cross intersection and displays the following
prompt:
Select first mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Second Mline prompt.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 165
Undo
Undoes the merged-cross intersection. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select First Mline
prompt.
Closed Tee
Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. GTXImage CAD PLUS trims or extends
the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. After you select the sample image,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Select first mline:
Select second mline:
Select the multiline to trim
Select the intersecting multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS completes the closed-tee intersection and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo):
Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Second Mline prompt.
Undo
Undoes the closed-tee intersection. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select First Mline prompt.
Open Tee
Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. GTXImage CAD PLUS trims or extends
the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. After you select the sample image,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Select first mline:
Select second mline:
Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select the intersecting multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS completes the open-tee intersection and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo):
Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Second Mline prompt.
166 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Undo
Undoes the open-tee intersection. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select First Mline prompt.
Merged Tee
Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines. GTXImage CAD PLUS trims or extends
the multiline to its intersection with the other multiline. After you select the sample image,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Select first mline:
Select second mline:
Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select the intersecting multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS completes the merged-tee intersection and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo):
Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Second Mline prompt.
Undo
Undoes the merged-tee intersection. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select First Mline
prompt.
Corner Joint
Creates a corner joint between multilines. GTXImage CAD PLUS trims or extends the multilines
to their intersection. After you select the sample image, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Select first mline:
Select second mline:
Select the multiline to trim or extend
Select the second half of the corner
GTXImage CAD PLUS completes the corner joint and displays the following prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo):
Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Second Mline prompt.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 167
Undo
Undoes the corner joint. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select First Mline prompt.
Add Vertex
Adds a vertex to a multiline. After you select the sample image, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
the following prompt:
Select mline:
Select a multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS adds the vertex at the selected point and displays the following prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt again.
Undo
Removes the added vertex. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt.
Delete Vertex
Deletes a vertex from a multiline. After you select the sample image, GTXImage CAD PLUS
displays the following prompt:
Select mline:
Select a multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS deletes the vertex nearest to the selected point and displays the following
prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt again.
168 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Undo
Restores the deleted vertex. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt.
Cut Single
Cuts a selected element of a multiline. After you select the sample image, GTXImage CAD PLUS
displays the following prompt:
Select mline:
Select a multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the selection point on the multiline as the first cut point and displays
the following prompt:
Select second point:
Specify the second cut point on the multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS cuts the element and displays the following prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt again.
Undo
Undoes the cut. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt.
Cut All
Cuts a multiline in two. After you select the sample image, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompt:
Select mline:
Select a multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the selected point on the multiline as the first cut point and displays
the following prompt:
Select second point:
Specify the second cut point on the multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS cuts all elements of the multiline and displays the following prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 169
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt again.
Undo
Undoes the cut. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt.
Weld All
Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. After you select the sample image, GTXImage
CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Select mline:
Select a multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the selected point on the multiline as the start of the weld and
displays the following prompt:
Select second point:
Specify the end of the weld on the multiline
GTXImage CAD PLUS welds the multiline and displays the following prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]:
Select another multiline or enter u
Mline
Edits another multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt again.
Undo
Undoes the weld. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Mline prompt.
MLINE
Creates multiple parallel lines.
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Multiline
Command line: mline
Current settings: Justification = current, Scale = current, Style = current
Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]:
option
Specify a point or enter an
Start Point
Specifies the next vertex of the multiline.
170 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify next point:
Specify next point or [Undo]:
Specify a point or enter u
If you create a multiline with two or more segments, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a prompt
that includes the Close option.
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Next Point
Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to
prompt for points.
Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline. GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the previous
prompt.
Close
Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments.
Justification
Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.
Enter justification type [Top/Zero/Bottom] <current>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Top
Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most positive offset is at the
specified points.
Zero
Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the MLSTYLE Element
Properties offset of 0.0 is at the specified points.
Bottom
Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line with the most negative offset is at the
specified points.
Scale
Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype scale.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 171
Enter mline scale <current>:
Enter a scale or press ENTER
The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition. A scale factor of
2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A negative scale factor flips the order
of the offset line—the smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative
scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0 collapses the multiline
into a single line. For information about the multiline style definition, see MLSTYLE.
Style
Specifies a style to use for the multiline.
Enter mline style name or [?]:
Enter a name or enter ?
Style Name
Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that's defined in a multiline library
(MLN) file you've created.
?—List Styles
Lists the loaded multiline styles.
MLSTYLE
Defines a style for multiple parallel lines.
Multilines comprise up to 16 lines called elements. The multiline style controls the number of
elements and the properties of each element. MLSTYLE also controls the background color and
the end caps of each multiline.
Format menu: Multiline Style
Command line: mlstyle
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Multiline Styles .
Multiline Styles Dialog Box
Defines the style and properties of multilines. The Multiline Styles dialog box displays multiline
style names, makes them current, loads them from a file, and saves, adds, and renames them. You
can also create or edit a description of a style.
Current
Displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a name from the list to make it current. If there
are multiple styles, the name of the current style is selected.
The list of multiline styles can include externally referenced multiline styles—that is, multiline
styles that exist in an externally referenced drawing (xref). GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
externally referenced multiline style names using the same syntax it uses for other externally
dependent nongraphical objects.
NOTE You cannot edit the element and multiline properties of the STANDARD multiline style or
any multiline style that is being used in the drawing. If you try to edit the options in either the
Element Properties or the Multiline Properties, the options are unavailable. To edit an existing
multiline style, you must do so before you draw any multilines in that style.
Name
Names a new multiline style or renames one. The element and multiline properties are unavailable
until you enter a new name and make it current by choosing Add.
172 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file.
GTXImage CAD PLUS saves the definition in the MLN file you specify. If you specify an MLN
file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not
erased. The default file name is ICAD.mln.
To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename. You cannot rename, modify, or delete the
default STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the current style, enter a name and then
choose Save. Multiline style names adhere to the naming conventions for named objects.
Description
Adds a description to a multiline style. Enter up to 255 characters, including spaces.
Load
Displays the Load Multiline Styles , in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN
file.
Save
Saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then choose Save.
Add
Adds the multiline style in Name to the Current list.
Rename
Renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then choose Rename.
Element Properties
Displays the Element Properties .
You cannot edit the element properties of an existing multiline style.
Multiline Properties
Displays the Multiline Properties .
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box
Loads a multiline style from an MLN file. The default file name is ICAD.mln. If ICAD.mln does
not exist, or if it exists but GTXImage CAD PLUS cannot find it, choose File to specify another
file or file location.
File
Displays a standard file selection dialog box in which you can locate and select another library file.
List
Lists the multiline styles available in the current library file. To load another multiline style, select
a style from the list and choose OK.
Element Properties Dialog Box
Sets the properties, such as the number, offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing multiline
elements.
Elements
Displays all the line elements in the current multiline style. Each line element in the style is
defined by its offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color, and linetype. The line elements are
always displayed in descending order of their offsets.
Add
Adds a new line element to the multiline style. Not available until color or linetype has been
selected for a multiline style other than STANDARD.
Delete
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 173
Deletes a line element from the multiline style.
Offset
Specifies the offset for line elements in the multiline style.
Color
Displays and sets the color for line elements in the multiline style. When you choose Color or the
color swatch, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter the
color name or number.
Linetype
Displays and sets the linetype for line elements in the multiline style. When you choose Linetype,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Linetype Properties dialog box, which displays loaded
linetypes. Select a linetype from this dialog box. To load a new linetype, choose Load. GTXImage
CAD PLUS displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box for loading selected linetypes into
the drawing from linetype files.
Multiline Properties Dialog Box
Sets the multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start and end caps and their
angle, and the background color.
Display Joints
Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment. A joint is also known as
a miter.
Caps
Controls the start and end caps of the multiline.
Line
Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline.
174 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Outer Arc
Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline.
Inner Arcs
Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there's an odd number of elements, the center
line is unconnected. For example, if there are six elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and
elements 3 and 4. If there are seven elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3
and 5. Element 4 is left unconnected.
Angle
Specifies the angle of the end caps.
Fill
Controls the background fill of the multiline.
On
Turns background fill on.
Color
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 175
Displays and sets the color of the background fill. When you choose Color or the color swatch,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter a color name or
number.
MODEL
Switches from a layout tab to the Model tab and makes it current.
Command line: model
On the Model tab, you can create two-dimensional or three-dimensional drawings in model space.
The Model tab automatically sets the TILEMODE system variable to 1, and you can create tiled
viewports to display various views of your model drawing. Once you've completed your drawing
model, you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot.
NOTE: The Model tab replaces the TILE toggle on the status bar in earlier releases of
GTXImage CAD PLUS.
MOVE
Displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Move
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Move.
Command line: move
Select objects:
finish
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
Specify base point or displacement:
Specify a base point (1)
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point (2) or press ENTER
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how far the selected objects
are to be moved and in what direction. If you press ENTER at the second point, the first point is
interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point of
Displacement prompt, the first point is interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if
you specify 2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the object moves 2 units in
the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position.
MSPACE
Switches from paper space to a model space viewport.
176 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
GTXImage CAD PLUS operates in either model space or paper space. You use model space (the
Model tab) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimensional drawings or threedimensional models. You use paper space (a layout tab) to create a finished layout of a drawing for
plotting.
When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace on the command line to make the last viewport in
the layout current, and then work in model space in that viewport within the layout. You can
switch to model space by double-clicking a viewport, and you can switch to paper space by
double-clicking an area of paper space.
Command line: mspace
MTEXT
Creates multiline text.
MTEXT creates paragraphs that fit within a nonprinting text boundary. You create the text
boundary to define the width of the paragraph. You can also specify the justification, style, height,
rotation, width, color, spacing, and other text attributes using MTEXT. Each multiline text (mtext)
object is a single object, regardless of the number of lines it contains. The text boundary, although
not plotted, printed, or displayed, remains part of the object's framework.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Text
Multiline Text
Command line: mtext
Specify first corner:
Current text style: current Text height: current Line Spacing: current
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:
After you specify the point for the opposite corner, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the command
line.
If you enter -mtext at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and
displays additional prompts on the comamnd line.
Multiline Text Editor
Creates or modifies mtext objects and imports or pastes text from other files.
Character Tab (Multiline Text Editor)
Controls character formatting for text entered at the keyboard or imported into the Multiline Text
Editor.
To change the current formatting of multiline text (mtext), select the text you want to change. To
select characters, click and drag the pointing device over the characters. To select a word, doubleclick the word. To select a paragraph, triple-click the paragraph. Choose from the following
formatting options:
Font
Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. The font box lists all available
fonts in alphabetical order. TrueType® fonts are listed by font family name. GTXImage CAD
PLUS compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored.
Custom fonts or third-party fonts are substituted with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. A custom
SHX font is available for character formatting overrides only if it is defined for a text style in the
drawing. A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is provided in
the GTXImage CAD 2000/Sample directory.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 177
Height
Sets the character height in drawing units. All heights used in the current session of GTXImage
CAD PLUS are listed in the height box. The default value for the text height is based on the current
style. If the height for the style is 0, the value is based on the value stored in the TEXTSIZE
system variable. An mtext object can contain characters of various heights.
The text displayed in the text editor is scaled in proportion to the value stored in the TEXTSTYLE
system variable. For example, if the current text style has a height of 2 inches and you change the
value to 1 inch, the text in the dialog box changes from its default size of 16 points to 8 points.
Dialog box text is displayed at a minimum size of 4 points and a maximum size of 100 points. Text
that is proportionally larger or smaller may cause word wrapping to be displayed incorrectly.
If some characters are given a height that overrides the height defined for the rest of the mtext
object, the overridden text will scale with the mtext object when you use the SCALE command or
scale with grips.
Bold
Turns on and off bold formatting for new or selected text. This option is available only for
characters using TrueType fonts.
Italic
Turns on and off italic formatting for new or selected text. This option is available only for
characters using TrueType fonts.
Underline
Turns on and off underlining for new or selected text.
Undo
Undoes the last editing action in the Multiline Text Editor. Changes to either text content or text
formatting are undone.
NOTE: You can undo the most recent change made by pressing CTRL+Z.
Stack
Turns on and off stacking for selected text. To create stacked text, use a carat (^), forward slash (/),
or pound sign (#) character between the characters you want stacked. Text to the left of the
character is stacked on top of the text to the right of the character. Select the text to be stacked and
then choose the Stack button.
By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-justified tolerance values. Text that contains
the forward slash converts to center-justified text separated by a horizontal bar the length of the
longer text string. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a diagonal
bar the height of the two text strings. The characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottomright aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar are top-left aligned.
To unstack stacked text, select it and choose the Stack button.
You can edit stacked text and change the stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text in the
Stack Properties . Select the stacked text, right-click, and choose Properties from the shortcut
menu.
Color
Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text.
You can assign text the color associated with the layer it is on (BYLAYER) or the color of the
block it is contained in (BYBLOCK). You can also choose one of the colors in the color list or
choose Other to open the Select Color dialog box.
Symbol
178 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Inserts a listed symbol or nonbreaking space at the cursor position. Symbols can also be inserted
manually.
Choosing Other in the Symbols list displays the Character Map dialog box, which contains the
entire character set for the current font. To insert a character, select it and choose Select. Select all
the characters you want to use and then choose Copy. Right-click in the Multiline Text Editor and
choose Paste from the shortcut menu.
Properties Tab (Multiline Text Editor)
Controls properties that apply to the mtext object.
Style
Applies an existing style to new or selected text. The current style (saved in the TEXTSTYLE
system variable) is applied to new text.
Applying a different style does not override existing character formatting (bold, italic, stacked, and
so on) applied to individual words or characters.
Styles that have backward or upside-down effects are not applied. If a style defined with a vertical
effect is applied to an SHX font, the text is displayed horizontally in the Multiline Text Editor.
Justification
Sets justification and alignment for new or selected text. The current setting (Top Left by default)
is applied to new text. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect
the justification of the line. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right
text boundaries. Text is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom text
boundaries.
Justification is based on the boundary you specify for the text object. For a complete description of
each justification option.
Width
Applies a specified paragraph width to new or selected text. If you select the No Wrap option, the
resulting mtext object appears on a single line. The width of individual characters is not affected
by this option.
Rotation
Sets the rotation angle for new or selected text in the current unit of angle measurement (degrees,
radians, or grads).
Line Spacing Tab (Multiline Text Editor)
Controls line spacing for new or selected mtext.
At Least/Exactly
Specifies how the spacing between lines of text is adjusted. If you select At Least, GTXImage
CAD PLUS automatically adds space between lines based on the height of the largest character in
the line. This is the default setting.
The Exactly option forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the mtext object.
You can use this option to insert text into a table. To ensure that line spacing is identical in
multiple mtext objects, use Exactly and set the spacing increment to the same value in each mtext
object. Using Exactly can cause text in lines above or below lines with large font characters to
overlap the larger characters.
NOTE: Exact spacing is recommended when you use mtext to create a table. Use a smaller
text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 179
Single (1x), etc.
Specifies the line spacing increment for the mtext object. The spacing increment is the vertical
distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text.
You can set the spacing increment to multiples of single-line spacing, or to an absolute value.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. Options include Single (1x), 1.5 lines
(1.5x), and Double (2x). You can select an option from the list or enter a number followed by x to
indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single spacing by choosing or entering
1x, or specify triple spacing by entering 3x.
You can also enter an absolute value. For example, enter 1 for spacing of exactly 1.0 units,
regardless of the text height.
Find/Replace Tab (Multiline Text Editor Dialog Box)
Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text.
Find Box
Defines the text string to search for.
Find Button
Starts a search for the text string in the Find box. To continue the search after finding an instance
of the text, choose Find again.
Replace with Box
Defines the text string to replace the text in the Find box.
Replace Button
Replaces the highlighted text with the text in the Replace box.
Match Case
Finds text only if the case of all characters in the text string is identical to the case of the text in the
Find box. When this option is cleared, GTXImage CAD PLUS finds a match for specified text
strings regardless of case.
Whole Word
Matches the text in the Find box only if it is a single word. Text that is part of another word is
ignored. When this option is cleared, GTXImage CAD PLUS finds a match for text strings whether
they are single words or parts of other words.
AutoCAPS
Converts all newly typed and imported text to uppercase. AutoCAPS does not affect existing text.
To turn AutoCAPS on or off, double-click the AutoCAPS control, located at the bottom of the
Multiline Text Editor.
To change the case of existing text, select the text, right-click, and choose Change Case from the
shortcut menu.
Import Text
Displays the Open dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Select any file that is in ASCII
or RTF format. Imported text retains its original character formatting and style properties, but you
can edit and format it as you would any text in the Multiline Text Editor. The file size for imported
text is limited to 16K.
The Multiline Text Editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER. If AutoCAPS is on,
imported text is capitalized. Import Text is available from all tabs of the Multiline Text Editor.
180 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Shortcut Menu Options
Right-clicking any tab in the Multiline Text Editor displays a shortcut menu. The first five options
on the shortcut menu are basic editing options. The following options are specific to the Multiline
Text Editor.
Change Case
Changes the case of selected text. Options are Uppercase or Lowercase.
Stack
Stacks text if any of the stack characters are contained in the selected text. This option appears on
the shortcut menu only if a stack character is contained in the selected text.
Unstack
Unstacks text if stacked text is selected. This option appears on the shortcut menu only if stacked
text is contained in the selected text.
Remove Formatting
Removes bold, italic, or underline formatting applied to selected text.
Combine Paragraphs
Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph.
Stack Properties Dialog Box
Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text. To open the Stack Properties dialog
box, select the stacked text, right-click, and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options control the stack style,
position, and text size of the stacked text.
Upper
Edits the number on the upper or first half of the fraction.
Lower
Edits the number on the lower or second half of the fraction.
Style
Specifies how text is stacked.
Tolerance
Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number. There is no line
between the numbers.
Fraction (Horizontal)
Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a
horizontal line.
Fraction (Diagonal)
Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a diagonal
line.
NOTE: Previous releases of GTXImage CAD PLUS do not support diagonal fractions. If an
mtext object contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to horizontal fractions
when you save the drawing to earlier releases of GTXImage CAD PLUS. Diagonal fractions
are restored when the drawing is re-opened in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000. If a single mtext
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 181
object contains both horizontal and diagonal fractions, all fractions are converted to diagonal
fractions when the drawing is reopened in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000.
Position
Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All stacked text in an object
uses the same alignment.
NOTE: The Multiline Text Editor does not display stacked text aligned in the alignment
position that you choose. However, when you close the Multiline Text Editor, the stacked text
appears aligned in the drawing.
Top
Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text line.
Center
Centers the fraction vertically to the center of the text line.
Bottom
Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline.
Text Size
Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current text style (from 25 to
125 percent). Default text size is 70 percent.
Defaults
Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to the current stacked
text.
AutoStack Button
Displays the Autostack Properties . AutoStack only stacks numeric characters immediately before
and after the carat, slash, and pound characters. To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that
includes spaces, select the text and choose the Stack button.
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box
Turns on automatic stacking, removes leading blank spaces before stacked text, specifies whether
the slash character converts to diagonal or horizontal fractions, and suppresses display of the
Autostack Properties dialog box.
Enable AutoStacking
Stacks fractions automatically as you type. Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before
and after the carat, slash, or pound character. For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a
nonnumeric character or space, the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal fraction.
Remove Leading Blank
Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction.
Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction
Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction when AutoStack is on.
Convert It to a Horizontal Fraction
182 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction when AutoStack is on.
NOTE: Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound character is always converted to a
diagonal fraction, and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance format.
Don't Show This Dialog Again; Always Use These Settings
Suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box. The current property settings are used
for all stacked text. When this option is cleared, the AutoStack Properties dialog box is
automatically displayed if you type two numbers separated by a slash, carat, or pound sign
followed by a space or nonnumeric character.
MTEXT Command Line
If you enter -MTEXT at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and
displays additional prompts on the command line.
Current text style: current Text height: current
Specify first corner:
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:
The MTEXT current value line lists the current style name and text height.
The command line prompts you to draw a boundary box to define the width of the text object.
Specify a point or enter a coordinate for the first corner. To use the command line to specify text
characteristics, enter an option before specifying the opposite corner of the text boundary box.
If you enter an option on the command line, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you for the
information pertaining to the option. When you finish, GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the
Specify Opposite Corner prompt where you can enter another option, or specify the opposite
corner.
A rectangle is displayed as you move the pointing device to specify the opposite corner. This
rectangle indicates the size of the box and the direction of text flow.
Height
Specifies the height of the font used for mtext characters.
Specify height <current >:
The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style or the height stored in the
TEXTSIZE system variable. Character height is calculated in drawing units. Changing the height
updates the value stored in TEXTSIZE.
Justify
Specifies the text justification and flow for text in the boundary rectangle. The current justification
(Top Left, by default) is applied to new text. The text is justified within the rectangle based on one
of nine justification points on the rectangle. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to
the left and right text boundaries. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text
and affect the justification of the line. Text flow is from the middle, the top, or the bottom of the
paragraph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries.
Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] <TL>:
Justify
options
Option
Meaning
TL
Top Left
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 183
TC
Top Center
TR
Top Right
ML
Middle Left
MC
Middle Center
MR
Middle Right
BL
Bottom Left
BC
Bottom Center
BR
Bottom Right
The following illustrations show each justification option.
Line Spacing
Specifies line spacing for the mtext object.
Enter line spacing type [At least/Exactly] <current>:
At Least
Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line. When At
Least is selected, lines of text with taller characters have added space between lines.
Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>:
Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the
bottom of the next line of text. You can set the spacing increment to a multiple of single-line
spacing, or to an absolute value.
184 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter the spacing increment
as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single
spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x.
Exactly
Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the mtext object. Spacing is based on
the text height of the object or text style.
Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>:
Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the
bottom of the next line of text. You can set the spacing increment to a multiple of single-line
spacing, or to an absolute value.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter the spacing increment
as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single
spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x.
NOTE: Exact spacing is recommended when you use mtext to create a table. Use a smaller
text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.
Specify rotation angle <current>:
Specify a point or enter a value
The rotation angle is determined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most
recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point.
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite corner of the
text boundary.
Style
Specifies the text style to use for mtext.
Enter style name or [?] <current>:
Style Name
Specifies a text style name. Text styles can be defined and saved using the STYLE command.
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite corner of the
text boundary.
?—List Styles
Lists text style names and characteristics. GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the previous prompt
until you specify the opposite corner of the text boundary.
Width
Specifies the width of the mtext object.
Specify width:
Specify a point or enter a value
If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as the distance between the
start point and the specified point. If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the
mtext object is displayed on a single line. Word wrap appears in the text object just as it does in the
Multiline Text Editor for drawings created in Release 14 or later, but it may not match text objects
in drawings created in Release 13 and earlier.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 185
Creating Special Unicode Characters
When using MTEXT, you can create special characters, including the degree symbol, the
PLUS/minus tolerance symbol, and the diameter symbol, by entering the following Unicode
character strings:
\U+00B0Degree symbol (°)
\U+00B1Tolerance symbol (±)
\U+2205 Diameter symbol (Ø)
The diameter symbol, when selected from the symbol menu, is displayed as %%c instead of the
actual diameter symbol in the Multiline Text Editor.
See appendix G, "Using Unicode Fonts."
Using Control Codes and Special Characters
Besides using Unicode characters for entering special characters at the Command prompt, you can
also specify a special character by including a control code in the text string. Use a pair of percent
signs to introduce each control sequence.
These control codes display the following characters in your drawing if the characters are present
in the current font:
%%d
Degrees symbol (°)
{bmc acw0588u.bmp}
%%p
PLUS/minus tolerance symbol (±)
%%c
Circle diameter dimensioning symbol (Ø)
Note that the circle diameter dimensioning symbol appears as %%c in the Multiline Text Editor
but converts to the special character in your drawing.
Using the Euro Symbol
You can use the Euro symbol with .shx fonts and their TrueType equivalent fonts shipped with
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000. If your keyboard does not contain a Euro symbol, hold down
CTRL+ALT and enter 0128 on the numeric keypad.
MULTIPLE
Repeats the next command until canceled.
Command line: multiple
Enter command name to repeat:
GTXImage CAD PLUS repeats the command you enter until you press ESC. Because MULTIPLE
repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified each time. MULTIPLE does
not repeat commands that display dialog boxes. You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the
AutoLISP command function.
MVIEW
Creates floating viewports and turns on existing floating viewports.
When TILEMODE is set to 0 (off), MVIEW controls the number and layout of paper space
viewports. When TILEMODE is set to 1 (on), use VPORTS to create tiled viewports.
View menu: Viewports {bmct proc.bmp} 1 Viewport, 2 Viewports, 3 Viewports, 4 Viewports
186 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Command line: mview
Specify corner of viewport or
[ON/OFF/Fit/Hideplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/Restore/2/3/4] <Fit>:
option or specify a point
Enter an
In a paper space layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but you can see only up to
64 viewports. Use the On and Off options to control the display of viewports.
Corner of Viewport
Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.
Specify opposite corner:
On
Turns on a viewport, making its objects visible.
Select objects:
Select one or more viewports
Off
Turns off a viewport. When a viewport is off, its objects are not displayed, and you cannot make
that viewport current.
Select objects:
Select one or more viewports
Fit
Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the paper margins. When the paper
background is turned off, the viewport fills the display.
Hideplot
Removes hidden lines in a viewport during plotting from paper space.
Hidden line removal for plotting [ON/OFF]:
Select objects:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter on or off
Select one or more viewports
General Command Reference 187
Lock
Locks the selected viewport.
Viewport View Locking [ON/OFF]:
Select objects:
Enter on or off
Select one or more viewports
Object
Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a viewport. The polyline
you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can
contain an arc as well as line segments.
Select object to clip viewport:
Select an object
Polygonal
Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. The prompts are similar to those
displayed when you specify a polygonal clip boundary for external references (xrefs), but you can
specify arcs when you create a polygonal viewport boundary.
Specify start point:
Specify a point
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]:
option
Specify a point or enter an
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport.
[Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo/Endpoint of arc]
<Endpoint>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Close
Closes the boundary. If you press ENTER after specifying at least three points, GTXImage CAD
PLUS automatically closes the boundary.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the
previous segment is an arc, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the new line segment tangent to that arc
segment.
Undo
Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal viewport.
Restore
Converts viewport configurations saved using VPORTS into individual viewport objects in paper
space.
Enter viewport configuration name or [?] <*ACTIVE>:
name, or press ENTER
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>:
Enter ?,, enter a
Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner
Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; GTXImage CAD PLUS fits
the viewports into the selected area.
Fit
Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
2
Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal size.
188 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical] <Vertical>:
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>:
Enter h or press ENTER
Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner
Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; GTXImage CAD PLUS fits
the viewports into the selected area.
Fit
Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
3
Divides the specified area into three viewports.
Enter viewport arrangement
[Horizontal/Vertical/Above/Below/Left/<Right>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The other options create
one large viewport of half the available area and two smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and
Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed.
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner
Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; GTXImage CAD PLUS fits
the viewports into the selected area.
Fit
Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
4
Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size.
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner
Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; GTXImage CAD PLUS fits
the viewports into the selected area.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 189
Fit
Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
NEW
Creates a new drawing file.
Standard toolbar:
File menu: New
Command line: new
GTXImage CAD PLUS® displays the Create New Drawing . If you turned off the display of this
dialog box, GTXImage CAD PLUS automatically creates a new drawing using the measurement
system (English or metric) specified by the MEASUREINIT system variable.
Create New Drawing Dialog Box
Defines the settings for a new GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing. There are three main methods that
you can use to create a new drawing. (The first option, Open a Drawing, is not available from the
NEW command. To open an existing drawing, use OPEN.) Choose one of the buttons at the top of
the dialog box.
Start from Scratch
Starts a new drawing using default settings defined in either the ICAD.dwt or ICADiso.dwt
template, depending on the measurement system you've chosen. GTXImage CAD PLUS stores this
setting in the MEASUREINIT system variable. You can change the measurement system for a
given drawing by using the MEASUREMENT system variable. You cannot modify the ICAD.dwt
or ICADiso.dwt templates. To start a new drawing based on a customized template.
English
Starts a new drawing based on the Imperial measurement system. The drawing is based on the
ICAD.dwt template, and the default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 12 × 9 inches.
Metric
Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system. The drawing is based on the
ICADiso.dwt template, and the default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 429 × 297
millimeters.
Use a Template
Creates a new drawing using the settings defined in a template drawing you select. Template
drawings store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers, dimension
styles, and views. Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing files by the .dwt file
extension. They are normally kept in the template directory.
Several template drawings are included with GTXImage CAD PLUS. You can make additional
template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file names to .dwt.
190 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Select a Template
Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing template file location, which is specified in
the Options dialog box. Choose a file to use as a starting point for your new drawing. A preview
image of the selected file is displayed to the right.
Browse
Displays the Select a Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can
access template files that are not available in the Select a Template list.
Use a Wizard
Creates a new drawing using the settings that you specify in the Quick Setup or Advanced Setup
wizard.
Quick Setup
Displays the Quick Setup , in which you can specify the units and area for your new drawing.
Advanced Setup
Displays the Advanced Setup , in which you can specify the units, angle, angle measure, angle
direction, and area for your new drawing.
Show Startup Dialog
Provides the option to display or not display the Create New Drawing dialog box and the Startup
dialog box. If the option is cleared, the Create New Drawing dialog box is not displayed when you
use the NEW command, and the Startup dialog box isn't displayed when you start a new
GTXImage CAD PLUS session. When you turn off the display of these dialog boxes, GTXImage
CAD PLUS automatically creates a new drawing based on your last Start from Scratch selection
(English or metric). You can turn these dialog boxes on again from the System tab of the Options
dialog box.
Quick Setup Wizard
Defines the units and area of your drawing.
The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back
and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the
new drawing with the settings you specified.
Units
Indicates the format in which you enter and in which GTXImage CAD PLUS displays coordinates
and measurements. Several formats are available in GTXImage CAD PLUS. Two of them,
Engineering and Architectural, have a specific base unit (inches) assigned to them. You can select
from other measurement styles that can represent any convenient unit of measurement.
NOTE: You control the precision displayed in all measurements in the Advanced Setup
wizard. You can later change the units format and precision for the drawing with the UNITS
command.
Decimal
Displays measurements in decimal notation.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 191
Engineering
Displays measurements in feet and decimal inches.
Architectural
Displays measurements in feet, inches, and fractional inches.
Fractional
Displays measurements in mixed-number (integer and fractional) notation.
Scientific
Displays measurements in scientific notation (numbers expressed in the form of the product of a
decimal number between 0 and 10 and a power of 10).
Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. This setting limits the
area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on. You can change the drawing
area with the LIMITS command.
Advanced Setup Wizard
Defines the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area of your new drawing.
The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure, Angle Direction,
and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next to navigate between pages; choose
Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you
specified.
You can later change units, angle, angle measure, and angle direction using the UNITS command,
and you can change area using the LIMITS command.
Units
Indicates the unit format and precision. The unit format is the format in which you enter and in
which GTXImage CAD PLUS displays coordinates and measurements. The Units page of the
Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats. See for more information.
The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional size for displaying
linear measurements.
Angle
Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
angles.
Decimal Degrees
Displays partial degrees as decimals.
Deg/Min/Sec
Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds.
Grads
Displays angles as grads.
Radians
Displays angles as radians.
Surveyor
Displays angles in surveyor's units.
Angle Measure
Indicates the direction of the 0 angle for the entry of angles. When you enter an angle value in
GTXImage CAD PLUS, GTXImage CAD PLUS measures the angle either counterclockwise or
clockwise from the compass direction that you select on this page. You control the
counterclockwise/clockwise direction on the Angle Direction page.
East
192 General Command Reference
Specifies the compass direction east as the 0 angle.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
North
Specifies the compass direction north as the 0 angle.
West
Specifies the compass direction west as the 0 angle.
South
Specifies the compass direction south as the 0 angle.
Other
Specifies a direction other than east, north, west, or south.
Enter a specific compass angle to treat as the 0 angle.
Angle Direction
Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which GTXImage CAD PLUS
displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise.
Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. This setting limits the
area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on.
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves.
OFFSET creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or through a specified
point.
{bmc acw1338u.bmp }
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Offset
Command line: offset
Specify offset distance or [Through] <current>:
press ENTER
Specify a distance, enter t, or
Offset Distance
Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Select object to offset or <exit>:
command
Select one object or press ENTER to end the
Specify point on side to offset?:
you want to offset
Specify a point (1) on the side of the object
General Command Reference 193
GTXImage CAD PLUS® repeats the two prompts so that you can create multiple offset objects.
To end the command, press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt.
Through
Creates an object passing through a specified point.
Select object to offset or <exit>:
command
Specify through point:
object to pass
Select one object or press ENTER to end the
Specify a point (1) through which you want the offset
GTXImage CAD PLUS repeats the two prompts so that you can create multiple offset objects. To
end the command, press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt.
OOPS
Restores erased objects.
Command line: oops
OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command.
You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK to restore the objects that are erased when a
block is created. You cannot use OOPS to restore objects on a layer that has been removed with
the PURGE command.
OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file.
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Open
Command line: open
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select File dialog box.
NOTE: If the drawing you open contains macros, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
GTXImage CAD PLUS Macro Virus Protection dialog box.
194 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Select File Dialog Box
Displays, locates, and opens GTXImage CAD PLUS files. All GTXImage CAD PLUS files in
drawing format (including earlier versions) appear in the list of files. You can also select files from
different directories and drives, or open a file from an Internet location.
Most of the options in this dialog box are based on the standard file selection dialog box.
Following are descriptions of the additional options provided by the Select File dialog box.
Open As Read-Only
Opens a drawing in read-only mode. You can edit the drawing and save it with another drawing
name using SAVEAS.
Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file (if a bitmap was saved with the drawing). The Preview area
is blank if you do not select a file. Use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option on the Open
and Save tab in the Options to save a bitmap with a drawing file.
Partial Open
Displays the Partial Open . You can open and load a portion of a drawing, including geometry on a
specific view or layer. This option can only be used with GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 drawings.
Select Initial View
Displays the specified view when you open the drawing, if the drawing contains more than one
named view.
Find File
Displays the Browse/Search . You can browse through preview images of DWG files or search for
files both locally and on a network.
Locate
Uses the GTXImage CAD PLUS search path to locate the file specified in File Name. You set the
search path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
Browse/Search Dialog Box
Displays preview images of drawings, opens drawings, and searches for files. Use the browser to
search for files across multiple directories on a single drive or on multiple drives.
Browse Tab
Displays small bitmap images of drawings in the specified directory. You can sort the preview
images by file type.
File Name
Displays the name of the currently selected drawing.
Directories
Displays the names of the directories on the current drive.
Drives
Displays the names of the available drives.
List Files of Type
Specifies file types to browse for, including drawing files (DWG),
drawing interchange format files (DXF), and drawing template files (DWT).
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 195
Size
Changes the size of the preview images. The options are Small, Medium, and Large.
Network
Displays the Map Network Drive dialog box (a Windows system window) for
connecting to networked drives.
Search Tab
Searches for files by specified type or date of creation.
Files
Displays a list of files that meet the search criteria.
Search Pattern
Specifies a pattern to search for in file name, based on file type. For example, you can enter floor*
to search for all files that begin with "floor" and are of the file type specified.
This option handles wild-card characters in the following way: if the search string does not contain
path separators, the search attempts to match either the full path or just the file name portion of the
path.
File Types
Specifies the type of file through which GTXImage CAD PLUS searches.
Date Filter
Controls whether GTXImage CAD PLUS searches forward or backward from the specified time or
date.
Time
Specifies the time from which GTXImage CAD PLUS searches forward or
backward.
Date
Specifies the date from which GTXImage CAD PLUS searches. The specified date must be 1/1/80
or later.
Search Location
Specifies which drives and paths GTXImage CAD PLUS searches.
Drive
Lists all currently attached drives.
All Drives
Lists all local hard drives, including removable and network drives.
Path
Lists directories.
Open
Opens the selected file.
Search
Begins searching for the named file according to the search location information. Changes to Stop
Search once the search begins.
196 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Partial Open Dialog Box
Displays the drawing views and layers available for specifying what geometry to load into the
selected drawing. When working with large drawing files, you can select the minimal amount of
geometry you need to load when opening a drawing.
When a drawing is partially open, all GTXImage CAD PLUS named objects, as well as the
specified geometry, are loaded into the file. GTXImage CAD PLUS named objects include blocks,
dimension styles, layers, layouts, linetypes, text styles, UCSs, views, and viewport configurations.
View Geometry to Load
Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing. Only model space views are
available for loading. You can load paper space geometry by loading the layer that the paper space
geometry is drawn on.
View Name
Displays the currently selected view. Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the
layers is loaded into the drawing.
View List
Displays all the model space views available in the selected drawing file. When a view is selected,
GTXImage CAD PLUS loads only the geometry in the selected view. The default view is Extents.
Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing. You
can load geometry from only one view.
You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a partially open
drawing.
NOTE: When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the file along
with the specified geometry from the selected view. All views are still available in the
partially open drawing, but only geometry from the view specified to load is displayed in the
drawing.
Layer Geometry to Load
Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file. The geometry on selected layers is
loaded into the drawing, including both model space and paper space geometry. The default loads
no layer geometry into the drawing, but you can load geometry from one or more layers. If you
specify to load no layer geometry into the drawing, no geometry from the selected view is loaded
either because no layer geometry in that view or in the entire drawing is loaded. Xref-dependent
layers are displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list only if the selected drawing was last saved
with the VISRETAIN system variable set to 1. Any layers created in the xref since the xref was
loaded into the selected drawing are not displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list.
You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a partially open
drawing.
NOTE: When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the file along
with the specified geometry from the selected layers. All layers are still available in the
partially open drawing, but only geometry from the layers specified to load appears in the
drawing.
Layer Name
Displays the layer names in the selected drawing.
Load Geometry Loads geometry from the layer when the drawing is opened.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 197
Load All
Loads geometry from all layers when the drawing is opened. You can
right-click and use the shortcut menu to load geometry from all layers
into the drawing.
Clear All
Loads no geometry from any layer when the drawing is opened. No
geometry at all is loaded, including geometry specified to load from a
view. You can right-click and use the shortcut menu to load no
geometry into the drawing.
Index Status
Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index. INDEXCTL controls
whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the drawing file.
Use Spatial Index
Controls whether a spatial index is used when partially opening a drawing. GTXImage CAD PLUS
uses a spatial index to locate what portion of the drawing is read; this minimizes the time required
to open the drawing. If a drawing does not contain a spatial index, this option is unavailable.
Spatial Index
Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial index. A spatial index organizes
objects based on their location in space. When partially opening a drawing, GTXImage CAD
PLUS uses a spatial index to locate what portion of the drawing is read; this minimizes the time
required to open the drawing.
Layer Index
Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a layer index. A layer index is a list showing
the objects that are on each layer. When partially opening a drawing, GTXImage CAD PLUS uses
a layer index to locate what portion of the drawing is read; this minimizes the time required to
open the drawing.
Unload All Xrefs on Open
Loads all external references when opening the drawing. Selecting this option enhances the
opening process. If you partially open a drawing that contains a bound xref, only the portion of the
xref that is loaded (defined by the selected view) is bound to the partially open drawing.
Open
Opens the drawing file, loading only combined geometry from the selected view and layers.
OPTIONS
Customizes the GTXImage CAD PLUS settings.
Tools menu: Options
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no commands active and no
objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and choose Options.
Command line: options
Displays the Options .
Options Dialog
Customizes many GTXImage CAD PLUS settings by using options on the nine tabs of the Options
dialog box.
Current Profile
198 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Displays the name of the current profile above the tabs. To set the current profile, create a new
profile, or edit an existing profile, use the Profiles tab. The CPROFILE system variable (read-only)
stores the current profile.
Current Drawing
Displays the name of the current drawing above the tabs. A drawing file icon is displayed next to
any option saved with the drawing. An option saved with the drawing affects only the current
drawing. An option saved in the registry affects all drawings in an GTXImage CAD PLUS session.
Options that are saved in the registry (and are not displayed with a drawing file icon) are saved in
the current profile.
Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Specifies the directories in which GTXImage CAD PLUS searches for support, driver, menu, and
other files. Also specifies optional, user-defined settings such as which dictionary to use for
checking spelling.
List of Folders and Files
Displays a list of the directories and files used by GTXImage CAD PLUS. To specify a location
for a directory or file, double-click the directory or file from the list. Choose Browse and use the
Browse for Folder dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) to locate the directory or file
you want to use.
Support File Search Path
Specifies the directories in which GTXImage CAD PLUS searches for support files. In addition to
the files required to run GTXImage CAD PLUS, you can include files for fonts, menus, drawings
to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns in the support file search path. Environment variables can
also be included in the support file search path. See "Using Environment Variables" in chapter 4,
"Configuring and Optimizing GTXImage CAD PLUS," in the Installation Guide.
Working Support File Search Path
Specifies the active directories in which GTXImage CAD PLUS searches for support files specific
to your system. The working support file list displays valid paths from the Support File Search
Path that exist within the current directory structure and network paths. Any valid environment
variables listed in the Support File Search Path are displayed as expanded directories in the
Working Support File Search Path. Environment variables that contain other environment variables
are displayed with only the parent variable as an expanded directory.
Device Driver File Search Path
Specifies where GTXImage CAD PLUS looks for device drivers for the video display, pointing
devices, printers, and plotters.
Project Files Search Path
Specifies a project name for the drawing. The project name corresponds to a search path for
external reference (xref) files associated with the project. You can create any number of project
names with associated directories, but each drawing can have only one project name.
PROJECTNAME system variable also stores the project name.
Menu, Help, and Miscellaneous File Names
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 199
Menu File
Specifies the location of the GTXImage CAD PLUS menu file.
Help File
Specifies the location of the GTXImage CAD PLUS Help file.
Default Internet Location
Specifies the default Internet location used by both the Connect to Internet option on the Help
menu, and the Launch Browser button on the Standard toolbar.
Configuration File
Specifies the location of the configuration file used to store hardware device driver information.
This value is read-only and can only be changed by using the /c command line switch. See "Using
Command Line Switches" in chapter 4, "Configuring and Optimizing GTXImage CAD PLUS," in
the Installation Guide.
License Server
Provides a current list of client license servers available to the network license manager program
for network administrators. This value is stored in the ICADSERVER environment variable. If
ICADSERVER is not defined, "None" is displayed. This value is read-only, and cannot be
modified in the Options dialog box. GTXImage CAD PLUS reads the value for ICADSERVER
only at the beginning of each session. If GTXImage CAD PLUS changes the value, it is not
displayed until GTXImage CAD PLUS is closed and reopened.
Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names
Specifies a number of optional settings.
Text Editor Application
Specifies the text editor application to use for editing mtext objects.
You can also set the Text Editor Application option by using the MTEXTED system variable.
Main Dictionary
Specifies the dictionary to use for checking spelling. You can select American English, one of two
options for British English, or one of two options for French.
You can also set the Main Dictionary option by using the DCTMAIN system variable.
Custom Dictionary File
Specifies a custom dictionary to use (if you have one).
You can also set the Custom Dictionary File option by using the DCTCUST system variable.
Alternate Font File
Specifies the location of the font file to use if GTXImage CAD PLUS cannot locate the original
font and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file. If you choose Browse,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Alternate Font , from which you can choose an available font.
You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT system variable.
Font Mapping File
Specifies the location of the file that defines how GTXImage CAD PLUS should convert fonts it
cannot locate.
You can also set the location of Font Mapping File by using the FONTMAP system variable.
Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names
Specifies settings related to plotting.
200 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Plot File Name For Legacy Plotting Scripts
Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with earlier
versions of GTXImage CAD PLUS. The default name is the drawing name PLUS .plt file name.
The default name used with GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 drawings is the drawing name-layout
name PLUS the .plt file name extension. Some plotting device drivers, however, use a different
plot file extension name. This option only affects the default plot file name used for plotting scripts
created with earlier versions of GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Print Spool Executable
Specifies the application to use for print spooling. You can enter the executable file name as well
as any command line arguments you want to use. For example, you can enter myspool.bat %s to
spool plot files to myspool.bat and have a unique plot file name automatically generated.
PostScript Prolog Section Name
Assigns a name for a customized prolog section in the ICAD.psf file. The prolog section is used
with PSOUT to customize the resulting output.
This value is also controlled by the PSPROLOG system variable.
Printer Support File Path
Specifies search path settings for printer support files.
Print Spooler File Location
Specifies the path for print spool files. GTXImage CAD PLUS writes the plot to this location.
Printer Configuration Search Path
Specifies the path for printer configuration files (PC3 files).
Printer Description File Search Path
Specifies the path for files with a .pmp file extension, or printer description files.
Plot Style Table Search Path
Specifies the path for files with an .stb or .ctb extension, or plot style table files (both named plot
style tables and color-dependent plot style tables).
Search Path for ObjectARX Applications
Specifies the path for ObjectARX
application files. You can enter multiple URL addresses
under this option. (Multiple URLs should be separated by a semi-colon.) GTXImage CAD PLUS
searches the specified URLs when an associated ObjectARX application cannot be located. Only
URL addresses can be entered in this option.
Automatic Save File Location
Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatic Save on the Open and Save tab.
This value is also controlled by the SAVEFILEPATH system variable.
Data Sources Location
Specifies the path for database source files. Changes to this setting do not take effect until you
close and restart GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Drawing Template File Location
Specifies the path for the template files used by the setup wizards.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 201
Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File on the Open and
Save tab.
This value is also controlled by the LOGFILEPATH system variable.
Temporary Drawing File Location
Specifies the location GTXImage CAD PLUS uses to store temporary files. GTXImage CAD
PLUS creates temporary files on disk and then deletes them when you exit the program. If you plan
to run GTXImage CAD PLUS from a write-protected directory (for example, if you are working
on a network or opening files from a CD), specify an alternate location for your temporary files.
The directory you specify must not be write-protected.
The TEMPPREFIX variable (read-only) also stores the current location of temporary drawing
files.
Temporary External Reference File Location
Specifies the location of external reference (xref) files. This location is used for the copy of the
xref when you select Enabled with Copy in the Demand Load Xrefs list on the Open and Save tab.
This value is also controlled by the XLOADPATH system variable.
Texture Maps Search Path
Specifies the directories GTXImage CAD PLUS searches for rendering texture maps.
Browse
Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box, depending on what you selected in the
List of Folders and Files.
Add
Adds a search path for the selected directory.
Remove
Removes the selected search path or file.
Move Up
Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path.
Move Down
Moves the selected search path below the following search path.
Set Current
Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current.
Display Tab
Customizes the GTXImage CAD PLUS display.
202 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Window Elements
Control display settings specific to the GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing environment.
Display Scroll Bars in Drawing Window
Specifies whether to display scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the drawing area.
Display Screen Menu
Specifies whether to display the screen menu on the right side of the drawing area. The GTXImage
CAD PLUS screen menu font is controlled by the Windows system font settings. If you use the
GTXImage CAD PLUS screen menu, you should set the Windows system font setting to a font and
font size that fits the screen menu size restrictions.
Text Lines in Command Line Window
Specifies the number of lines of text you want to display in the docked command line window. The
default value is 3. The valid range is 1 to 100.
Colors
Use this dialog box to specify colors of elements in the GTXImage CAD PLUS window.
Fonts
Displays the Command Line Window Font . Use this dialog box to specify the font for the
command line text.
Layout Elements
Control options for existing and new layouts. A layout is a paper space environment in which you
can set up drawings for plotting.
Display Layout and Model Tabs
Specifies whether to display the Layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the drawing area.
Display Margins
Specifies whether margins are displayed in a layout. Margins appear as dashed lines. Objects
drawn outside of the margins are clipped or omitted when the drawing is plotted.
Display Paper Background
Specifies whether a representation of the specified paper size is displayed in a layout. The paper
size and plot scale determine the size of the paper background.
Display Paper Shadow: Specifies whether a shadow is displayed around the paper
background in a layout.
Show Page Setup Dialog for New Layouts
Specifies whether the Page Setup dialog box is displayed when you create a new layout. Use this
dialog box to set options related to paper and plot settings.
Create Viewport in New Layouts
Specifies whether a viewport is created when you create a new layout.
Crosshair Size
Controls the size of the crosshairs. The valid range is from 1 to 100 percent of the total screen. At
100 percent the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When the size is decreased to 99 percent or
below, the crosshairs have a finite size, and the ends of the crosshairs are visible when situated at
the edge of the drawing area. The default size is 5 percent.
You can also set Crosshair Size by using the CURSORSIZE system variable.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 203
Display Resolution
Controls the quality of the display of objects. If you set high values to improve display quality, the
impact on performance is significant.
Arc and Circle Smoothness
Controls the smoothness of circles, arcs, and ellipses. A higher number produces smoother objects,
but GTXImage CAD PLUS requires more time to regenerate, pan, and zoom the objects. You can
improve performance by setting Arc and Circle Smoothness to a low value such as 100 for
drawing, and increasing the value for rendering. The valid range is 1 to 20,000. The default setting
is 100. This setting is saved in the drawing.
Arc and circle smoothness is also controlled by the VIEWRES command.
Segments in a Polyline Curve
Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each polyline curve. The higher the number,
the greater the performance impact. Set this option to a low value such as 4 to optimize
performance for drawing. Values range from -32767 to 32767. The default setting is 8. This setting
is saved in the drawing.
Segments per Polyline Curve is also controlled by the SPLINESEGS system variable.
Rendered Object Smoothness
Controls the smoothness of shaded and rendered curved solids. GTXImage CAD PLUS multiplies
the value you enter for Rendered Object Smoothness by the value you enter for Arc and Circle
Smoothness to determine how to display solid objects. To improve performance, set Rendered
Object Smoothness to 1 or less when drawing. A higher number decreases display performance
and increases rendering time. The valid range is 0.01 to 10. The default setting is 0.5. This setting
is saved in the drawing.
The value is also controlled by the FACETRES system variable.
Contour Lines per Surface
Sets the number of contour lines per surface on objects. A higher number decreases display
performance and increases rendering time. The valid range is 0 to 2047. The default setting is 4.
This setting is saved in the drawing.
The value is also controlled by the ISOLINES system variable.
Display Performance
Controls display settings that affect GTXImage CAD PLUS performance.
Pan and Zoom with Raster Image
Controls the display of raster images when you use Realtime PAN and ZOOM. Clear this option to
optimize performance. If dragging display is turned on and you select Pan and Zoom with Raster
Image, a copy of the image moves with the cursor as you reposition the original image. Dragging
display controls whether an outline of the object is displayed while you drag it. The DRAGMODE
system variable controls dragging display.
Pan and Zoom with Raster Image is also controlled by the RTDISPLAY system variable.
Highlight Raster Image Frame Only
Controls the display of raster images during selection. If this option is selected, only the frame of
the raster image is highlighted when selected. Select this option to optimize performance.
Highlight Raster Image Frame Only is also controlled by the IMAGEHLT system variable.
True Color Raster Images and Rendering
Controls whether raster images or renderings are displayed at optimum quality. Selecting True
Color Raster Images and Rendering enables GTXImage CAD PLUS to display images in True
204 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Color or at the highest display quality available for the system. Increasing the amount of colors in
the system display setting significantly decreases display performance. Clearing this option or
reducing the color palette in the system display settings optimizes performance.
Apply Solid Fill
Controls whether solid fills in objects are displayed. Objects with solid fill include multilines,
traces, solids, all hatches (including solid-fill), and wide polylines. You must regenerate the
drawing by using REGEN or REGENALL for this setting to take effect. This setting is saved in the
drawing. Clear this option to optimize performance.
Apply Solid Fill is also controlled by the FILLMODE system variable.
Show Text Boundary Frame Only
Displays the frames for text objects instead of displaying the text objects. After you select or clear
this option, you must use REGEN to update the display. This setting is saved in the drawing. Select
this option to optimize performance.
Show Text Boundary Frame Only is also controlled by the QTEXTMODE system variable.
Show Silhouettes in Wireframe
Controls whether silhouette curves of 3D solid objects are displayed as wireframes. This option
also controls whether mesh is drawn or suppressed when a 3D solid object is hidden. This setting is
saved in the drawing. Clear this option to optimize performance.
The value is also controlled by the DISPSILH system variable.
Reference Fading Intensity
Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during in-place reference editing. With in-place
reference editing you can edit a block reference or external reference from within the current
drawing. While references are being edited in-place, objects that are not being edited are displayed
at a lesser intensity than objects that can be edited. The valid range is 0 through 90 percent. The
default setting is 50 percentReference Fading Intensity is also controlled by the XFADECTL
system variable.
Open and Save Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Controls options that relate to opening and saving files in GTXImage CAD PLUS.
File Save
Controls settings related to saving a file in GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Save As
Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file with SAVE and SAVEAS. The file format
selected for this option is the default format that all drawings are saved as when you use SAVE or
SAVEAS. Saving an GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 file to any DXF format affects performance.
Set the Save As option to GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 Drawing to optimize performance while
saving.
Save a Thumbnail Preview Image
Specifies whether an image of the drawing should be displayed in the Preview area of the Select
File dialog box. Save Thumbnail Preview Image is also controlled by the RASTERPREVIEW
system variable.
Incremental Save Percentage
Sets the percentage of potential wasted space in a drawing file. When the specified percentage is
reached, GTXImage CAD PLUS performs a full save instead of an incremental save. Full saves
eliminate wasted space. If you set Incremental Save Percentage to 0, every save is a full save.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 205
Although incremental saves increase the size of your drawing, do not set a very low value. Low
values degrade performance because GTXImage CAD PLUS performs time-consuming full saves
more often. For optimum performance, set the value to 50. If hard disk space becomes an issue, set
the value to 25. If you set the value to 20 or less, performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS
commands slows significantly.
Incremental Save Percentage is also controlled by the ISAVEPERCENT system variable.
File Safety Precautions
Assist in avoiding data loss and in detecting errors.
Automatic Save
Saves your drawing automatically at the interval you specify. You can specify the location of all
Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable. SAVEFILE (read-only) stores the
name of the Autosave file.
Minutes Between Saves: Specifies how often the drawing is saved when using Automatic
Save. The value is stored in SAVETIME.
Create Backup Copy with Each Save
Specifies whether a backup copy of a drawing is created when you save the drawing. To specify
the location of the backup file, use the Files tab in the Options dialog box. The location of the
current temporary file search path is also stored in TEMPPREFIX (read-only). The ISAVEBAK
system variable controls whether a backup copy of the drawing is created.
For information about using backup files, see "Recovering Data from Backup Files" in appendix
A, "Uninstalling GTXImage CAD PLUS Files and Maintaining Your System," in the Installation
Guide.
Full-Time CRC Validation
Specifies whether a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) should be performed each time an object is
read into the drawing. CRC is an error-checking mechanism. If your drawings are being corrupted
and you suspect a hardware problem or GTXImage CAD PLUS error, turn this option on.
Maintain a Log File
Specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. To specify the location
and name of the log file, use the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
You can also set the log file location by using LOGFILEMODE. LOGFILENAME(read-only)
stores the log file name of the current drawing.
File Extension for Temporary Files
Specifies a unique extension for the current user to identify temporary files in a network
environment. The default extension is .ac$.
External References (Xrefs)
Controls the settings that relate to editing and loading external references.
Demand Load Xrefs
Controls demand loading of xrefs. Demand loading improves performance by loading only the
parts of the referenced drawing needed to regenerate the current drawing. External Reference File
Demand Load is also controlled by the XLOADCTL system variable.
Disabled: Turns off demand loading.
Enabled: Turns on demand loading and improves GTXImage CAD PLUS performance.
Select the Enabled setting to enhance the loading process when working with clipped xrefs
206 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
that contain a spatial or layer index. When this option is selected, other users cannot edit
the file while it is being referenced.
Enabled with Copy: Turns on demand loading but uses a copy of the referenced drawing.
Other users can edit the original drawing.
Retain Changes to Xref Layers
Saves changes to layer properties and states for xref-dependent layers. When the drawing is
reloaded, the properties currently assigned to xref-dependent layers are retained. This setting is
saved in the drawing.
You can also set Retain Changes to Xref Layers by using the VISRETAIN system variable.
Allow Other Users to Refedit Current Drawing
Determines whether the current drawing file can be edited in-place if it is being referenced by
another drawing or multiple drawings. This setting is saved in the drawing.
You can also set Allow Other Users to Refedit Current Drawing by using the XEDIT system
variable.
ObjectARX Applications
Controls settings that relate to GTXImage CAD PLUS Runtime Extension applications and proxy
graphics.
Demand Load ObjectARX Apps
Specifies if and when GTXImage CAD PLUS demand-loads a third-party application if a drawing
contains custom objects created in that application. Demand-loading is also controlled by the
DEMANDLOAD system variable.
Disable Load on Demand: Turns off demand-loading.
Custom Object Detect: Demand-loads the source application when you open a drawing
that contains custom objects. This setting does not demand-load the application when
you invoke one of the application's commands.
Command Invoke: Demand-loads the source application when you invoke one of the
application's commands. This setting does not demand-load the application when you
open a drawing that contains custom objects.
Object Detect and Command Invoke: Demand-loads the source application when you
open a drawing that contains custom objects or when you invoke one of the
application's commands.
Proxy Images for Custom Objects
Controls the display of custom objects in drawings.
Do Not Show Proxy Graphics: Specifies not to display custom objects in drawings.
Show Proxy Graphics: Specifies to display custom objects in drawings.
Show Proxy Bounding Box: Specifies to show a box in place of custom objects in
drawings.
Show Proxy Information Dialog Box
Specifies whether GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a warning when you open a drawing that
contains custom objects. This option is also controlled by the PROXYNOTICE system variable.
Plotting Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Controls options related to plotting.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 207
Default Plot Settings for New Drawings
Controls default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in an earlier release of
GTXImage CAD PLUS that have never been saved in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 format.
Use As Default Output Device
Sets the default output device for new drawings and for drawings created in an earlier release of
GTXImage CAD PLUS that have never been saved in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 format. The
list displays any plotter configuration files (PC3) found in the plotter configuration search path and
any system printers that are configured in the system.
Use Last Successful Plot Settings
Sets the plotting settings according to the settings of the last successful plot. This option
determines default plot settings the same way that earlier releases of GTXImage CAD PLUS do.
Add or Configure Plotters
Displays the Autodesk Plotter Manager (a Windows system window). You can add or configure a
plotter with the Autodesk Plotter Manager. See "Setting Up Plotters and Printers" in chapter 6,
"Configuring Plotters and Printers," in the Installation Guide.
General Plot Options
Controls options that relate to the general plotting environment including paper size settings,
system printer alert behavior, and OLE objects in an GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing.
Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible
Uses the paper size specified on the Layout Settings tab in the Page Setup dialog box as long as the
selected output device can plot to this paper size. If the selected output device cannot plot to this
paper size, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a warning message and uses the paper size specified
either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings if the output device is
a system printer. You can also set Keep the Layout Paper Size If Possible by setting
PAPERUPDATE to 0.
Use the Plot Device Paper Size
Uses the paper size specified either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or in the default system
settings if the output device is a system printer. You can also set Use the Plot Device Paper Size by
setting PAPERUPDATE to 1.
System Printer Spool Alert
Determines whether to alert you if the plotted drawing is spooled through a system printer because
of an input or output port conflict.
Always Alert (And Log Errors): Alerts you and always logs an error when the plotted
drawing spools through a system printer.
Alert First Time Only (And Log Errors): Alerts you once and always logs an error when
the plotted drawing spools through a system printer.
Never Alert (And Log First Error): Never alerts you and logs only the first error when
the plotted drawing spools through a system printer.
Never Alert (Do Not Log Errors): Never alerts you or logs an error when the plotted
drawing spools through a system printer.
OLE Plot Quality
Determines the quality of plotted OLE objects. The values are Line Art, Text, Graphics,
Photograph, and High Quality Photograph. You can also control this option by using the
OLEQUALITY system variable.
Use OLE Application When Plotting OLE Objects
208 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Launches the application used to create the OLE object when plotting an GTXImage CAD PLUS
drawing with OLE objects. You can use this option if you want to optimize the quality of plotted
OLE objects. This setting is saved in the drawing. You can also control this option by using the
OLESTARTUP system variable.
Default Plot Style Behavior
Controls options related to plot style behavior in all drawings. Changing the default plot style
behavior using the Options dialog box does not affect the current drawing. A plot style is a
collection of property settings defined in a plot style table and applied when the drawing is plotted.
The default setting is Use Color Dependent Plot Styles. The plot style list on the Object Properties
toolbar is disabled by default. You enable the list after you select the Use Named Plot Styles option
and open a new drawing. You can also control Default Plot Style Behavior by using the
PSTYLEPOLICY system variable.
Use Color Dependent Plot Styles
Uses color-dependent plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created in earlier versions of
GTXImage CAD PLUS. Color-dependent plot styles use the numbers from the GTXImage CAD
PLUS color index to create a plot style table with a .ctb file extension. Each color is defined by a
name or number ranging from 1 to 255. You can assign each color number to a different pen on a
pen plotter to achieve different property settings in the plotted drawing. If this option is selected, a
plot style is created for each color setting. You can also control Use Color Dependent Plot Styles
by setting the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 1.
If you want to change the default plot style behavior for a drawing, select this option or Use
Named Plot Styles before opening or creating a drawing. Changing the default plot style behavior
using the Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings created in an earlier release of
GTXImage CAD PLUS that have never been saved in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 format. This
setting is saved with the drawing. Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent Plot Styles
as the default, you can change the default to Use Named Plot Styles with a migration utility.
However, once a drawing is saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the default, you cannot change it
to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles.
Use Named Plot Styles
Uses named plot styles in both new drawings and drawings created in earlier versions of
GTXImage CAD PLUS. GTXImage CAD PLUS plots the drawing according to the property
settings you specify in the plot style definition. The plot style is defined in the plot style table
attached to the layout or viewport. Named plot style tables are files with the file extension .stb.
You can also control Use Named Plot Styles by setting the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 0.
If you want to change the default plot style behavior for a drawing, select this option or Use Color
Dependent Plot Styles before opening or creating a drawing. Changing the default plot style
behavior using the Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings created in an earlier
release of GTXImage CAD PLUS that have never been saved in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
format. This setting is saved with the drawing. Once a drawing is saved with Use Color Dependent
Plot Styles as the default, you can change the default to Use Named Plot Styles with a migration
utility. However, once a drawing is saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the default, you cannot
change it to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles.
Default Plot Style Table
Specifies the default plot style table to attach to new drawings. A plot style table is a file with a
.ctb or an .stb extension that includes and defines plot styles. If you are using color-dependent plot
styles, this option lists all color dependent plot style tables found in the search path as well as the
value of None. If you are using named plot styles, this option lists all named plot styles tables.
Default Plot Style for Layer 0
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 209
Sets the default plot style for Layer 0 for new drawings or drawings created with earlier releases of
GTXImage CAD PLUS that have never been saved in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 format. The
list displays the default value Normal and alphabetically displays any plot styles defined in the
currently loaded plot style table.
You can also control the Default Plot Style for Layer 0 using the DEFLPLSTYLE system variable.
Default Plot Style for Objects
Sets the default plot style that is assigned when you create new objects. The list displays a
BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and Normal style, and it alphabetically displays any plot styles defined
in the currently loaded plot style table.
You can also control the Default Plot Style for Objects using the DEFPLSTYLE system variable.
DEFPLSTYLE is drawing specific and controls the default plot style for objects in new drawings
or in drawings created in earlier releases of GTXImage CAD PLUS that have never been saved in
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 format.
Add or Edit Plot Style Tables
Displays the Autodesk Plot Style Table Manager (a Windows Explorer window). You can create
or edit plot style tables with the Autodesk Plot Style Table Manager.
Scripts
Controls options related to scripts in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 drawings.
Plot with Legacy Command Line Prompts
Controls whether legacy plot scripts are enabled in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 drawings. Legacy
plot scripts are those created for releases earlier than GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000. You can also
control the Plot with Legacy Command Line Prompts using the PLOTLEGACY system variable.
System Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Controls GTXImage CAD PLUS system settings.
Current Pointing Device
Controls options that relate to the pointing device.
Current Pointing Device
Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers.
Current System Pointing Device: Sets the system pointing device as current.
Wintab Compatible Digitizer: Sets the Wintab Compatible Digitizer as current.
Accept Input From
Specifies whether GTXImage CAD PLUS accepts input from both a mouse and a digitizer or
ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set.
General Options
Controls general options that relate to system settings.
Single-Drawing Compatibility Mode
Specifies whether a Single-drawing Interface (SDI) or a Multi-drawing Interface (MDI) is enabled
in GTXImage CAD PLUS. If you select this option, GTXImage CAD PLUS opens only one
drawing at a time. If you clear this option, GTXImage CAD PLUS can open multiple drawings at
once.
You can also control Single-drawing Compatibility Mode by using the SDI system variable.
210 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Show Startup Dialog
Controls whether the Startup dialog box is displayed when you start GTXImage CAD PLUS. You
can use the Startup dialog box to open an existing drawing, or specify settings for the new drawing
by using a template, a wizard, or starting from scratch.
Display OLE Properties Dialog
Controls the display of the OLE Properties dialog box when inserting OLE objects into GTXImage
CAD PLUS drawings.
Show All Warning Messages
Displays all dialog boxes that include a Don't Display This Warning Again option. All dialog
boxes with warning options are displayed regardless of previous settings specific to each dialog
box. This option affects the display of the Paper Update Alert dialog box.
Beep on Error in User Input
Specifies whether GTXImage CAD PLUS should sound an alarm beep when it detects an invalid
entry.
Allow Long Symbol Names
Determines whether long symbol names are enabled. Named objects can include up to 255
characters. Names can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used
by Windows and GTXImage CAD PLUS for other purposes. When this option is enabled, long
names can be used for layers, dimension styles, blocks, linetypes, text styles, layouts, UCS names,
views, and viewport configurations. This option is saved in the drawing.
You can also control Allow Long Symbol Names by using the EXTNAMES system variable.
dbConnect Options
Controls options that relate to database connectivity.
Store Links Index in Drawing File
Stores the database index within the GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing file. Select this option to
enhance performance during Link Select operations. Clear this option to decrease drawing file size
and to enhance the opening process for drawings with database information.
Open Tables in Read-Only Mode
Specifies whether to open database tables in Read-only mode within the GTXImage CAD PLUS
drawing file.
User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Controls options that optimize the way you work in GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Windows Standard Behavior
Specifies whether Windows behavior is applied when working in GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Windows Standard Accelerator Keys
Follows Windows standards in interpreting keyboard accelerators (for example, CTRL+C equals
COPYCLIP). If this option is cleared, GTXImage CAD PLUS interprets keyboard accelerators by
using GTXImage CAD PLUS standards rather than Windows standards (for example, CTRL+C
equals Cancel, CTRL+V toggles among the viewports).
Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area
Controls whether right-clicking in the drawing area displays a shortcut menu or issues ENTER.
Right-Click Customization
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 211
Displays the Right-Click Customization dialog. You can also set Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area
and the Customize settings by using the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.
Hyperlink
Controls settings that relate to the display properties of hyperlinks.
Display Hyperlink Cursor and Shortcut Menu
Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu. The hyperlink cursor appears
alongside the crosshairs whenever the pointing device moves over an object that contains a
hyperlink. The hyperlink shortcut menu provides additional options when you right-click over a
hyperlink in a drawing. If this option is cleared, the hyperlink cursor is never displayed and the
Hyperlink option on shortcut menus is not available (if shortcut menus are enabled).
Display Hyperlink Tooltip
Controls the display of the Hyperlink tooltip. If this option is selected, a hyperlink tooltip is
displayed when the pointing device moves over an object that contains a hyperlink. Display
Hyperlink Cursor and Shortcut Menu must be selected to enable this option.
Priority for Coordinate Data Entry
Controls how GTXImage CAD PLUS responds to input of coordinate data. These options are also
controlled by using the OSNAPCOORD system variable.
Running Object Snap
Uses running object snaps instead of specific coordinates at all times. You can also set
OSNAPCOORD to 0 to enable Running Object Snap.
Keyboard Entry
Uses the specific coordinates that you enter at all times and overrides running object snaps. You
can also set OSNAPCOORD to 1 to enable Keyboard Entry.
Keyboard Entry Except Scripts
Uses the specific coordinates that you enter rather than running object snaps, except in scripts. You
can also set OSNAPCOORD to 2 to enable Keyboard Entry Except Scripts.
Object Sorting Methods
Determines the sort order of objects. You can also set this option by using the SORTENTS system
variable.
Object Selection
Controls how objects are sorted during selection. If this option is selected, GTXImage CAD PLUS
sorts objects available for selection from those created first to those created last. If two overlapping
objects are chosen during object selection, GTXImage CAD PLUS recognizes the newest object as
the selected object. If this option is cleared, object selection is determined by a random sort order.
This setting is saved in the drawing. You can also set this option by using the SORTENTS system
variable.
Object Snap
Controls how objects are sorted when using Object Snap. If this option is selected, GTXImage
CAD PLUS sorts objects available for selection from those created first to those created last. If two
overlapping objects are chosen when using Object Snap, GTXImage CAD PLUS recognizes the
newest object as the object to snap to. If this option is cleared, Object Snap is determined by a
random sort order. This setting is saved in the drawing. You can also set this option by using the
SORTENTS system variable.
Redraws
212 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Controls how objects are sorted when using REDRAW or REDRAWALL. If this option is
selected, GTXImage CAD PLUS sorts and redraws objects in the drawing from those created first
to those created last. If this option is cleared, the redrawing of objects is determined by a random
sort order. This setting is saved in the drawing. You can also set this option by using the
SORTENTS system variable.
Regens
Controls how objects are sorted when using REGEN or REGENALL. If this option is selected,
GTXImage CAD PLUS sorts and regenerates objects in the drawing from those created first to
those created last. If this option is cleared, the regeneration of objects is determined by a random
sort order. This setting is saved in the drawing. You can also set this option by using the
SORTENTS system variable.
Plotting
Controls how objects are sorted during plotting. If this option is selected, GTXImage CAD PLUS
sorts and plots objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last. If this option is
cleared, the plotting of objects is determined by a random sort order. This setting is saved in the
drawing. You can also set this option by using the SORTENTS system variable.
PostScript Output
Controls how objects are sorted during PostScript output. If this option is selected, GTXImage
CAD PLUS sorts and exports objects in the drawing from those created first to those created last. If
this option is cleared, the exporting of objects is determined by a random sort order. This setting is
saved in the drawing. You can also set this option by using the SORTENTS system variable.
Lineweight Settings
Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box. Use this dialog box to set lineweight options, such as
display properties and defaults, and also to set the current lineweight.
Drafting Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Specifies a number of general editing options.
AutoSnap Settings
Controls settings that relate to object snaps. With object snaps you can locate exact points and
planes including endpoints, midpoints, centers, nodes, quadrants, intersections, insertion points,
and perpendicular and tangent planes.
Marker
Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker. The marker is a geometric symbol that displays
the object snap location when the crosshairs move over a snap point on an object. You can also
enable the Marker by setting AUTOSNAP to 1.
Magnet
Sets the AutoSnap magnet on or off. The magnet is an automatic movement of the crosshairs that
locks the crosshairs onto the nearest snap point. You can also enable the Magnet by setting
AUTOSNAP to 4.
Display AutoSnap Tooltip
Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip. The tooltip is a text flag that describes which part of
the object you are snapping to. You can turn object snaps on and off from the Object Snap tab in
the Drafting Settings dialog box. You can also enable the Display AutoSnap tooltip option by
setting AUTOSNAP to 2.
Display AutoSnap Aperture Box
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 213
Controls the display of the AutoSnap aperture box. The aperture box is a box that appears inside
the crosshairs when you select an object snap. You can also set the Display AutoSnap Aperture
Box by using the APBOX system variable.
AutoSnap Marker Color
Specifies the color of the AutoSnap marker.
AutoSnap Marker Size
Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker. Values range from 1 to 20 pixels.
AutoTrack Settings
Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack
behavior.
Display Polar Tracking Vector
Sets Polar Tracking behavior on or off. With polar tracking, you can draw lines along angles
relative to a drawing command From or To point. Polar angles are 90-degree divisors, such as 45,
30, and 15 degrees.
You can disable Display Polar Tracking Vector by setting TRACKPATH to 2.
Display Full-Screen Tracking Vector
Controls the display of tracking vectors. Tracking vectors are construction lines from which you
can draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects. If selected,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays alignment vectors as infinite lines.
You can disable Display Full-screen Tracking Vector by setting TRACKPATH to 1.
Display AutoTrack Tooltip
Controls the display of the AutoTrack tooltip. The tooltip is a text flag that displays the tracking
coordinates. You can turn Object Snap Tracking on and off on the Object Snap tab in the Drafting
Settings dialog box.
You can also enable the AutoTrack tooltip by setting AUTOSNAP to 32.
Alignment Point Acquisition
Controls the method of displaying alignment vectors in a drawing.
Automatic
Displays tracking vectors automatically when the aperture moves over an object snap.
Shift to Acquire
Displays tracking vectors when pressing SHIFT and moving the aperture over an object snap.
Aperture Size
Sets the display size for the aperture. The aperture is the selection tool used when a drawing
command is invoked. Values range from 1 to 50 pixels. You can also set Aperture Size by using
the APERTURE system variable.
Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Selection Modes
Controls settings that relate to object selection methods.
Noun/Verb Selection
214 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Selects an object before invoking a command. The invoked command affects the previously
selected object or objects. You can also set this option by using the PICKFIRST system variable.
You can use many editing and inquiry commands with noun/verb selection, including
ALIGN
DVIEW
PROPERTIES
ARRAY
ERASE
ROTATE
BLOCK
EXPLODE
SCALE
CHANGE
LIST
STRETCH
CHPROP
MIRROR
WBLOCK
COPY
MOVE
Use Shift to Add to Selection
Adds or removes an object to the selection set when you press SHIFT and select an object. To
clear a selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of the drawing. You can also
set this option by using the PICKADD system variable.
Press and Drag
Draws a selection window by selecting a point and dragging the pointing device to a second point.
If this option is not selected, you can draw a selection window by selecting two separate points
with the pointing device. You can also set this option by using the PICKDRAG system variable.
Implied Windowing
Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you select a point outside an object.
Drawing the selection window from left to right selects objects inside the window's boundaries.
Drawing from right to left selects objects within and crossing the window's boundaries. You can
also set this option by using the PICKAUTO system variable.
Object Grouping
Selects an entire Object Group when you select one object in that group. With GROUP you can
create and name a set of objects for selection. You can also set this option by setting the
PICKSTYLE system variable to 1.
Associative Hatch
Determines which objects are selected when you select an associative hatch. If this option is
selected, boundary objects are also selected when you select an associative hatch. You can also set
this option by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 2.
Pickbox Size
Controls the display size of the GTXImage CAD PLUS pickbox. The default size is set to 3 pixels;
values range from 0 to 20. You can also set the Pickbox Size by using the PICKBOX system
variable. If you use the command line to set Pickbox Size, values range from 0 to 32767.
Grips
Controls the settings that relate to grips. Grips are small squares displayed on an object after it has
been selected.
Enable Grips
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 215
Controls whether grips are displayed on an object after you select it. You can edit an object with
grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu. Enabling grips in a drawing significantly
affects performance. Clear this option to optimize performance.
You can also set Enable Grips by using the GRIPS system variable.
Enable Grips within Blocks
Controls how grips are displayed on a block after you select it. If this option is selected,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays all grips for each object in the block. If this option is cleared,
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays one grip located at the insertion point of the block. You can edit
an object with grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu.
You can also set Enable Grips within Blocks by using the GRIPBLOCK system variable.
Unselected Grip Color
Determines the color of an unselected grip. If you choose Other from the color list, GTXImage
CAD PLUS displays the Select Color dialog box. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays an unselected
grip as the outline of a small square. You can also set Unselected Grip Color by using the
GRIPCOLOR system variable.
Selected Grip Color
Determines the color of a selected grip. If you choose Other from the color list, GTXImage CAD
PLUS displays the Select Color dialog box. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a selected grip as a
filled small square. You can also set Selected Grip Color by using the GRIPHOT system variable.
Grip Size
Controls the display size of GTXImage CAD PLUS grips. The default size is set to 3 pixels; values
range from 1 to 20. You can also set the Grip Size by using the GRIPSIZE system variable. If you
use the command line to set Grip Size, values range from 0 to 255.
Profiles Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Controls the use of profiles. A profile is a configuration you define.
Available Profiles
Displays a list of the available profiles. To set the current profile, select a profile and choose Set
Current.
Set Current
Makes the selected profile the current profile.
216 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Add to List
Displays the Add Profile to save the selected profile under a different name.
Rename
Displays the Change Profile for changing the name and description of the selected profile. Use
Rename when you want to rename a profile but keep its current settings.
Delete
Deletes the selected profile (unless it is the current profile).
Export
Exports a profile as a file with an .arg extension so the file can be shared with other users. You can
import the file on the same computer or a different computer.
Import
Imports a profile (a file with an .arg extension) created by using the Export option.
Reset
Resets the values in the selected profile to the system default settings.
Alternate Font Dialog Box
Specifies the location of the font file to use if GTXImage CAD PLUS cannot locate the original
font and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file. You can also set the location of
Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT system variable.
If you do not specify an alternate font through the Options dialog box or the FONTALT system
variable, when you open a drawing containing fonts that GTXImage CAD PLUS cannot locate, a
similar dialog box displays from which you specify a font to use for each missing font.
Font Name
Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all GTXImage CAD PLUS
compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the GTXImage CAD PLUS Fonts directory. When you select a
name from the list, GTXImage CAD PLUS reads the file for the specified font.
Font Style
Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. If the missing font is a Big Font,
this option changes to Big Font and lists all available Asian-language Big Font files.
Color Options Dialog Box
Sets the display color of GTXImage CAD PLUS window elements.
Model Tab
Displays the current settings for GTXImage CAD PLUS window elements in model space. To
change the color of a Model tab window element, click the specific element in the Model Tab area
or select it from the Window Element list, and then select a color from the Color list. The window
title bar and menu bar colors are controlled by the Windows system settings.
Layout Tabs
Displays the current settings for GTXImage CAD PLUS window elements in layouts. To change
the color of a layout tab window element, click the specific element in the Layout Tabs area or
select it from the Window Element list, and then select a color from the Color list. The window
title bar and menu bar colors are controlled by the Windows system settings.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 217
Window Element
Lists the GTXImage CAD PLUS window elements. If you select a new color for a window
element, the new setting is displayed in the Model Tab or Layout Tabs preview image.
Model Tab Background
Specifies the GTXImage CAD PLUS window color in model space. The default color setting is
Black.
Model Tab Pointer
Specifies the GTXImage CAD PLUS crosshairs color in model space. The default color setting is
White.
Layout Tabs Background (Paper)
Specifies the GTXImage CAD PLUS window color in all layouts. This option is dependent on the
Display Paper Background option on the Display tab in the Options dialog box. The paper
background is a representation of the specified paper size in a layout. If Display Paper Background
is selected, the window color surrounding the paper background is displayed as gray. If Display
Paper Background is cleared, the entire GTXImage CAD PLUS window assumes the Layout Tabs
Background (Paper) color setting.
Layout Tabs Pointer
Specifies the GTXImage CAD PLUS crosshairs color in a layout. The default setting is the
Windows standard window text color.
AutoTracking Vector Color
Specifies the color for GTXImage CAD PLUS AutoTracking vectors. Tracking vectors are
construction lines that enable you to draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to
other objects. The default setting is White.
Command Line Background
Specifies the background color of the GTXImage CAD PLUS command line window. The default
color setting is the Windows standard window color.
Command Line Text
Specifies the text color of the GTXImage CAD PLUS command line window. The default setting
is the Windows standard window text color.
Color
Lists the available color settings to apply to the list of GTXImage CAD PLUS window elements.
Default All
Sets all GTXImage CAD PLUS window elements back to the default color settings.
Default One Element
Sets the selected GTXImage CAD PLUS window element back to the default color setting.
Command Line Window Font Dialog Box
Sets the font displayed in the GTXImage CAD PLUS command line window. The GTXImage
CAD PLUS screen menu font is controlled by the Windows system font settings. (If you use the
GTXImage CAD PLUS screen menu, you should set the Windows system font setting to a font and
font size that fits the screen menu size restrictions.)
Font
218 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Lists the system fonts available for selection.
Font Style
Lists the styles available to apply to the current font.
Size
Lists the font sizes available for the current font.
Right-Click Customization Dialog Box
Controls whether right-clicking in the drawing area displays a shortcut menu or is the same as
pressing ENTER. If you are accustomed to using the right-click method for ENTER while a
command is active, you might prefer to disable Command shortcut menus from this dialog box.
You can also control shortcut menus by using the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.
Default Mode
The options in this section determine what happens when you right-click in the drawing area while
in Default mode, which means that no objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
Repeat Last Command
Disables the Default shortcut menu. As a result, right-clicking in the drawing area when no objects
are selected and no commands are in progress is the same as pressing ENTER, which repeats the
last issued command.
Shortcut Menu
Enables the Default shortcut menu.
Edit Mode
The options in this section determine what happens when you right-click in the drawing area while
in Edit mode, which means that one or more objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
Repeat Last Command
Disables the Edit shortcut menu. As a result, right-clicking in the drawing area when one or more
objects are selected and no commands are in progress is the same as pressing ENTER, which
repeats the last issued command.
Shortcut Menu
Enables the Edit shortcut menu.
Command Mode
The options in this section determine what happens when you right-click in the drawing area while
in Command mode, which means that a command is currently in progress.
ENTER
Disables the Command shortcut menu. As a result, right-clicking in the drawing area when a
command is in progress is the same as pressing ENTER.
Shortcut Menu: Always Enabled
Enables the Command shortcut menu.
Shortcut Menu: Enabled When Command Options Are Present
Enables the Command shortcut menu only when options are currently available from the command
line. On the command line, options are enclosed in square brackets. If no options are available,
right-clicking is the same as pressing ENTER.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 219
Add Profile Dialog Box
Creates a new profile from an existing one. The new profile is displayed in the Profile list box on
the Profiles tab in the Options dialog box.
Profile Name
Enter a name to save the profile as. The new profile is created and added to the profile list.
Description
Enter a description for the new profile. The description is saved with the new profile.
Change Profile Dialog Box
Renames an existing profile. The new profile name is displayed in the Profile list box on the
Profiles tab in the Options dialog box.
Profile Name
Enter a new name for the existing profile. The new profile name replaces the previous profile name
in the profile list.
Description
Enter a description. The description is saved under the new profile name.
ORTHO
Constrains cursor movement.
ORTHO constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical directions (relative to the UCS)
and with the current grid rotation angle.
Status bar: Ortho
Command line: ortho (or 'ortho for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>:
Enter on or off, or press ENTER
In the illustration, a line is drawn using Ortho mode. Point 1 is the first point specified, and point 2
is the position of the cursor when the second point is specified.
{bmc acw1500u.bmp}
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses Ortho mode when you specify an angle or distance by means of two
points using a pointing device. Ortho mode has no effect on keyboard entries. GTXImage CAD
PLUS ignores Ortho mode in perspective views.
GTXImage CAD PLUS defines horizontal as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical
as being parallel to the Y axis. ORTHO adjusts to the current snap rotation regardless of the UCS.
OSNAP
Sets object snap modes.
An object snap mode specifies a snap point at an exact location on an object. You can use an object
snap once in the middle of a command, or you can set running object snaps. Running object snap
modes can be toggled on and off with the Osnap button on the status bar. You can use the TAB
key to cycle through available object snaps. Object snap settings are stored with the drawing.
Object Snap toolbar:
Tools Menu: Drafting Settings
Shortcut menu: Press SHIFT while right-clicking in the drawing area and choose Osnap Settings.
220 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Command line: osnap (or 'osnap for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Object Snaps tab in the Drafting Settings dialog box.
If you enter -osnap at the Command prompt, OSNAP presents options on the command line.
Current osnap modes: current
Enter list of object snap modes:
none or off
Enter names of object snap modes, or enter
Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first three characters of the name. If you
enter more than one name, separate the names with commas.
ENDpoint
Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline segment, or ray or to the
closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.
MIDpoint
Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline segment, solid, spline,
or xline.
INTersection
Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline, ray, spline, or
xline.
NOTE: You may get varying results if you have both Intersection and Apparent Intersection
on at the same time.
EXTension
Snaps to the extension point of an object. You can establish an extension path by moving the
cursor over the endpoint of an object. A marker is placed on the endpoint. While the endpoint is
marked, the cursor snaps to the extension path of the endpoint.
APParent Intersection
Apparent Intersection includes two separate snap modes: Apparent Intersection and Extended
Apparent Intersection. You can also locate Intersection and Extended Intersection snap points
while running Apparent Intersection object snap mode.
Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent intersection of two objects (arc, circle, ellipse,
elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline) that do not intersect in 3D space but appear
to intersect in the drawing display. Extended Apparent Intersection snaps to the imaginary
intersection of two objects that would appear to intersect if the objects were extended along their
natural paths.
NOTE: You may get varying results if you have both Intersection and Apparent Intersection
on at the same time. Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection recognize edges of
regions and curves.
CENter
Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
NODe
Snaps to a point object.
QUAdrant
Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
INSertion
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 221
Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a shape, or text.
PERpendicular
Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline, ray,
solid, spline, or xline.
TANgent
Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
NEArest
Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, mline, point, polyline, spline,
or xline.
PARallel
Snaps to an extension in parallel with an object. When you move the cursor over the endpoint of an
object, the endpoint is marked and the cursor snaps to the parallel alignment path to that object.
The alignment path is calculated from the current "from point" of the command.
QUIck
Snaps to the first snap point found. Quick must be used in conjunction with other object snap
modes.
NONe
Turns off object snap modes.
PAGESETUP
Specifies the layout page, plotting device, paper size, and settings for each new layout.
Layouts toolbar:
File menu: Page Setup
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Page Setup.
Command line: pagesetup
GTXImage CAD PLUS® displays the Page Setup .
Page Setup Dialog Box
Specifies page layout and plotting device settings. The Page Setup dialog box is displayed each
time you choose a layout tab in a drawing session. The layout settings you specify are stored with
the layout.
Layout Name
Displays the current layout name.
Page Setup Name
Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can choose to base the current page setup
on a named page setup or you can add a new named page setup by choosing Add. Choosing Add
displays the User Defined Page Setups .
Plot Device Tab (Page Setup Dialog Box)
Specifies a currently configured plotting device to send a layout to for plotting.
Plotter Configuration
Displays the currently configured plotting device, the port to which it's connected or its network
location, and any additional user-defined comments about the plotter. A list of the available system
222 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
printers and PC3 file names is displayed in the Name list. An icon is displayed in front of the
plotting device name to identify it as a PC3 file name or a system printer. If a selected plotter
doesn't support the layout's selected paper size, a warning is displayed here and the plotter's default
paper size is automatically selected. You can set paper size on the Layout Settings tab.
Properties
Displays the Plotter Configuration (PC3) Editor where you can view or modify the current plotter
configuration, ports, device, and media settings.
If you make changes to the PC3 file using the Plotter Configuration Editor, the Changes to a
Printer Configuration File is displayed.
Hints
Displays information about the specific plotting device.
Plot Style Table
Specifies the plot style table currently assigned to the layout or viewport.
Name
Displays a list of the current plot style tables available to assign to the current drawing or layout.
To modify the definition of a plot style contained in a plot style table, choose Edit.
Edit
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor where you can view or modify plot styles for the currently
assigned plot style table.
New
Displays the Plot Style Table wizard, which you can use to create a new plot style table. The
wizard that is displayed is determined by whether the current drawing is in color-dependent or
named mode.
Display Plot Styles
Controls whether plot styles and plot style names are assigned to objects in GTXImage CAD
PLUS. Selecting Display Plot Styles determines whether plot styles and plot style names are
displayed in the drawing and plotted.
Options
Displays the Plotting tab in the Options dialog box. You can view or modify the current layout and
plot settings in the Options dialog box.
Display When Creating a New Layout
When selected, displays the Page Setup dialog box each time you select a new layout tab to begin
creating a new layout.
Layout Settings Tab (Page Setup Dialog Box)
Specifies layout settings such as plot area, plot scale, plot offset, drawing orientation, and paper
size.
Paper Size and Paper Units
Displays standard paper sizes available for the selected plotting device. An icon is displayed in the
Paper Size list that indicates the orientation for the paper in the plotter. Printable Area displays the
actual area on the paper that is used for the plot based on the currently configured paper size.
Actual paper sizes are indicated by the width (X axis direction) and height (Y axis direction). If no
plotter is selected, the full standard paper size list is displayed and available for selection. A default
paper size is set for the plotting device when you create a PC3 file with the Add-a-Plotter wizard.
The paper size is saved with a layout and overrides the PC3 file settings.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 223
Drawing Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait
orientation. You can change the drawing orientation to achieve a 0-, 90-, 180-, or 270-degree plot
rotation by selecting Portrait, Landscape, or Plot Upside-Down. The paper icon represents the
media orientation of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on
the page.
Portrait
Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page.
Landscape
Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page.
Plot Upside-Down
Allows the drawing to be plotted upside-down on the sheet of paper. The effect is similar to
rotating the plot. Selecting either Portrait or Landscape and then selecting Plot Upside-Down
replaces the plot rotation control in Release 14.
Plot Area
Specifies the area of the drawing to be plotted.
Layout/Limits
Displays Layout when plotting a layout. Plots everything within the margins of the specified paper
size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout.
Displays Limits when plotting the Model tab. Plots the entire drawing area defined by the drawing
limits. If the current viewport does not display a plan view, this option has the same effect as the
Extents option.
Extents
Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the
current space is plotted. GTXImage CAD PLUS may regenerate the drawing to recalculate the
extents before plotting.
If you plot the drawing's extents with a perspective view active and the camera position is within
the drawing extents, this option has the same effect as the Display option.
Display
Plots the view in the current viewport in the Model tab.
View
Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command. You can select a named view from the list
provided. If there are no saved views in the drawing, this option is unavailable.
Window
Plots any portion of the drawing you specify by a windowed area. After the Window button is
chosen, you can specify the plot area by specifying the two corners of the area to be plotted, or by
entering XY coordinate values.
Command: Specify first corner:
Specify other corner:
Specify a point
Specify a point
Plot Scale
Controls the plot area. The default scale setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is
Scaled to Fit when plotting the Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the scale is displayed
in Custom.
Scale
224 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Defines the exact scale for the plot. The four most recently used standard scales are displayed at
the top of the list.
Custom
Defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or
millimeters) equal to the number of drawing units.
Scale Lineweights
Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of
plotted objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale.
Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plotting area from the lower-left corner of the paper. In a layout, the
lower-left corner of a specified plot area is positioned at the lower-left margin of the paper. You
can offset the origin by entering a positive or negative value.
Center Plot
paper.
Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the
X
Specifies the plot origin in the X direction.
Y
Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction.
Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, plot styles, and the current plot style table. You can select
whether lineweights are plotted. By selecting Plot with Plot Styles, you plot using the object plot
styles that are assigned to the geometry, as defined by the plot style table.
Plot with Lineweights
Plots lineweights.
Plot with Plot Styles
Plots using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions
with different property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables, and can be easily attached
to the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of GTXImage CAD
PLUS.
Plot Paperspace Last
Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space
geometry.
Hide Objects
Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout environment (paper space).
Hidden line removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide
property in the Properties window. This is reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
Plot
Plots the current Model tab or layout tab using the settings you have specified.
User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box
Specifies the name of the user-defined page setup you are saving. All settings you apply to the
current layout are saved to the user-defined page setup file.
New Page Setup Name
Names the new user-defined page setup you are saving.
Page Setups
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 225
Lists the user-defined page setups you have saved. You can select a named page setup from the list
to apply to a layout.
Rename
Renames the currently selected user-defined page setup.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected user-defined page setup.
Import
Imports a user-defined page setup from another drawing and applies it to a layout in the current
drawing.
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup)
Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration (PC3) file. You can
cancel your changes, choose OK to overwrite the PC3 file, or specify a new file name for the
modified PC3 file.
Save Changes to the Following File
Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have changed. To preserve the original PC3 file, specify
a new file name.
PAN
Moves the drawing display in the current viewport.
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Pan Realtime
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Pan.
Command line: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt; you can pan the drawing display in real
time.
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display shortcut menu.
If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays alternative prompts on the command
line, and you can specify a displacement to pan the drawing display.
Panning in Real Time
The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on the pointing device, you
lock the cursor to its current location relative to the viewport coordinate system. The drawing
display is moved in the same direction as the cursor.
When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor
on the side where the extent has been reached. Depending on whether the logical extent is at the
top, bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizontal (top or bottom) or vertical (left or
right side).
226 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick button, move the cursor
to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again to pan the display from that
location.
To stop panning at any time, press ENTER or ESC.
Panning by Specifying Displacements
If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN presents alternative prompts on the command
line.
This version of PAN works in two ways. You can specify a single point, indicating the relative
displacement of the drawing with respect to the current location, or (more commonly) you can
specify two points, in which case GTXImage CAD PLUS computes the displacement from the first
point to the second point.
You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW, or while another ZOOM, PAN, or
VIEW command is in progress.
Specify base point or displacement:
Specify a point (1)
The point you specify indicates either the amount to move the drawing or the location in the
drawing to be moved, depending on how you respond to the next prompt.
Specify second point:
Press ENTER or specify a point (2)
If you press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS moves the drawing by the amount you specified in
the Specify Base Point or Displacement prompt. For example, if you specify 2,2 at the first prompt
and press ENTER at the second prompt, GTXImage CAD PLUS moves the drawing 2 units in the
X direction and 2 units in the Y direction. If you specify a point at the Specify Second Point
prompt, GTXImage CAD PLUS moves the location of the first point to the location of the second
point.
Pan Shortcut Menu
When the PAN command is active, you can exit PAN or switch to ZOOM using the options on the
Pan shortcut menu. To access the Pan shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while PAN is
active.
Exit
Cancels PAN or ZOOM.
Pan
Switches to PAN.
Zoom
Switches to ZOOM in real time.
Zoom Window
Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window.
Zoom Original
Restores the original view.
Zoom Extents
Zooms to display the drawing extents.
PARTIALOAD
Loads additional geometry into a partially opened drawing.
File Menu: Partial Load
Command line: partiaload
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 227
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Partial Load . PARTIALOAD can only be used in a partially
open drawing. To partially open a drawing, use OPEN and choose Partial Open in the Select File
dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Any information that is loaded into the file using
PARTIALOAD cannot be unloaded, not even with UNDO.
If you enter -partiaload at the Command prompt, PARTIALOAD displays prompts on the
command line.
Partial Load Dialog Box
Displays the views and layers available for specifying additional geometry to load into a partially
open drawing. You can select and load geometry from a view or a selected area and from layers.
You cannot unload any information that is currently loaded in the drawing. If the drawing contains
attached xrefs that were not loaded at the time that the drawing was partially opened, you can
reload the xrefs by using the Xref Manager. See XREF.
View Geometry to Load
Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing. Views available for loading include
only views defined in model space. You can load paper space geometry by loading the layer on
which the paper space geometry is drawn.
View Name
Displays the currently selected view. Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the
layers is loaded into the drawing.
View List
Displays all the model space views available in the selected drawing file. When a view is selected,
GTXImage CAD PLUS loads only the geometry in the selected view. The default view is Extents.
You can only select to load geometry from one view. Geometry that is common to both the
selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing. Any information currently loaded into the
file cannot be unloaded.
Pick Window
Prompts you to use the pointing device to specify an area using window selection. The selected
area becomes the view to load and is displayed in the View Geometry to Load list as New View.
Layer Geometry to Load
Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file. The geometry on selected layers is
loaded into the drawing, including both model space and paper space geometry. No layers are
selected to load by default. You can load geometry from multiple layers. Geometry that is common
to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing. Any information that is
currently loaded into the file cannot be unloaded.
Layer Name
Displays the layer names in the selected drawing.
Load Geometry
Specifies whether geometry from a layer is loaded into the drawing or not. If Load Geometry is
selected, the geometry from the layer is loaded into the drawing. Any information that is currently
loaded into the file cannot be unloaded.
Load All
Selects Load Geometry for all layers. You can also right-click and choose Load All from the
shortcut menu to load geometry from all layers.
228 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Clear All
Specifies that no geometry be loaded into the drawing (clears the Load Geometry option for all
layers). It is recommended that you load geometry from at least one layer into the drawing. If you
do not select any layers to load, no geometry is loaded at all, including geometry from the selected
view. GTXImage CAD PLUS issues a warning if you do not select any layers to load into the
drawing. You can also right-click and choose Clear All from the shortcut menu to specify that no
geometry is loaded from any layer.
Index Status
Indicates whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index. INDEXCTL controls
whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the drawing file. A spatial index organizes objects
based on their location in space. A layer index is a list showing which objects are on which layers.
PARTIALOAD Command Line
When a drawing is partially open and you enter -partiaload at the Command prompt,
PARTIALOAD displays prompts on the command line.
Specify first corner or [View]:
Specify a point or enter v
First Corner
Specifies the first corner of a user-defined view.
Specify opposite corner:
Specify a point
Geometry from the defined view is loaded into the partially open drawing.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>:
ENTER
Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from the selected layers into the current drawing, including both model space and
paper space geometry. To load geometry from multiple layers into the drawing, use a comma
between layer names. If no layer geometry is specified, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads no layer
geometry into the drawing, including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
Does not load any external references into the drawing.
No
Loads all external references into the drawing.
?—List Layers
Displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing. Enter one or more layer names. If
no layer geometry is specified, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes
Does not load any external references into the drawing.
No
Loads all external references into the drawing.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 229
View
Loads the geometry from the specified view into the current drawing.
Enter view to load or [?] <*Extents*>:
ENTER to load the Extents view
Enter a view name, enter ?, or press
View to Load
Loads the geometry from the specified view into the partially open drawing.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>:
ENTER
Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from the layer or layers into the current drawing. To load geometry from multiple
layers into the drawing, use a comma between layer names. If no layer geometry is specified,
GTXImage CAD PLUS loads no layer geometry into the drawing, including geometry specified to
load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter yes, GTXImage CAD PLUS does not load any external references into the drawing. If
you enter no, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads all external references into the drawing.
?—List Layers
Displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing. Enter one or more layer names. If
no layer geometry is specified, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter yes, GTXImage CAD PLUS does not load any external references into the drawing. If
you enter no, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads all external references into the drawing.
?—List Views
Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing. Enter a view name.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>:
ENTER
Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing. To load geometry from multiple
layers into the drawing, use a comma between layer names. If no layer geometry is specified,
GTXImage CAD PLUS loads no layer geometry into the drawing, including geometry specified to
load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter yes, GTXImage CAD PLUS does not load any external references into the drawing. If
you enter no, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads all external references into the drawing.
?—List Layers
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing. Enter one
or more layer names. If no layer geometry is specified, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads no layer
geometry into the drawing, including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter yes, GTXImage CAD PLUS does not load any external references into the drawing. If
you enter no, GTXImage CAD PLUS loads all external references into the drawing.
230 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
PASTEBLOCK
Pastes a copied block into a new drawing.
Edit menu: Paste as Block
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Paste as
Block.
Command line: pasteblock
Specify insertion point:
Specify a point
Pastes the copied block into the new drawing.
PASTECLIP
Inserts data from the Clipboard.
In GTXImage CAD PLUS, you can paste objects, text, and files of various types, including
metafiles, bitmaps, and multimedia files from the Clipboard.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu:
Paste
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Paste.
Command line: pasteclip
If the Clipboard contains a graphic object, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to specify an
insertion point. If the Clipboard contains an OLE text object, the OLE Properties dialog box is
displayed when the text object is pasted.
If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, GTXImage CAD PLUS inserts the text in the upper-left
corner of the drawing area using the MTEXT defaults. ASCII text becomes an mtext object.
All other objects, except GTXImage CAD PLUS objects, are inserted as embedded or linked
objects. You can edit these embedded or linked objects by double-clicking them in the GTXImage
CAD PLUS drawing to open the application in which they were created.
NOTE: You can also use CTRL+V to run PASTECLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing area,
PASTECLIP behaves as described. If the cursor is on the command line, text from the
Clipboard is pasted at the current prompt.
PASTEORIG
Pastes a copied object in a new drawing using the coordinates from the original drawing.
Pastes a copied object in a new drawing to the same coordinates that were used in the original
drawing. For example, you can use PASTEORIG to paste an object such as a fire hydrant from a
site plan to a plot plan.
PASTEORIG functions only when the Clipboard contains GTXImage CAD PLUS data from a
drawing other than the current drawing.
Edit menu: Paste to Original Coordinates
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Paste to
Original Coordinates.
Command line: pasteorig
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 231
PASTESPEC
Inserts data from the Clipboard and controls the format of the data.
GTXImage CAD PLUS supports the Windows® feature object linking and embedding (OLE).
When an object is inserted into an GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing from an application that
supports OLE, the object can maintain a connection to its source file.
PASTESPEC pastes a linked or embedded object from the Clipboard into an GTXImage CAD
PLUS drawing.
Edit menu: Paste Special
Command line: pastespec
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Paste Special .
Paste Special Dialog Box
Sets file formats and linking options for pasted files.
Source
Displays the path name of the source file and the object's item type.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing. When you paste an OLE text object
using PASTESPEC, the OLE Properties dialog box is displayed.
Paste Link
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing. If the source application supports an
OLE link, GTXImage CAD PLUS creates a link to the original file.
As
Displays applicable formats in which you can paste the contents of the Clipboard into an
GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing.
If you choose GTXImage CAD PLUS Entities, GTXImage CAD PLUS converts the metafile
graphics in the Clipboard to GTXImage CAD PLUS objects. If the metafile graphics are not
converted, the metafile is displayed as an OLE object.
Display as Icon
Displays the source application's icon in the GTXImage CAD PLUS drawing. Double-clicking the
icon displays the linked or embedded information.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and three-dimensional polygon meshes.
GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts vary depending on whether you have selected a 2D or a 3D
polyline.
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Polyline
Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Polyline Edit.
Command line: pedit
Select polyline:
Use an object selection method
If the selected object is a line or an arc, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
Object selected is not a polyline.
Do you want it to turn into one? <Y>:
232 General Command Reference
Enter y or n, or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline that you can edit. You can
use this operation to join lines and arcs into a polyline.
2D Polyline Selection
If you select a 2D polyline, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype
gen/Undo]: Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command
If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option in the prompt. You
can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in the same direction as the Z axis of the
current UCS.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with the first. GTXImage
CAD PLUS considers the polyline open unless you close it using the Close option.
Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. GTXImage CAD PLUS considers the polyline
closed unless you open it using the Open option.
Join
Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the curve fitting from a
curve-fit polyline. For objects to join the polyline, their endpoints must touch.
Select objects:
Width
Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline.
Specify new width for all segments:
You can use the option of the Edit Vertex option to change the starting and ending widths of a
segment.
Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you have specified a
tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in that direction. GTXImage CAD PLUS
prompts:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 233
[Next/Previous/Break/Insert/Move/Regen/Straighten/Tangent/Width/eXit] <current>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
Pressing ENTER accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous.
Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start
of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the
end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
Break
Saves the location of the marked vertex.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] <current>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
You can move the X marker to any other vertex. If you leave the X marker where it is and enter
go, GTXImage CAD PLUS splits the polyline into two pieces at the specified vertex or vertices.
Any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specified are deleted.
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one truncated polyline. If
both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just one vertex is specified and it is at
an endpoint, you cannot use Break.
Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start
of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.
Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the
end of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.
Go
Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex
mode.
Exit
Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
234 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.
Specify location for new vertex:
Specify a point (1)
Move
Moves the marked vertex.
Specify new location for marked vertex:
Specify a point (1)
Regen
Regenerates the polyline.
Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex. You can move the X marker to any other vertex, or leave
it where it is and enter go. Any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify are
deleted, and a single straight line segment replaces them. If you specify only one vertex by
entering go without moving the X marker, the segment following that vertex is made straight if it is
an arc.
If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then
extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] <current>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex.
Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex.
Go
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 235
Moves the selected vertex to the new location and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Any segments and
vertices between the two vertices you specify are deleted and replaced by a single straight line
segment. If you do not move the marker, Go straightens the arc segment that follows the marked
vertex.
Exit
Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Tangent
Attaches a tangent direction to the current vertex, marked by the X, for use later in curve fitting.
GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
Specify direction of vertex tangent:
Specify a point or enter an angle
Width
Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately follows the marked
vertex.
Specify starting width for next segment <current>:
value, or press ENTER
Specify a point, enter a
Specify ending width for next segment <starting width>:
enter a value, or press ENTER
Specify a point,
You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width.
Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.
Fit
Creates a smooth curve consisting of pairs of arcs joining each pair of vertices. The curve passes
through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify.
Spline
Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a curve. The curve
passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed. The curve is
pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily pass through them. The more control points
you specify in a particular part of the frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. The technical
term for this type of curve is B-spline. GTXImage CAD PLUS can generate quadratic and cubic
spline-fit polylines.
236 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Spline curves are very different from the curves produced by the Fit option. Fit constructs pairs of
arcs that pass through every control point. Both these curves are different from true B-splines
created with the SPLINE command.
If the original polyline included arc segments, they are straightened when forming the spline's
frame. If the frame has width, the resulting spline tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex
to the width of the last vertex. All intermediate width information is ignored. Once spline-fit, the
frame, if displayed, is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype. Tangent specifications
on control point vertices have no effect on spline-fitting.
When a spline-fit curve is fit to a polyline, the spline curve's frame can be restored by a subsequent
decurving. You can turn a spline-fit curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT
Decurve option. This option works on fit curves in the same way it does on splines.
Spline frames are not usually displayed on the screen. If you want to see them, set the
YS_SPLFRAME system variable to 1. The next time the drawing is regenerated, GTXImage CAD
PLUS draws both the frame and the spline curve.
Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline-fit polylines or fit curves. MOVE,
ERASE, COPY, MIRROR, ROTATE, and SCALE operate on both the visible spline curve and its
frame, whether the frame is visible or not. EXTENDchanges the frame by adding a new vertex
where the initial or final line of the frame intersects the boundary geometry. If you apply one of
these commands to a spline, then decurve it and later fit a new spline to it, you end up with the
same spline.
BREAK, TRIM, and EXPLODE delete the frame and generate a polyline with only the fit spline,
which is consistent with fit curves, where the curve fitting is permanent. OFFSET generates a
polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent with its behavior with fit curves. DIVIDE,
MEASURE, the Object option of AREA, HATCH, FILLET, and CHAMFER recognize only the
fit spline, not the frame. STRETCH refits the spline to the stretched frame after a spline is
stretched.
The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline information of the original
and any added polylines. Once the Join operation is complete, you can fit a new spline to the
resulting polyline.
The Next and Previous options of the Edit Vertex option of PEDIT move the X marker only to
points on the frame of the spline, whether visible or not. The Break option of the Edit Vertex
option discards the spline. The Insert, Move, Straighten, and Width options of the Edit Vertex
option automatically refit the spline. The Tangent option of the Edit Vertex option has no effect on
splines.
Object snap sees only the spline-fit curve itself, not the frame. If you want to snap to the frame
control points, use PEDIT to restore the polyline frame first.
The SPLINETYPE system variable controls the type of spline curve approximated. Setting
SPLINETYPE to 5 approximates a quadratic B-spline. Setting SPLINETYPE to 6 approximates a
cubic B-spline.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 237
You can examine or change the fineness or coarseness of the spline approximation with the
SPLINESEGS system variable, or you can use AutoLISP. The default value is 8. If you set the
value higher, a greater number of line segments are drawn and the approximation to the ideal
spline becomes more precise. The generated spline occupies more space in the drawing file and
takes longer to generate.
If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, GTXImage CAD PLUS generates segments using the
absolute value of the setting and then applies a fit-type curve to those segments. Fit-type curves
use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few
segments are specified, but the curve can take longer to generate.
To change the number of segments used to fit an existing spline, change SPLINESEGS and
respline the curve. You do not have to decurve it first.
Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the
polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit
curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit polyline with commands such as BREAK or TRIM, you
cannot use the Decurve option.
Ltype Gen
Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the polyline. When turned
off, this option generates the linetype starting and ending with a dash at each vertex. Ltype Gen
does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
Enter polyline linetype generation option [ON/OFF] <current>:
off, or press ENTER
Enter on or
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.
PLAN
Displays the plan view of a user coordinate system.
PLAN provides a convenient means of viewing the drawing from the plan view. You can select a
plan view of the current user coordinate system, a previously saved UCS, or the world coordinate
system. PLAN affects the view in the current viewport only. You cannot use PLAN in paper space.
238 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
PLAN changes the viewing direction and turns off perspective and clipping; it does not change the
current UCS. Any coordinates entered or displayed subsequent to the PLAN command remain
relative to the current UCS.
View menu: 3D Views
Plan View
Command line: plan
Enter an option [Current ucs/Ucs/World] <Current>:
ENTER
Enter an option or press
Current UCS
Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the
current UCS.
UCS
Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the display.
Enter name of UCS or [?]:
drawing
Enter a name or enter ? to list all UCSs in the
If you enter ? at the prompt, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Enter UCS name(s) to list <*>:
drawing
Enter a name or enter * to list all UCSs in the
World
Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit on the screen of the world
coordinate system.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 239
PLINE
Creates two-dimensional polylines.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Polyline
Command line: pline
Specify start point:
Specify a point (1)
Current line-width is <current>
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]:
point (2) or enter an option
Specify a
The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around and the smoothness
of the vertices of a 2D polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 1 generates new polylines in a continuous
pattern around the vertices of the completed polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the
polyline with a dash at each vertex. PLINEGEN does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. GTXImage CAD PLUS repeats the previous prompt.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or
[Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/Line/Radius/Second
pt/Undo/Width]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
Endpoint of Arc
Draws an arc segment. The arc segment starts at the last point tangent to the previous segment of
the polyline. GTXImage CAD PLUS repeats the previous prompt.
Angle
Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Specify included angle:
240 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering a negative number
creates clockwise arc segments.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Endpoint of Arc
Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Center
Specifies the center of the arc segment.
Specify center point of arc:
Radius
Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Specify radius of arc:
Specify a distance
Specify direction of chord for arc <current>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
Center
Specifies the center of the arc segment.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify a point (2)
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/Length]:
option
Specify a point (3) or enter an
Endpoint of Arc
Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Angle
Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Specify included angle:
Length
Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the previous segment is an arc, GTXImage CAD
PLUS draws the new arc segment tangent to the previous arc segment.
Specify length of chord:
Close
Closes a polyline with an arc segment.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 241
Direction
Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment.
Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc:
Specify endpoint of arc:
Specify a point (2)
Specify a point (3)
Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges.
Specify starting half-width <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending half-width <starting width>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the
uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting
and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is
performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Line
Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial PLINE command prompts.
Radius
Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Specify radius of arc:
Specify a distance
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]:
Specify a point or enter a
Endpoint of Arc
Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Angle
Specifies the included angle for the arc segment.
Specify included angle:
Specify direction of chord for arc <current>:
ENTER
Specify an angle or press
Second Pt
Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc.
242 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify second point on arc:
Specify end point of arc:
Specify a point (2)
Specify a point (3)
Undo
Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline.
Width
Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
Specify starting width <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width <starting width>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform
width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points
of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is
performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Close
Draws a line segment from the current position to the starting point of the polyline, creating a
closed polyline.
Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of its edges.
Specify starting half-width <current>:
Specify ending half-width <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the
uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting
and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is
performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. If the
previous segment is an arc, GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the new line segment tangent to that arc
segment.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 243
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance
Undo
Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline.
Width
Specifies the width of the next line segment.
Specify starting width <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width <starting width>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform
width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points
of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is
performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
PLOT
Plots a drawing to a plotting device or file.
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Plot
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Plot.
Command line: plot
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Plot . Choose OK to begin plotting with the current settings
and display the Plot Progress dialog box.
If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, PLOT displays prompts on the command line.
Plot Dialog Box
Specifies device and media settings, and plots your drawing. To send more than one layout to the
plotter, choose the layout tabs for the layouts you want to plot, and then use PLOT.
Layout Name
Displays the current layout name or displays "Selected layouts" if multiple tabs are selected. If the
Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout Name shows "Model."
Save Changes to Layout
Saves changes you make in the Plot dialog box in the layout. This option is unavailable if multiple
layouts are selected.
244 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Page Setup Name
Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can choose to base the current page setup
on a named page setup, or you can add a new named page setup by choosing Add.
Add
Displays the User Defined Page Setups . You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.
Plot Device Tab (Plot Dialog Box)
Specifies the plotter to use, a plot style table, the layout or layouts to plot, and information about
plotting to a file.
Plotter Configuration
Displays the currently configured plotting device, the port to which it's connected or its network
location, and any additional user-defined comments about the plotter. A list of the available system
printers and PC3 file names is displayed in the Name list. An icon is displayed in front of the
plotting device name to identify it as a PC3 file name or a system printer.
Properties
Displays the Plotter Configuration Editor (PC3 Editor), where you can modify or view the current
plotter configuration, ports, device, and media settings. For information about PC3 files, see
"Setting Up Plotters and Printers" in chapter 6, "Configuring Plotters and Printers," in the
Installation Guide.
If you make changes to the PC3 file using the Plotter Configuration Editor, the Changes to a
Printer Configuration File is displayed.
Hints
Displays information about the specific plotting device.
Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)
Sets the plot style table, edits the plot style table, or creates a new plot style table.
Name
Displays the plot style table assigned to the current Model tab or layout tab and a list of the
currently available plot style tables. If more than one layout tab is selected and they have different
plot style tables assigned, the list displays "Varies."
Edit
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor where you can edit the selected plot style table.
New
Displays the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, which you can use to create a new plot style table.
What to Plot
Defines what you want to plot whether you select the Model tab or a layout tab.
Current Tab
Plots the current Model or layout tab. If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows its viewing
area is plotted.
Selected Tabs
Plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To select multiple tabs, hold down CTRL while
selecting the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is unavailable.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 245
All Layout Tabs
Plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab is selected.
Number of Copies
Denotes the number of copies that are plotted. If multiple layouts and copies are selected, any
layouts that are set to plot to a file or AutoSpool produce a single plot.
Plot to File
Plots output to a file rather than to the plotter.
Plot to File
Plots to a file.
File Name
Specifies the plot file name. The default plot file name is the drawing name and the tab name,
separated by a hyphen, with a .plt file extension.
Location
Displays the directory location where the plot file is stored. The default location is the directory
where the drawing file resides.
[...]
Displays a standard Browse for Folder dialog box, where you can choose the directory location to
store a plot file.
Plot Settings Tab (Plot Dialog Box)
Specifies paper size, orientation, plot area and scale, offset, and other options.
Paper Size and Paper Units
Displays standard paper sizes available for the selected plotting device.
Actual paper sizes are indicated by the width (X axis direction) and height (Y axis direction). If no
plotter is selected, the full standard paper size list is displayed and available for selection. A default
paper size is set for the plotting device when you create a PC3 file with the Add-a-Plotter wizard.
For more information about the Add-a-Plotter wizard, see "Setting Up Plotters and Printers" in
chapter 6, "Configuring Plotters and Printers," in the Installation Guide. The paper size you select
is saved with a layout and overrides the PC3 file settings.
If you are plotting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, the size of the plot is specified in
pixels, not in inches or millimeters.
Plot Device
Displays the name of the currently selected plot device.
Paper Size
Displays a list of the available paper sizes. An icon next to the paper size indicates the plot
orientation of the paper.
Printable Area
Displays the actual area on the paper that is used for the plot based on the current paper size.
Inches
Specifies inches for the plotting units.
MM
Specifies millimeters for the plotting units.
246 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Drawing Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support landscape or portrait
orientation. You can change the drawing orientation to achieve a 0-, 90-, 180-, or 270-degree plot
rotation by selecting Portrait, Landscape, or Plot Upside-Down. The paper icon represents the
media orientation of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on
the page.
Portrait
Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page.
Landscape
Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page.
Plot Upside-Down
Orients and plots the drawing upside down.
Plot Area
Specifies the portion of the drawing to be plotted.
Layout
Plots everything within the margins of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0
in the layout. Available only when a layout is selected.
If you choose to turn off the paper image and layout background on the Display tab of the Options
dialog box, the Layouts selection becomes Limits.
Limits
Plots the entire drawing area defined by the drawing limits. If the current viewport does not display
a plan view, this option has the same effect as the Extents option. Available only when the Model
tab is selected.
Extents
Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects. All geometry in the
current space is plotted. GTXImage CAD PLUS may regenerate the drawing to recalculate the
extents before plotting.
If you plot the drawing's extents with a perspective view active and the camera position is within
the drawing extents, this option has the same effect as the Display option.
Display
Plots the view in the current viewport in the selected Model tab or the current paper space view in
the layout.
View
Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command. You can select a named view from the list
provided. If there are no saved views in the drawing, this option is unavailable.
Window
Plots any portion of the drawing you specify. If you select Window, the Window button becomes
available. Choose the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the
area to be plotted or enter coordinate values.
Command: Specify first corner:
Specify other corner:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a point
Specify a point
General Command Reference 247
Plot Scale
Controls the plot area. The default scale setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is
Scaled to Fit when plotting a Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the scale is displayed in
Custom.
Scale
Defines the exact scale for the plot. The four most recently used standard scales are displayed at
the top of the list.
Custom
Creates a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches equal
to the number of drawing units.
Scale Lineweights
Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale. Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of
printed objects and are plotted with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale.
Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plotting area from the lower-left corner of the paper. In a layout, the
lower-left corner of a specified plot area is positioned at the lower-left margin of the paper. You
can offset the origin by entering a positive or negative value. The plotter unit values are in inches
or millimeters on the paper.
Center the Plot
Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on
the paper.
X
Specifies the plot origin in the X direction.
Y
Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction.
Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, plot styles, and the current plot style table. You can select
whether lineweights are plotted. By selecting Plot with Plot Styles, you plot using the object plot
styles that are assigned to the geometry, as defined by the plot style table.
Plot with Lineweights
Plots lineweights.
Plot with Plot Styles
Plots using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions
with different property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be easily attached
to the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of GTXImage CAD
PLUS.
Plot Paperspace Last
Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space
geometry.
Hide Objects
Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout environment (paper space).
Hidden line removal for model space objects in viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide
property in the Object Property Manager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the
layout.
248 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Full Preview
Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper. To exit the print preview, right-click
and choose Exit.
Partial Preview
Quickly shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to the paper size and
printable area. Partial preview also gives advance notice of any warnings that you might encounter
when GTXImage CAD PLUS plots. The final location of the plot depends on the plotter.
Changes that modify the effective plot area include those made to the plot origin, which you define
under Plot Offset on the Plot Settings tab. If you offset the origin so much that the effective area
extends outside the preview area, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a warning.
Paper Size
Displays the currently selected paper size.
Printable Area
Displays the printable area within the paper size allowable for plotting based on the plotter
configuration.
Effective Area
Displays the dimensions of the drawing within the printable area.
Warnings
Displays a list of warnings that pertain to the effective plotting area.
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Plot)
Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration (PC3) file. You can
cancel your changes, choose OK to overwrite the PC3 file, or specify a new file name for the
modified PC3 file.
Apply Changes for the Current Plot Only
Uses the changes you've made to the PC3 file in the current plot but does not save them in the PC3
file.
Save Changes to the Following File
Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have changed. To preserve the original PC3 file, specify
a new file name.
PLOTSTYLE
Sets the current plot style for new objects, or the assigned plot style for selected objects.
Command line: plotstyle
If no selection set exists, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Current Plot Style . If a selection set
exists, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Plot Style .
If you enter -plotstyle at the Command prompt, PLOTSTYLE displays a prompt on the .
Current Plot Style Dialog Box
Specifies the plot style for new objects.
Current Plot Style
Displays the current plot style.
Plot Style List
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 249
Displays the available plot styles that can be assigned to an object, including the default plot style,
NORMAL. A plot style is a collection of overrides for color, dithering, gray scale, pen
assignments, screening, linetype, lineweight, end styles, join styles, and fill styles.
Active Plot Style Table
Displays the plot style table attached to the current layout or viewport. A plot style table contains
plot style definitions.
Editor
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor.
Attached To
Displays the viewport or the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot style table is attached to.
Select Plot Style Dialog Box
Specifies the plot style to be assigned.
Plot Styles
Displays the available plot styles, including the default plot style, NORMAL. A plot style is a
collection of property settings used in plotting.
Original
Displays the originally assigned plot style.
New
Displays the new plot style to be assigned.
Active Plot Style Table
Displays the plot style table attached to the current drawing. A plot style table defines plot styles.
Editor
Displays the Plot Style Table Editor.
Attached To
Displays the viewport or the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot style table is attached to.
PLOTSTYLE Command Line
If you enter -plotstyle at the Command prompt, PLOTSTYLE displays a prompt on the command
line.
Command line: -plotstyle
Enter an option [?/Current]:
?—List Plot Styles
Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table.
Current
Specifies the plot style to use for new objects.
PLOTTERMANAGER
Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can launch the Add-a-Plotter wizard and the Plotter
Configuration Editor.
File menu: Plotter Manager
Command line: plottermanager
250 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Plotter Manager. In the Plotter Manager, you can double-click
the Add-a-Plotter wizard to add and configure plotters and printers. Right-click a plotter
configuration (PC3 file) to start the Plotter Configuration Editor. For information about the Plotter
Configuration Editor, see "Editing Your Plotter Configuration Files" in chapter 6, "Configuring
Plotters and Printers," in the Installation Guide.
Add-a-Plotter Wizard
The Add-a-Plotter wizard adds new plotters and printers. The wizard produces a PC3 file that you
can edit in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Your configurations are stored in the GTXImage CAD
PLUS 2000\Plotters folder.
POINT
Creates a point object.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Point Single Point
Command line: point
Specify a point:
Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects. You can specify a full three-dimensional
location for a point. The current elevation is assumed if you omit the Z coordinate value.
The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the appearance of point objects. PDMODE
values 0, 2, 3, and 4 specify a figure to draw through the point. A value of 1 specifies that nothing
is displayed.
Specifying the value 32, 64, or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point, in addition to the figure
drawn through it:
PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and 1. A setting of 0
generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an
absolute size for the point figures. A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport
size. The size of all points is recalculated when the drawing is regenerated.
After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points changes the next time
GTXImage CAD PLUS regenerates the drawing.
POLYGON
Creates an equilateral closed polyline.
A polygon is a polyline object. GTXImage CAD PLUS draws polylines with zero width and no
tangent information. You can use the PEDIT command to change these values.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 251
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Polygon
Command line: polygon
Enter number of sides <current>:
ENTER
Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press
Specify center of polygon or [Edge]:
Specify a point (1) or enter e
Center of Polygon
Defines the center of the polygon.
Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle] <current>:
Enter i or c or press ENTER
Inscribed in Circle
Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie.
Specify radius of circle:
Specify a point (2) or enter a value
Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon.
Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap
rotation angle.
Circumscribed about Circle
Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon.
Specify radius of circle:
Specify a distance
Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon.
Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap
rotation angle.
Edge
Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge.
Specify first endpoint of edge:
252 General Command Reference
Specify a point (1)
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify second endpoint of edge:
Specify a point (2)
PREVIEW
Shows how the drawing will look when it is plotted.
PREVIEW displays a full-page preview of the current drawing. The preview is based on the
current plot configuration, as defined by the PAGESETUP command.
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Plot Preview
Command line: preview
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display shortcut menu.
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the preview, and the cursor changes to a magnifying glass with
PLUS (+) and minus (-) signs. Dragging the cursor towards the top of the screen while holding
down the pick button enlarges the preview image. Dragging towards the bottom of the screen
reduces the preview image.
Right-click to access a shortcut menu that offers additional preview options.
Plot Preview Shortcut Menu
Controls Plot Preview options. To access this menu, right-click in the preview area.
Exit
Exits Plot Preview.
Plot
Plots the drawing as it is displayed in the full-sheet preview, and then exits Plot Preview.
Pan
Displays the pan cursor, a hand cursor you can use to pan the preview image. Hold down the pick
button and drag the cursor in any direction. The pan cursor stays active until you choose Zoom
again from the shortcut menu.
Zoom
Displays the zoom cursor, a magnifying-glass cursor you can use to enlarge or reduce the preview
image. To enlarge the image, hold down the pick button and drag the cursor towards the top of the
screen. To reduce the image, hold down the pick button and drag the cursor towards the bottom of
the screen.
Zoom Window
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 253
Zooms to display a specified window. Zoom Window works with both the zoom cursor and the
pan cursor.
Zoom Original
Restores the initial full-sheet preview. Zoom Original works with both the zoom cursor and the pan
cursor.
PSDRAG
Controls the appearance of a PostScript image as it is dragged into position with PSIN.
Command line: psdrag
Enter PSIN drag mode [0/1] <0>:
Enter 0 or 1, or press ENTER
Setting Drag mode to 0 displays only the image's bounding box and its file name while the image
is being dragged. Setting Drag mode to 1 displays the rendered PostScript image while the image
is being dragged into place.
When the PSQUALITY system variable is set to 0, the PSIN Drag mode has no effect. As you
drag the image into place, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the bounding box with the name of the
file inside the box.
PSETUPIN
Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout.
Provides the ability to import a saved, named page setup from one drawing into a new drawing.
The settings that are saved in the named page setup can be applied to layouts in the new drawing.
Command line: psetupin
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a standard file selection dialog box in which you can select the
drawing (.dwg) file whose page setups you want to import.
If you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, PSETUPIN displays prompts on the command
line.
After you select the drawing file you want to use, the Import User Defined Page Setups is
displayed.
Import User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box}
Lists the available page setups that were saved in the drawing you have selected to import. After
selecting a named page setup, you can apply that setup to a layout in your new drawing.
PSFILL
Fills a two-dimensional polyline outline with a PostScript pattern.
Although GTXImage CAD PLUS does not display PostScript fill patterns on the screen, you can
use PSOUT to create a PostScript file that contains the fill patterns with or without the polyline
outline.
Command line: psfill
Select polyline:
254 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter PostScript fill pattern name (. = none) or [?] <current>:
period, or ?, or press ENTER
Enter a pattern name,
If the object was previously filled with a PostScript pattern, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
current pattern name as the default. Preceding the pattern name with an asterisk (*) omits the
polyline outline. If you enter a question mark (?), GTXImage CAD PLUS lists the PostScript fill
patterns previously defined in ICAD.psf.
The GTXImage CAD PLUS PostScript support file (ICAD.psf), the master support file for PSOUT
and PSFILL, is a modifiable ASCII file divided into sections, one of which defines PostScript fill
patterns. New patterns can be added to ICAD.psf by including the appropriate PostScript
procedures.
The definition of fill patterns can contain arguments or parameters that control the appearance of
the pattern. When you use PSFILL and specify a fill pattern, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts for a
response to any parameters or arguments required by the pattern you chose. If the pattern has any
arguments or parameters, GTXImage CAD PLUS reads them. Pattern arguments are integers or
real numbers that control pattern appearance according to its PostScript definition.
PSOUT
Creates an encapsulated PostScript file.
GTXImage CAD PLUS-generated encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files contain a PostScript
rendering of the model. GTXImage CAD PLUS exports arcs, circles, polylines, and filled regions
as PostScript primitives instead of vectors. The exception is when objects are unrepresentable in
PostScript, for instance, extruded objects, in which case they're output as vectors. If text objects or
multiline text objects that have been exploded into text objects use font files named in the
PostScript support file (ICAD.psf), GTXImage CAD PLUS outputs them as PostScript text objects
in the corresponding PostScript font.
GTXImage CAD PLUS objects that cannot be directly represented in PostScript are exported as
wireframe images—precisely as GTXImage CAD PLUS displays them. HIDE and SHADEMODE
have no effect on output generated by PSOUT.
Command line: psout
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Create PostScript File dialog box, a standard file selection
dialog box in which you can enter a name for the file. GTXImage CAD PLUS adds the .eps file
extension.
Choose Options to display the PostScript Out Options , or choose Save to accept the defaults.
PostScript Out Options Dialog Box
Sets PostScript file output options.
Prolog Section Name
Assigns a name for a prolog section to be read from the ICAD.psf file when you are using the
PSOUT command. The prolog name is optional. GTXImage CAD PLUS uses this name to
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 255
customize PostScript output in a number of ways. See "PostScript Support" in chapter 3, "Shapes,
Fonts, and PostScript Support," in the Customization Guide.
What to Plot
Specifies which part of the drawing to export.
Display
Exports the current floating model space viewport or the current viewport in the paper space
layout.
Extents
Exports the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects.
Limits
Exports the entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits. If the current viewpoint isn't the
plan view (0,0,1), this option is the same as the Extents option.
View
Exports a view saved previously with the VIEW command. If you select View, the View button
becomes available. Choose the View button to select a name from a list of available views.
Window
Exports any portion of your drawing. If you select Window, the Window button becomes
available. Choose the Window button to display the Window Selection dialog box. Enter values for
the window corners, or choose Pick to define the window with the pointing device when you exit
either the EXPORTor the PSOUT command.
Specify first corner:
Specify a point
Specify opposite corner:
Specify a point
Preview
Specifies the type of preview image to include in the file.
None
Specifies no screen preview image in the file.
EPSI
Includes an Encapsulated PostScript Interchange preview image. Use the Pixels area to specify a
preview image of 128 × 128, 256 × 256, or 512 × 512.
TIFF
Includes a Tagged Image File Format preview image. Use the Pixels area to specify a screen
preview image of 128 × 128, 256 × 256, or 512 × 512.
Size Units
Sets the paper size units to inches or millimeters. The list of available paper sizes changes to match
the option that you select.
Scale
Creates an explicit scale by specifying how many drawing units to output per plotted unit
(millimeters or inches). For example, to produce output at a scale of 1 drawing unit per millimeter,
enter 1 in both Output Units and Drawing Units.
256 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If you select Fit to Paper, GTXImage CAD PLUS scales the output to make the drawing as large as
possible for the paper size you specify.
Paper Size
Specifies a paper size for the exported PostScript image. Select a size from the list, or enter width
and height values.
Specifying a width and height creates a unique size, which appears with the label USER or USERn
on the list for paper sizes the next time you create an EPS file with PSOUT.
PSPACE
Switches from a model space viewport to paper space.
GTXImage CAD PLUS operates in either model space or paper space. You use paper space to
create a finished layout of a drawing for printing.
While a layout tab is active, you can work in either model space or paper space. In paper space you
create floating viewport objects that contain different views of the objects in model space. Using
the MSPACE command, you can switch from paper space and edit the objects in model space
within the floating viewports. The PSPACE command switches you back to paper space. You can
also switch between floating model space view and paper space by choosing Model or Paper on the
status bar.
The floating viewports in paper space layouts differ from tiled viewports in model space. Tiled
viewports split the screen into fixed viewports that cannot overlap. Floating viewports are not fixed
and may overlap. Switching to paper space by using the menu or the status bar automatically turns
off TILEMODE (tiled viewports).
You can make a viewport the current viewport by double-clicking it. You can switch to paper
space by double-clicking an area of the paper space layout that is not within a viewport.
Command line: pspace
GTXImage CAD PLUS switches from model space to paper space.
PURGE
Removes unused named objects, such as blocks or layers, from the drawing database.
File menu: Drawing Utilities Purge
Command line: purge
Enter type of unused objects to purge
[Blocks/Dimstyles/LAyers/LTypes/Plotstyles/SHapes/textSTyles/Mlinestyles/A
ll]: Select an object type to purge or enter a to purge all named object types
After you specify the type of named objects to purge, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 257
Enter name(s) to purge <*>:
purge all objects
Enter a name or names, or press ENTER to
Each named object to purge is displayed for verification.
PURGE removes only one level of reference. Repeat PURGE until there are no unreferenced
objects. You can use PURGE at any time during a drawing session.
QDIM
Quickly creates a dimension.
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Qdim
Command line: qdim
Use QDIM to quickly create a series of dimensions. The command is particularly useful for
creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions, or for dimensioning a series of circles and
arcs.
Select geometry to dimension:
Select the objects you want to dimension and press ENTER
Specify dimension line position, or
[Continuous/Staggered/Baseline/Ordinate/Radius/Diameter/datumPoint/Edit]
<current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Continuous
Creates a series of continued dimensions.
Staggered
Creates a series of staggered dimensions.
Baseline
Creates a series of baseline dimensions.
Ordinate
Creates a series of ordinate dimensions.
Radius
Creates a series of radius dimensions.
Diameter
Creates a series of diameter dimensions.
Datum Point
Sets a new datum point for baseline and ordinate dimensions.
Select new datum point:
Specify a point
GTXImage CAD PLUS® returns to the previous prompt.
Edit
Edits a series of dimensions. GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to add or remove points from
existing dimensions.
Indicate dimension point to remove, or [Add/eXit] <eXit>:
enter a, or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
Specify a point,
QLEADER
Quickly creates a leader and leader annotation.
258 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Dimension toolbar:
Draw menu: Dimension Leader
Command line: qleader
Use QLEADER to quickly create leaders and leader annotation. You can use the Leader Settings
to customize the command so that it prompts you for the number of leader points and the
annotation type suited to your drawing needs. You can use QLEADER to
Specify leader annotation and annotation format
Set the location where leaders attach to multiline text annotation
Limit the number of leader points
Constrain the angle of the first and second leader segments
Specify first leader point, or [Settings] <Settings>:
point
Specify the first leader
First Leader Point
Specify next point:
Specify the next leader point
Specify next point: Specify the next leader point, or press ENTER to specify
the leader annotation
The Number of Points setting in the Leader Settings determines the number of leader points
GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to specify. When you specify that number of points, or press
ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to enter the leader annotation. The prompt that is
displayed next depends on settings selected on the Annotation tab in the Leader Settings dialog
box.
If Mtext and Prompt for Width are selected on the Annotation tab, GTXImage CAD PLUS
displays the following prompts:
Specify the width <0.0000>: Specify the mtext width by creating a text
boundary or entering a value
Enter first line of annotation text:
Enter the first line of text
Press ENTER once to enter another line of text. Press ENTER twice to display the leader and the
new mtext annotation.
If Copy an Object is selected on the Annotation tab, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the following
prompt:
Select an object to copy: Select a text object, block reference, or tolerance
object (feature control frame)
GTXImage CAD PLUS attaches the object to the leader.
If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box. Use the dialog box to create the tolerance feature control frame. When you
choose OK, GTXImage CAD PLUS attaches the feature control frame to the leader.
If Block Reference is selected on the Annotation tab, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the
following prompts:
Enter block name or [?]:
defined in the drawing
Enter the name, or enter ? to display a list of blocks
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/X/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify the block insertion point or enter an option
For a description of the insertion options, see INSERT.
If None is selected on the Annotation tab, no annotation prompts are displayed.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 259
Settings
Displays the Leader Settings .
Leader Settings Dialog Box
Customizes the QLEADER command and sets leader and annotation format.
Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)
Sets the leader annotation type, specifies multiline text options, and indicates whether you want to
reuse the annotation.
Annotation Type
Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER leader annotation
prompt.
MText
Prompts you to create mtext annotation.
Copy an Object
Prompts you to copy an mtext, single-line text, tolerance, or block reference object.
Tolerance
Displays the Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to create a feature control frame to attach to
the leader.
Block Reference
Prompts you to insert a block reference.
None
Creates a leader with no annotation.
MText Options
Specify multiline text options. The options are available only when the mtext annotation type is
selected.
Prompt for Width
Prompts you to specify the width of the mtext annotation.
Always Left Justify
Left-justifies mtext annotation.
Frame Text
Places a frame around mtext annotation.
Annotation Reuse
Sets options for reusing leader annotation.
None
Does not reuse leader annotation.
Reuse Next
Reuses the next annotation you create for all subsequent leaders.
Reuse Current
Reuses current annotation. GTXImage CAD PLUS automatically selects this option when you
reuse annotation after selecting Reuse Next.
260 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Leader Line & Arrow Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)
Sets the leader line and arrowhead format.
Leader Line
Sets the leader line format.
Straight
Creates straight-line segments between the points you specify.
Spline
Creates an GTXImage CAD PLUS spline object using the leader points you specify as control
points.
Arrowhead
Defines the leader arrowhead. Select an arrowhead from the Arrowhead list. The arrowheads are
the same ones that are available for dimension lines. See DIMSTYLE. If you choose User Defined,
a list of blocks in the drawing is displayed. Select one of the blocks to use it as a leader arrowhead.
Number of Points
Sets the number of leader points that QLEADER prompts you to specify before prompting for the
leader annotation. For example, if you set the points to 3, QLEADER automatically prompts you to
specify the annotation after you specify two leader points. Set the number to one more than the
number of leader segments you want to create. If you set the option to No Limit, QLEADER
prompts for leader points until you press ENTER twice.
Angle Constraints
Sets angle constraints for the first and second leader lines.
First Segment
Sets the angle of the first leader segment.
Second Segment
Sets the angle of the second leader segment.
Attachment Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)
Sets the attachment location for leader lines and multiline text annotation. Use the tab to set
attachment locations for mtext attached on the left and right side.
Top of Top Line
Attaches the leader line at the top of the top mtext line.
Middle of Top Line
Attaches the leader line at the middle of the top mtext line.
Middle of Multiline Text
Attaches the leader line at the middle of the mtext.
Middle of Bottom Line
Attaches the leader line at the middle of the bottom mtext line.
Bottom of Bottom Line
Attaches the leader line at the bottom of the bottom mtext line.
Underline Bottom Line
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 261
Underlines the bottom mtext line.
QSAVE
Quickly saves the current drawing.
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Save
Command line: qsave
If the drawing is named, GTXImage CAD PLUS saves the drawing without requesting a file name.
If the drawing is unnamed, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Save Drawing As dialog box (see
SAVEAS) and saves the drawing with the file name you specify.
If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS command to save the changed file under a different
name.
QSELECT
Quickly creates selection sets based on filtering criteria.
QSELECT creates a selection set that either includes or excludes all objects matching the object
type and object property criteria that you specify. You can apply QSELECT to the entire drawing
or to an existing selection set. You can also specify whether the selection set created by QSELECT
replaces or is appended to the current selection set. If you have partially opened the current
drawing, QSELECT does not consider objects that you have not loaded. For more advanced
filtering operations, see FILTER.
In addition to the following access methods, you can also access QSELECT by choosing the Quick
Select button in the Properties window.
Tools menu: Quick Select
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Quick
Select.
Command line: qselect
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Quick Select .
Quick Select Dialog Box
Specifies the filtering criteria and how you want GTXImage CAD PLUS to create the selection set
from that criteria.
Apply To
Specifies whether to apply the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or the current selection set. If
there is a current selection set, Current Selection is the default value. If there is no current selection
set, Entire Drawing is the default value. Current Selection is unavailable if no selection set exists
or if Append to Current Selection Set is selected. You can choose the Select Objects button to
create a selection set.
Select Objects
Temporarily closes the Quick Select dialog box so that you can select the objects to which you
want to apply the filter criteria. Press ENTER to return to the Quick Select dialog box. GTXImage
CAD PLUS sets Apply To to Current Selection. Select Objects is available only when you select
Include In New Selection Set and clear Append to Current Selection Set.
Object Type
262 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specifies the object type for the filter. The default is Multiple. If no selection set exists, the Object
Type list includes all object types available in GTXImage CAD PLUS, including custom object
types. If a selection set exists, the list includes only the object types of the selected objects.
Properties
Specifies the object property for the filter. This list includes all searchable properties for the
selected object type. GTXImage CAD PLUS determines the sort order for the properties
(alphabetical or categorized) based on the current sort order in the Properties window (see
PROPERTIES). The property you select determines the options available in Operator and Value.
Operator
Controls the range of the filter. Depending on the selected property, options may include Equals,
Not Equal To, Greater Than, Less Than, and *Wildcard Match. Greater Than and Less Than are
not available for some properties. *Wildcard Match is available only for text fields that can be
edited.
Value
Specifies the property value for the filter. If known values for the selected property are available,
Value becomes a list in which you can choose a value. Otherwise, enter a value.
How to Apply
Specifies whether you want the new selection set to include or exclude objects that match the
specified filtering criteria. Choose Include in New Selection Set to create a new selection set
composed only of objects that match the filtering criteria. Choose Exclude from New Selection Set
to create a new selection set composed only of objects that do not match the filtering criteria.
Append to Current Selection Set
Specifies whether the selection set created by QSELECT replaces or is appended to the current
selection set.
NOTE: QSELECT supports custom objects (objects created by another application) and
their properties. If a custom object uses properties other than GTXImage CAD PLUS
properties, the custom object's source application must be running in order for the
properties to be available to QSELECT.
QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects.
When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays each text and attribute object
as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes
GTXImage CAD PLUS to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain many text objects.
Command line: qtext (or 'qtext for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>:
Enter on or off, or press ENTER
QUIT
Exits GTXImage CAD PLUS.
File menu: Exit
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 263
Command line: quit
Quits GTXImage CAD PLUS if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved. If
the drawing has been modified, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Drawing Modification dialog
box to prompt you to save or discard the changes before quitting.
You can close a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made no modifications or
if you are willing to discard them. To save modifications to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS
command.
RAY
Creates a semi-infinite line.
RAY creates semi-infinite lines commonly used as construction lines. A ray has a finite starting
point and extends to infinity.
Draw menu: Ray
Command line: ray
Specify start point:
Specify a point (1)
Specify through point:
Specify a point for the ray to pass through (2)
GTXImage CAD PLUS® draws a ray and continues to prompt for through points so you can
create multiple rays. The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the
starting point and the through point. Press ENTER to end the command.
RECOVER
Repairs a damaged drawing.
If GTXImage CAD PLUS determines that a drawing you're opening is damaged based on the
drawing's header information, OPEN automatically repairs it.
File menu: Drawing Utilities {bmct proc.bmp} Recover
Command line: recover
In the Recover Drawing File dialog box, enter the drawing file name or select the damaged
drawing file. GTXImage CAD PLUS begins recovery and displays the results in the text window.
RECTANG
Draws a rectangular polyline.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Rectangle
Command line: rectang or rectangle
Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]:
Enter an option or specify a point (1)
First Corner
Specify other corner point:
264 General Command Reference
Specify a point (2)
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The two specified points determine the diagonal corners of a rectangle with sides parallel to the X
and Y axis of the current UCS.
Chamfer
Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle.
Specify first chamfer distance for rectangles <current>:
press ENTER
Specify a distance or
Specify second chamfer distance for rectangles <current>:
or press ENTER
Specify a distance
The values become the current chamfer distances for subsequent RECTANG commands.
Elevation
Specifies the elevation of the rectangle.
Specify the elevation for rectangles <current>:
ENTER
Specify a distance or press
The value becomes the current elevation for subsequent RECTANG commands.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle.
Specify fillet radius for rectangles <current>:
ENTER
Specify a distance or press
The value becomes the current fillet radius for subsequent RECTANG commands.
Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the rectangle.
Specify thickness for rectangles <current>:
ENTER
Specify a distance or press
The value becomes the current thickness for subsequent RECTANG commands.
Width
Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn.
Specify line width for rectangles <current>:
ENTER
Specify a distance or press
The value becomes the current polyline width for subsequent RECTANG commands.
REDO
Reverses the effects of the previous UNDO or U command.
REDO reverses the effects of a single UNDO or U command. REDO must immediately follow the
U or UNDO command.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Redo
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area
and choose Redo.
Command line: redo
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 265
REDRAW
Refreshes the display in the current viewport.
REDRAW removes marker blips and display artifacts (stray pixels) left by editing commands.
Command line: redraw (or 'redraw for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS redraws the current viewport.
REDRAWALL
Refreshes the display in all viewports.
REDRAWALL removes marker blips and display artifacts (stray pixels) left by editing commands.
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Redraw
Command line: redrawall (or 'redrawall for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS redraws all viewports.
REFCLOSE
Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference (an xref or a block).
REFCLOSE prompts you to save back or discard changes made to objects in an external reference
or block reference from within the current drawing. When you save back changes, changes made
to the objects in the reference are saved without actually opening the reference drawing or recreating the block. You can also save and discard edits by using the options on the Modify menu or
the Refedit toolbar. The Refedit toolbar is activated after a reference is selected for editing; the
toolbar is dismissed after changes to the reference are saved or discarded.
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit Save Reference Edits, or In-place Xref and Block
Edit Discard Reference Edits
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected during in-place reference editing, right-click in the
drawing area and choose Close Refedit Session.
Command line: refclose
Enter option [Save/Discard reference changes] <Save>:
Save
Saves back to the xref source drawing or to the block definition in the current drawing all changes
made to objects in the working set. If you remove an object from the working set and save
266 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
changes, the object is deleted from the reference and added to the current drawing. The Save Back
Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar automatically saves reference editing changes.
Discard Reference Changes
Discards the working set; the source drawing or block definition is returned to its original state.
Any changes you make to objects in the current drawing (not in the xref or block) are not
discarded. If you delete any object that is not in the working set, the object is not restored even if
you choose to discard changes. The Discard Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar
automatically discards reference editing changes without using REFCLOSE.
If you save or discard changes with REFCLOSE, you can still use the UNDO command to return
to the reference editing session. If you have made unwanted changes to an xref and already saved
back the changes, use UNDO to undo the unwanted changes; then use REFCLOSE to save back
changes and restore the xref to its original state.
NOTE: When you edit and save xrefs in place in a drawing, the preview image for the
original reference drawing is no longer available unless you open and save the drawing
again.
REFEDIT
Selects a reference for editing.
REFEDIT prompts you to select an external reference or block reference to edit from within the
current drawing. You can make minor changes to xrefs and blocks without having to open the
reference drawing or explode and redefine the block.
Refedit toolbar:
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit {bmct proc.bmp} Edit Reference
Command line: refedit
Select reference:
Select an xref or a block in the current drawing
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Reference Edit .
If you enter -refedit at the Command prompt, REFEDIT displays prompts on the command line.
Reference Edit Dialog Box
Specifies the reference to edit. To select a reference to edit, select an object in the reference. If you
select an object that is part of one or more nested references, the nested references are displayed in
the dialog box.
Reference Name
Displays the reference selected for in-place editing and any references nested within the selected
reference. Nested references are displayed only if the selected object is part of a nested reference.
If multiple references are displayed, choose a specific xref or block to modify. Only one reference
can be edited in place at a time. References that are inserted into a drawing using MINSERT
cannot be selected for in-place reference editing.
Preview
Displays a preview image of the currently selected reference. If you cycle through multiple
references by choosing Next or by selecting a reference name, a preview image of each selected
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 267
reference is displayed in Preview. The preview image displays the reference as it was last saved in
the drawing. The reference preview image is not updated when changes are saved back to the
reference.
Path
Displays the file location of the selected reference. If the selected reference is a block, no path is
displayed.
Enable Unique Layer and Symbol Names
Controls whether layer and symbol names of objects extracted from the reference are unique or
altered. If Enable Unique Layer and Symbol Names is selected, layer and symbol names are
altered (names are prefixed with $#$), similar to the way they are altered when you bind xrefs. If
Enable Unique Layer and Symbol Names is cleared, layer and symbol names are the same as they
are in the reference drawing.
Display Attribute Definitions for Editing
Controls whether all variable attribute definitions in block references are extracted and displayed
during reference editing. If Display Attribute Definitions for Editing is selected, the attributes
(except constant attributes) are made invisible, and the attribute definitions are available for editing
along with the selected reference geometry. When changes are saved back to the block reference,
the attributes of the original reference remain unchanged. The new or altered attribute definitions
affect only subsequent insertions of the block; the attributes in existing block instances are not
affected. Xrefs and block references without definitions are not affected by this option.
Next
Cycles through the references available for selection.
After you select a reference, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to select the specific objects in
the reference that you want to edit.
Select nested objects:
Select objects within the reference that you want to edit
GTXImage CAD PLUS forms a working set with the objects you have selected for editing. The
working set includes objects that can be saved back to update the xref or block definition. Saving
back changes saves changes made to the objects in the reference file without actually opening the
reference drawing or recreating the block. The working set is visually distinct from the rest of the
current drawing: all objects in the current drawing, except objects in the working set, appear faded.
The XFADECTL system variable controls the fading of objects while you edit a reference in place.
NOTE: Objects outside of the working set are not faded unless SHADEMODE is set to a
value of 2D Wireframe during in-place reference editing.
You can select objects in xrefs for editing even if they are on a locked layer in the reference file.
When a reference object is part of the working set, you can unlock the object's layer and make
changes to the object. Only the changes made to the object are saved back to the reference file; the
xref layer remains locked in the reference file.
If you select a reference that contains OLE objects, the OLE objects are displayed but cannot be
selected for editing.
The Refedit toolbar is displayed and activated after you select which nested objects to edit. Using
the buttons on the Refedit toolbar, you can add objects to or remove objects from the working set,
and you can discard or save back changes to the reference. The Refedit toolbar is automatically
dismissed after you save back or discard changes made to the working set.
REFSET
Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference (an xref or a
block).
268 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
REFSET prompts you to add or remove objects to and from a working set while editing an xref or
a block definition in place. The working set is a set of objects extracted from a reference that can
be modified and then saved back to update the xref or block definition from within the current
drawing. Saving back changes saves changes made to the objects without actually opening the
reference drawing or re-creating the block. You can also add and remove objects by using the
options on the Modify menu or the Refedit toolbar. The Refedit toolbar is activated after a
reference is selected for editing; the toolbar is dismissed after changes to the reference are saved or
discarded.
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit {bmct proc.bmp} Add to Workset, or In-place Xref
and Block Edit {bmct proc.bmp} Remove from Workset
Command line: refset
Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing...
Enter an option [Add/Remove] <Add>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Objects that are part of the working set are visually distinct from other objects in the current
drawing. All objects in the current drawing, except objects in the working set, appear faded.
Add
Adds objects to the working set.
Select objects:
Select the objects you want to add
An object that is part of the working set is added to the reference when changes are saved back,
and the object is removed from the current drawing. The Add to Workset button on the Refedit
toolbar prompts you to add objects to the working set without using REFCLOSE.
Remove
Removes objects from the working set.
Select objects:
Select the objects you want to remove
An object that is removed from the working set is removed from the reference when changes are
saved back; the object is also removed from the current drawing. The Remove from Workset
button on the Refedit toolbar prompts you to remove objects from the working set without using
REFCLOSE.
REGEN
Regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport.
REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects. It
also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance.
View menu: Regen
Command line: regen
GTXImage CAD PLUS regenerates the current viewport.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 269
REGENALL
Regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports.
REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects.
It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance.
View menu: Regen All
Command line: regenall
GTXImage CAD PLUS regenerates all viewports and reindexes the drawing database.
REGENAUTO
Controls automatic regeneration of a drawing.
GTXImage CAD PLUS drawings regenerate automatically when REGENAUTO, a toggle, is set to
On. If you are working on a large drawing, you may want to set REGENAUTO to off to save time.
The current setting is stored by the REGENMODE system variable.
Regardless of the REGENAUTO setting, you cannot execute transparent commands that require
regeneration.
Command line: regenauto (or 'regenauto for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>:
Enter on or off, or press ENTER
On
Regenerates the drawing immediately if any suppressed regenerations exist in the queue and
continues to regenerate automatically whenever you perform an action that requires regeneration.
Off
Inhibits regeneration of the drawing until you use the REGEN or REGENALL command, or set
REGENAUTO to on.
If you perform an action that requires a regeneration and that action is irrevocable (such as thawing
layers), GTXImage CAD PLUS displays Regen queued on the command line.
If you perform an action that requires a regeneration and that action is revocable, GTXImage CAD
PLUS displays the following message:
About to regen—proceed?
If you choose OK, GTXImage CAD PLUS regenerates the drawing. If you choose Cancel,
GTXImage CAD PLUS cancels the last action that you performed and does not regenerate the
drawing.
REINIT
Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer input/output port, and program parameters file
The program parameters file (ICAD.pgp) is an ASCII text file that stores command definitions and
shortcuts. GTXImage CAD PLUS reinitializes ICAD.pgp each time a new or existing drawing is
opened. REINIT reloads ICAD.pgp during an editing session.
Command line: reinit
270 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Re-initialization .
Re-initialization Dialog Box
Defines the I/O port and the device file for reinitialization.
I/O Port Initialization
Reinitializes the I/O port for the digitizer.
Device File Initialization
Reinitializes the digitizer and the ICAD.pgp file.
RENAME
Changes the names of objects
Nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes are stored by name and called named objects.
Use RENAME to change the names of these entries. You can also use RENAME to view a list of
names of all blocks and nongraphical objects in the current drawing.
Format menu: Rename
Command line: rename
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Rename .
If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, RENAME displays prompts on the command line.
Rename Dialog Box
Lists named objects and items and specifies the old and new names for objects. You can use the
wild-card characters * and ? to rename groups of objects. You cannot rename some standard
objects, such as layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS linetype.
Named Objects
Lists named objects in a drawing by category: blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, plot
styles, text styles, UCSs, views, and tiled viewport configurations. Select the objects you want to
rename.
Items
Displays the named objects selected in the Named Objects list.
Old Name
Specifies the named object to be renamed. Enter a name or select a name from the Items list.
Rename To
Specifies the new name you want to assign to the object. Enter a name and choose Rename To to
apply the name change.
RESUME
Continues an interrupted script.
Command line: resume (or 'resume for transparent use)
You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing ESC or BACKSPACE. Any error
encountered while processing input from a script file causes the script to be suspended. If a script
is suspended while GTXImage CAD PLUS is active, you can use RESUME to continue the script.
ROTATE
Moves objects about a base point.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 271
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Rotate
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Rotate.
Command line: rotate
Current positive angle in UCS:
Select objects:
finish
ANGDIR=current
ANGBASE=current
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
Specify base point:
Specify a point (1)
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]:
enter r
Specify an angle, specify a point, or
Rotation Angle
Determines how far an object rotates around the base point.
Reference
Specifies the absolute current rotation angle and desired new rotation angle. You can use the
Reference option to straighten an object or align it with other features in a drawing.
Specify the reference angle <0>:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
Specify the new angle:
When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain parallel to the edges of the
drawing area.
RSCRIPT
Creates a script that repeats continuously.
RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script; for example, a script that must run over
and over during a trade show or in a showroom.
Command line: rscript
If RSCRIPT is the last line in a script file, the file runs continuously until interrupted by ESC.
NOTE: Consider turning off UNDO and any log files if you anticipate running the script
over a long period; otherwise, these log files continue to grow and take up increasing
amounts of disk space.
SAVE
Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name.
Command line: save
If the drawing is named, GTXImage CAD PLUS® displays the Save Drawing As dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box). If you enter a different file name, GTXImage CAD PLUS saves
a copy of the drawing under that name.
272 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If the drawing is unnamed, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Save Drawing As standard file
selection dialog box. Enter a file name to both name and save the drawing.
SAVE is available only from the command line. The Save option on the File menu or on the
Standard toolbar is QSAVE. If the drawing is named, QSAVE saves the drawing without
displaying the Save Drawing As dialog box. If the drawing is unnamed, GTXImage CAD PLUS
displays the Save Drawing As dialog box. Enter a file name to both name and save the drawing.
SAVEAS
Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing.
File menu: Save As
Command line: saveas
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box. Enter a
file name and type. You can select any of the following file types:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 Drawing (*.dwg)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R14/LT 98/LT 97 Drawing (*.dwg)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R13/LT 95 Drawing (*.dwg)
GTXImage CAD PLUS Drawing Template File (*.dwg)
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 DXF (*.dxf)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R14/LT 98/LT 97 DXF (*.dxf)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R13/LT 95 DXF (*.dxf)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R12/LT2 DXF (*.dxf)
See for a description of the limitations that result from saving to an earlier version.
GTXImage CAD PLUS saves the file under the specified file name. If the drawing is already
named, GTXImage CAD PLUS saves the drawing to the new file name. If you save the file as a
drawing template, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Template Description , where you can
provide a description for the template and set the units of measurement.
Options displays the Saveas Options , which controls various DWG and DXF settings.
Saving to Earlier Versions
Saving a drawing in Release 14/LT 98/LT 97 format is subject to the following limitations:
Hyperlinks are converted to Release 14 attached URLs.
Database links and freestanding labels are converted to Release 14 links and displayable
attributes.
Database attached labels are converted to Mtext and leader objects, and their link
information is not available. Attached labels are restored if you open the drawing in
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000.
Lineweight information is not available. Lineweights are restored if you open the
drawing in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000.
Saving a drawing in Release 13/LT 95 format is subject to the following limitations:
Lightweight polyline and hatch patterns are converted to R13 polylines and hatch
patterns.
Raster objects are displayed as bounding boxes. Raster objects are restored if the
drawing is opened in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000.
Draw order information is not applied for display or print.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 273
Xrefs that have been clipped with a boundary box are displayed in full as attached xrefs
because Release 13 does not support xref clipping. Clipping is restored if the drawing
is opened in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000.
Saving a drawing in Release 12/LT 2 format is subject to the following limitations:
Lightweight polylines and hatch patterns are converted to R12 polylines and hatch
patterns.
All solids, bodies, regions, ellipses, leaders, multilines, rays, tolerances, and xlines are
converted to lines, arcs, and circles as appropriate.
Groups, complex linetypes, OLE objects, and preview images are not displayed.
Many objects are lost if you save a drawing as Release 12 and open it later in
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000.
Template Description Dialog
Sets drawing template options.
Description
Specifies a description for the drawing template. This description is displayed when you choose
the template in the Startup dialog box or in the Create New Drawing dialog box.
Measurement
Specifies whether the drawing template uses English or metric units.
Saveas Options Dialog Box
Sets options for DWG files and for drawing interchange file output.
DWG Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box)
Controls the drawing index and display of custom objects and specifies the default file format for
saving drawings.
Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects
If you save to the Release 13 or later file type, and the drawing contains custom objects from
another application, you can select Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects. GTXImage CAD PLUS
saves images of the custom objects in the drawing file. If you do not choose this option,
GTXImage CAD PLUS saves a frame for each custom object in the drawing file.
The Save Proxy Images option sets the PROXYGRAPHICS system variable.
Index Type
Determines whether GTXImage CAD PLUS creates layer or spatial indexes when you save a
drawing. GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the indexes to improve performance during demand loading.
Using indexes may slightly increase the time required to save a drawing. If a partially open
drawing does not already contain spatial and layer indexes, this option is not available.
None
Creates neither layer nor spatial indexes when you save a drawing.
Layer
Loads only layers that are on and thawed.
Spatial
Loads only the portion of the drawing within a clipped boundary.
Layer & Spatial
274 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Optimizes performance by specifying that GTXImage CAD PLUS loads only layers that are on,
thawed, and within a clipped boundary area.
Save All Drawings As
Specifies the default file format that drawings are saved to. If you change the specified value, all
subsequent uses of SAVE and QSAVE save the drawing to the new file format. You can also set
this option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box (see OPTIONS).
You can select any of the following file types:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 Drawing (*.dwg)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R14/LT98/LT 97 Drawing (*.dwg)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R13/LT 95 Drawing (*.dwg)
GTXImage CAD PLUS Drawing Template File (*.dwt)
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 DXF (*.dxf)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R14/LT98/LT 97 DXF (*.dxf)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R13/LT 95 DXF (*.dxf)
GTXImage CAD PLUS R12/LT2 DXF (*.dxf)
DXF Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box)
Sets drawing interchange file output options.
Format
Specifies whether GTXImage CAD PLUS creates an ASCII or binary DXF file. ASCII-format
DXF files can be read with a text editor and are compatible with a wider range of applications.
Binary-format DXF files contain all of the information of an ASCII DXF file but in a more
compact form. You can read and write to binary-format files faster than to ASCII-format files. For
more information about DXF files, see the online DXF Reference.
Select Objects
Controls whether the DXF file consists of selected objects or the entire drawing. When you select
this option, the output file includes only selected objects and the block reference portions of any
included blocks. The output file does not include the block symbol tables.
Save Thumbnail Preview Image
Specifies whether an image of the drawing is displayed in the Preview area of the Select File
dialog box. Save Thumbnail Preview Image is also controlled by the RASTERPREVIEW system
variable.
Decimal Places of Accuracy
Saves the file using the specified number of bits of precision.
The default precision is adequate in most cases; however, you might need to increase this value for
certain drawings and for certain applications. If you encounter problems loading a DXF file you
create, try increasing the precision. The only disadvantage of higher precision is increased file size.
Lower precision is useful for specialized purposes but is not recommended in general.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects equally in the X, Y, and Z directions.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Scale
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 275
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Scale.
Command line: scale
Select objects:
finish
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
Specify base point:
Specify a point (1)
The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same location as the selected
objects change size (and thus move away from the stationary base point). Drag the cursor to make
the image larger or smaller.
Specify scale factor or [Reference]:
Specify a scale or enter r
Scale Factor
Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified scale. A scale factor greater than
1 enlarges the objects. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the objects.
Reference
Scales the selected objects based on a reference length and a specified new length.
Specify reference length <1>:
Specify new length:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify a distance
If the new length is longer than the reference length, the objects are enlarged.
SCRIPT
Executes a sequence of commands from a script.
Tools menu: Run Script
Command line: script (or 'script for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select Script File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Enter the file name of a script to run that script.
When you press ENTER or choose Open, the named file is opened in GTXImage CAD PLUS. If
you choose Locate, GTXImage CAD PLUS searches for the file in the paths defined by the
GTXImage CAD PLUS Support File Search Path in the Options dialog box. Find File searches
276 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
multiple paths and drives using search criteria. When you choose Find File, the Browse/Search
dialog box is displayed.
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set.
GTXImage CAD PLUS requires that objects be selected in order to be processed. The Select
Objects prompt occurs after many commands, including the SELECT command itself.
Command line: select
Select objects:
Use an object selection method
A small box, called the object selection target, replaces the crosshairs on the graphics cursor.
You can select objects individually with the pointing device, by drawing a selection window
around them, by entering coordinates, or by using one of the selection methods listed below. These
methods can be used to select objects regardless of the command that initiated the Select Objects
prompt. To view all options, enter ? on the command line.
Expects a point or
Window/Last/Crossing/BOX/ALL/Fence/WPolygon/CPolygon/Group/Add/Re
move/Multiple/Previous/Undo/AUto/SIngle
Select objects:
Specify a point or enter an option
Window
Selects all objects completely inside a rectangle defined by two points. Specifying the corners from
left to right creates a window selection. (Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing
selection.)
Specify first corner:
Specify a point (1)
Specify opposite corner:
Specify a point (2)
Last
Selects the most recently created visible object.
Crossing
Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points. A crossing selection is displayed
as dashed or otherwise highlighted to differentiate it from window selection. Specifying the
corners from right to left creates a crossing selection. (Specifying the corners from left to right
creates a window selection.)
First corner:
Other corner:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a point (1)
Specify a point (2)
General Command Reference 277
Box
Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points. If the rectangle's points
are specified from right to left, Box is equivalent to Crossing. Otherwise, Box is equivalent to
Window.
Specify first corner:
Specify a point
Specify opposite corner:
Specify a point
All
Selects all objects on thawed layers.
Fence
Selects all objects crossing a selection fence. The Fence method is similar to CPolygon except that
GTXImage CAD PLUS does not close the fence, and a fence can cross itself. Fence is not affected
by the PICKADD system variable.
First fence point:
Specify a point
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]:
point
Specify a point or enter u to undo the last
WPolygon
Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The polygon can be any shape but
cannot cross or touch itself. GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the last segment of the polygon so that
it is closed at all times. WPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.
First polygon point:
Specify a point
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]:
point
278 General Command Reference
Specify a point or enter u to undo the last
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
CPolygon
Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying points. The polygon can be
any shape but cannot cross or touch itself. GTXImage CAD PLUS draws the last segment of the
polygon so that it is closed at all times. CPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system
variable.
First polygon point:
Specify a point
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]:
point
Specify a point or enter u to undo the last
Group
Selects all objects within a specified group.
Enter group name:
Enter a name list
Add
Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the
object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default methods.
Remove
Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the current selection set using any
object selection method. To remove specific objects, hold down the SHIFT key and select the
objects.
Multiple
Specifies multiple points without highlighting the objects, thus speeding up the selection process
for complex objects. The Multiple method also selects two intersecting objects if the intersection
point is specified twice.
Previous
Selects the most recent selection set. The Previous selection set is cleared by operations that delete
objects from the drawing.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 279
GTXImage CAD PLUS keeps track of whether each selection set was specified in model space or
paper space. The Previous selection set is ignored if you switch spaces.
Undo
Cancels the selection of the object most recently added to the selection set.
Auto
Switches to automatic selection: pointing to an object selects the object. Pointing to a blank area
inside or outside an object forms the first corner of a box defined by the Box method. Auto and
Add are the default methods.
Single
Switches to the Single method: selects the first object or set of objects designated rather than
continuing to prompt for further selections.
SETVAR
Lists or changes the values of system variables.
Tools menu: Inquiry Set Variable
Command line: setvar (or 'setvar for transparent use)
Enter variable name or [?] <current>:
press ENTER
Enter a variable name, enter ?, or
Variable Name
Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set.
Enter new value for variable_name <current>:
ENTER
Enter a new value or press
You can also change the value of system variables at the Command prompt by entering the name
of the variable and its new value.
?—List Variables
Lists all system variables in the drawing and their current settings.
Enter variable(s) to list <*>:
variables
Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all
SHAPE
Inserts a shape.
Before inserting a shape, you must load the file containing the shape you want using the LOAD
command.
Command line: shape
Enter shape name or [?]:
Enter a name, or enter ?
Shape Name
Loads the shape.
Specify insertion point:
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify a height or press ENTER
Specify an angle or press ENTER
If a shape belongs to an external reference (xref) attached to the current drawing, GTXImage CAD
PLUS identifies the shape file as externally dependent. Externally dependent shapes cannot be used
in the current drawing unless they are reloaded.
280 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
?—List Shapes
Lists shapes and the files in which the shapes are defined. If you enter a question mark (?),
GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
Enter shape name(s) to list <*>:
Enter a name list or press ENTER
If you enter a name, GTXImage CAD PLUS lists the name of the file in which the shape definition
exists and ends SHAPE. If you enter an asterisk (*), GTXImage CAD PLUS lists shape names and
ends SHAPE.
Commands
LOAD makes shapes available for placement in a drawing.
SHELL
Accesses operating system commands.
Command line: shell
OS command:
Enter an operating system command or press ENTER
With SHELL, you can execute operating system commands while remaining in GTXImage CAD
PLUS. When SHELL prompts you for an OS command, you can enter most valid commands for
your OS. When the command has been executed, SHELL returns you to the GTXImage CAD
PLUS prompt.
Pressing ENTER at the OS Command prompt displays the system prompt with an extra close angle
bracket (>). You can enter operating system commands as if you were at the normal system
prompt. Enter exit to return to GTXImage CAD PLUS.
WARNING! Do not use the SHELL command to delete lock files (file name extension .??k) or
temporary files (file name extensions .ac$ or .$a). Do not use SHELL to run chkdsk, reset the
serial I/O ports, or run external programs that require disk swapping while editing a drawing stored
on a floppy disk. Load Terminate-and-Stay-Resident programs into memory before starting
GTXImage CAD PLUS.
SKETCH
Creates a series of freehand line segments.
Drawing with the SKETCH command controls a screen-based pen with a pointing device.
SKETCH is useful for entering map outlines, signatures, or other freehand drawings. Sketched
lines are not added to the drawing until they are recorded. The standard digitizer tablet button
menu is not available while SKETCH is in progress. The following information is based on the
assumption that Tablet mode is on.
Command line: sketch
Record increment <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
The record increment value defines the length of the line segments. The pointing device must be
moved a distance greater than the increment value to generate a line.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 281
GTXImage CAD PLUS captures sketching as a series of independent lines. Setting the SKPOLY
system variable to a nonzero value produces a polyline for each contiguous sequence of sketched
lines rather than multiple line objects.
Sketch. Pen eXit Quit Record Erase Connect.
pointer button
Enter an option or press a
Pen (Pick Button)
Raises and lowers the sketching pen. The pen must be raised before you can select menu items
with the pointing device.
Exit—ENTER (button 3)
Records and reports the number of temporary lines sketched and ends the command.
Quit (button 4)
Discards all temporary lines sketched since the start of SKETCH or the last use of the Record
option, and ends the command.
Record (button 2)
Records temporary lines as permanent and does not change the pen's position. Reports the number
of lines using the following prompt:
nnn lines recorded.
Erase (button 5)
Erases any portion of a temporary line and raises the pen if it is down.
Select end of delete.
Connect (button 6)
Lowers the pen to continue a sketch sequence from the endpoint of the last sketched line or last
Erase.
Connect:
Move to endpoint of line.
Lowers the pen, draws a straight line from the endpoint of the last sketched line to the pen's current
location, and returns the pen to the up position.
System Variables
SKETCHINC stores the current SKETCH record increment. SKPOLY controls whether SKETCH
draws lines as individual line objects or as polylines.
SNAP
Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals.
The points you enter with a pointing device can be locked into alignment by SNAP. You can rotate
the snap grid, set differing X and Y spacing, or choose an isometric format for the snap grid. You
can toggle Snap mode on and off with the Snap button on the status bar.
A change in the snap grid affects the cursor location when you specify a point location using the
pointing device.
The snap grid is invisible. Use SNAP with GRID to display a separate visible grid of dots. Set the
spacing of the two grids to equal or related values.
GTXImage CAD PLUS ignores Snap mode in perspective views.
Command line: snap (or 'snap for transparent use)
Specify snap spacing or [ON/OFF/Aspect/Rotate/Style/Type] <current>:
Specify a distance, enter an option, or press ENTER
Snap Spacing
282 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Activates Snap mode with the value you specify.
On
Activates Snap mode using the current resolution, rotation, and style of the snap grid.
Off
Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings.
Aspect
Specifies differing X and Y spacings for the snap grid. This option is not available if the current
snap style is Isometric.
Specify horizontal spacing <current>:
Specify vertical spacing <current>:
Specify a distance, or press ENTER
Specify a distance, or press ENTER
Rotate
Sets the origin and rotation of the snap grid. The rotation angle is measured relative to the current
UCS. You can specify a rotation angle between –90 and 90 degrees. A positive angle rotates the
grid counterclockwise about its base point. A negative angle rotates the grid clockwise.
Specify base point <current>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <current>:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
Style
Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric.
Enter snap grid type [Standard/Isometric] <current>:
ENTER
Enter s, enter i, or press
Standard
Displays a rectangular grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. X and Y spacing may
differ.
Specify snap spacing or [Aspect] <current>:
press ENTER
Specify a distance, enter a, or
Spacing
Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid.
Aspect
Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 283
Specify horizontal spacing <current>:
Specify vertical spacing <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify a distance or press ENTER
Isometric
Sets an isometric grid, in which the grid points are initially at 30-degree and 150-degree angles.
Isometric snap can be rotated but cannot have different Aspect values.
Specify vertical spacing <current>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
ISOPLANE determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane (30- and 150-degree
angles), the left isoplane (90- and 150-degree angles), or the right isoplane (30- and 90-degree
angles).
Type
Specifies the snap type.
Polar
Sets the snap to polar tracking angles.
Grid
Sets the snap to grid.
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing.
Tools menu: Spelling
Command line: spell (or 'spell for transparent use)
Select objects:
finish
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
If you enter all at the Select Objects prompt, the spelling in all objects in the Model tab as well as
the last active layout tab is checked.
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Check Spelling.
Check Spelling Dialog Box
Corrects the spelling in text objects created with TEXT and MTEXT. The Check Spelling dialog
box is displayed only if GTXImage CAD PLUS finds a dubious word in the specified text.
Current Dictionary
Displays the name of the current dictionary.
Current Word
Identifies a suspected misspelling.
Suggestions
Displays the word being checked and lists alternatives.
Ignore
Skips the current word.
284 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Ignore All
Skips all remaining words that match the current word.
Change
Replaces the current word with the word in the Suggestions box.
Change All
Replaces the current word in all selected text objects.
Add
Adds the current word to the current custom dictionary. The maximum word length is 63
characters.
Lookup
Checks the spelling of the word in the Suggestions box.
Change Dictionaries
Displays the Change Dictionaries .
Context
Displays the phrase in which GTXImage CAD PLUS located the current word.
Change Dictionaries Dialog Box
Changes to another dictionary. During the spelling check, GTXImage CAD PLUS matches the
words in the drawing to the words in the current main dictionary. Any spelling exceptions that you
identify with the Add option are stored in the custom dictionary you are using at the time of the
spelling check.
If you want to check spelling in another language, you can change to a different main dictionary.
You can also create any number of custom dictionaries and switch to them as needed.
Main Dictionary
Displays a list of language-specific dictionaries from which you can choose a different main
dictionary.
Custom Dictionary
Displays the name of the current custom dictionary. You can enter the name of a different custom
dictionary.
Browse
Displays the Select Custom Dictionary dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which
you can select a custom dictionary file to use. The selected dictionary file is used by GTXImage
CAD PLUS until another file is selected.
Custom Dictionary Words
Displays a list of the words that currently exist in the specified custom dictionary. You can add
words to or delete words from this list.
Add
Adds the word that you enter in the box to the current custom dictionary. The maximum length is
63 characters.
Delete
Deletes the word you enter in the box or select from the custom dictionary.
SPLINE
Creates a quadratic or cubic spline (NURBS) curve.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 285
SPLINE fits a smooth curve to a sequence of points within a specified tolerance. GTXImage CAD
PLUS uses NURBS (nonuniform rational B-splines) mathematics, which stores and defines a class
of curve and surface data.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Spline
Command line: spline
Specify first point or [Object]:
Specify a point or enter o
First Point
Creates a spline using points you specify.
Specify next point:
Specify a point
Enter points until you have defined the spline curve. After you enter two points, GTXImage CAD
PLUS displays the following prompt:
Specify next point or [Close/Fit Tolerance] <Start tangent>:
enter an option, or press ENTER
Specify a point,
Next Point
Continuing to enter points adds additional spline curve segments until you press ENTER. Enter
undo to remove the last point specified. Once you press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts
you to specify the start tangent for the spline curve. See .
Close
Closes the spline curve by defining the last point as coincident with the first and making it tangent
to the joint.
Specify tangent:
Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify a point to define the tangent vector or use the Tan and Perp object snap modes to make the
spline tangent or perpendicular to existing objects.
Fit Tolerance
Changes the tolerance for fitting of the current spline curve. The spline curve is redefined such that
it fits through the existing points according to the new tolerance. You can repeatedly change the fit
tolerance, but doing so changes the fit tolerance for all the control points regardless of the control
point that is selected.
Specify fit tolerance <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
If you set the tolerance to 0, the spline curve passes through the fit points. Entering a tolerance
greater than 0 allows the spline curve to pass through the fit points within the specified tolerance.
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the previous prompt.
286 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Start Tangent
Defines the tangency for the first and last points of the spline curve.
Specify start tangent:
Specify a point or press ENTER
The Specify Start Tangent prompt specifies the tangency of the spline curve at the first point.
Specify end tangent:
Specify a point or press ENTER
The Specify End Tangent prompt specifies the tangency of the spline curve at the last point.
If you specify tangency at both endpoints of the spline, you can enter a point or use the Tan and
Perp object snap modes to make the spline tangent or perpendicular to existing objects. If you
press ENTER, GTXImage CAD PLUS calculates default tangents.
Object
Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines and (depending on
the setting of the DELOBJ system variable) deletes the polylines.
Select objects to convert to splines...
Select objects:
you finish
Select 2D or 3D spline-fit polylines and press ENTER when
SPLINEDIT
Edits a spline object.
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Spline
Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Spline Edit.
Command line: splinedit
Select spline:
If you select a spline that was created with SPLINE, fit points are displayed in the grip color. If
you select a spline that was created with PLINE, control points are displayed in the grip color.
Enter an option [Fit Data/Close/Move vertex/Refine/rEverse/Undo]:
If the selected spline is closed, the Close option changes to Open. If the selected spline has no fit
data, the Fit Data option is not available. Fit data consists of all fit points, the fit tolerance, and the
tangents associated with splines created with SPLINE.
A spline can lose its fit data if you take any of these steps:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 287
Use the Purge option while editing fit data.
Refine the spline.
Fit the spline to a tolerance and move its control vertices.
Fit the spline to a tolerance and open or close it.
SPLINEDIT automatically converts splined polylines to spline objects. A splined polyline is
converted even if you select it and immediately exit SPLINEDIT.
Fit Data
Edits fit data using the following options:
Enter a fit data option
[Add/Close/Delete/Move/Purge/Tangents/toLerance/eXit] <eXit>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
NOTE: If the selected spline is closed, GTXImage CAD PLUS replaces the Close option with
the Open option.
Add
Adds fit points to a spline.
Specify control point <exit>:
Specify a control point or press ENTER
Specify new point <exit>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify new point <exit>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
When you select a point, GTXImage CAD PLUS highlights it and the next point and interprets the
new point to go between the highlighted points. Use the Undo option to remove the last point
added. Selecting the last point on an open spline highlights only that point, and GTXImage CAD
PLUS adds the new point after the last. If you select the first point on an open spline, you have the
option of placing the new point before or after the first point.
Specify new point or [After/Before] <exit>:
or press ENTER
Specify new point <exit>:
Specify a point, enter an option,
Specify a point or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS adds the point and refits the spline through the new set of points.
Close
Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous (smooth) at its endpoints. If the spline's
start point and endpoint are the same, this option makes the spline tangent continuous at both
points.
288 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Open
Opens a closed spline. If the spline's start point and endpoint were the same before you used the
Close option to make it tangent continuous at both points, the Open option returns the spline to its
original state. The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose their tangent continuity
(smoothness).
If the spline was open (its start point and endpoint were not the same) before you used the Close
option to make it tangent continuous where the start point and endpoint meet, this option returns
the spline to its original open state and removes tangent continuity.
Delete
Removes fit points from a spline and refits the spline through the remaining points.
Specify control point <exit>:
Specify a control point or press ENTER
Move
Moves fit points to a new location.
Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] <N>:
point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Specify a
New Location
Moves the selected point to the new location you specify. GTXImage CAD PLUS repeats the
previous prompt.
Next
Moves selection to the next point.
Previous
Moves selection to the previous point.
Select Point
Selects a point from the set of fit points.
Specify fit point <exit>:
Specify a fit point or press ENTER
Exit
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 289
Returns to the Enter a Fit Data Option prompt.
Purge
Removes a spline's fit data from the drawing database. After purging the spline's fit data,
GTXImage CAD PLUS redisplays the main SPLINEDIT prompt without the Fit Data option.
Tangents
Edits the start and end tangents of a spline.
Specify start tangent or [System default]:
press ENTER
Specify a point, enter an option, or
Specify end tangent or [System default]:
press ENTER
Specify a point, enter an option, or
If the spline is closed, the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or [System Default].
The System Default option calculates the default tangents at the ends.
You can specify a point or use the Tan or Perp object snap mode to make the spline tangential or
perpendicular to existing objects.
Tolerance
Changes the tolerance for fitting of the current spline curve. The spline curve is redefined such that
it fits through the existing points according to the new tolerance.
Enter fit tolerance <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
If you set the tolerance to 0, the spline curve passes through the fit points. Entering a tolerance
greater than 0 allows the spline curve to pass through the fit points within the specified tolerance.
Exit
Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt.
Close
Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous (smooth) at its endpoints. If the spline's
start point and endpoint are the same, this option makes the spline tangent continuous at both
points.
Open
Opens a closed spline. If the spline's start point and endpoint were the same before you used the
Close option to make it tangent continuous at both points, the Open option returns the spline to its
original state. The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose their tangent continuity
(smoothness).
If the spline was open (its start point and endpoint were not the same) before you used the Close
option to make it tangent continuous where the start point and endpoint meet, this option returns
the spline to its original open state and removes tangent continuity.
Move Vertex
Relocates a spline's control vertices and purges the fit points.
Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] <N>:
point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Specify a
New Location
290 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Moves the selected point to the new location you specify.
After you specify a new location for the selected point, GTXImage CAD PLUS recalculates and
displays the spline with a new set of control points.
Next
Moves selection to the next point. The point marker does not wrap around from the end to the start
of the spline, even if the spline is closed.
Previous
Moves selection to the previous point. The point marker does not wrap around from the start to the
end of the spline, even if the spline is closed.
Select Point
Selects a point from the set of control points.
Specify fit point <exit>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
Exit
Returns to the main Move Vertex prompt.
Refine
Fine-tunes a spline definition.
Enter a refine option [Add control point/Elevate order/Weight/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Add Control Point
Increases the number of control points that control a portion of a spline.
Specify a point on the spline <exit>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS adds a new control point close to the point you select, between the two
control points affecting that portion of the spline.
Elevate Order
Increases the order of the spline.
Enter new order <current>:
Enter an integer or press ENTER
Entering a value greater than the current value increases the number of control points uniformly
across the spline for more localized control. The maximum value for order is 26.
Weight
Changes the weight at various spline control points. A larger weight value pulls the spline closer to
the control point.
Enter new weight (current = current) or [Next/Previous/Select point/eXit] <N>:
Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER
New Weight
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 291
Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value at the selected control point. The larger the
integer value, the more the spline is pulled toward the control point.
Next
Moves selection to the next point. The point marker does not wrap around from the end to the start
of the spline, even if the spline is closed.
Previous
Moves selection to the previous point. The point marker does not wrap around from the start to the
end of the spline, even if the spline is closed.
Select Point
Selects a point from the set of control points.
Specify fit point <exit>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
Exit
Returns to the main Refine prompt.
Exit
Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt.
Reverse
Reverses the spline's direction. This option is primarily for use by applications.
Undo
Cancels the last editing action.
STATUS
Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents.
Tools menu: Inquiry
Status
Command line: status (or 'status for transparent use)
All coordinates and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified by UNITS.
STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing. This includes graphical objects
such as arcs and polylines, and nongraphical objects such as layers and linetypes, and block
definitions. When used at the DIM prompt, STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all
dimensioning system variables.
In addition, STATUS displays the following information.
Model or Paper Space Limits Are
Displays the drawing limits defined by LIMITS. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the
limit's lower-left corner, stored in the LIMMIN system variable. The second line shows the XY
coordinate of the limit's upper-right corner, stored in the LIMMAX system variable. The notation
Off to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that limits checking is set to 0.
Model or Paper Space Uses
Displays the drawing extents, which includes all objects in the database and can exceed the
drawing limits. The first line shows the XY coordinate of the lower-left corner of the extents. The
second line shows the XY coordinate of the upper-right corner. The notation Over to the right of the
Y coordinate value indicates that the drawing extends outside the drawing limits.
Display Shows
292 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Lists the portion of the drawing extents visible in the current viewport. The first line shows the XY
coordinate of the display's lower-left corner. The second line shows the XY coordinate of the
upper-right corner.
Insertion Base Is
Displays the insertion point of the drawing, stored in the INSBASE system variable and expressed
as an X,Y,Z coordinate.
Snap Resolution Is
Displays the snap spacing in the X and Y directions, stored in the SNAPUNIT system variable.
Grid Spacing Is
Displays the grid spacing in the X and Y directions, stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable.
Current Space
Shows whether model space or paper space is active.
Current Layer
Lists the current layer of the drawing, stored by the CLAYER system variable.
Current Color
Lists the current color, stored by the CECOLOR system variable.
Current Linetype
Lists the current linetype, stored by the CELTYPE system variable.
Current Lineweight
Lists the current lineweight, stored by the CELWEIGHT system variable.
Current Plot Style
Lists the current plot style, stored by the CPLOTSTYLE system variable.
Current Elevation
Lists the current elevation of the drawing, stored in the ELEVATION system variable.
Thickness
Lists the current thickness, stored in the THICKNESS system variable.
Fill, Grid, Ortho, Qtext, Snap, Tablet
Shows whether these modes are on or off.
Object Snap Modes
Lists the running object snap modes specified by OSNAP.
Free Dwg Disk Space
Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive specified for GTXImage CAD PLUS
temporary files.
Free Physical Memory
Lists the amount of installed memory free on your system.
Free Swap File Space
Lists the amount of free space in your swap file.
STRETCH
Moves or stretches objects.
Modify toolbar:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 293
Modify menu: Stretch
Command line: stretch
Select objects: Use the cpolygon or crossing object selection method (1 and
2) and press ENTER when you finish
GTXImage CAD PLUS stretches arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, polyline segments, rays, and splines
that cross the selection window. STRETCH moves the endpoints that lie inside the window,
leaving those outside the window unchanged. STRETCH also moves vertices of traces and 2D
solids that lie inside the window and leaves those outside unchanged. Polylines are handled
segment by segment, as if they were primitive lines or arcs. STRETCH does not modify polyline
width, tangent, or curve-fitting information.
GTXImage CAD PLUS moves any objects entirely within the window or polygon, as if you were
using MOVE.
Specify base point or displacement:
Specify second point of displacement:
Specify a point (3) or press ENTER
Specify a point (4) or press ENTER
If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from the base point to the
second point. If you press ENTER at the Second Point of Displacement prompt, STRETCH treats
the first point as the X,Y displacement value.
STYLE
Creates or modifies named styles and sets the current style for text in your drawing.
GTXImage CAD PLUS provides one standard text style. If you want to create a new style or
modify an existing style, use STYLE. STYLE also sets the current style used when you create text
with TEXT and MTEXT.
If you change the orientation or font file of an existing text style, all text objects with that style use
the new values when the drawing is regenerated. If REGENAUTO is on, the change causes an
automatic regeneration.
Format menu: Text Style
Command line: style (or 'style for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Text Style .
If you enter -style at the Command prompt, STYLE displays prompts on the .
294 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Text Style Dialog Box
Creates and modifies text styles.
Style Name
Displays text style names, adds new styles, and renames and deletes existing styles. The list
contains defined style names and displays the current style by default. To change the current style,
select another style from the list, or choose New to create a new style.
New
Displays the New Text Style dialog box and automatically supplies the name "stylen" (where n is
the number of the supplied style) for the current settings. You can accept the default or enter a
name and choose OK to apply the current style settings to the new style name.
Rename
Displays the Rename Text Style dialog box. The text style listed is renamed when you enter a new
name and choose OK.
You can also use RENAME to change the name of an existing text style. If any existing text object
uses the old style name, the text object takes the new name automatically.
Delete
Deletes a text style. Select a name from the list to make it current, and then choose Delete.
Font
Changes the style's font.
Font Name
Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all GTXImage CAD PLUS
compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the GTXImage CAD PLUS Fonts directory. When you select a
name from the list, GTXImage CAD PLUS reads the file for the specified font. The file's character
definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by another text style. You can
define several styles that use the same font.
Font Style
Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. When Use Big Font is selected,
this option changes to Big Font Name and is used to select a Big Font file name.
Height
Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you enter 0.0, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts
for the text height each time you enter text using this style. Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets
the text height for this style. TrueType fonts can be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts
with the same height setting.
NOTE: The text height you specify may not be accurately represented by uppercase letters in
TrueType fonts supplied with GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Use Big Font
Specifies an Asian-language Big Font file. Use Big Font is available only if you specify an SHX
file under Font Name. Only SHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 295
Effects
Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and obliquing angle and
whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or vertically aligned.
Upside Down
Displays the characters upside down.
Backwards
Displays the characters backwards.
Vertical
Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the selected font supports
dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType® fonts.
Width Factor
Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value
greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Angle
Sets the obliquing angle of the text. Entering a value between –85 and 85 makes the text oblique.
NOTE: TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear bold on the
screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts are plotted as specified
by applied character formatting.
Preview
Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify the effects. To
change the sample text, enter characters in the box below the character preview image.
Preview
Updates the sample text in the character preview image according to any changes you've made in
the dialog box.
NOTE: Height has no effect in the character preview image because a very large text height
might show little or no text.
Apply
Applies style changes made in the dialog box to the text of the current style in the drawing.
Close
Applies changes to the current style. Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of
the options under Style Name. Changing, renaming, or deleting the current style and creating a
new style are actions that take place immediately and cannot be canceled.
Cancel
Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of the options under Style Name.
STYLESMANAGER
Displays the Plot Style Manager.
296 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
File menu: Plot Style Manager
Command line: stylesmanager
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Plot Style Manager. In the Plot Style Manager, you can
double-click the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table to add plot style tables. Right-click on a plot style table
(STB or CTB file) to start the Plot Style Table Editor. For information about the Plot Style Table
Editor, start Help, choose the Contents tab and navigate to the Plotting with GTXImage CAD
PLUS Plotting Editors Help topic.
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard
The Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard lets you add new plot style tables. Plot style tables contain and
define plot styles. When complete, the wizard produces an STB or CTB file depending on the type
of table you are creating. You can edit these files in the Plot Style Table Editor.
You can create a plot style table from scratch, use an existing plot style table as a starting point,
use settings from your GTXImage CAD PLUS Release 14 CFG file, or use settings from a PCP or
PC2 file. You can create either a named plot style table or a color-dependent plot style table. With
a named plot style table, you can add and define plot styles as you like; the file name has the
extension .stb. A color-dependent plot style table creates 255 plot styles based on color; the file
name has the extension .ctb. You can specify whether you want to use a plot style table for new
drawings or for drawings created with previous releases of GTXImage CAD PLUS when they are
saved in GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000.
SYSWINDOWS
Arranges windows.
SYSWINDOWS is equivalent to the standard Window menu options in Windows applications. It
is intended for use with external applications that share the GTXImage CAD PLUS window.
Command line: syswindows
Enter an option [Cascade/tile Horizontal/tile Vertical/Arrange icons]:
an option
Enter
Cascade
Overlaps windows, leaving title bars visible.
Tile Horizontal
Arranges windows in horizontal, nonoverlapping tiles.
Tile Vertical
Arranges windows in vertical, nonoverlapping tiles.
Arrange Icons
Arranges the window icons.
TEXT
Displays text on screen as it is entered.
You can use TEXT to enter several lines of text that you can rotate, justify, and resize. As you type
at the Enter Text prompt, the text you are typing is displayed on the screen. Each line of text is a
separate object. To end a line and begin another, press ENTER after entering characters at the
Enter Text prompt. To end TEXT, press ENTER without entering any characters at the Enter Text
prompt.
By applying a style to the text, you can use a variety of character patterns or fonts that you can
stretch, compress, make oblique, mirror, or align in a vertical column.
Draw menu: Text Single Line
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 297
Command line: text
Current text style: current Current text height: current
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]:
Specify a point or enter an option
If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing ENTER at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt
skips the prompts for height and rotation angle and immediately displays the Enter Text prompt.
The text is placed directly beneath the previous line of text. The point specified at the prompt is
also stored as the Insertion Point object snap.
Start Point
Specifies a start point for the text object.
Specify height <current>:
Specify a point (1), enter a value, or press ENTER
The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style does not have a fixed height.
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Specify an angle or press ENTER
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
Justify
Controls justification of the text.
Enter an option
[Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]:
You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text prompt.
Align
Specifies both text height and text orientation by designating the endpoints of the baseline.
Specify first endpoint of text baseline:
Specify second endpoint of text baseline:
Enter text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify a point (2)
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their height. The longer the text string, the
shorter the characters.
Fit
Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height.
Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify first endpoint of text baseline:
Specify second endpoint of text baseline:
Specify a point (1)
Specify a point (2)
Specify height <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The height is the distance in drawing units that the uppercase letters extend from the baseline.
Designated text height is the distance between the start point and a point you specify. The longer
the text string, the narrower the characters. The height of the characters remains constant.
298 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Center
Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline, which you specify with a point.
Specify center point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The rotation angle specifies the orientation of the text baseline with respect to the center point.
You can designate the angle by specifying a point. The text baseline runs from the start point
toward the specified point. If you specify a point to the left of the center point, GTXImage CAD
PLUS draws the text upside down.
Middle
Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical center of the height you specify.
Middle-aligned text does not rest on the baseline.
Specify middle point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The Middle option differs from the MC option in that it uses the midpoint of all text, including
descenders. The MC option uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters.
Right
Right-justifies the text at the baseline, which you specify with a point.
Specify right endpoint of text baseline:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
TL (Top Left)
Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text
only.
Specify top-left point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
General Command Reference 299
TC (Top Center)
Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text
only.
Specify top-center point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
TR (Top Right)
Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented
text only.
Specify top-right point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
ML (Middle Left)
Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented
text only.
Specify middle-left point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
MC (Middle Center)
Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the middle of the text. Available for horizontally
oriented text only.
Specify middle-center point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height of text <current>:
300 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
The MC option differs from the Middle option in that it uses the midpoint of the height of
uppercase letters. The Middle option uses the midpoint of all text, including descenders.
MR (Middle Right)
Right-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally
oriented text only.
Specify middle-right point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
BL (Bottom Left)
Left-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify bottom-left point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
BC (Bottom Center)
Centers text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify bottom-center point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
BR (Bottom Right)
Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text
only.
Specify bottom-right point of text:
Specify a point (1)
Specify height <current>:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 301
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
Enter text:
Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
Style
Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text characters. Text you create
uses the current text style.
Enter style name or [?] <current>:
text styles
Enter a text style name or enter ? to list all
Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other parameters.
Creating Special Unicode Characters
When entering text, you can create special characters, including the degree symbol, PLUS/minus
tolerance symbol, and the diameter symbol, by entering the following Unicode character strings:
\U+00B0
Degrees symbol (°)
\U+00B1
Tolerance symbol (±)
\U+2205
Diameter symbol (Ø)
See "Unicode Font Descriptions" in chapter 3, "Shapes, Fonts, and PostScript Support," in the
Customization Guide and appendix G, "Using Unicode Fonts."
Using Control Codes and Special Characters
Besides using Unicode characters for entering special characters, you can also overscore text,
underscore text, or insert a special character by including control information in the text string. Use
a pair of percent signs to introduce each control sequence.
You can use this control code with standard GTXImage CAD PLUS text fonts and PostScript
fonts:
%%nnn
Draws character number nnn.
You can use these control codes with standard GTXImage CAD PLUS text fonts only:
%%o
Toggles overscoring on and off.
%%u
Toggles underscoring on and off.
%%d
302 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Draws degrees symbol (°).
%%p
Draws PLUS/minus tolerance symbol (±).
%%c
Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol (Ø).
%%%
Draws a single percent sign.
Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn off automatically at the
end of the text string.
You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using the PostScript fonts.
However, if you use PSOUT to create a PostScript file containing characters created with this
method, the characters are displayed as outlines in the file.
A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is provided in the
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000/Sample directory.
Using the Euro Symbol
You can use the Euro symbol with .shx fonts and their TrueType equivalent fonts shipped with
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000. If your keyboard does not contain a Euro symbol, hold down
CTRL+ALT and enter 0128 on the numeric keypad.
TEXTSCR
Opens the GTXImage CAD PLUS text window.
View menu: Display Text Window
Command line: textscr (or 'textscr for transparent use)
TEXTSCR displays the GTXImage CAD PLUS command line in a separate window. You can
press F2 to toggle between the drawing area and the text window. GTXImage CAD PLUS ignores
this command on dual-screen systems.
TIME
Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing.
Tools menu: Inquiry Time
Command line: time (or 'time for transparent use)
TIME displays the following information:
Current time:
Wednesday, September 03, 1997 at 9:54:51:406 AM
Times for this drawing:
Created:
Friday, July 25, 1994 at 1:21:36:203 AM
Last Updated: Wednesday, September 03, 1997 at 9:49:19:208 AM
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 303
Total Editing Time:
0 days 06:44:10.520
Elapsed Timer (on):
0 days 00:07:05.312
Next Automatic Save In: 0 days 01:59:15.570
Current Time
Displays current date and time. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays all times to the nearest
millisecond using a 24-hour clock.
Created
Displays date and time the current drawing was created.
Last Updated
Displays the date and time of the latest update of the current drawing. This date and time is
initially the drawing creation time. GTXImage CAD PLUS revises it with each use of END or
SAVE and applies the default file name.
Total Editing Time
Displays time spent editing the current drawing. This timer is updated by GTXImage CAD PLUS
and cannot be reset or stopped. Plotting time is not included in the total editing time. If you quit the
editing session without saving the drawing, the time you spent in the editing session is not added to
the accumulated editing time.
Elapsed Timer
Runs as another timer while GTXImage CAD PLUS is running. You can turn it on and off or reset
it whenever you like.
Next Automatic Save In
Indicates time remaining until the next automatic save. You can set the time interval using
OPTIONS or the SAVETIME system variable.
Enter option [Display/On/OFF/Reset]:
Enter an option or press ENTER
Display
Repeats the display with updated times.
On
Starts the user elapsed timer if it was off.
Off
Stops the user elapsed timer.
Reset
Resets the user elapsed timer to 0 days 00:00:00.000.
TOLERANCE
Creates geometric tolerances.
Geometric tolerances define the maximum allowable variations of form or profile, orientation,
location, and runout from the exact geometry in a drawing. They specify the required accuracy for
proper function and fit of the objects you draw in GTXImage CAD PLUS.
GTXImage CAD PLUS adds geometric tolerances to a drawing in feature control frames. These
are frames divided into compartments that contain the geometric characteristic symbols followed
by one or more tolerance values. Where applicable, the tolerance is preceded by the diameter
symbol and followed by datums and symbols for their material conditions.
Dimension toolbar:
304 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Draw menu: Dimension Tolerance
Command line: tolerance
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Geometric Tolerance.
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box
Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame.
After you select geometric characteristic symbols, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box closes and
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays this prompt:
Enter tolerance location:
Specify a location
GTXImage CAD PLUS places the feature control frame at the specified location.
Sym
Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the Symbol . The dialog box
is displayed when you select one of the Sym boxes.
Tolerance 1
Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance value indicates the
amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate from a perfect form. You can insert a
diameter symbol before the tolerance value and a material condition symbol after it.
The first Tolerance 1 box inserts a diameter symbol (Ø) in front of the tolerance value.
Click the box to insert the diameter symbol.
The second Tolerance 1 box creates the tolerance value. Enter a value in the box.
The third Tolerance 1 box displays the Material Condition , in which you select a
modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and
the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.
Select the symbol you want to use. GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the Material Condition dialog
box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the first tolerance value in the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box.
Tolerance 2
Creates the second tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance value indicates the
amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate from a perfect form. You can insert a
diameter symbol before the tolerance value and a material condition symbol after it.
The first Tolerance 2 box inserts a diameter symbol (Ø) in front of the tolerance value.
Click the box to insert the diameter symbol.
The second Tolerance 2 box creates the tolerance value. Enter a value in the box.
The third Tolerance 2 box displays the Material Condition , in which you select a
modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and
the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 305
Select the symbol you want to use. GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the Material Condition dialog
box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the second tolerance value in the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box.
Datum 1
Creates the primary datum reference in the feature control frame. The datum reference can consist
of a value and a modifying symbol. A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference used to
establish the tolerance zone for a feature.
Datum
Creates the datum reference value. Enter a value in the box.
MC
Displays the Material Condition , in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as
modifiers to the datum reference.
Select the symbol you want to use. GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the Material Condition dialog
box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the primary datum reference in the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box.
Datum 2
Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary
datum reference.
Datum
Creates the datum reference value. Enter a value in the box.
MC
Displays the Material Condition , in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as
modifiers to the datum reference.
Select the symbol you want to use. GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the Material Condition dialog
box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the secondary datum reference in the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box.
Datum 3
Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary
datum reference.
Datum
Creates the datum reference value. Enter a value in the box.
MC
Displays the Material Condition , in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as
modifiers to the datum reference.
Select the symbol you want to use. GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the Material Condition dialog
box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the tertiary datum reference in the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box.
306 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Height
Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame. A projected tolerance zone
controls the variation in height of the extended portion of a fixed perpendicular part and refines the
tolerance to that specified by positional tolerances. Enter a value in the box.
Projected Tolerance Zone
Inserts a projected tolerance zone symbol,
, after the projected tolerance zone value.
Datum Identifier
Creates a datum-identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter. A datum is a theoretically
exact geometric reference from which you can establish the location and tolerance zones of other
features. A point, line, plane, cylinder, or other geometry can serve as a datum. Enter the letter in
the box.
Symbol Dialog Box
Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location, orientation, form, profile, and runout.
Select the symbol you want to use. GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the dialog box and inserts the
symbol into the Sym text box in the Geometric Tolerance . The following table describes the
symbols.
Geometric
characteristic
symbols
Symbol
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Characteristic
Type
Position
Location
Concentricity or
coaxiality
Location
Symmetry
Location
General Command Reference 307
Parallelism
Orientation
Perpendicularity
Orientation
Angularity
Orientation
Cylindricity
Form
Flatness
Form
Circularity or roundness
Form
Straightness
Form
Profile of a surface
Profile
Profile of a line
Profile
Circular runout
Runout
Total runout
Runout
NOTE: If DIMGAP is set to 0, some tolerance symbols are not displayed properly
(horizontal lines in the symbol overlap the edges of the feature control frame).
Material Condition Dialog Box
Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and
the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.
Select the symbol you want to use. GTXImage CAD PLUS closes the Material Condition dialog
box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the first or second tolerance value in the Geometric
Tolerance .
TOOLBAR
Displays, hides, and customizes toolbars.
View menu: Toolbars
Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.
Command line: toolbar
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Toolbars .
If you enter -toolbar at the Command prompt, TOOLBAR displays prompts on the command line.
Toolbars Dialog Box
Defines the display of toolbars. When this dialog box is displayed, you can right-click any toolbar
button in the GTXImage CAD PLUS interface to display either the Button Properties or the Flyout
Properties , depending on whether the button you right-click contains a flyout toolbar.
Toolbars
308 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Displays or hides toolbars. To turn a toolbar on or off, select the box to the left of its name. An X
in the box indicates that the toolbar is on.
Menu Group
Displays the menu group to which the listed toolbars belong. If the toolbars you want to display,
hide, or edit belong to a menu group other than GTXImage CAD PLUS, you need to select that
menu group from the list.
New
Displays the New Toolbar , in which you can create a new, empty toolbar. After you create the
toolbar, choose Customize to add buttons to the toolbar.
Delete
Removes the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list.
Customize
Displays the Customize Toolbars , in which you can move or copy button icons to toolbars.
Properties
Displays the Toolbar Properties , in which you can rename the selected toolbar or modify the help
text that is displayed on the status bar when you hold your pointer over the toolbar.
Large Buttons
Controls the size at which buttons are displayed. The default display size is 16 × 16 pixels. Turning
on Large Buttons displays icons at 32 × 32 pixels.
Show ToolTips
Controls whether tooltips are displayed when you move your cursor over an icon in the toolbar.
New Toolbar Dialog Box
Creates a new toolbar.
Toolbar Name
Specifies a name for the new toolbar.
Menu Group
Specifies a menu group for the new toolbar. See chapter 4, "Custom Menus," in the Customization
Guide.
Customize Toolbars Dialog Box
Displays all button icons contained in the selected button category. Click any icon and drag it
outside the dialog box and onto a displayed toolbar in the GTXImage CAD PLUS interface to add
the button to that toolbar. You can also drag buttons from one toolbar to another while this dialog
box is displayed. To copy, rather than move, buttons across toolbars, hold down CTRL while you
drag.
When this dialog box is displayed, you can right-click any toolbar button in the GTXImage CAD
PLUS interface to display either the Button Properties or the Flyout Properties , depending on
whether the button you right-click contains a flyout toolbar.
Toolbar Properties Dialog Box
Provides information about the toolbar and changes the toolbar name and help text.
Name
Specifies the toolbar name.
Help
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 309
Specifies the text displayed at the left end of the status bar when the pointing device moves over
the toolbar.
Alias
Displays the toolbar name that GTXImage CAD PLUS uses internally. The name includes a prefix
that represents the toolbar's menu group, followed by the toolbar name as it appears in the
ICAD.mnu file. The toolbar alias is used in the TOOLBAR command to identify the toolbar.
Button Properties Dialog Box
Sets the properties of individual toolbar buttons.
Name
Specifies the button name. If Show ToolTips is selected in the Toolbars , the name is displayed
when the pointing device moves over the button.
Help
Specifies the text displayed at the left end of the status bar when the pointing device moves over
the button.
Macro
Controls the command or set of commands associated with a button icon. Enter a command in the
box. Use a semicolon (;) to separate a series of commands. See chapter 4, "Custom Menus," in the
Customization Guide.
Button Icon
Specifies the icon associated with a button. Select an icon from the list, or choose Edit to modify
an icon.
Edit
Displays the , in which you can customize an existing icon or create a new one.
Flyout Properties Dialog Box
Sets the properties of toolbar flyouts.
Name
Specifies the flyout name. If Show ToolTips is selected in the Toolbars , the name is displayed
when the pointing device moves over the flyout.
Help
Specifies the text displayed at the left end of the status bar when the pointing device moves over
the flyout.
Associated Toolbar
Specifies the toolbar associated with the flyout.
Show This Button's Icon
Displays the flyout icon selected under Button Icon. If Show This Button's Icon is selected,
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses this icon for the flyout. Otherwise, the flyout icon displayed is the
icon of the last flyout selected.
Button Icon
Specifies the icon associated with a button. Select an icon from the list, or choose Edit to modify
an icon.
Edit
Displays the , in which you can customize an existing icon or create a new one.
310 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Button Editor
Modifies or creates buttons.
Button Image
Displays the button at its actual size.
Editing Tools
Pencil
Edits one pixel at a time in the selected color. Drag the pointing device to edit several pixels at
once.
Line
Creates lines in the selected color. Click and drag the pointing device to draw the line.
Circle
Creates circles in the selected color. Click and drag the pointing device to draw the circle.
Erase
Sets pixels to white.
Editing Area
Provides a close-up view of the button icon for pixel editing.
Color Palette
Sets the current color.
Clear
Clears the editing area.
Open
Opens an existing button icon for editing. Button icons are stored as BMP files.
Undo
Undoes the last action.
Save
Saves the customized button icon as a BMP file.
Close
Closes the current button icon.
Grid
Turns on the grid. Each grid dot represents one pixel.
TRANSPARENCY
Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 311
Several image file formats allow images with transparent pixels. Setting image transparency to On
allows GTXImage CAD PLUS to recognize the transparent pixels so that graphics on the screen
show through those pixels. Transparency is available for both bitonal and nonbitonal (Alpha RGB
or gray-scale) images. By default, images are attached with transparency turned off. Transparency
is controlled on a per-object basis.
TRANSPARENCY supports the PICKFIRST system variable, and you can select multiple images.
Objects that are not images are filtered from the selection set.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object Image Transparency
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Image
Transparency.
Command line: transparency
Select image(s):
Enter transparency mode [On/Off] <current>:
ENTER
Enter an option or press
On
Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible.
Off
Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the image are not visible.
TRIM
Trims objects at a cutting edge defined by other objects.
Objects that can be trimmed include arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D polylines, rays,
splines, floating viewports, regions, text, and xlines.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Trim
Command line: trim
Current settings: Projection = current Edge = current
Select cutting edges...
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
finish selecting objects
Select the objects that define the cutting edges at which you want to trim an object or press
ENTER to select all objects as potential cutting edges. TRIM projects the cutting edges and the
objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
option, or press ENTER
312 General Command Reference
Select an object, enter an
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
When GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to select boundary edges, you can press ENTER and
select the object to be trimmed. GTXImage CAD PLUS trims the object against the nearest
candidate.
Object to Trim
Specifies the object to trim. GTXImage CAD PLUS repeats the prompt for the object to trim so
that you can trim multiple objects. Pressing ENTER ends the command.
If the selection point is between the end of the object and a cutting edge, TRIM removes the
portion of the object that extends beyond the cutting edge. If the selection point is between two
cutting edges, the portion between is deleted and the portions outside are preserved, turning one
object into two.
GTXImage CAD PLUS trims 2D polylines at their center lines. If the polyline is tapered, the width
at the cutting edge is the same after trimming. The ends of a wide polyline are always square.
Cutting a wide polyline at an angle causes portions of the end to extend beyond the cutting edge.
Trimming a spline-fit polyline removes the curve-fit information and changes the spline-fit
segments into ordinary polyline segments.
Project
Specifies the projection GTXImage CAD PLUS uses when trimming objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>:
press ENTER
Enter an option or
None
Specifies no projection. GTXImage CAD PLUS trims only objects that intersect with the cutting
edge in 3D space.
UCS
Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS. GTXImage CAD PLUS trims objects
that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 313
View
Specifies projection along the current view direction.
Edge
Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object's implied edge or only to an object that
intersects it in 3D space.
Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] <current>:
an option or press ENTER
Enter
Extend
Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space.
No Extend
Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space.
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM.
U
Reverses the most recent operation.
314 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Caution: There is a limit of 5 RASTER undo levels. Invoking U more than five times on raster
commands may have the result of returning the affected image to its ORIGINAL
APPEARANCE.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Undo
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area
and choose Undo.
Command line: u
You can enter u as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time, until the drawing is as it
was when you began the current editing session.
When an operation cannot be undone, GTXImage CAD PLUS® displays the command name but
performs no action. Operations external to the current drawing, such as plotting or writing to a file,
cannot be undone.
If you undo a command during which mode toggles or transparent commands were used, the
effects of those commands are undone along with the main command.
The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1.
UCS
Manages user coordinate systems.
The user coordinate system (UCS) provides a movable coordinate system for coordinate entry,
planes of operation, and viewing. Most GTXImage CAD PLUS geometric editing commands are
dependent on the location and orientation of the UCS; objects are drawn on the XY plane of the
current UCS.
The UCS command sets the orientation of the user coordinate system in three-dimensional space.
It defines the orientation for two-dimensional objects and the extrusion direction for the
THICKNESS system variable. It also provides the axis of rotation for ROTATE and the default
projection plane for pointing.
Changing from one UCS to another does not change the drawing view unless the UCSFOLLOW
system variable is on.
Command line: ucs
Enter an option
[New/Move/orthoGraphic/Prev/Restore/Save/Del/Apply/?/World] <World>:
New
Defines a new coordinate system by one of six methods.
Specify origin of new UCS or [ZAxis/3point/OBject/Face/View/X/Y/Z]
<0,0,0>:
Origin
Defines a new UCS by shifting the origin of the current UCS, leaving the direction of its X, Y, and
Z axes unchanged.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a point
General Command Reference 315
Specify a new origin point relative to the origin of the current UCS. If you do not specify a Z
coordinate value for the origin, this option uses the current elevation.
Z Axis
Defines a UCS with a particular positive Z axis.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>:
Specify a point
Specify point on positive portion of Z-axis <current>:
Specify a point
Specify a new origin and a point that lies on the new positive Z axis. The Z axis option tilts the XY
plane.
3 Point
Specifies the new UCS origin and the direction of its positive X and Y axes. The Z axis follows by
applying the right-hand rule. You can use this option to specify any possible coordinate system.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>:
Specify a point (1)
Specify point on positive portion of X-axis <current>:
Specify a point (2)
Specify point on positive-Y portion of the UCS XY plane <current>:
a point (3)
Specify
The first point specifies the origin of the new UCS. The second point defines the positive X axis.
The third point defines the positive Y axis. The third point can be anywhere on the positive Y
portion of the new UCS XY plane.
Object
Defines a new coordinate system based on a selected 3D object. The new UCS has the same
extrusion direction (positive Z axis) as that of the selected object.
Select object to align UCS:
316 General Command Reference
Select an object
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The following objects cannot be used with this option: 3D solids, 3D polylines, 3D meshes,
viewports, mlines, regions, splines, ellipses, rays, xlines, leaders, mtext.
For objects other than 3D faces, the XY plane of the new UCS is parallel to the XY plane in effect
when the object was drawn. However, the X and Y axes can be rotated differently.
The new UCS is defined as shown in the following table.
Defining a UCS by
selecting an object
Object
Method of determining UCS
Arc
The center of the arc becomes the new UCS origin. The X
axis passes through the arc endpoint that is closest to the
selection point.
Circle
The center of the circle becomes the new UCS origin. The X
axis passes through the selection point.
Dimension
The midpoint of the dimension text becomes the new UCS
origin. The direction of the new X axis is parallel to the X axis
of the UCS in effect when the dimension was drawn.
Line
The endpoint nearest the selection point becomes the new
UCS origin. GTXImage CAD PLUS chooses the new X axis so
that the line lies in the XZ plane of the new UCS. The line's
second endpoint has a Y coordinate of zero in the new
system.
Point
The point becomes the new UCS origin.
2D polyline
The start point of the polyline is the new UCS origin. The X
axis extends along the line segment from the start point to
the next vertex.
Solid
The first point of the solid determines the new UCS origin.
The new X axis lies along the line between the first two
points.
Trace
The "from" point of the trace becomes the UCS origin, with
the X axis lying along its centerline.
3D face
The new UCS origin is taken from the first point, the X axis
from the first two points, and the Y positive side from the first
and fourth points. The Z axis follows by application of the
right-hand rule.
Shape, text,
block reference,
attribute
definition
The insertion point of the object becomes the new UCS
origin, and the new X axis is defined by the rotation of the
object around its extrusion direction. The object you select
to establish a new UCS has a rotation angle of zero in the
new UCS.
Face
Aligns the UCS to the selected face of a solid object. To select a face, click within the boundary of
the face or on the edge of the face. The face is highlighted and the UCS X axis is aligned with the
closest edge of the first face found.
Select face of solid object:
Enter an option [Next/Xflip/Yflip] <accept>:
Next
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 317
Locates the UCS on either the adjacent face or the back face of the selected edge.
Xflip
Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the X axis.
Yflip
Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the Y axis.
Accept
If you press ENTER, accepts the location. The prompt repeats until you accept a location.
View
Establishes a new coordinate system with the XY plane perpendicular to your viewing direction
(parallel to your screen). The UCS origin remains unchanged.
X, Y, Z
Rotates the current UCS about a specified axis.
Specify rotation angle about n axis <0>:
Specify an angle
In the prompt, n is X, Y, or Z. Enter a positive or negative angle to rotate the UCS. GTXImage
CAD PLUS uses the right-hand rule to determine the positive direction of rotation around the axis.
You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations around the X, Y, or Z
axes.
Move
Redefines a UCS by shifting the origin or changing the Z-depth of the current UCS, leaving the
orientation of its XY plane unchanged. Changing the Z-depth moves the UCS along its Z axis in a
positive or negative direction relative to the current origin.
Specify new origin point or [Zdepth] <0,0,0>:
Specify a point or enter z
New Origin
Changes the origin of the UCS.
Zdepth
Specifies the distance along the Z axis to move the UCS origin.
Specify Zdepth <0>:
Enter a distance or press ENTER
If you have multiple viewports active, and you change viewports to specify a new origin or Zdepth, the change is applied to the UCS of the viewport that was current when the command was
started and that viewport becomes current once the command has finished.
318 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
NOTE: The UCS Move option does not add a UCS to the Previous list.
Orthographic
Specifies one of the six orthographic UCSs provided with GTXImage CAD PLUS. These UCS
settings are typically used when viewing and editing 3D models.
Enter an option [Top/Bottom/Front/Back/Left/Right] <current>:
option or press ENTER
Enter an
By default the orthographic UCS settings orient the current UCS relative to the world coordinate
system (WCS) origin and orientation. The UCSBASE system variable controls the UCS upon
which the orthographic settings are based. The origin or Z-depth of the orthographic UCS settings
can be changed using the option of the UCS command.
Prev
Restores the previous UCS. GTXImage CAD PLUS retains the last 10 coordinate systems created
in paper space and the last 10 coordinate systems created in model space. Repeating the Previous
option steps back through the retained list. The restored coordinate system depends on which space
is current.
If you have saved different UCS settings in individual viewports and you switch between
viewports, GTXImage CAD PLUS does not retain the different UCSs in the Previous list.
However, if you change a UCS setting within a viewport, GTXImage CAD PLUS does retain the
last UCS setting in the Previous list. For example, changing the UCS from World to UCS1 would
retain World at the top of the Previous list. If you then switch viewports with Front as the current
UCS, and then change the UCS to Right, the Front UCS is retained at the top of the Previous list. If
you then choose the UCS Previous option twice in this viewport, the UCS setting changes to Front,
and then back to World. See the UCSVP system variable.
Restore
Restores a saved UCS so that it becomes the current UCS. Restoring a saved UCS does not
reestablish the viewing direction in effect when the UCS was saved.
Enter name of UCS to restore or [?]:
Enter a name or enter ?
Name
Specifies a named UCS.
?—List UCSs
Lists the names of currently defined UCSs. GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
UCS name(s) to list <*>:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all UCSs
General Command Reference 319
Save
Saves the current UCS to a specified name. The name can have up to 255 characters and can
include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows
and GTXImage CAD PLUS for other purposes.
Enter name to save current UCS or [?]:
Enter a name or enter ?
Name
Saves the current UCS with the specified name.
?—List UCSs
Lists the names of currently defined UCSs. GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
UCS name(s) to list <*>:
Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all UCSs
Del
Removes the specified UCS from the list of saved user coordinate systems.
Enter UCS name(s) to delete <none>:
Enter a name list or press ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS deletes the named UCS you enter. If you delete a named UCS that is
current, GTXImage CAD PLUS renames the current UCS UNNAMED.
Apply
Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports when other
viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport. The UCSVP system variable determines
whether a UCS is saved with a viewport.
Pick viewport to apply current UCS or [All] <current>:
clicking inside it, enter a, or press ENTER
Specify a viewport by
Viewport
Applies the current UCS to the specified viewport and ends the UCS command.
All
Applies the current UCS to all active viewports.
?—List UCSs
Lists names of user coordinate systems and provides the origin and X, Y, and Z axes for each saved
UCS relative to the current UCS. If the current UCS is unnamed, it is listed as WORLD or
UNNAMED, depending on whether it's the same as the WCS.
UCS name(s) to list <*>:
Enter a name list
World
Sets the current user coordinate system to the world coordinate system. The WCS is the basis for
all user coordinate systems and cannot be redefined.
UCSICON
Controls the visibility and placement of the UCS icon.
320 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The UCS icon represents the orientation of the user coordinate system (UCS) axes and the location
of the current UCS origin. It also represents the current viewing direction relative to the UCS XY
plane. The UCS can be different in different viewports if the UCSVP system variable is set to 1 for
that viewport.
View menu: Display
UCS Icon
Command line: ucsicon
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays different UCS icons in paper space and model space. In both
cases, a PLUS sign (+) appears at the base of the icon when it is positioned at the origin of the
current UCS. The letter W appears in the Y portion of the icon if the current UCS is the same as the
world coordinate system.
A box is formed at the base of the icon if you are viewing the UCS from above (positive Z
direction). The box is missing if you are viewing the UCS from below.
If your view direction is edge-on to the current UCS, the UCS icon is replaced by a broken pencil
icon.
Enter an option [ON/OFF/All/Noorigin/ORigin] <current>:
or press ENTER
Enter an option
On
Displays the UCS icon.
Off
Turns off display of the UCS icon.
All
Applies changes to the icon in all active viewports. Otherwise, UCSICON affects only the current
viewport.
Enter an option [ON/OFF/Noorigin/ORigin] <current>:
apply to all active viewports or press ENTER
Enter an option to
No Origin
Displays the icon at the lower-left corner of the viewport regardless of the location of the UCS
origin.
Origin
Displays the icon at the origin (0,0,0) of the current coordinate system. If the origin is off the
screen, or if the icon cannot be positioned at the origin without being clipped at the viewport
edges, the icon appears at the lower-left corner of the viewport.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 321
UCSMAN
Manages defined user coordinate systems.
A user coordinate system (UCS) is a movable, user-defined coordinate system for convenient
placement of objects. The function of UCSMAN is to restore saved UCSs or orthographic UCSs,
specify UCS icon and UCS settings for viewports, and name or rename the current UCS.
Command line: ucsman
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the UCS.
UCS Dialog Box
Displays and modifies defined and unnamed user coordinate systems, and restores orthographic
UCSs.
Named UCSs Tab
Lists user coordinate systems and sets the current UCS.
Current UCS
Displays the name of the current UCS setting. If the UCS setting has not been saved and named,
the current UCS reads UNNAMED.
UCS Names List
Lists the defined coordinate systems in the current drawing. If there are multiple viewports and
multiple unnamed UCS settings, the list includes only the unnamed UCS of the current viewport.
The current UCS is indicated by a small pointer icon beside the name in the list.
UNNAMED is always the first entry if the current UCS is unnamed. World is always listed and
cannot be renamed or deleted. If you define other coordinate systems for the active viewport
during the current editing session, a Previous entry is next. You can step back through these
coordinate systems by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly. To add a UCS name to this
list, use the Save option of the UCS command.
Set Current
Restores the coordinate system selected in the UCS Names list. You can also restore a selected
coordinate system by double-clicking its name in the list, or by right-clicking it and choosing Set
Current from the shortcut menu. The Current UCS text field is updated.
Details
Displays the UCS Details dialog box. You can also view the details about a selected coordinate
system by right-clicking and choosing Details from the shortcut menu.
Orthographic UCSs Tab (UCS Dialog Box)
Changes the UCS to one of the orthographic UCS settings.
Current UCS
Displays the name of the current UCS view. If the UCS setting has not been saved and named, the
current UCS reads UNNAMED.
Orthographic UCS Names
Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems in the current drawing. The orthographic coordinate
systems are defined relative to the UCS specified in the Relative To list. The Depth field lists the
322 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
distance between the orthographic coordinate system and the parallel plane passing through the
origin of the UCS base setting (stored in the UCSBASE system variable).
Name
Specifies the name of the orthographic coordinate system.
Depth
Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that
passes through the origin of the coordinate system specified by the UCSBASE system variable.
The parallel plane of the UCSBASE coordinate system can be an XY, YZ, or XZ plane.
NOTE: You can specify the depth or a new origin for the selected orthographic UCS.
Set Current
Restores the selected coordinate system. You can also restore a selected coordinate system by
double-clicking its name in the list, or by right-clicking and choosing Set Current from the shortcut
menu.
Details
Displays the UCS Details . You can also view the details about a selected coordinate system by
right-clicking and choosing Details from the shortcut menu.
Relative To
Specifies the orientation of the selected orthographic UCS relative to a base coordinate system. By
default, WCS is the base coordinate system. The list displays all the named UCSs in the current
drawing.
Whenever you change the Relative To setting, the origin of the selected orthographic UCS is
restored to its default position.
If you save an orthographic coordinate system in a drawing as part of a viewport configuration, or
if you select a setting in Relative To other than World, the orthographic coordinate system name
changes to UNNAMED to distinguish it from the predefined orthographic coordinate system.
Reset (Shortcut Menu Only)
Restores the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system. The origin can be changed from
its default 0,0,0 position using the Move option of the UCS command. To reset the origin of the
selected orthographic coordinate system, right-click the name in the list and choose Reset Origin
from the shortcut menu. The origin is restored to its default location (0,0,0) relative to the specified
base coordinate system.
Depth (Shortcut Menu or Double-Click)
Specify the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes
through the origin of the coordinate system. In the Orthographic UCS Depth dialog box, enter a
value or choose the Select New Origin button to use the pointing device to specify a new depth or
a new origin.
Settings Tab (UCS Dialog Box)
Displays and modifies UCS icon settings and UCS settings saved with a viewport.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 323
UCS Icon Settings
Specifies the UCS icon settings for the current viewport.
On
Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport.
Display at UCS Origin Point
Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current coordinate system for the current viewport. If
this option is cleared, or if the origin of the coordinate system is not visible in the viewport, the
UCS icon is displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport.
Apply to All Active Viewports
Applies the UCS icon settings to all active viewports in the current drawing.
UCS Settings
Specifies the UCS settings for the current viewport.
Save UCS with Viewport
Saves the coordinate system setting with the viewport. This option sets the UCSVP system
variable. If this option is cleared, the viewport reflects the UCS of the viewport that is current.
Update View to Plan When UCS Is Changed
Restores plan view when the coordinate system in the viewport changes. Plan view is restored
when the dialog box is closed and the selected UCS setting is restored. This option sets the
UCSFOLLOW system variable.
UCS Details Dialog Box
Displays information about the origin and axes of the selected UCS.
By default, the origin and the values for the X, Y, and Z axes are calculated relative to the world
coordinate system.
Name
Displays the name of the current named UCS setting. By default, this is set to World.
Origin
Specifies the origin X,Y,Z coordinate relative to the UCS selected.
X Axis
Specifies the values for the X axis relative to the UCS selected.
Y Axis
Specifies the values for the Y axis relative to the UCS selected.
Z Axis
Specifies the values for the Z axis relative to the UCS selected.
Relative To
Specifies a base coordinate system for calculating the values for Origin, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z
Axis. To set a new base coordinate system, select a named UCS from the list. This option resets
the UCSBASE system variable.
UNDO
Reverses the effect of commands.
Command line: undo
324 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter the number of operations to undo or
[Auto/Control/BEgin/End/Mark/Back]: Enter a positive number, enter an
option, or press ENTER to undo a single operation
UNDO displays the command or system variable name on the command line to indicate that you
have stepped past the point where the command was used.
Number
Undoes the specified number of preceding operations. The effect is the same as entering u multiple
times, but the drawing is not regenerated at each step.
Auto
Undoes a menu selection as a single command, reversible by a single U command. UNDO Auto
inserts an UNDO Begin at the start of each menu item, if a menu item is not already active, and
inserts an UNDO End upon exit from the menu item.
UNDO Auto is not available if the Control option has turned off or limited the UNDO feature.
Enter UNDO Auto mode [ON/OFF] <current>:
ENTER
Enter on or off, or press
Control
Limits or turns off UNDO.
Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One] <All>:
press ENTER
Enter an option or
All
Turns on the full UNDO command.
None
Turns off the U and UNDO commands and discards any UNDO command information saved
earlier in the editing session.
The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect. An attempt to
use UNDO while the None option is in effect causes GTXImage CAD PLUS to immediately
display the prompt for the Control option:
Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One] <All>:
One
Limits UNDO to a single operation.
The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect. The prompt
shows that only a Control option or a single step of the UNDO command is available when the
One option is in effect.
Control/<1>:
If you enter c, GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the previous prompt.
Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One] <All>:
Begin, End
Begin groups a sequence of operations. All subsequent operations become part of the group until
End terminates the group.
UNDO and U treat grouped operations as a single operation.
Entering UNDO Begin while a group is already active ends the current group and begins a new
group. If you enter UNDO Begin without UNDO End, UNDO nnn undoes the specified number of
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 325
commands at a time but does not back up past the UNDO Begin point. UNDO nnn requires an
UNDO End even if the group is empty. The same applies to U.
A mark placed inside an UNDO Begin and UNDO End group disappears.
Mark, Back
Mark places a mark in the undo information. Back undoes all the work done back to this mark. If
you undo one operation at a time, GTXImage CAD PLUS informs you when you reach the mark.
You can place as many marks as necessary. Back moves back one mark at a time, removing the
mark. If no mark is found, Back displays the following prompt:
This will undo everything. OK? <Y>:
Enter y or n or press ENTER
Entering y undoes every operation in the current drawing since you opened the file. Entering n
causes GTXImage CAD PLUS to ignore the Back option.
A mark stops multiple UNDO operations if the number entered is greater than the number of
operations since the mark.
Immediately after ERASE, either OOPS or UNDO restores the erased objects. OOPS, however,
can be entered at an arbitrary later time (as long as nothing else has been erased), while UNDO
operates strictly in reverse sequence. After BLOCK, OOPS and UNDO have very different effects:
both bring the deleted objects back to life, but UNDO removes the new block definition as well.
A multiple UNDO (using the Back option or a number, or undoing a group) regenerates or redraws
if necessary. This occurs at the end of the UNDO; therefore, UNDO 5 will cause at most one
regeneration, while U could cause as many as five.
Some commands (LINE, the DIM commands, TRIM, and EXTEND, for example) have their own
Undo options. These step back one operation at a time. However, once you exit the command, U
will undo the entire command.
If PEDIT began by converting a line or arc to a polyline, PEDIT's Undo option will not reconvert
it. To undo that, exit PEDIT and enter U.
UNDO has no effect on the following commands and system variables:
ABOUT
GRAPHSCR
PSOUT
REINIT
AREA
HELP
QSAVE
RESUME
ATTEXT
HIDE
QUIT
SAVE
COMPILE
ID
RECOVER
SAVEAS
CVPORT
LIST
REDRAW
SHELL
DBLIST
NEW
REDRAWALL
STATUS
DELAY
OPEN
REGEN
TEXTSCR
DIST
PLOT
REGENALL
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and determines precision.
Format menu: Units
Command line: units (or 'units for transparent use)
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Drawing Units .
If you enter -units at the Command prompt, UNITS displays prompts on the command line.
326 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Drawing Units Dialog Box
Defines the unit and angle formats.
Length
Specifies the current unit of measure and the precision for the current units.
Type
Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal,
Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feetand-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch. The other formats can
represent any real-world unit.
Precision
Sets the number of decimal places for the current units format.
Angle
Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle.
Type
Sets the current angle format.
Precision
Sets the precision for the current angle format.
GTXImage CAD PLUS uses the following conventions for the various angle measures: decimal
degrees appear as decimal numbers, grads appear with a lowercase g suffix, and radians appear
with a lowercase r suffix. The degrees/minutes/seconds format uses d for degrees, ' for minutes,
and " for seconds, for example:
123d45'56.7"
Surveyor's units show angles as bearings, using N or S for north or south, degrees/minutes/seconds
for how far east or west the angle is from direct north or south, and E or W for east or west, for
example:
N 45d0'0" E
The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed in the degrees/minutes/seconds format. If
the angle is precisely north, south, east, or west, only the single letter representing the compass
point is displayed.
Clockwise
Calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction. The default direction for positive angles is
counterclockwise.
When GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts for an angle, you can point in the desired direction or enter
an angle regardless of the setting specified for Clockwise.
Drawing Units for GTXImage CAD PLUS DesignCenter Blocks
Controls the unit of measure used for block insertions from GTXImage CAD PLUS DesignCenter.
A block created in units that differ from the units specified in this option is scaled and inserted in
the specified units. Select Unitless to insert the block as is and not scale the block to match the
specified units.
NOTE: Source content units and Target drawing units settings in the User Preferences tab of
the Options dialog box are used when Insert Units are not defined.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 327
Sample Output
Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles.
Direction
Displays the Direction Control .
Direction Control Dialog Box
Controls the base angle. The base angle determines where 0 degrees is when GTXImage CAD
PLUS calculates angles.
Base Angle
Sets the direction of the base angle. These options affect the entry of angles, object rotation angles,
the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical coordinates. Choose East,
North, West, or South, or choose Other to indicate an alternative direction. The default direction
for the zero angle is East. In GTXImage CAD PLUS, the base angle is relative to the orientation of
the user coordinate system.
East
North
Sets the base angle to east (default is zero degrees).
Sets the base angle to 90 degrees north.
West
Sets the base angle to 180 degrees west.
South
Sets the base angle to 270 degrees south.
Other
Sets a direction different from the points of the compass.
Angle
Sets the angle. Available only when Other is selected.
Pick an Angle
Defines the angle using the pointing device based on the angle of an imaginary
line connecting any two points you specify. Available only when Other is selected.
VIEW
Saves and restores named views.
A view is a portion of a drawing that is displayed in a viewport. You can save and restore views by
name for convenient access. Views are saved separately in model space and paper space.
Command line: view
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the View dialog box.
If you enter -view at the Command prompt, VIEW displays prompts on the command line.
View Dialog Box
Saves and restores named views and orthographic views.
Named Views Tab (View Dialog Box)
Creates, sets, renames, and deletes named views. The Orthographic and Isometric Views tab
restores orthographic or isometric views. See .
Current View
Displays the name of the view to make current. When the View dialog box is first displayed, it lists
the current view as CURRENT.
View Names
Lists the named views in the current drawing. The current view is indicated by a small pointer icon
beside the name in the list.
328 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The View Names list also includes information about the space of the view (Model or layout
name), the name of any user coordinate system (UCS) saved with the view, and whether the view
was saved in perspective or clipped. You can sort the list of named views by clicking any of the
column headings.
If the UCS that was saved with the view is unnamed, the list displays UNNAMED. If no UCS was
saved with the view, the UCS column is blank.
Set Current
Restores the selected named view. You can also restore a selected view by double-clicking its
name in the list or by right-clicking and choosing Set Current from the shortcut menu.
New
Displays the New View .
Details Displays the View Details .
Rename (Shortcut Menu Only)
Renames the selected view. Select a view, right-click, and choose Rename from the shortcut menu,
or press F2. You cannot use this option to rename the current view. To rename the current view,
select it, choose New, and enter a new name in the New View dialog box.
Delete (Shortcut Menu Only)
Deletes a named view. Select a view, right-click, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. You
cannot delete the current view.
Orthographic and Isometric Views Tab (View Dialog Box)
Restores orthographic or isometric views.
Current View
Displays the name of the current orthographic view. By default, this is set to CURRENT.
View Names
Lists the orthographic and isometric views in the current drawing. The current orthographic or
isometric view is indicated by a small pointer icon beside the name in the list. The views are
relative to the UCS listed in the Relative To list.
Set Current
Restores the selected orthographic view. You can also restore a selected view by double-clicking
its name in the list or by right-clicking and choosing Set Current from the shortcut menu. When an
orthographic view is restored, GTXImage CAD PLUS automatically zooms to the extents of the
view.
Relative To
Specifies the orientation of the selected orthographic view relative to coordinate systems saved in
the current drawing. The world coordinate system(WCS) is the default. Relative To sets the value
of the UCSBASE system variable. The list displays all the named UCSs in the current drawing.
Select a different coordinate system to orient the selected orthographic view relative to a UCS.
The UCSBASE system variable also controls the orientation of orthographic UCSs relative to the
WCS or to named UCSs. Changing the UCSBASE system variable on the Orthographic Views tab
also changes the orientation of the predefined orthographic UCSs. GTXImage CAD PLUS displays
a warning message to notify you when you change the value of the UCSBASE system variable.
Restore Orthographic UCS with View
Restores the associated UCS when you make an orthographic view current. This option sets the
UCSORTHO system variable.
New View Dialog Box
Creates a view.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 329
View Name
Specifies the view name. View names can have up to 255 characters and can include letters,
numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows and GTXImage
CAD PLUS for other purposes.
Current Display
Uses the current display as the new view.
Define Window
Uses a window as the new view, defined in the drawing area by specifying two opposite corners.
Define View Window Button
Temporarily closes the dialog boxes so that you can use the pointing device to define the opposite
corners of the new view window.
UCS Settings
Provides options for saving a UCS.
Save UCS with View
Saves a UCS with the new view. This option sets the UCSVIEW system variable.
UCS Name
Specifies the name of the UCS saved with the new view. This option is available only when Save
UCS with View is selected. If you select an unnamed UCS, GTXImage CAD PLUS saves it with
the view.
View Details Dialog Box
Displays information about the selected view. You can also right-click and choose Details from the
shortcut menu.
Name
Displays the name of the current orthographic view. The default is CURRENT.
Area
Specifies view area in width, height, and twist.
Target Specifies view target location as a coordinate.
Direction
Specifies view direction as a normal vector coordinate.
ClippingSpecifies the front and back clipping distance and whether each clipping plane is turned
on or off.
Perspective
Specifies lens length and whether perspective is turned on or off.
Relative To
Specifies the orientation of the selected orthographic view relative to the WCS
or UCSs saved in the current drawing.
VIEW Command Line
If you enter -view at the Command prompt, VIEW displays prompts on the command line.
Enter an option [?/Orthographic/Delete/Restore/Save/Ucs/Window]:
NOTE: The VIEW command cannot be used transparently.
?—List Views
330 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Lists the named views in the drawing.
Enter view names(s) to list <*>:
views
Enter name list or press ENTER to list all
GTXImage CAD PLUS lists the name of each specified view and the space in which it was
defined. M designates model space, and P designates paper space.
Orthographic
Restores the predefined orthographic view you specify to the current viewport.
Enter an option [Top/Bottom/Front/BAck/Left/Right] <Top>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
The view orientation of the specified orthographic view is based on the UCSBASE system
variable, which is set to the world coordinate system by default. When one of the orthographic
views is restored, GTXImage CAD PLUS zooms to the extents in the current viewport.
Delete
Deletes one or more named views.
Enter view name(s) to delete:
Enter a name list
Restore
Restores the view you specify to the current viewport. If a UCS setting was saved with the view, it
is also restored.
Enter view name to restore:
Enter a name
GTXImage CAD PLUS also restores the center point and magnification of the saved view. If you
restore a model space view while working in paper space, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts you to
select a viewport in which to restore that view.
Restoring model space view.
Select Viewport for view:
Select a viewport
Select the viewport by choosing its border. The viewport you select must be on and active.
GTXImage CAD PLUS switches to model space and restores the view in the selected viewport.
If you restore a paper space view while working in a layout, GTXImage CAD PLUS switches to
paper space and restores the view. You can't restore a paper space view if you are working in the
Model tab.
Save
Saves the display in the current viewport using the name you supply.
Enter view name to save:
Enter a name
The current value of the UCSVIEW system variable is displayed when you save a view. To change
the setting and turn this option on or off, use the UCS option of VIEW.
UCS
Determines whether the current UCS and elevation settings are saved when a view is saved.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 331
Save current UCS with named views? [Yes/No] <current>:
or press ENTER
Enter an option
The UCS option of VIEW sets the UCSVIEW system variable. Turning this option on saves the
current UCS for each named view that you save.
Window
Saves a portion of the current display as a view.
Enter view name to save:
Enter a name
Specify first corner:
Specify opposite corner:
Restoring such a view may display objects outside the specified window because the shape of the
window you specified may differ from that of the viewport.
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport.
Command line: viewres
Do you want fast zooms [Yes/No] <Y>: Press ENTER (Fast Zoom is no
longer a functioning option of this command and remains for script
compatibility only.)
Enter circle zoom percent (1–20000) <current>:
20,000 or press ENTER
Enter an integer from 1 to
VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, ellipses, and splines using short vectors. The
greater the number of vectors, the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc. You can gain speed
at the cost of smoothness or gain visual accuracy at the cost of speed. For example, if you create a
very small circle and then zoom in, it might appear as a polygon. Regenerating the drawing
updates and smooths the circle's appearance.
When a paper space layout is made current for the first time and a default viewport is created in the
layout, the viewing resolution for this initial viewport is the same as the viewing resolution for the
Model tab viewport.
VPCLIP
Clips viewport objects while in layout tab.
Clips the specified viewport objects. Reshapes the viewport border to conform to a user-drawn
boundary.
Shortcut menu: Select the viewport to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Viewport
Clip.
Command line: vpclip
Select viewport to clip:
Select clipping object or [Polygonal/Delete] <Polygonal>:
Object
332 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specifies an object to act as a clipping boundary. Objects that are valid as clipping boundaries
include closed polylines, circles, ellipses, closed splines, and regions.
Polygonal
Draws a clipping boundary. You can draw line segments or arc segments by specifying points. The
following prompt is displayed:
Specify start point:
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]:
The descriptions of the Next Point, Arc, Close, Length, and Undo options match the descriptions
of the corresponding options in the PLINE command.
Delete
Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport. This option is available only if the selected
viewport has already been clipped. If you clip a viewport that has been previously clipped, the
original clipping boundary is deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied.
VPLAYER
Sets layer visibility within viewports.
VPLAYER makes a layer visible in one or more viewports and invisible in all other viewports.
The VPLAYER command can be used only while you are working in a layout tab.
Command line: vplayer
Enter an option [?/Freeze/Thaw/Reset/Newfrz/Vpvisdflt]:
?—List Frozen Layers
Displays the names of frozen layers in a selected viewport.
Select a viewport:
Freeze
Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports. GTXImage CAD PLUS does not display,
regenerate, or plot objects on frozen layers.
Enter layer name(s) to freeze:
Enter one or more layer names
Enter an option [All/Select/Current] <Current>:
ENTER
Enter an option or press
All
Applies the changes in all viewports.
Select
Temporarily switches to paper space, allowing you to select the viewports where you can apply the
layer settings.
Select objects:
Select one or more viewports and press ENTER
Current
Applies the changes in the current viewport only.
Thaw
Thaws layers in specific viewports.
Enter layer name(s) to thaw:
Enter one or more layer names
Enter an option [All/Select/Current] <Current>:
ENTER
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter an option or press
General Command Reference 333
All
Applies the changes in all viewports.
Select
Applies the changes in selected viewports.
Select objects:
Select one or more viewports and press ENTER
Current
Applies the changes in the current viewport only.
Reset
Sets the visibility of layers in specified viewports to their current default setting.
Enter layer name(s) to reset:
Enter one or more layer names
Enter an option [All/Select/Current] <Current>:
ENTER
Enter an option or press
All
Applies the changes in all viewports.
Select
Applies the changes in selected viewports.
Select objects:
Select one or more viewports and press ENTER
Current
Applies the changes in the current viewport only.
Newfrz (New Freeze)
Creates new layers that are frozen in all viewports.
Enter name(s) of new layers frozen in all viewports:
names
Enter one or more layer
Vpvisdflt (Viewport Visibility Default)
Thaws or freezes the specified layers in subsequently created viewports.
Enter layer name(s) to change viewport visibility:
names
Enter one or more layer
Enter a viewport visibility option [Frozen/Thawed] <current>:
or press ENTER
Enter f or t,
VPORTS
Divides the drawing area into multiple tiled or floating viewports.
Determines the viewport configuration for model space and paper space (layout) environments. In
model space (the Model tab), you can create multiple tiled viewport configurations. In paper space
(a layout tab), you can create multiple floating viewport configurations.
Command line: vports
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Viewports .
If you enter -vports at the Command prompt, VPORTS displays prompts on the command line.•
334 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Viewports Dialog Box
Creates new viewport configurations, or names and saves a tiled viewport configuration. The
options available in this dialog box depend on whether you are configuring tiled viewports (on the
Model tab) or floating viewports (on a layout tab).
New Viewports Tab—Tiled (Viewports Dialog Box)
Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures tiled viewports.
New Name
Specifies a name for the new tiled viewport configuration you are creating. If you do not enter a
name, the viewport configuration you create is applied but not saved. If a viewport configuration is
not saved, it cannot be used in a layout.
Standard Viewports
Lists the standard viewport configurations available. It also contains a CURRENT item, the current
configuration.
Preview
Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each
individual viewport in the configuration.
Apply To
Applies the tiled viewport configuration to the entire display or to the current viewport.
Display: Applies the viewport configuration to the entire Model tab display. Display is
the default setting.
Current Viewport: Applies the viewport configuration to the current viewport only.
Setup
Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is
initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard
orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration.
Change View To
Replaces the selected viewport configuration with the viewport configuration you select from the
list. You can choose a named viewport configuration, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can
select from the list of standard viewport configurations. Use the Preview area to view the viewport
configuration choices.
Named Viewports Tab—Tiled (Viewports Dialog Box)
Displays any saved viewport configurations in the drawing. When you select a viewport
configuration, the layout of the saved configuration is displayed in Preview.
Current Name
Displays the name of the current viewport configuration.
New Viewports Tab—Floating (Viewports Dialog Box)
Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures floating viewports.
Viewport Spacing
Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the floating viewports you are configuring.
Preview
Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each
individual viewport in the configuration.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 335
Setup
Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is
initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard
orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration.
Change View To
Replaces the selected viewport configuration with the viewport configuration you select from the
list. You can choose a named viewport configuration, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can
select from the list of standard viewport configurations. Use the Preview area to view the viewport
configuration choices.
Named Viewports Tab—Floating (Viewports Dialog Box)
Displays any saved and named tiled viewport configurations for you to use in the current layout.
You cannot save and name a floating viewport configuration.
WBLOCK
Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file.
Command line: wblock
GTXImage CAD PLUS® displays the Write Block Dialog Box.
Entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays prompts on the command line.
Write Block Dialog Box
Saves objects or converts a block to a file.
The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is
selected, a single block is selected, or objects other than blocks are selected. For example, if you
have a single block selected when you open the Write Block dialog box, the Source radio button is
set to Block. The following table lists other defaults depending on the selection state of the current
drawing.
Nothing is Selected
Under Source, Objects is the default.
Single Block is Selected
Under Source, Block is the default.
Source Name List is set to the name of the selected block.
Destination File name is set to the name of the selected block.
NOTE: If the block name is invalid, the incorrect characters are replaced with hyphens.
Objects Other than Blocks
Under Source, Objects is the default.
The Destination file name is set to "new block".
Source
Selects blocks and objects, writes them out as a file, and specifies insertion points.
Block
Specifies a block to save as a file. Select a name from the list.
336 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Entire Drawing
Selects current drawing as a block. Equivalent to entering -wblock /* on the command line.
Objects
Specifies objects to be saved as a file.
Base Point
Specifies a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X
Specifies the X coordinate value.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate value.
Z
Specifies the Z coordinate value.
Pick Insertion Base Point
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current
drawing.
Objects
Retains, converts to a block, or deletes the selected objects in the current drawing.
Retain
Retains the selected objects in the current drawing after saving them as a file.
Convert to Block
Converts the selected object or objects to a block in the current drawing after saving them as a file.
The block is given the name in File Name.
Delete from Drawing
Deletes the selected objects from the current drawing after saving them as a file.
Select Objects Button
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select one or more graphical objects in the
current drawing to save to the file.
Quick Select Button
Opens the Quick Select dialog box, which you can use to apply a filter to your selection set.
Objects Selected
Indicates the number of objects selected.
Destination
Specifies the name, location, and units of the file.
File Name
Specifies a file name for the block or objects.
Location
Specifies a path.
Browse for Folder
Displays the Browse for Folder dialog box.
Insert Units
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 337
Specifies units to be used when the new file is inserted as a block. 0 (zero) is the Unitless setting.
See INSUNITS.
WMFIN
Imports a Windows metafile.
Unlike bitmaps or raster files, metafiles contain vector information, which can be scaled and
printed without loss of resolution.
Insert menu: Windows Metafile
Command line: wmfin
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Import WMF standard file selection dialog box. Enter a file
name. GTXImage CAD PLUS adds the .wmf file extension. If you choose Locate, GTXImage
CAD PLUS searches for the file in the paths defined by the GTXImage CAD PLUS Support File
Search Path in the Options dialog box.
If you choose Options, GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the WMF In Options . You can also open
this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS. After opening the selected WMF file, GTXImage
CAD PLUS displays the following prompt:
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify a point or enter an option
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the WMF file.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
X Scale Factor
Sets the X and Y scale factors.
Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>:
factor
Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
Corner
Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the insertion point.
Specify opposite corner:
Specify a point
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
XYZ
Sets the X, Y, and Z scale factors.
Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>:
press ENTER
Specify a nonzero value, enter c, or
If you enter c, you specify a corner point. The specified point and the insertion point determine the
X and Y scale factors for the WMF file.
Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>:
to use the same scale factor
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>:
use the same scale factor
Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter a value or press ENTER to
Specify rotation angle <0>:
338 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the
specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Specify rotation angle <0>:
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the WMF file.
Specify rotation angle <0>:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
X Scale Factor
Sets the X and Y scale factors.
Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>:
use the same scale factor
Enter a value or press ENTER to
Corner
Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the insertion point.
Specify opposite corner:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a point
General Command Reference 339
XYZ
Sets the X, Y, and Z scale factors.
Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>:
press ENTER
Specify a nonzero value, enter c, or
If you enter c, you specify a corner point. The specified point and the insertion point determine the
X and Y scale factors for the block.
Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>:
to use the same scale factor
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>:
use the same scale factor
Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter a value or press ENTER to
PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged
into position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the descriptions of the
corresponding options under .
PX
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged into
position.
Specify preview X scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the descriptions of the
corresponding options under .
PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged into
position.
Specify preview Y scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the descriptions of the
corresponding options under .
PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the WMF file as it is dragged into
position.
Specify preview Z scale factor:
Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
340 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the descriptions of the
corresponding options under .
PRotate
Sets the rotation angle of the WMF file as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview rotation angle:
Specify insertion point:
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>:
value, specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Enter a
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the descriptions of the
corresponding options under .
WMFOPTS
Sets options for WMFIN
Controls the way objects such as rectangles, polygons, and circles are imported from Windows
metafiles.
Command line: wmfopts
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the WMF In Options .
WMF In Options Dialog Box
Controls whether metafiles maintain relative line widths and whether they are imported as
wireframes or solid objects.
Wire Frame (No Fills)
Imports objects as wireframes. If you clear this option, objects are imported as filled objects.
Wide Lines
Maintains the relative line width of lines and borders. If you clear this option, lines are imported
with zero width.
WMFOUT
Saves objects to a Windows metafile.
Command line: wmfout
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Create WMF standard file selection dialog box. Enter a file
name. GTXImage CAD PLUS adds a .wmf file extension.
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you
finish selecting objects
Choose Save to save the selected objects to the file name as a Windows metafile.
NOTE: If one or more raster objects are attached to the drawing and if the image application
(ism.arx) is loaded, the maximum resolution of the resulting WMF file is 2K by 2K. The
image application is loaded the first time you run IMAGE, IMAGEADJUST,
IMAGEATTACH, IMAGECLIP, IMAGEFRAME, or IMAGEQUALITY.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 341
XATTACH
Attaches an external reference to the current drawing.
An xref is a variation on a block. However, an xref definition is not stored in the current drawing
like a block definition; it is stored in another drawing file. XATTACH attaches a drawing as an
external reference. If you attach a drawing that itself contains an attached xref, the attached xref
appears in the current drawing. Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested. If another person is
currently editing the xref, the drawing attached is based on the most recently saved version.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Xref Manager
Command line: xattach
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Select File to Attach dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). The External Reference is displayed after a file is selected.
External Reference Dialog Box
Attaches external references to your drawing.
Name
Displays the xref name in the list after an xref is attached. When an attached xref is selected in the
list, its path is displayed in Path.
Choose Browse to display the Select a Reference dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box),
in which you can select new xrefs for the current drawing.
Browse
Displays the Select a Reference dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
Retain Path
Determines whether the full path to the xref is saved. If this option is selected, the xref path is
saved in the drawing database. If it is cleared, the name of the xref drawing is saved in the database
without a path. GTXImage CAD PLUS searches for the xref in the GTXImage CAD PLUS
Support File Search Path and the paths associated with the current project name on the Files tab in
the Options dialog box.
Paths are defined by the Project Files Search setting in the Options dialog box and the
PROJECTNAME system variable.
Path
Displays the path of the selected drawing file.
Reference Type
Specifies whether the xref is an attachment or an overlay.
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point of the selected xref.
342 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify On-Screen
Displays prompts on the command line and makes the X, Y, and Z options unavailable. The
descriptions of the options displayed on the command line match the descriptions of the
corresponding options under Insertion Point in INSERT.
X
Specifies the X coordinate value for the point at which an xref instance is inserted into the current
drawing. The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned with the insertion point defined in
the BASE command in the referenced file.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate value for the point at which an xref instance is inserted into the current
drawing. The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned with the insertion point defined in
the BASE system variable in the referenced file.
Z
Specifies the Z coordinate value for the point at which an xref instance is inserted into the current
drawing. The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned with the insertion point defined in
the BASE system variable in the referenced file.
Scale
Specifies the scale factors for the selected xref.
Specify On-Screen
Displays prompts on the command line and makes the X, Y, and Z Scale Factor options
unavailable. The descriptions of the options displayed on the command line match the descriptions
of the corresponding options under Insertion Point in INSERT.
X Scale Factor
Specifies the X scaling factor for the xref instance.
Y Scale Factor
Specifies the Y scaling factor for the xref instance.
Z Scale Factor
Specifies the Z scaling factor for the xref instance.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the xref instance.
Specify On-Screen
Displays prompts on the command line and makes the Angle option unavailable. GTXImage CAD
PLUS prompts for a rotation angle, as described in INSERT.
Angle
Specifies the rotation angle at which an xref instance is inserted into the current drawing.
XBIND
Binds dependent symbols of an xref to a drawing.
An xref (external reference) is a drawing that you attach to or overlay on your current drawing. To
use XBIND, you must have an xref attached to the current drawing. For more information about
attaching drawings, see XREF.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 343
Xref-dependent symbols are named objects in an xref such as blocks, dimension styles, layers,
linetypes, and text styles. You can use XBIND to add symbols from an attached xref to the host
drawing. XBIND functions like the Bind option of XREF, except it makes individual symbols a
part of the host drawing instead of making the entire reference a part of the host drawing. For
example, you can use XBIND to add a block definition that was created in the attached xref to the
host drawing, and then you can insert the block into the host drawing.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object External Reference Bind
Command line: xbind
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the Xbind .
If you enter -xbind at the Command prompt, XBIND displays prompts on the command line.
Xbind Dialog Box
Adds xref-dependent symbols (such as blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles)
to your drawing.
Xrefs
Lists the xrefs currently attached to the drawing. Selecting an xref (double-clicking) displays the
symbol definitions in the attached xref.
Definitions to Bind
Lists the xref-dependent symbol definitions to bind to the host drawing.
Add
Moves the definitions selected in the Xrefs list into the Definitions to Bind list.
Remove
Moves the xref definition selected in the Definitions to Bind list back to its xref-dependent symbol
table.
XCLIP
Defines an xref or block clipping boundary and sets the front or back clipping planes.
XCLIP is used on external references and blocks to set both a clipping boundary and a front or
back clipping plane. A clipping boundary consists of planar straight line segments. Clipping
boundaries can also be generated from polylines. If the polyline has arcs, the clipping boundary is
created as if it had been decurved before it was used as a clipping boundary. If the polyline is
curve-fit polyline, the clipping boundary is created as a straight-edged representation of the curvefit polyline. When a clipping boundary is defined by a splined polyline, the spline is recognized,
and it is not converted back to a straight-edged representation. XCLIP can be applied to single or
multiple external references or blocks, and it can generate or delete a clipping boundary, generate a
polyline from the clipping boundary, or suppress the appearance of the clip on an external
reference. When XCLIP is turned off for an xref or a block, the clipping boundary is ignored and
the entire xref or block is displayed.
Reference toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select an xref, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Xref Clip.
Command line: xclip
Select objects:
objects
Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish selecting
344 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Enter clipping option [ON/OFF/Clipdepth/Delete/generate Polyline/New
boundary] <New>: Select an option or press ENTER
On
Displays the clipped portion of the xref or block in the host drawing.
Off
Displays all of the geometry of the xref or block in the host drawing, ignoring the clipping
boundary.
Clipdepth
Sets the front and back clipping planes on an xref or block. Objects outside the volume defined by
the boundary and the specified depth are not displayed.
Specify front clip point or [Distance/Remove]:
Front Clip Point
Creates a clipping plane passing through and perpendicular to the clipping boundary.
Specify back clip point or [Distance/Remove]:
Distance
Creates a clipping plane the specified distance from and parallel to the clipping boundary.
Specify distance from boundary:
GTXImage CAD PLUS returns to the previous prompt.
Remove
Removes both the front and back clipping planes.
Delete
Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To temporarily turn off a clipping
boundary, use the Off option. Delete erases the clipping boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE
command cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries.
Generate Polyline
Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary. The polyline assumes the
current layer, linetype, lineweight, and color settings. Use this option when you want to modify the
current clipping boundary using PEDIT and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new
polyline. To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary, use the Off option.
New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary or generates a polygonal clipping boundary
from a polyline. If a boundary already exists, GTXImage CAD PLUS prompts:
Delete old boundary? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
GTXImage CAD PLUS continues the command only if all previous boundaries are deleted.
Specify clipping boundary(s):
[Select polyline/Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>:
boundary option or press ENTER
Specify a clipping
Select Polyline
Defines the boundary using the selected polyline. The polyline can be open but must consist of
straight line segments and cannot intersect itself. The boundary created using this method is
parallel to the user coordinate system (UCS) plane on which the polyline lies.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 345
Polygonal
Defines a polygonal boundary by using the points you specify for the vertices of a polygon. The
clipping boundary is applied in the current UCS regardless of the current view.
Rectangular
Defines a rectangular boundary by using the points you specify for opposite corners. The clipping
boundary is applied in the current UCS and is independent of the current view.
XLINE
Creates an infinite line
XLINE creates infinite lines, which are commonly used as construction lines.
Command line: xline
Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]:
an option
Specify a point (1) or enter
Point
Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it passes.
Specify through point: Specify the point (2) through which you want the xline
to pass, or press ENTER to end the command
GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the xline through the specified point.
Hor
Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point.
Specify through point: Specify the point (1) through which you want the xline
to pass, or press ENTER to end the command
GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the xline parallel to the X axis.
Ver
Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point.
Specify through point: Specify the point (1) through which you want the xline
to pass, or press ENTER to end the command
GTXImage CAD PLUS creates the xline parallel to the Y axis.
346 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Ang
Creates an xline at a specified angle.
Enter angle of xline (0) or [Reference]:
Specify an angle or enter r
Angle of Xline
Specifies the angle at which to place the line.
Specify through point:
GTXImage CAD PLUS creates an xline through the specified point, using the specified angle.
Reference
Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The angle is measured counterclockwise from
the reference line.
Select a line object:
Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline
Enter angle of xline <0>:
Specify through point: Specify the point through which you want the xline to
pass, or press ENTER to end the command
GTXImage CAD PLUS creates an xline through the specified point, using the specified angle.
Bisect
Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the
first and second line.
Specify angle vertex point:
Specify a point (1)
Specify angle start point:
Specify a point (2)
Specify angle end point:
command
Specify a point (3) or press ENTER to end the
The xline lies in the plane determined by the three points.
Offset
Creates an xline parallel to another object.
Specify offset distance or [Through] <current>:
enter t, or press ENTER
Specify an offset distance,
Offset Distance
Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the selected object.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 347
Select a line object:
end the command
Specify side to offset?
Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline, or press ENTER to
Specify a point and press ENTER to exit the command
Through
Creates an xline offset from a line and passing through a specified point.
Select a line object:
end the command
Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline, or press ENTER to
Specify through point: Specify the point (1) through which you want the xline
to pass and press ENTER to exit the command
XREF
Controls external references to drawing files.
Attaches, overlays, lists, binds, detaches, reloads, unloads, renames, and modifies paths to external
references (xrefs) in the current (or host) drawing.
An xref is a variation on a block. A block is a collection of geometry that is identified by a unique
name, is stored in the symbol table, and essentially behaves as if it is a single entity. Xrefs share
block characteristics, and they are similarly defined in the symbol table. However, unlike blocks,
xref definitions are not stored in the current drawing; an xref is stored in another drawing file. Like
a block, an xref can be inserted many times in a drawing but has only one definition.
The advantage of using xrefs is that every time a drawing containing xrefs is opened, the most
recently saved versions of those externally referenced drawings are loaded into the current
drawing. This is also true if the xrefs are reloaded or the current drawing is plotted. Using xrefs
instead of blocks saves disk space, because there aren't numerous copies of the reference drawing's
geometry stored locally in all of the drawings that may need to use that data.
Typically, xrefs are used to display the geometry of a common base drawing in the current drawing
without bloating the size of the current drawing, allowing changes to that reference drawing to be
reflected in any host drawings that refer to it.
There are two methods of defining an xref: overlaying or attaching. Overlays are typically used
when you need to view another drawing's geometry temporarily but don't plan to plot using that
data. Attaching a drawing is typically for permanent use and plotting in the host drawing. The only
behavioral difference between overlays and attachments is how nested references are handled.
Nesting occurs when an xref drawing contains an xref to another drawing. An attachment to an
attached xref is always visible in the current drawing, whereas an overlay to an overlaid xref is not.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Xref Manager
Shortcut menu: Select an xref, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Xref Manager.
Command line: xref
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays the XREF Dialog Box.
If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, XREF displays prompts on the command line.
Xref Manager
Lists, attaches, loads, and modifies external references.
List of External References
Displays the xrefs in the drawing in a tree view or a list view. You can use the F3 and F4 keys to
switch between list view and tree view. Selecting any field selects the xref.
348 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
List View
Displays a flat listing of the attached xrefs and their associated data. You can sort the list of
references by name, status, type, file date, file size, or the saved path and file name.
Reference Name
Lists the names of the xrefs as stored in the block definition symbol table.
Status
Shows whether the xref is loaded, unloaded, unreferenced, not found, unresolved, or orphaned.
Loaded: Currently attached to the drawing.
Unloaded: Marked to be unloaded from the drawing once the Xref Manager is closed.
Unreferenced: Attached to the drawing but erased.
Not Found: No longer exists in the valid search paths.
Unresolved: Cannot be read by GTXImage CAD PLUS.
Orphaned: Attached to another xref that is unreferenced, unresolved, or not found.
Size
Shows the file size of the corresponding reference drawing. The size is not displayed if the xref is
unloaded, not found, or unresolved.
Type
Indicates whether the xref is an attachment or an overlay.
Date
Displays the last date the associated drawing was modified. This date is not displayed if the xref is
unloaded, not found, or unresolved.
Saved Path
Shows the saved path of the associated xref (this is not necessarily where the xref is found).
Tree View
Displays a hierarchical representation of the xrefs, displaying the relationships between xref
definitions. Tree view shows the level of nesting relationship of the attached xrefs, whether they
are attached or overlaid, and whether they are loaded, unloaded, marked for reload or unload, or
not found, unresolved, or unreferenced.
Attach
Displays the Attach Xref dialog box (see XATTACH).
Detach
Detaches one or more xrefs from your drawing, erasing all instances of a specified xref and
marking the xref definition for deletion from the symbol table. Only the xrefs attached or overlaid
directly to the current drawing can be detached; nested xrefs cannot be detached. GTXImage CAD
PLUS cannot detach an xref referenced by another xref or block.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 349
Reload
Marks one or more xrefs for reloading. This option rereads and displays the most recently saved
version of the drawing.
Unload
Unloads one or more xrefs. Unloaded xrefs can be easily reloaded. Unlike detaching, unloading
does not remove the xref permanently. It merely suppresses the display and regeneration of the
xref definition to improve performance.
Bind
Displays the Bind Xrefs . The Bind option makes the selected xref and its dependent symbols
(such as blocks, text styles, dimension styles, layers, and linetypes) a part of the current drawing.
Xref Found At
Displays the full path of the currently selected xref. This is where the xref is actually found and is
not necessarily the same as the saved path.
Browse
Displays the Select New Path dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you can
select a different path or file name.
Save Path
Saves the path, as it appears in Xref Found At, to the currently selected xref.
Bind Xrefs Dialog Box
Converts xref definitions to standard local block definitions. If you bind an xref into the current
drawing, the xref and all its dependent symbols become a part of the current drawing. XBIND adds
individual xref-dependent symbol table definitions, such as blocks, text styles, dimension styles,
layers, and linetypes, to the local symbol table. To bind a nested xref, you must also select the
parent xref. The two methods of binding xrefs to the current drawing are Bind and Insert. Bind
alters the symbol table names of an xref when it is inserted. Insert does not alter the symbol table
names of an xref when it is inserted.
Bind
Binds the selected xref definition to the current drawing. Xref-dependent symbol table names are
changed from blockname|symbolname to blockname$n$symbolname syntax. In this manner,
unique symbol table names are created for all xref-dependent symbol table definitions bound to the
current drawing.
For example, if you have an xref named FLOOR1 containing a layer named WALL, after binding
the xref, the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL becomes a locally defined layer named
FLOOR1$0$WALL. The number in $n$ is automatically incremented if a local symbol table
definition with the same name already exists. In this example, if FLOOR1$0$WALL already
existed in the drawing, the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL would be renamed
FLOOR1$1$WALL.
Insert
Binds the xref to the current drawing in a way similar to detaching and inserting the reference
drawing. Rather than being renamed using blockname$n$symbolname syntax, xref-dependent
symbol table names are stripped of the xref name. As with inserting drawings, no name
incrementing occurs if a local symbol shares the same name as a bound xref-dependent symbol.
The bound xref-dependent symbol assumes the properties of the locally defined name. For
350 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
example, if you have an xref named FLOOR1 containing a layer named WALL, after binding with
the Insert option, the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL becomes the locally defined layer
WALL.
ZOOM
Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport.
You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW or while ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW
is in progress.
View menu: Zoom
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and choose Zoom to
zoom in real time.
Command line: zoom (or 'zoom for transparent use)
Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window] <real time>:
All
Zooms to display the entire drawing in the current viewport. In a plan view, GTXImage CAD
PLUS® zooms to the drawing limits or current extents, whichever is greater. In a 3D view,
ZOOM All is equivalent to ZOOM Extents. The display shows all objects even if the drawing
extends outside the drawing limits.
You can use ZOOM All transparently, but it always regenerates the drawing.
Center
Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a magnification value or height. A
smaller value for the height increases the magnification. A larger value decreases the
magnification.
Specify center point:
Specify a point (1)
Enter magnification or height <current>:
Enter a value or press ENTER
Dynamic
Zooms to display the generated portion of the drawing with a view box. The view box represents
your viewport, which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing. Positioning and
sizing the view box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the image inside the view box.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
General Command Reference 351
The panning view box is displayed first. Drag it to the location you want and click. The zooming
view box is then displayed. Resize it and press ENTER to zoom, or click to return to the panning
view box.
Press ENTER to fill the current viewport with the area currently enclosed by the view box.
Extents
Zooms to display the drawing extents. You can use ZOOM Extents transparently, but it always
regenerates the drawing.
Previous
Zooms to display the previous view. You can restore up to 10 previous views.
NOTE: If you change the shading with the SHADEMODE command the view is changed. If
you enter ZOOM Previous after changing the shading, it restores the previous view which is
shaded differently, but not zoomed differently.
Scale
Zooms the display at a specified scale factor.
Enter a scale factor (nX or nXP):
Specify a value
The value you enter is relative to the limits of the drawing. For example, entering 2 doubles the
apparent display size of any objects from what it would be if you were zoomed to the limits of the
drawing.
352 General Command Reference
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If you enter a value followed by x, GTXImage CAD PLUS specifies the scale relative to the
current view. For example, entering .5x causes each object to be displayed at half its current size
on the screen.
If you enter a value followed by xp, GTXImage CAD PLUS specifies the scale relative to paper
space units. For example, entering .5xp displays model space at half the scale of paper space units.
The following illustration shows a number of viewports arranged in paper space. The view in each
viewport is scaled relative to paper space. The first view is scaled 1=1 relative to paper space
(1xp), the second is scaled .5=1 relative to paper space (.5xp), and so on.
Window
Zooms to display an area specified by two opposite corners of a rectangular window.
Specify first corner:
Specify a point (1)
Specify opposite corner:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Specify a point (2)
General Command Reference 353
Real Time
Using the pointing device, zooms interactively to a logical extent.
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display the shortcut menu
The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with PLUS (+) and minus (–) signs. See for a
description of the options that are available while zooming in real time.
The current drawing area is used to determine the zooming factor. ZOOM uses half of the window
height to move to a zoom factor of 100%. Holding down the pick button at the midpoint of the
window and moving vertically to the top of the window zooms in to 100%. Conversely, holding
the pick button down at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the bottom of the
window zooms out by 100%.
NOTE: If you place the cursor at the bottom of the window, hold down the pick button, and
move vertically to the top of the window, the zoom-in factor is 200%.
When you have reached the zoom-in limit, the PLUS sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that
you can no longer zoom in. When you have reached the zoom-out limit, the minus sign in the
cursor disappears, indicating that you can no longer zoom out.
When you release the pick button, zooming stops. You can release the pick button, move the
cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press the pick button again and continue to
zoom the display from that location.
To exit zooming at the new position, press ENTER or ESC.
Zoom Shortcut Menu
When the ZOOM command is active, you can exit ZOOM or switch to PAN or 3DORBIT using
the options on the Zoom shortcut menu. To access the Zoom shortcut menu, right-click in the
drawing area while ZOOM is active.
Exit
Cancels ZOOM or PAN.
Pan
Switches to PAN.
Zoom
Switches to ZOOM in real time.
3D Orbit
Switches to 3DORBIT.
Zoom Window
Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window.
Zoom Original
Restores the original view.
Zoom Extents
354 General Command Reference
Zooms to display the drawing extents.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Raster Command Reference
General Information
This section defines the specific GTXImage CAD PLUS commands that enhance, edit and convert
raster data. The first few pages include new and changed commands, a set of overview tables
listing each command and feature with icon and brief description. Read detailed command
descriptions through the rest of the section, indexing along the top margin of the page to find each
command name.
Command Overview
Changed items have explanations in italics.
Icon
Command
Short Description
gACTIVE
GAC Prepares a selected image as the active image,
ready for raster editing or conversion
gADESKEW GAD Automatically rotates the current raster image to
align raster to an orthogonal orientation
gAUTOSNAP GAS Enables GTXImage CAD PLUS’ AutoSnap options
within active image entities.
gARRAY
raster data
GAR
Creates a circular or rectangular array from selected
gATTACH
GA
Quickly loads raster images.
gBURN
GB
Converts all vectors to raster, “burning” them into the
current raster image
gCALIKE
Changes circles and arcs to have the same radius
as a selected circle or arc
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 355
gCELEV
Assigns incremental elevations to multiple polylines
gCHANGE GCH
Changes the size or position of a line, arc or circle
gCHGLAY
object
Changes the layer of objects to that of a specified
gCONCEN
Moves circles and arcs to be concentric about a
location or about the centerpoint of a specified circle or arc
gCONVRT
GCO
Converts selected raster data to vector
New features include spline recognition, broken line styles and hatch
pattern separation, arrowhead recognition toggle and gap jump setting.
gCOPY
GCP Copies selected raster data to a new location on the
image, retaining the original
gCOOORDS
Scales an image using relative coordinates
gCAI
Copies all images using the COPY command.
gCREATE GCR
raster database
Creates a new raster database or flush the current
gCROP
GCRO Deletes all information outside of a specified window
gCUT
GCU
gDESKEW GD
degrees
Copies selected raster data to a file or buffer
Aligns raster data in current raster image to 0 and 90
Disabled prompt for move, rotate or scale at end of command. This
makes it quicker command and easier to use with AutoLISP.
gDRO_BK
entities
Sets all image entities’ draw order behind other
gECONVRT GEC
Creates a vector edge around selected raster
356 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
gEDGE
GED
Creates a raster edge around selected raster
gERASE
GE
Removes selected raster data
gFRZLAY
Freezes the layer of a specified object
gTRANS_ON
gINFO
GI
gINACTIVE GINA
memory
Makes all images transparent
Displays information about the raster database
Deactivates the currently active image, freeing
gINVERT
GIN
Reverses the raster foreground and background
data Useful for raster scanned from negative images
gISOLAY
Freezes all layers except that of a selected object
gJOIN
Joins lines
gLINE
GLI
Draws lines on current raster image
gMIRROR
GMI
Mirrors selected raster data
gMOVE
GM
Moves selected raster data
gMAI
Moves all images using the MOVE command
gOFFSET GOF Creates concentric raster circles, parallel raster lines
and parallel raster arcs
gOSR
conversion
Invokes GTX OSR for doing batch raster-to-vector
gPASTE
GP
created with gCUT
Pastes raster data from a raster file or a buffer
gRAHEAD
Erases “arrowheads” (solids with three points)
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 357
gRASTER
GRA
Converts selected vector entities to raster
gREFLCT GREF Mirrors the entire image in either the X or Y axis,
replacing the original image
gRELIMIT
Combines trim and extend for lines
gRESIZE
GRE Resizes the image entity (Adds or removes pixels
without scaling the image entity)
gROTATE
GR
gRAI
Rotates selected raster data
Rotates all images using the ROTATE command
gRUB
GRU
Erases raster data under selected vector data
gSAVE
GSA
Saves the raster image
gSCALE
GS
Scales selected raster data
gSAI
gSCAN
Scales all images using the SCALE command
GSC
Scans an image into GTXImage CAD PLUS
gSETLAY
Sets the current layer to that of a specified entity
gSMOOTH GSM
Smoothes selected raster.
gSPECKL GSP
Perform raster object speckle removal to selectively
erase background noise or fill in holes in the raster image
gTCONFIG GTCFGConfigures Text IOP and the gTCONVRT/gTRAIN
commands
The dialog has been updated to support word recognition, touching
character splitting, and the other ICR feature enhancements.
gTCONVRT GTC
358 Raster Command Reference
Converts raster text to text entities
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
gTRACE
GT
Traces vector lines, arcs, and circles over selected
raster geometry (raster is preserved)
gTRAIN
GTR Previews and edits text recognition files used by
gTCONVRT. Text recognition training is only available with GTX ICR
PLUS
GTRANS_ON
Turns on transparency for all images
gTURN
GTU
270 (-90) degrees
Reorients the work area (and image) by 90, 180 or
gVSKEW
Deskews vector data
gWARP
GWA
Corrects distortions in an image
Raster Picking Options
Most commands affect a subset of the raster image. To gMOVE a raster circle, you need to first
pick that circle. GTXImage CAD PLUS uses Intelligent Object Picking (IOP) to pick raster entities
from the drawing as if they were intelligent CAD entities. These options can be typed, found in the
GTX Edit/Raster Pick, the toolbar or the screen menu.
The following list each IOP option:
Icon
Pick Option
Short
Description
Add
ADD
Add data to the selection set (after using “remove”)
Remove
REM
Remove selected data from the selection set
Window
W
Select all raster within a rectangular window
PwindowPW
Select all raster within a polygonal window
Crossing
CR
Select connected raster objects that are completely contained
by or crossing the edge of a window
Pcrossing
PC
(Polygon Crossing) Select raster that is completely contained
by or crossing the edge of a polygon
Inside
I
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Select raster objects completely contained by a window
Raster Command Reference 359
Pinside
by a polygon
PI
Select connected raster objects that are completely contained
Fence
polyline
F
Select connected raster objects that are intersected by a
Object
O
Select contiguous raster data within the current view
ALL
ALL
Select all raster on the current raster image
Arc
AR
Select raster arcs under a reference arc
Circle
CI
Select raster arcs or a circle under a reference circle
Line
L
Select raster lines under a reference line
Previous
PR
Pick the objects in the previous selection set
Segment
S
Selects a linear raster segment in both directions from a pick
until it stops or finds an acute angle or a branch
TEXTLine
TEXTL Select text-sized raster elements that are intersected by a
reference line. Separates text from touching raster elements
TEXTWindow
TEXTW Select raster text elements that are within a rectangular
window. Separates text from touching raster elements
unDer
D
Pick raster under selected vector objects
Undo
made
U
Remove data from the selection set added by the last pick
View
V
Select all raster data within the present view
Raster Object Snapping Options
GTXImage CAD PLUS provides transparent “raster snaps” similar to but independent from object
snaps. While using a command, select Control-Right-mouse button to choose raster snaps from a
pop-up menu.
In addition to transparent raster snaps, the gAUTOSNAP command, enables object Endpoint,
Intersection, Nearest and Node AutoSnap™ methods within active raster entities. The following
table lists each raster snap option.
Icon
Name
Keyboard
Description
None
‘rnone
Disables previous snap mode settings.
Endpoint ‘rend
360 Raster Command Reference
Snaps to the nearest end of a raster entity.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Endpoint activates as running snap under the End AutoSnap Feature.
Intersection
‘rint
Snaps to the intersection of two or more raster
entities. Intersection activates as running snap under the Intersection AutoSnap Feature.
Nearest
‘rnea
Snaps to the centerline of the nearest raster object.
Nearest activates as running snap under the Nearest AutoSnap Feature.
Edge
‘redge
Snaps to the edge of the nearest raster object. Edge
activates as running snap under the Node AutoSnap Feature.
Center
‘rcen
three raster points.
Snaps to the center of a circle or arc defined by
Tangent
‘rtan
Snaps to the point that, with the previous point,
makes a line tangent to a circle or arc defined by three raster points. The first point
defines the side of the circle or arc for the tangent.
Midpoint‘rmid
Snaps to the midpoint of a line defined by two raster points.
MidArc
‘rmida
Snaps to the midpoint of a raster arc defined by the
endpoints and a circumference point.
Perpendicular
‘rper
Snaps to a point where the present entity being
drawn will intersect perpendicular to a line defined by two points.
Perp-Arc ‘rpera
raster points.
Snaps to the point perpendicular to an arc defined by three
Command Definitions
This section defines each raster command.
Note: GTXImageCAD PLUS has two menus – a Classic and a Full menu. Each Command
Reference lists the command’s location in the Classic menu. To switch between menus, select
HELP Change Menu to [Full or Classic].
gACTIVE (Active Image)
Imaging Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Active Image
Command Line: GAC
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 361
Function:
Every raster editing/enhancing command requires an active image to be specified. The gACTIVE
command is invoked automatically when there is none specified, so you won’t explicitly invoke
this command unless you are working on more than one image at a time and wish to switch from
one to another.
gACTIVE sets active images to transparent.
Options:
Number of Images
Note: Invoke gINACTIVE to make an active image inactive and save memory.
CLIPPING only masks the DISPLAY of images. When editing a clipped image, the entire
image is being edited (selections include clipped portions of an image, but after the edit, the
clipping is still active).
The behavior of gACTIVE varies depending on the number of images currently attached to the
drawing:
One Image:
If there is only one image currently attached, gACTIVE will
automatically set it as the active raster image.
Two or More Images:
If there are two or more images, a prompt will request that you select
the one to edit.
Image Type
gACTIVE behaves differently depending on the number of images attached.
Bi-Tonal:
Bi-tonal images are activated quickly and easily.
Color or Greyscale:
Color or greyscale images are reduced to bi-tonal (two colors) before
becoming active. The color or greyscale image is not modified; rather,
the command generates a bitonal version of the original.
gADESKEW
Enhance Menu: Auto Deskew
Command Line: GAD or GADESKEW
Function:
Drawings are often scanned in slightly rotated. This command straightens selected raster by
rotating it to align with the X or Y axis. gDESKEW rotates selected raster so a selected line on the
drawing becomes “square”. The AutoDeskew configuration parameter causes the gATTACH
command to automatically deskew upon loading a new raster image.
Instructions:
1. Select gADESKEW.
Deskew Entire Image?
2. The deskew will take place, based on long raster lines found in the margin of the raster image.
If no such lines are found, the will not deskew.
362 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
gARRAY
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Array Raster
Command Line: GAR or GARRAY
Function:
Copies raster data in rectangular or polar arrays. When creating a rectangular array, gARRAY
arranges multiple copies of the selected raster in rows and columns. When creating a polar array,
the command arranges copies of the selected raster placed about a circle.
gARRAY command, illustrated:
Instructions:
Invoke gARRAY.
Select raster <Window>:
Select the raster data to be copied. Use any valid raster selection method.
Press [RETURN].
Rectangular or Polar array (R/P) <R>:
Enter R for rectangular or P for polar.
Rectangular
If using a rectangular array you must specify the number of rows and columns to be copied.
Number of rows (---)<1>:
Enter the number of rows you desire.
Number of columns (|||)<1>:
Enter the number of vertical columns you desire.
Unit cell or distance between rows (---):
You may enter a vertical distance numerically or draw a “unit cell” representing the distances
between rows and columns graphically. If you enter a distance numerically then press [RETURN],
you will receive the following prompt:
Distance between columns (|||):
Enter the distance that will separate the columns. The selected raster is copied.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 363
Note: Positive x or y distances places copies to the right or above the original. Negative
distances places them to the left or below the original.
If you drew a unit cell instead of typing a distance, a rectangular box will rubber-band from the
anchor point. Drag the box to represent the distance between both the rows and columns. The
selected raster is copied.
Polar
If using a polar array you must specify the center point of the array, the number of copies, the
angle to fill and whether or not to rotate the raster data as it is copied around the polar array.
Center point of array:
Select a point that represents the axis around which all selected data will be copied.
Number of items:
Enter the number of items that will fill the angle you will specify.
Angle to fill (+=ccw,-=cw)<360>:
Enter an integer value representing the angle over which the copies will be evenly distributed.
Rotate objects as they are copied? <Y>:
Respond Y to rotate the objects as they are copied. This will keep the raster objects in the same
orientation to the center point as they are copied. Responding N will keep the raster objects in the
same orientation as the original raster object selected.
The raster data is copied.
gATTACH
Standard Toolbar:
File Menu: Open Raster File
Command Line: GA, GATTACH, GL
Function:
Loads or attaches an image into GTXImage CAD PLUS. Allows migration of earlier GTX
software raster projects to GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 by reading .REF files.
Instructions:
Select File Open Raster File.
The OPEN Raster File file dialog will appear.
364 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Select the appropriate file type in the “List Files of Type:” combo-box, select the directory in
which the file resides. All files of the indicated type will appear in the “File Name” box. Select the
file you wish to load and press OK.
Loading a Raster File
The image is attached at 0,0 and at the orientation specified by the AUTOROTATE configuration
parameter.
Any image that has an associated .REF file (whose filename matches the raster file’s) will be
inserted at the location and scale specified within the .REF file. The presence of a .REF file causes
gATTACH to rotate the image as per the LOADROTATE configuration parameter.
Raster Resolution
If the GTXRAST.CFG setting is “FILE” the file’s resolution will be used, but if a specific
resolution is set in GTXRAST.CFG, it will override that of the file.
gAUTOSNAP
Raster Snap Toolbar:
Edit Menu: Raster Snaps
Command Line: GAS,GASP,GASNAP or GAUTOSNAP
Function:
gAUTOSNAP enables the AutoSnap options within active image.
Details:
See “Snapping to Raster” in the Using GTXImage CAD PLUS section for more details on using
AutoSnap within raster images.
Instructions:
GAUTOSNAP: <0>,1:
Type 1 to raster-enable AutoSnap™.
Invoke the OSNAP command. This command is normally used to control object snaps, but with
gAUTOSNAP, it also controls running raster snaps. The dialog includes a Select Settings section:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 365
Select the snap modes you wish to enable. The Endpoint, Intersection, Intersection and Node
settings activate GTX raster snaps. Because there is no “edge” object snap, "Node" is used to
enable a running edge raster snap.
GTXImage CAD Object Snap
Endpoint
GTX Raster Snap
Endpoint
Intersection
Intersection
Nearest
Nearest
Node
Edge
Select OK.
The aperture box will appear around the crosshairs and the marker will snap to raster features.
Note: AutoSnap™ uses glyphs (symbols) to display the type of snap being employed.
Similarly, running raster snaps use ToolTip labels to display the type of raster snap being
used. Raster snaps will work instantaneously even though the ToolTips appear after a short
delay.
gBURN
Convert Toolbar:
Convert Menu: Burn All to Raster
Command Line: GBU or GBURN
Function:
Use this command to convert all vector entities into raster data with a designated line width.
Note: The raster database must be established before gBURN can be used. The database can
be established either by loading a raster file or by using gCREATE. If the database has not
been established, you will see a message and gCREATE will be invoked automatically.
Warning: Only entities within the raster limits can be rasterized! Those outside the limits
will be ignored or erased. When entities are partially outside, the part inside is rasterized;
the part outside is erased.
Warning: All vector entities will be deleted when you use this command!
Options:
Width Options
366 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Table
Use the width settings according to color as set in the Width Table
Fixed
Type in a value or select the width graphically using Box or Pick.
Instructions:
Dialog
Invoke gBURN. The following dialog will appear.
To specify line width you can a) enter a Fixed line width, b) specify it graphically by drawing a
Box or by using Pick to select raster in the drawing of the desired width, or c) use a Table to
correlate the colors of vectors to raster line widths.
Fixed Line Width:
Select the Fixed radio button. Type the raster width to be used (in drawing units, not pixels), or use
the Pick or Box option to graphically specify the width.
Using Box:
Select the Box button.
Select first corner of box:
Select a point.
Select opposite corner of box:
As you move the cursor, a rubber-banding rectangle appears with one corner at the point selected.
Move the cursor until the box is the desired width and the length exceeds the width. Select the
point.
The best way to use this feature is to pick a point on the edge of an existing horizontal or vertical
raster line and stretch the box along the line. You can then easily match the width. The length of
the rectangle can be any size that is longer than the width as the smallest side is used as the width
measurement. A reference rectangle is used instead of a square to make it easier to see. As soon as
the second point has been selected, the rasterization takes place.
Using Pick
Select Pick.
Select raster <WIDTH>:
Select a piece of raster data of the desired raster width. The width of the selected raster will be
entered in the “Fixed” text box.
Using the LineWidth Configuration Table:
Select the Table radio button and the Table Setup button. The LineWidth Configuration Table
appears, correlating color numbers and line widths expressed in current units.
To change the width associated with a particular color, select that Color row. Enter the value in the
Width text field. Select OK to close the dialog or select another row to change its width.
Line Width Configuration Dialog:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 367
Enter width <.XX>:
Enter the value for the width in the units being used and press [RETURN]. The Width Table will
reflect the changes.
Select another color number to change its width or press [0] and [RETURN] to continue the
command.
The entities will be changed to raster with the widths defined by their colors.
The highlighted entities will be converted to raster. Some residual vector markings overlay the
raster until you redraw the image.
Note: The width settings you change will remain in effect until you change them or you
exit GTXImage CAD PLUS.
The vectors will be burned to raster with the table’s widths.
Note: Polylines and other non-filled entities that have a width attribute will be drawn with
the width attribute.
Rasterization of certain entities may take a while to process. Rasterizing text and ellipses
takes longer than lines, for instance. Select less data at a time to improve rasterization
speeds. You may need to zoom in to see line styles.
gCALIKE
Vector Cleanup Toolbar:
VClean Menu: CAlike
Command Line: GCA or GCALIKE
Function:
The gCALIKE command changes the radius of circles or arcs to a specified radius or to match
that of a selected circle or arc.
Options:
The circles can be changed in terms of a Reference circle or arc, a specified Radius or Diameter.
Instructions:
Select objects:
Select one or more circles and/or arcs that you will want to set to identical radii.
Select reference circle or arc:
368 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Choose a circle or arc with the desired radius.
Enter Diameter <Radius> <#.##>:
The reference object’s radius will appear in the angle brackets. A rubber banding line stretches
from the center of the reference object to the cursor. Press [RETURN] to accept the value,
graphically select with the left mouse button the desired radius, type a new desired radius value, or
type D and then enter a new diameter.
gCELEV
Vector Cleanup Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Contour Elevation
Command Line: GCE or GCELEV
Function:
The gCELEV command sets the elevation of a series of PLINE objects in increments.
Instructions:
Set the base or starting elevation.
Set the Contour Interval – the increments by which elevation is changed.
Press OK.
Stop/<Pick Contour>:
Select the polyline to assign the starting elevation.
Stop/<Pick Contour>:
Select the polyline to assign consequent elevations.
When done, type S.
gCHANGE
Change Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Stretch Raster
Command Line: GCH or GCHANGE
Function:
The gCHANGE command stretches raster lines, arcs and circles. Change the radius of an arc by
moving its circumference and endpoint. Change the radius of a circle by moving its circumference.
Change the length and orientation of a line by moving one endpoint.
This command also merges or smoothes fragmented and irregular lines or arcs. To smooth, choose
the raster entity and redraw it without changing its geometry. To smooth or merge entire sections
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 369
of a drawing, use the gSMOOTH command. In the following illustrations, dashed lines portray
rubber-banding lines.
gCHANGE command, illustrated
Options:
Object Type
Options
Line
Select a line to be changed.
Arc
Select an arc to be changed.
Circle
Select a circle to be changed.
Instructions:
Select gCHANGE.
Select raster <LINE>:
The original default is “line”. If you want to select another type of object, select it from the menu
or type the first letter of the name.
Using Line
Select a point on the raster line to serve as the endpoint that will NOT change. Then select a point
to indicate the rest of the line that will be altered. The raster line will be highlighted and a rubberbanding reference line will appear, attached at the first point used to pick the line (If the first point
was outside the raster line, the endpoint closest to that point is selected).
Select new endpoint:
Note: If you choose points to change a raster line drawn in a broken or dashed line style, all
the segments will be selected, but the new line will be redrawn as a smoothed, solid line.
Turn on the Ortho Mode ON if you want to change lines so they are perfectly horizontal or
vertical or so they snap to a specified angle.
370 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Move the cursor. The reference line will rubber band as it follows the cursor. Press [SELECT] to
select the new point where the line should end. The reference line will disappear and the raster line
will be redrawn at the new orientation and length.
Using Arc
Select the endpoint that will NOT change. Then select a point on the circumference of the arc and
the other endpoint of the arc. These three points define the raster arc and the selected arc will be
highlighted.
Select new circumference point:
You will see a rubber-banding line extending from the first endpoint selected. Select a point to be
on the circumference of the new arc.
Select new endpoint:
The rubber-banding line will be attached at the second point. Select the endpoint for the new arc in
any of the usual ways. The raster arc will be redrawn through the three points. If the original arc
was in several pieces, they will be selected but the new arc will be solid.
Using Circle
Select the “circle” option from the menu.
Select point on circumference of circle:
Specify the raster circle by selecting three points on the circumference. After the raster circle has
been selected, it will be highlighted. A rubber-banding line from the center of the circle will
appear.
Enter circle radius:
Enter a value in current units or select a point to indicate the radius of the new circle. The circle
will be redrawn with the original center point and the new radius.
Note: If the original circle was broken into arcs or drawn in a dashed line style, they will
be selected but the new circle will be unbroken.
gCHGLAY
Edit Layer Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Change Layer
Command Line: GCHGLAY
Function:
Changes the layer of objects to that of a specified object
Instructions:
Select Objects to Change Layer:
Select the objects you want to move to a destination layer.
Dialog/<Select object on NEW layer>:
Either type D to select a layer or to define a new layer, or select a sample object that is already
residing on the desired destination layer.
If you selected a sample object, the selected objects are moved to the same layer as the sample. If
you selected dialog, continue reading the following instructions:
The Manual Layer Selection dialog appears:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 371
Select the destination layer name from the list or select New Layer to define a new destination
layer for the selected objects.
When done, select OK.
The selected objects are moved to the specified layer.
gCONCEN
Vector Cleanup Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Concen
Command Line: gCONCEN or GCONC
Function:
Moves circles and arcs to be concentric about a location or about the centerpoint of a specified
circle or arc
Instructions:
Select Objects:
Select one or more circles or arcs.
Pick point/<Select circle/arc>:
Select another arc or circle about which the previously selected objects should become concentric.
Alternatively, type P and select the location itself.
The selected objects are moved so their centerpoints align about the centerpoint of the target object
or about the indicated location.
gCONVRT
Convert Toolbar:
Convert Menu: Vectorize
Command Line: GCO or GCONVRT
Function:
Converts raster data to vector objects.
372 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Instructions:
Conversion Type
CAD mode causes raster data to be converted into lines, arcs, circles and “arrowheads” (triangular
SOLID entities). This option is best for mechanical drawings and line diagrams.
Contour mode causes raster data to be converted into polyline or spline entities. This option is best
for maps and other documents containing contours.
Rectify
Ortho Improve the drawing by making cleaner intersections; snapping lines to horizontal or
vertical. Where applicable, fillet arcs are snapped to increments of 90 degrees, producing a high
quality filleted corner.
Reference snaps lines that are close to a specified reference angle to that angle. Parallel lines at
this angle separated by a distance close to the offset distance are snapped to that distance.
Select Reference.
First point for snap angle:
Select the first point for the angular line.
Second point for snap angle:
Select the second point to define the angle.
Reference angle <XX.XXXXX>:
You can type in a new value for the angle or press [RETURN] if it is satisfactory. You cannot
redefine it by selecting points.
Parallel alignment offset <0.0>:
This value determines the distance between the imaginary grid lines parallel to the given reference
angle. Type in a value in current drawing units. Using the (0.0) value which is always the default
means no grid snapping for this angle.
First point for snap angle:
You can define another reference angle and grid or press [RETURN] if you don’t want to use
another one. When you are finished defining the angles, press [RETURN]. The command then
continues as above.
Note: If you use the Reference Angle option, orthogonal rectification will not occur
automatically. However, you can enter “0” and “90” reference angles to achieve orthogonal
rectification.
None converts raster exactly as it appears without any rectification.
Vector Color
GTXImage CAD PLUS preserves line width information by assigning a color to vectors resulting
from different raster line widths.
By Width causes the values in the line-width configuration table will be used to determine the
color of the vector entities. Table Setup displays the table and values can be changed if desired. If
several colors are given the same width value, only the lowest number color will be used for that
line width.
Select the No Widths check box to render resulting vectors in the current drawing layer’s color or
select the Table Setup button to color-code resulting vectors for up to 16 different line widths.
Line Width Configuration Table Dialog
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 373
Click on the color to modify a color’s width value. Enter the new value in the Width input window
at the lower right corner.
Note: If you set your preferences so that the background of the screen is white, the Line
Width Configuration Table’s “white” color (color #7) will refer to black vectors.
Select another color to change or click OK to exit the Line Width Configuration dialog.
Leaving By Width inactive causes resulting vectors to inherit the color and linestyle of their
layers.
Hatches
When this is active, vectors generated from hatched areas will be isolated on their own drawing
layer. The name for this layer is established by the Hatch_Layer_Name configuration parameter in
GTXRAST.CFG. You can create this layer in advance in your drawing template and give it a
color if you always want hatched data to appear the same.
Hatch angle? <0.000>/Pick:
Type the hatch angle or type P to select two points designating the angle.
Parallel alignment offset <0,0>
Type the distance between hatches or select two points designating the distance.
Hatch angle? <45.000>/Pick:
When done, press [RETURN].
Parallel alignment offset <0,0>
Press [RETURN] again.
Linestyles
When this is active, lines that appear to have regular breaks in the raster image will be isolated on
their own drawing layer. The name for this layer is established by the Linestyle_Layer_Name
configuration parameter in GTXRAST.CFG. As with Hatch_Layer_Name, you can create this
layer in advance in your drawing template and give it a color and linestyle if you always want
hatched data to appear the same.
Arrowheads
Controls whether arrowheads (3-sided solids) are generated during CAD type conversion.
Linear alignment
Linear Alignment causes broken lines to be merged into unbroken lines as they are vectorized.
This is used to convert dashed geometry as a single entity (then the entities can be moved to a
dashed drawing layer). If this box is empty, collinear geometry with gaps or breaks will be
vectorized without closing the gaps. The gap is established by the Gap Jump setting.
Gap Jump
Sets the distance in pixels for Linear Alignment to jump when combining multiple collinear lines
into single lines (as in recognizing dashed linestyles). This can be set by manually entering the
distance or by selecting Pick Gap and then graphically showing a gap distance.
Other Options
Save Raster preserves raster data after converting it to vector. If this box is empty, the raster will
be erased after conversion.
374 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Elevation sets the elevation at which resulting vectors will be created. The default value is 0. To
create contours at different elevation, set this value before converting raster to vector.
Elevation
Set the Elevation to the level at which resulting vectors should be created (normally you want this
to be 0).
When all parameters are set as desired, click OK to launch the conversion process.
gCOPY
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Copy Raster
Command Line: GCP or GCOPY
Function:
Copies raster data from one location to another location in the image entity.
gCOPY command, illustrated
Options:
Movement Options
Base Point
Indicate the offset distance for the copy by selecting two points.
Note: Turn the ORTHO Mode ON to place copies in a perfectly horizontal, vertical, or
specified direction from the last position.
Displacement
Enter X and Y offset values to indicate copy placements.
Instructions:
Select gCOPY.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster to be copied. The selected raster will be highlighted.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 375
When all of the raster to be copied is highlighted, press [RETURN].
Base point or displacement:
There are several ways to respond to this prompt. To use the default option, either select a
reference point or type in how far over the selected data should be copied. Since the system does
not know whether X,Y value typed in this is the base point or the displacement distance, the
response to the second point clarifies this.
Using Base Point
Select a base point either by using the cursor or by typing the coordinates. This will be a reference
point for the copy process.
Second point of displacement:
A rubber-banding line will appear attached at the base point. Select a second point to define the
relative distance and angle for placement of the copy. The copy will appear in the designated
location in the display raster color. The original raster will be un-highlighted. The command will
terminate.
Using Displacement
At the “base point or displacement” prompt, type in the X and Y value for the displacement in the
same format used to enter coordinates. You will see the same prompt as above.
Second point of displacement:
Press [RETURN] to indicate that the original entry was the displacement. The raster data you
selected will be copied to its new location in the main raster color. The original raster will be unhighlighted. The command will terminate.
Copy All Images
Imaging Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Copy All Images
Command Line: gCAI
Function:
Invokes the COPY command on all image entities.
gCREATE
??? Toolbar:
File Menu: New Raster Area
Command Line: GCR or GCREATE
Function:
Establishes an unnamed raster image entity on the current drawing layer. The raster data can be
modified within the limits, which can be changed later using the gRESIZE command.
The MaxNumPixels configuration parameter limits the number of pixels allowed in a new raster
image. The default value is:
MaxNumPixels=552960000
which at 300 dpi could generate an image measuring 1357.65" X 1357.65".
376 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Instructions:
Select gCREATE.
Enter raster resolution DPI <200>:
Enter a positive integer.
Select lower left corner of raster limits <0.000,0.000>:
Normally, you enter “0,0” for this value. However, you can select any point either by typing
coordinates or selecting it graphically.
Select upper right corner of raster limits:
A rubber-banding box will appear attached at the first point. Select the point for the upper right
corner either with coordinates or graphically.
Warning: When creating a new raster image in a hybrid environment, consider the
drawing’s scale. Raster images will normally be about the same size as paper media. Create
images at “paper” size and then scale them against your vector data. You don’t want to
create a raster image the size of a house or a map - it will take a long time if it works at all!
The program will check whether there is sufficient memory for the work area you designate. If not,
you will get an error message.
CROP
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Crop
Command Line: GCRO or GCROP
Function:
Deletes all raster data outside of a specified rectangular window. For instance, you may use it to
get rid of “dirty” edges or an unwanted frame.
Instructions:
Select the gCROP command.
Select first corner of window:
Select a point for one corner of the window.
Select opposite corner of window:
A rectangular window will rubber-band from the first point selected. Position it to include all the
raster data you want to save. Press [SELECT] to select the point.
Note: If your drawing is skewed or rotated, use gDESKEW first. To reduce the raster limits
by eliminating the outside area, use gRESIZE or use the gCUT command to create a new file.
The raster data outside the window will disappear. The raster limits stay the same.
gCUT
Standard Toolbar:
Edit Menu: Cut/Copy Raster
Command Line: GCU or GCUT
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 377
Function:
Note: Raster data cut from images is oriented relative to the raster file’s coordinate system.
When cutting raster data from a rotated image entity, the raster is not necessarily saved as
displayed within GTXImage CAD PLUS. Also, when pasting raster data into a rotated
image, the raster data appears at the image entity’s native rotation.
If the “raster limits” box does not enclose all of the highlighted raster data, the data outside
the rectangle will not be saved in the file.
If the rectangle does not fall entirely within the raster limits, the limits will be used instead of
the point(s) selected.
If you want to save the file with a format other than the one specified in the GTXRAST.CFG
file, type in the extension that defines that format.
Copies raster data from the active image entity to a raster file or to memory. The default filename
is set in the configuration file.
Options:
Mode Options
Copy
Copy the data and retain it on the screen.
Erase
Copy the data and erase it from the drawing.
Destination Options
File
Copy the data to a raster file.
Buffer Copy the data to a temporary buffer (to be pasted later using the gPASTE
command).
Instructions:
Select gCUT.
Command: gCUT
Mode <Copy>/Erase:
The default value is in brackets. Press [RETURN] to select the default or select the desired mode
from the menu or by entering its abbreviation.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster data.
Press [RETURN] when all the raster data to be saved in the new file has been highlighted. You
will next be prompted to define the image limits.
Select lower left corner of raster limits:
Type in the coordinates for the point or position the cursor and press [SELECT]. A rubberbanding box will appear attached at the point.
Select upper right corner of raster limits:
Select the point for the upper right corner of the limits. The two points you have selected are stored
as the upper and lower limits of the image.
File/<Buffer>:
Enter B to copy the data to a temporary raster buffer. The selected data within the rectangle will be
copied to a raster buffer for later insertion using gPASTE. Enter F to save the selected data to a
raster file (Continue with step 8).
After specifying F or File, gCUT will save the selected data to a raster file. gCUT will display the
SAVE Raster File dialog.
378 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Enter the desired file name and select the appropriate path for the new file.
To change the default file type, select the scroll box labelled “List Files of Type:” and select the
desired file format.
The file name entered does not need to include the extension. The file type extension displayed in
the List Files of Type: box will be used.
Click OK to return to the drawing editor.
Raster file FILENAME.EXT saved.
gDESKEW
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Deskew
Command Line: GD or GDESKEW
Function:
Drawings are often scanned in slightly rotated. This command straightens selected raster by
rotating it to align with the X or Y axis. gDESKEW rotates selected raster so a selected line on the
drawing becomes “square”.
The gADESKEW (Auto Deskew) command may be faster and easier with drawings that have
titleblocks.
The deskew uses reference line that is rotated to horizontal or vertical (whichever is closer). Pick
points as far apart as possible. Use transparent zoom or raster snapping features to draw the
reference line precisely.
The lower left corner is used as the rotation point.
Processing time depends on image size, and resolution, and available memory.
Instructions:
Select gDESKEW.
Command: gDESKEW
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster data to deskew. If deskewing the entire drawing, type: ALL. Press [RETURN].
Select one end of reference line:
Select a point on a raster line that should be perfectly horizontal or vertical. A rubber-banding
reference line will extend from it to the cursor.
Select other end of reference line:
Move the cursor to the second point on the line and select it. The deskew will take place, based on
the reference line you indicated. You will see a message: De-skewing XX.XXXXXX degrees.
Do you wish to displace deskewed raster? Y/<N>:
If the raster is located correctly, press [RETURN]. The command will be completed. If you wish
to move the deskewed raster, type: Y.
Base point or displacement:
There are two ways to respond. You can either select the first of two points that will show the
movement graphically or type in the offset values in the form X,Y. Since the system does not
know whether the X,Y value typed in is the base point or the displacement distance, the response
to the second prompt clarifies this.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 379
Using Base Point
Select the reference point for the moving process.
Second point of displacement:
Note:
If you skew the same file several times the raster data could become distorted. If this
happens, re-load the raster image and deskew it again using gDESKEW once.
If the image needs to be rotated more than 5 degrees you should re-scan the drawing.
Deskewing the entire image more than a few degrees can distort the raster data.
Large files may take several minutes to complete the operation.
Using transparent zoom or the “end” or “int” raster snapping methods can help you more
accurately pick your reference line.
A rubber-banding line will appear attached at the base point. Select a second point to define the
relative distance and angle for the new placement of the deskewed raster. It will appear in the
designated location. The command will be completed.
Using Displacement
Type in the X and Y values for the displacement in the same format used to enter coordinates. You
will see the same prompt as above.
Second point of displacement:
Press [RETURN] in response to the prompt to indicate that the original entry was the
displacement. The deskewed raster will appear in the new location.
DrawOrder Back
Reference Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Send Images to Back
Command Line: GDRO-BK
Function:
Moves all raster image entities’ draworder to back using the DrawOrder command.
gECONVRT
Convert Toolbar:
Convert Menu: Vectorize Edge
Command Line: GEC or GECONVRT
Function:
Converts raster data to vector geometry.
Options:
Contour When checked, raster contours are converted into polyline entities, which are good for
designating contours. When this checkbox is empty, raster data is converted into lines, arcs, and
circles.
Save Raster
Retains raster after conversion to vector. If this box is empty, the raster is erased
during conversion.
380 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Elevation
Sets the elevation at which resulting vectors will be created. The default value is
0. To create contours at different elevation, set this value before converting raster to vector.
Instructions:
Invoke gECONVRT.
Specify raster <WINDOW>:
Select the desired raster and press [RETURN]. The Edge Convert Setup dialog will appear:
Width Recognition
The edge of a solid raster area has no width, so this option is disabled. Proceed to the conversion
type.
CAD or Contour Conversion:
Checking the Contour box will cause lines and polylines to be generated. Leaving this box unchecked will cause only lines, arcs and circles to be generated.
If the Contour option is checked, the Polyline Smooth Index input window will contain a value
between 1 and 9. A value of 1 would follow the contours least smoothly, and 9 results in the
closest match to the contour.
With lower resolution images you may want to choose values lower than 8 or 9 so that the
polylines don’t follow the square contours of individual pixels!
Set the Elevation to the desired level at which resulting vectors will be created.
Set Save Raster to your preference
Select OK to start the conversion.
gEDGE
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Edge
Command Line: GED or GEDGE
Function:
Removes the inside of solid raster regions, leaving only the edge. Removes all raster except a
single pixel width contour around the edge of selected raster data.
gEDGE command, illustrated:
Instructions:
Command Dialog:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 381
Invoke gEDGE.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster you wish to “hollow out”. Press [RETURN].
The insides of the raster are erased, leaving a 1-pixel edge around the outside.
gERASE
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Erase Raster
Command Line: GE or GERASE
Function:
Removes selected raster data from the drawing.
gERASE command, illustrated
Instructions:
Invoke gERASE.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster you want to remove.
When all the raster data to be removed is highlighted, press [RETURN]. The selected raster is then
erased.
gFRZLAY
Edit Layer Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Freeze Layer
Command Line: GFR or GFRLA
Function:
Freezes the layer of a selected object.
382 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Instructions:
Dialog/<Select object>:
Choose an object residing on the layer you wish to freeze or type D to use the dialog.
Object:
The layer of the selected object becomes frozen.
Dialog:
The following dialog appears:
Choose the layer or layers to freeze and select OK.
gHELP
Standard Toolbar:
Help Menu: Help Contents
Command Line: GH or GHELP
Function:
Starts the online Help. The Help window functions as any other Windows application Help file,
including “search for keyword” capabilities.
The Help file can also be executed from the Help icon in the GTX program folder.
For more information on available sources of help, refer to the Introduction.
Image Frame
Reference Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Image Frame
Command Line: ImageFrame
Function:
Controls whether GTXImage CAD PLUS displays frames on image entities. Sets the ImageFrame
system variable to ON or OFF.
Image Transparency
Reference Toolbar:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 383
Tools Menu: Image Control Image Transparency On
Command Line: Transparency
Function:
Makes all images transparent when selected from the Imaging toolbar. Otherwise lets you set the
transparency mode for selected images.
gINACTIVE
Imaging Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Deactivate Image
Command Line: GINA or GINACTIVE
Function:
Deactivates the active image entity, freeing memory. In order to edit the image you must reinvoke
gACTIVE and choose the image.
gINFO
Standard Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Inquiry Image Status
Command Line: GI or GINFO
Function:
Obtains details about the current raster image. It includes the default values for raster file name and
format, as well as the resolution, the raster limits and data extents (in current drawing units). The
file name and format will be that of the last raster file loaded or saved.
Instructions:
Select gINFO. You will see a listing on the text screen display similar to the following. The values
shown are sample values only.
Descriptions:
Resolution:
Shows the resolution of the current raster database in terms of dots per
inch (DPI). This value is obtained from the resolution from the file unless
overridden by the GTXRAST.CFG Resolution setting or by a resolution
established using gCREATE.
Raster data limits:
Defines the rectangular area indicating the size of the present raster image,
including bounding white space, set with gCREATE or gRESIZE or by
the limits of the raster drawing that was loaded. The values are given in
current drawing units.
Raster data extents:
Defines smallest rectangular area that can enclose the raster data in terms
of drawing units. It is defined by the X and Y coordinates of the lower left
corner, followed by the X and Y coordinates of the upper right corner of
the rectangle. The extents determine where raster data is currently drawn.
Drawing limits:
Defines the drawing limits.
Source FileName:
The name of the raster file to which the image refers.
Active FileName:
The filename to which gSAVE will save.
384 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster File type:
This reflects the format of the last raster file saved with gSAVE or the
setting in GTXRAST.CFG if no file has been saved yet.
Undo store size:
Number of raster undo’s being recorded.
Image modified?
Flag identifying whether image has been changed since the last save
(TRUE or FALSE).
Version:
Shows GTX program, version number, and ARX version of the GTX
program that is running.
gINVERT
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Invert
Command Line: GIN or GINVERT
Function:
Reverses the background and main raster colors of the current raster image. Use it on files scanned
in reverse (light on dark). This does not just invert the display of an image - it truly inverts the
raster image itself.
Instructions:
The color of the background and the color of the data will be switched.
Undo gINVERT by invoking the command again.
gISOLAY
Edit Layers Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Isolate Layer
Command Line: GISL or GISOLAY
Function:
The gISOLAY command freezes all layers except that of the selected object, effectively isolating
its layer.
Instructions:
Select objects:
Select objects on the layer or layers you want to isolate.
Press [RETURN].
The layers of the objects chosen in step 1 are isolated by freezing all other layers.
gJOIN
Vector Cleanup Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Join
Command Line: GJO or GJOIN
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 385
Function:
The gJOIN command joins lines together.
Instructions:
Select line startpoint.
Select the endpoint of the line you wish to join with another line.
Select object:
Select the first line (whose endpoint you selected).
Select object:
Continue selecting lines until all lines you wish to join have been selected.
Press [RETURN]
All selected lines are merged into one line.
gLINE
Draw Toolbar:
Draw Menu: Raster Line
Command Line: GLN or GLINE
Function:
Draws a raster line in the current raster image
Instructions:
From point:
Select or type the first endpoint.
To point:
Select or type the other endpoint.
The command continues, allowing you to continue entering point coordinates.
To point:
Note: If there is no active image, gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with gLINE.
If there is no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into which raster
line can be drawn.
Enter the endpoint for the next line or press [RETURN] to end the command.
gMIRROR
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Mirror Raster
Command Line: GMI or GMIRROR
386 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Function:
Creates a mirror image of selected raster data. This is different from reflect which mirrors the
entire current raster image. You will define a line for the data to be mirrored across. You may
either retain or discard the original data.
gMIRROR command, illustrated
Instructions:
Select gMIRROR.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster data to be mirrored. The selected raster will be highlighted.
When you have selected all the items to be mirrored, press [RETURN].
First point of mirror line:
Select a point for the start of the reference line.
Second point:
Select another point to define the reference line.
Delete old objects? Yes/<No>
Press [RETURN] to preserve the original raster geometry. If you only want to keep the new
mirrored data, enter Y.
gMOVE
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Move Raster
Command Line: GM or GMOVE
Function:
Moves selected raster data from one area to another on the drawing. The displacement points
define the relative distance and angle that the items will be moved from the original position.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 387
Note: Turn ORTHO mode ON to move objects in perfectly horizontal or vertical
directions.
Options:
Base point
Indicate the offset distance for the copy by selecting two points.
Displacement
Enter X and Y offset values to indicate copy placement.
Instructions:
Invoke gMOVE.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster data to be moved. The selected raster will be highlighted.
When you have selected all the items to be moved, press [RETURN].
Base point or displacement:
There are two ways to respond. You can either select the first of two points that will show the
movement graphically or type in the offset values in the form X,Y. Since the system does not
know whether the X,Y value typed in is the base point or the displacement distance, the response
to the second prompt clarifies this.
Using Base Point
Select a point either by using the cursor or by typing the coordinates. This will be a reference point
for the moving process.
Base point or displacement:
Second point of displacement:
A rubber-banding line will appear attached at the base point. Select a second point to define the
relative distance and angle for the new placement of the data. The data will appear in the
designated location in the main raster color. The raster will disappear from the original location.
The command will be terminated.
Using Displacement
Type in the X and Y values for the displacement in the same format used to enter coordinates. You
will see the same prompt as above.
Second point of displacement:
Press [RETURN] in response to the prompt to indicate that the original entry was the
displacement. The raster data you selected will disappear from the original location and be
displayed in the new location in the raster color.
Move All Images
Imaging Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Move All Images
Command Line: gMAI
Function:
Invokes the Move command on all image entities.
388 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
gOFFSET
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Offset Raster
Command Line: gOFFSET
Function:
Creates a copy of a selected line, arc, or circle parallel or symmetrical to the original.
gOFFSET command, illustrated:
Instructions:
Having prepared an image for editing,
Invoke gOFFSET.
Offset distance or Through <Through>:
Either enter a distance or use the mouse to indicate the distance through which copies will be
offset.
Select raster <LINE>:
At this point you enter “C” for circle, “A” for arc, or click two points on a raster line.
Line
Click two points along the raster line.
Arc/Circle
Click three points along the circumference of the arc or circle.
Offset
Side to offset?
Click a point to one side of the line, arc or circle. (you can click inside or outside a circle).
A copy of the original entity will be placed at the specified offset distance on the indicated side.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 389
gOSR
Convert Menu: OSR Batch Convert
Command Line: GOSR
Function:
Launches the GTX OSR batch vectorization program. This requires that you have a license for
GTX OSR.
Instructions:
Invoke gOSR. If the directory containing GTX OSR (C:\GTX_OSR) is on the system path, then it
will run.
If the directory is not in the system path, the following dialog will be displayed:
Locate the GTX OSR executable and select Open. GTX OSR will run.
gPASTE
Standard Toolbar:
Edit Menu: Paste Raster
Command Line: GP or GPASTE
Function:
Inserts a saved raster image at a specified location on the graphics screen. You can use this
command to insert saved raster onto an existing image or onto a blank graphics screen to create a
new image. The image may be scaled or rotated as it is placed. The default values for file format
and name will be taken from the GTXRAST.CFG file or the current database, but can be
overridden. Raster files of any acceptable format can be used.
Raster data cut from images is oriented relative to the raster file’s coordinate system. When cutting
raster data from a rotated image entity, the raster is not necessarily saved as displayed within
GTXImage CAD PLUS. Also, when pasting raster data into a rotated image, the raster data is
aligned with the image entity’s native rotation.
If there is no active image, gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with gPASTE. If there is
no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into which raster data can be
pasted.
Options:
Source Options:
File
Insert raster data from a raster file.
390 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Buffer
Insert raster data from a temporary buffer (previously created with gCUT).
Paste Options:
Move
Move the pasted data to a different location.
Rotate Specify the desired orientation (angle) of the image.
Scale
Specify the factors by which to change the X and Y dimensions.
Fit
A “Scale” option that allows you to show the scale graphically.
Instructions:
Invoke the gPASTE command.
File/<Buffer>:
Type F to paste data from a raster file. Type B, Buffer or [RETURN] if it is the default as shown
above to paste data from a temporary buffer (created with gCUT).
Pasting from a File:
gPASTE will determine the raster file you wish to paste.
Enter the desired file name and select the appropriate path for the new file.
If CMDDIA is set to 0, gPASTE will issue the following prompt:
Command: GPASTE
Enter raster file name <cut_data.ext>:
Type the name of the raster file that you want to paste. “Cut_data” or the last file pasted is the
default, shown in brackets. If no path is entered, the program looks for the file in the current
directory, then the GTXImage CAD PLUS path, then the DOS path.
Pasting from a Buffer
gPASTE will paste raster data from a buffer only if you previously performed a gCUT to that
buffer.
After determining the source of the raster data to be pasted, the following prompt will appear:
Insertion point <0.0000,0.0000>:
Select the point where the lower left corner of the file should be placed. The raster data of the file
will appear at that location in the main raster color. The gPASTE menu will replace the
GTXRAST menu.
Loading raster -- filename.ext ...
Move/Rotate/Scale
If you are satisfied with the default settings and the present location of the raster, press
[RETURN] to exit from the command. To change the location, rotation or scale, select the desired
option. Options can be selected in any order and any number of times until you press [RETURN]
to exit from the command.
The same data can be selected for further raster editing with the “previous” option of the editing
command. For instance, if you want to have more than one copy of the pasted data at the same size
and orientation, you can select gCOPY and “previous”.
Using Move
Select “Move” by entering “m” or selecting “Move” from the menu. The pasted data will be
highlighted. You will be prompted to indicate a base point for the move.
Base point or displacement:
Select a reference point. This may be a significant point such as the center of a cross.
Second point of displacement:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 391
A rubber-band line will extend from the base point.
Select a second point to indicate the distance and angle that the base point should move. The raster
data will move to the new location and be un-highlighted. The reference line disappears.
Move/Rotate/Scale:
You can continue to select options or press [RETURN] to terminate the command.
Using Rotate
Enter “r” or select “Rotate” from the menu to change the orientation of the reference box. The
pasted data will be highlighted.
Base point:
Select a point for the center of rotation.
Rotation Angle <0.0>/Reference:
A rubber-band line will extend from the base point. The rotation point is the lower left corner of
the box. The rotation is counter-clockwise from the X-axis if a positive angle is entered.
There are several ways to respond. You can accept the default angle by pressing [RETURN] or
use either of the two options. The default angle, initially zero degrees, reflects the value used for a
previous gPASTE operation.
Rotation Angle
Using rotation angle, you can specify the angle with reference to the X-axis by typing in a value
(in degrees) or by rubber-banding the reference line.
When you designate the angle by either method, the raster will be redrawn in the new orientation.
Using Reference Angle
Using reference angle, you must enter “r” or select “Reference” from the menu. You then indicate
a different base line (not the X-axis) for the graphic angle.
Reference angle <0.0>:
You can either enter a degree value to define the new base line in relation to the X-axis or you can
define it graphically by selecting the first point for the base line.
Reference angle <0.0>: Second point:
Select the second point for the base line.
New angle:
Indicate the final position for the new base line by entering a value. You can also indicate the
rotation angle graphically if you chose the original base point (the center of rotation) as the first
point of the new base line. The selected data will rotate the same amount. The angle of rotation
will actually be the angle between the reference line positions.
For example, if the desired rotation would bring a certain line to a vertical position, you could
draw the base line over that line and then type “90” for the new angle. The default angle then will
be 90 minus the angle of the base line.
As soon as the rotation angle has been specified, the highlighted data will rotate about the base
point. The highlighting will be removed.
Move/Rotate/Scale
You can select another option to change or press [RETURN] to terminate the command.
Using Scale
If you enter “s” or select “Scale” from the menu, the pasted data will be highlighted and you can
change the size of the image. The default value is initially set to X=1, Y=1.
Base point:
392 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Select the point about which the raster will be scaled. This point will not change its location. It also
serves as the first point for the scale rectangle if you use the graphic method of scaling.
Scale factors <1.0,1.0>/Fit:
The data is scaled from the base point. You can type the numerical values by which to scale the Xand Y- dimensions or select “Fit” and change the height and width graphically.
If you select “Fit”, you will be prompted to select the original size.
Select original size:
Select two corners of a box representing the size of the original image.
Select new size:
Draw the window to show the relative size of the desired image to the reference box. The data that
filled the original rectangle will be enlarged or compressed to fit into the new rectangle. The X and
Y dimensions can be different.
After you indicate the scale by either method, the pasted data is redrawn at the new size and unhighlighted.
Move/Rotate/Scale:
You can select another option to change or press [RETURN] to terminate the command. You can
further adjust the image after you have placed it with the “previous” option in the desired
command (gMOVE, gSCALE, etc.).
gRAHEAD
Vector Cleanup Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Remove Arrow Heads
Command Line: GRAH or GRAHEAD
Function:
The gRAHEAD command erases “arrowheads” (three-sided solids).
Instructions:
Filter Arrow heads - All/<Select objects>:
Type A for all or press [RETURN] to select a group of objects
If you typed A, then all 3-sided solids are erased. If you chose to select objects, the following
prompt is shown:
Select objects:
Window or pick objects. Press [RETURN] when done. arrowheads are highlighted.
Press [RETURN] to erase them.
gRASTER
Convert Toolbar:
Convert Menu: Rasterize
Command Line: GRA or GRASTER
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 393
Function:
Note: If there is no active image, gACTIVE will be invoked before continuing with
gRASTER. If there is no image attached gCREATE will be invoked to set up an image into
which raster data can be created.
Only entities within the raster limits can be rasterized. Those selected outside the limits will
be ignored or erased. When entities are partially outside, the part inside is rasterized; the
part outside is erased.
Use this command to convert specified vector entities into raster data with a designated line width.
The line style will be preserved.
gRASTER command, illustrated:
Options:
Width Options
Table
Use the width settings according to color as set in the Width Table
Box
Define a value graphically to be used for the width of the vector selected
to be converted to raster.
Value
Type in a value in inches or millimeters to use for the width of the vector
selected to be converted to raster.
Instructions:
Invoke gRASTER. The following prompt will appear:
Select objects:
Select the vector entities to be converted. When all entities to be converted are highlighted, press
[RETURN]. The Rasterize Setup dialog will appear.
To specify line width, you can enter a Fixed line width, specify it graphically by drawing a Box or
use a Table of vector color-to-raster line width correlations.
Fixed Line Width:
394 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Select the Fixed radio button. Type a value (in mm or inch) as the width to be used for all the
vector lines to be rasterized, or use the value in the Fixed Width text field. If you enter a value it
will remain the default line width during this editing session.
Note: If you defined the width previously in this session with a typed value or the “box”
option, that value will appear as the default.
Using the LineWidth Configuration Table:
Select the Table radio button and the Table Setup button. The LineWidth configuration Table
appears, correlating color numbers and line widths expressed in current units.
To change the width associated with a particular color, select that Color row. Enter the value in the
Width text field. Select OK to close the dialog or select another row to change its width.
Enter width <.XX>:
Enter the value for the width in the units being used and press [RETURN]. The Width Table will
reflect the changes.
Select another color number to change its width or press [0] and [RETURN] to continue the
command.
The entities will be changed to raster with the widths defined by their colors.
Using Box
Select Box.
Select first corner of box:
Select a point.
Select opposite corner of box:
As you move the cursor, a rubber-banding rectangle appears with one corner at the point selected.
Move the cursor until the box is the desired width and the length exceeds the width. Select the
point.
The best way to use this feature is to pick a point on the edge of an existing horizontal or vertical
raster line and stretch the box along the line. You can then easily match the width. The length of
the rectangle can be any size that is longer than the width as the smallest side is used as the width
measurement. A reference rectangle is used instead of a square to make it easier to see. As soon as
the second point has been selected, the rasterization takes place.
Note: The next time you use this command, the value of the width you used will be
displayed as the default fixed linewidth.
The highlighted entities will be converted to raster. Some residual vector markings overlay the
raster until you redraw the image.
Using Pick
Select a vector entity
Select the Pick option
Select raster <width>:
Next select a raster entity or enter a width
A dialog box will appear with a fixed width value of the raster entity selected.
Select OK
The vector entity selected will be converted to line width of the previous raster that was selected
using the Pick command.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 395
The next time you use gRASTER, the value of the width you used will be the default fixed line
width.
If the width value is less than 1 pixel, the raster width will automatically be reset to 1 pixel,
regardless of the way the width was set.
Polylines and other non-filled entities that have a width attribute will be drawn with the width
attribute.
Rasterization of certain entities may take a while to process. Rasterizing text and ellipses takes
longer than lines, for instance. Select less data at a time to improve rasterization speeds.
CALS Plotter Driver
An alternative method for rasterizing vector data is to use the Raster File Format HDI plotter
driver. This can be configured using the Plotter Manager from the Windows Control Panel.
gREFLCT
Enhance Menu: Reflect
Command Line: GREF or gREFLCT
Function:
This command reflects the raster within an image about the X or Y axis. This command can be
useful if an image was scanned through the back of transparent media.
Instructions:
Select gREFLCT.
Select axis to mirror data about <Xaxis>/Yaxis:
Select “X” or “Y” or press [RETURN] to select the default value. The entire image is flipped
about the chosen axis and the raster limits are rotated to the new orientation.
gRELIMIT
Vector Cleanup Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Relimit
Command Line: GREL or GRELIMIT
Function:
Combines trim and extend for lines
Instructions:
Select line end point:
The End AutoSnap becomes enabled to help select endpoints. Select the end of the line you want
to trim or extend.
Select Object:
Select the boundary line.
The line will lengthen or shorten to meet the boundary.
If the line cannot shorten or lengthen to meet the boundary, the following message is displayed:
Object does not intersect an edge.
396 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
gRESIZE
Enhance Menu: Resize
Command Line: GRE or GRESIZE
Function:
Changes the size of the raster work area. You can increase the dimensions in both positive and
negative directions. This is useful to accommodate pasting in additional raster files, scaling up the
drawing, or making edits that would move data beyond the existing limits. You can also reduce the
work area to reduce memory requirements, for instance, when the actual data you need occupies
only a small portion of the work area.
Instructions:
Select gRESIZE.
This command could fail in limited memory situations
Do you want to save the raster image first? Yes/<No>:
If you have not recently saved your data, respond “Yes”. You will be prompted for a file name and
then returned to the command.
Select lower left corner of raster limits <X.XXX,X.XXX>:
Select a point with the mouse or type in the coordinates for the point to be the lower left corner of
the work area. Negative numbers are acceptable.
Select upper right corner of raster limits:
Select a point with the mouse or type in the coordinates for the point to be the upper right corner of
the work area. Make sure that all the existing raster data is enclosed in the resulting window. Any
raster data not included will be eliminated from the database.
Lines marking the raster work area move to the new boundaries. Existing data retains the same
coordinates as before.
Warning: When resizing an image, consider the drawing’s scale. Raster images will
normally be about the same size as paper media. Ensure your image remains within a normal
“paper” size and then scale it against your vector data. You don’t want to create a raster
image the size of a house or a map - it will take a long time if it works at all!
gROTATE
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Rotate Raster
Command Line: GR or GROTATE
Function:
Rotates selected raster data. You will define the center point and a rotation angle to specify the
new orientation for the data. The rotation angle may be selected by entering a value or by picking
two points to indicate the angle graphically. gROTATE can also be used to “deskew” a specified
section of a drawing.
gROTATE command, illustrated:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 397
Options:
Rotation Angle
Specify the rotation angle with respect to the X axis.
Reference Angle Draw a new base line and indicate the desired angle for this line.
Instructions:
Select gROTATE.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster data to be rotated. When everything you want to be rotated is highlighted, press
[RETURN] to continue the command.
Base point:
Select a point on the entity to be used as the center point for the rotation process. The entity will
turn about this “anchor” point as it rotates. It will also be used as the base point for a graphic
representation of the rotation angle.
Rotation angle <0.0>/Reference:
There are several ways to respond to this prompt. You can enter the default value, a new rotation
angle, or use reference angles to graphically designate the rotation.
Using the Default Angle
The default angle, initially zero degrees, reflects the value used for a previous gROTATE
operation. You can accept the default angle by pressing [RETURN].
Delete old objects Yes/<No>:
Using Rotation Angle
You can specify the angle with reference to the X axis by typing in a value (in degrees) or by
rubber banding the reference line.
When you designate the angle by either method, the raster will be redrawn in the new orientation.
Using Reference Angle
Enter “R” or select “Reference” from the menu to use a different base line (not the X axis) for the
graphic angle.
Reference angle <0.0>:
You can either enter a degree value to define the new base line or define it graphically by selecting
a point. If you select a point, you will be prompted for the second point.
Reference angle <0.0>: Second point:
Select the second point to define the line that should be rotated to a particular angle.
New angle:
Type in the value for the angle the new base line should take. The selected data will rotate the
same amount. The angle of rotation will actually be the angle between the reference line positions.
For example, if the rotation should bring a certain line to a vertical position, you could draw the
398 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
base line over that line and then type “90” for the new angle. The default angle will then be 90
minus the angle of the base line.
Respond “yes” if you do not want to retain the original data in addition to the rotated copy.
Note: If raster data is placed so that it is outside of the set raster drawing limits, the portion
outside the drawing limits will be lost. If this happens, use UNDO, use gRESIZE to extend
the raster limits as necessary, then use gROTATE to rotate the data. Nothing will be lost
because all raster is within the new raster limits.
Rotating raster data may distort it somewhat. The “line”, “arc”, and “circle” intelligent
raster object picking methods may not work on raster data that has been rotated several
times.
gROTATE can rotate raster right off the image. To rotate an entire raster image 90 degrees,
rotate the image entity using the ROTATE command, or use gTURN so that the image is
automatically resized.
Positive values rotate raster in a counter-clockwise direction.
As soon as the rotation angle has been defined by whatever method is used, the highlighted data
will rotate as specified about the base point. The command terminates.
Rotate All Images
Imaging Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Rotate All Images
Command Line: gRAI
Function:
Invokes the Rotate command on all image entities.
gRUB
Modify Menu: Erase Raster Under
Command Line: GRU or GRUB
Function:
Erases raster data after it has been converted or traced to vector entities. You select the vector
entities overlying the raster that is to be erased. This lets you use the raster to evaluate the
conversion and then erase it easily.
Instructions:
Select gRUB.
Select objects:
Select the vector entities over the raster to be erased. When all the desired entities are highlighted,
press [RETURN]. You will see a message indicating the percent of rub completed.
Note: The width at which gRUB erases is determined by the linewidth configuration table.
Automatically generated polylines have no actual width, so they aren’t very effective for
erasing underlying raster. gERASE can be more effective in this situation.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 399
gSAVE
Main / Standard Toolbar:
File Menu: Save Raster File
Command Line: GSA or GSAVE
Function:
Saves changes made to a raster image.
A filename can be up to 256 characters long. If the extension is not included, the default raster
format and its extension (such as “.RNL”, “.RLC”, or “.CG4”) will be used.
TIFF subformats (uncompressed, CCITT G3, CCITTG4, and Version 6 tiled) default to the
TIFFFORMAT setting in GTXRAST.CFG.
Instructions:
Invoke gSAVE. The SAVE Raster File dialog appears:
Select the output format from the List Files of Type box. Enter the File Name and press OK.
If the file name already exists, you will be prompted to overwrite the file or cancel the save.
The drawing is saved.
Renaming an Image
If you saved the image to a new name, note that the image entity still points to the originally
attached raster file. If you want the drawing to point to the new filename you must do the
following:
Select Insert/Raster Image... to invoke the IMAGE command.
Select the GTXARCH image. Above under the Saved Path column you can see the original raster
filename. At the bottom of the dialog you can see an “Image Found At” text box, which points at
the recently saved filename.
Select Save Path. This tells points the image at the new filename.
Note: The lower left corner of the drawing raster limits is set as the insertion point to be used
when the file is loaded or pasted.
Always save when leaving for any length of time and before loading new files. If performing
many tasks on a single drawing, it is a good idea to save the files periodically.
Select OK.
400 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
gSCALE
Modify Toolbar:
Modify Menu: Scale Raster
Command Line: GS or GSCALE
Function:
Changes the size of raster geometry within an image entity. You may scale the data about a
reference point by entering X axis and Y axis scaling factors or you may scale the raster data
graphically.
Instructions:
Select gSCALE.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster data to be scaled. When all of the data to be scaled is highlighted, press
[RETURN].
Base point:
Select a point near the data selected. This point is the reference point to scale the entities about (it
will not change its location). It also serves as the first point for the scale rectangle if you use the
graphic method of scaling.
Scale factors<1.0,1.0>/Fit:
The value in the brackets is the default value, either the initial default of 1.0,1.0 (scale by 1 in both
X and Y directions) or any values previously used with the gSCALE command.
There are several ways to respond to the prompt. You can use the default value or enter the
numerical scaling factors for X and Y. You can also indicate the size graphically be selecting “Fit”.
Using the Default Scaling Factors
Scale factors<1.0,1.0>/Fit:
The default scaling values reflect the scale factors used for a previous gSCALE operation or
1.0,1.0 if the command has not been used. You can accept the default scale factors by pressing
[RETURN].
Entering Numerical Scaling Factors
Scale factors<1.0,1.0>/Fit:
Enter two values separated by a comma to indicate the X and Y scale factors respectively. To
enlarge the image, enter scale factors greater than 1. To shrink the image, enter scale factors
between 0 and 1 (Entering “2,2” doubles each dimension and increases the area by a factor of 4.
Entering “.5,.5” cuts each dimension in half and decreases the image to 1/4 its original size.)
Using “Fit”
Scale factors<1.0,1.0>/Fit:
After selecting the base point, select “Fit” from the menu or enter “F”. A rubber-banding box
anchored at the base point will appear.
Select original size:
Rubber-band a reference rectangle from the base point representing the original size of the raster
data being scaled.
Select new size:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 401
Rubber-band a new reference rectangle from the base point representing the new size of the raster
data. The “Fit” option generates scale factors based on the size ratio between the reference
rectangles.
Note: gSCALE can scale raster data right outside image entity, and the data is lost! To avoid
this, choose the base point to avoid rotating the data outside the limits of the image. After
scaling, you can easily re-select the rotated data and reposition it with gMOVE “previous” if
necessary - this even works if the rotated data overlaps with preexisting raster.
To expand the image, save the file and then use gRESIZE to enlarge the raster work area.
Scaling a raster image with different X and Y factors will cause raster arcs and circles to
become elliptical. The resulting shapes cannot be selected using the intelligent raster object
“arc” and “circle” picking methods.
The data is scaled to the dimensions indicated by the scaling factors. The command is terminated.
Scale All Images
Imaging Toolbar:
Tools Menu: Image Control Scale All Images
Command Line: gSAI
Function:
Invokes the Scale command on all image entities.
gSCAN
GTX Main / Standard Toolbar:
File Menu: Acquire Scan Drawing
Command Line: GSC or GSCAN
Function:
gSCAN Scans an image into GTXImage CAD PLUS by creating and attaching new raster file.
Scanner Options:
Calcomp Models
ScanPlusII
300, 500, 800. 1000
ScanPlusIII
300, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 800T, 1200T, 1800T, 800C
Contex Models
FSS3000, 5000, 8000, 10000, 3200DSP, 5200DSP, 6200DSP, 8200DSP, 10200DSP
TDDS8000DSP
ACS4100DSDP, 4200DSP
FSS8300DSP, 12300DSP, 18300DSP
FSC8000
Océ
4700 Series: 4715, 4730
Vidar
402 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
If using a Vidar scanner, you must Appload vidar.lsp and MenuLoad vidar.mnu in
GTXImage CAD PLUS. The gSCAN command then prompts you for the location of
VExplorer.exe. After this, gSCAN launches TruInfo, performs the scanning. After
scanning, gSCAN automatically attaches the image.
Widecom
SLC 436 PLUS and SLC 436 C
Imtek
The ScannerType configuration parameter in gtxrast.cfg configuration file establishes the
brand of scanner that is being used.
Instructions:
Filename
Defines the filename of the image will be scanned.
Scan Width
The length of the paper controls the lengh of the raster image.
The width is set by Scan Width.
Paper Size can be set to ANSI settings E, D, C, B, A, A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, Letter, Legal,
Executive, or Custom.
Unit can be set to Scanner Units (used by Calcomp, Contex and Océ; 4.24” = 1 SU), Millimeters or
Inches.
Width and Lenth are set by the paper size setting, or can be edited directly. When the width and
length values are set manually, the Paper Size value changes to Custom.
Threshold
The threshold can be set to any value between 0 and 255. Its effect is similalr to darkness on a
photocopier.
Scan
Begins scanning a drawing.
gSETLAY
Edit Layers Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Set Layer
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 403
Command Line: GSETLAY
Function:
Sets the current layer to that of a specified entity
Instructions:
Dialog/<Select object>:
Select an object whose layer you wish to make current or type D to use the dialog.
Select Object:
The selected object’s layer becomes current.
Dialog:
The following dialog appears:
Select the layer you wish to make current and press OK or select New Layer.
Pressing OK makes the selected layer current.
Selecting New starts the New Layer Creation dialog:
Type the name and choose the color for a new dialog. Press OK when done.
The new layer becomes current.
gSMOOTH
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Smooth
Command Line: GSM or gSMOOTH
Function:
Smoothes raster objects in a selected portion of the raster data. gSMOOTH can also make raster
lines orthogonal or parallel to a specified angle, combine fragmented raster lines. Can also set
404 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
raster linewidth to a fixed value or snap raster linewidth to a set of linewidths. By smoothing
raster, gSMOOTH can reduce the file size by up to 30 percent.
Options:
Rectification Options
Ortho
improves the drawing by snapping lines to horizontal or vertical.
None
smoothes the data exactly as it appears without any rectification.
Reference
snaps smoothed lines to the nearest reference angle.
Line Width Options
Box defines a value graphically to be used for the width of the data selected to be smoothed.
Value applies a literal value to use for the width of the data selected to be smoothed.
Average smoothes raster geometry to a an average of that segment’s width.
Table snaps the lines to the nearest value listed in the Width Table.
Instructions:
Select gSMOOTH.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the raster to be smoothed. When all the data to be converted is highlighted, press
[RETURN].
The Raster Smoothing Setup dialog appears:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 405
Select CAD or Contour conversion type.
Select the type of Rectification to use (Ortho, Reference or None). You can create reference
angles to snap lines to a particular non-orthogonal angle (such as hatching) or you can use no
rectification.
Orthogonal Rectification will cause all lines within a few degrees of 0 and 90 degrees to be
snapped to 0 and 90 degrees. Reference Rectification requires some setup:
Using Reference Angles
Select Reference. The option will prompt you to draw a line showing the reference angle to which
lines will be snapped.
First point for snap angle:
Select the first point to define the angular line.
Second point for snap angle:
Select the second point to define the angle.
Parallel alignment offset <0.0>:
This value determines the distance between the imaginary grid lines parallel to the given reference
angle. Type a value in current drawing units. Using the (0.0) value which is always the default
means no grid snapping for this angle.
First point for snap angle:
You can define another reference angle and grid or press [RETURN] if you do not want to use
another one. When you are finished defining the angles, press [RETURN].
Using a Fixed Line Width
If using fixed width, Type a line width in the Fixed Width text box or select Box or Pick to
graphically select the line width.
Using Box
Select “Box”.
Select first corner of box:
Select a point on the edge of a horizontal or vertical raster line.
Select opposite corner of box:
406 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
As you move the cursor, a rubber-banding rectangle appears with one corner at the point selected.
Stretch the box along the line and match the width. The length of the rectangle can be any size that
is longer than the width as the smallest side is used as the width measurement. Select the second
point.
Using Pick
Select Pick.
Select raster <WIDTH>Pick a raster line, arc, or circle that is the width to which you want to
smooth the selected raster.
The dialog will reappear with the width of the picked raster in the Fixed Width text box.
Using The Average Width
Select Average. Each element will be smoothed to its average width. If parts of a line are
significantly different in width, they will be averaged separately.
Using The LineWidth Table
Select Table from the menu. The LineWidth Table will be displayed. The LineWidth Table will
be displayed. The widths will be displayed in the units set in GTXRAST.CFG. This allows you to
set up to seven different widths to which the lines will snap.
Note: The colors do not affect raster smoothing. In this command they only determine the
title under which a line width is defined.
To modify the table, select one of the lines and then modify the associated width. The Width Table
will reflect the new value.
You can set up to 16 different widths.
You can define another reference angle and grid or press [RETURN] if you don’t want to use
another one. When you are finished defining the angles, press [RETURN].
After you press OK, the smoothing will take place and you will see the message “Processing
Image...” on the command line.
Contour Smoothing
If you selected Contour rather than CAD, all raster objects will be treated as contours rather than
lines, arcs, and circles. In this mode, gSMOOTH will not rectify lines, but you can specify a
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 407
“Smoothness” value. A large value for smoothness causes the contours to be broken into smaller
lines. In some images it may not be desireable to set a very high smoothness value (i.e., 8 or 9).
gSPECKL
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Speckle
Command Line: GSP or GSPECKLE
Function:
Use this command to find and remove speckles from the raster image or to fill in small holes in the
raster.
gSPECKL command, illustrated:
Options:
Pick Options
gSPECKL allows only Window, PWindow or View raster picking to and to add or
remove raster data to/from the selection set.
Mode Options
Delete
Remove speckles from the raster.
Fill
Fill in small holes in the raster.
Instructions:
Select gSPECKL.
Speckle size <0.00>/Box/Pick:
There are two ways to respond to this prompt. You can enter a value or you can use the “Box”
option to graphically specify the speckle size.
Entering a Value
Specify an absolute value and hit [RETURN]. This value will represent one side of a square area.
The speckles or holes to be affected must be within this tolerance.
Using a Box
408 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
To use the graphics method, type “B” or select Box from the menu.
Using Pick
Single-click with the left mouse button on a sample speckle in the image. Raster data of that size
and smaller will be considered to be speckles.
Select first corner of box:
You may want to window an actual speckle or hole to gauge the proper size. Select a point for one
corner of the window or box. A rubber-banding box will appear with one corner attached at the
point.
Select opposite corner of box:
Drag the box to the desired size and select the second point. The largest side of the box will be
used as the reference dimension to define maximum speckle/hole size.
After specifying the speckle size, the following prompt will appear:
<Delete Speckle>/Fill hole:
This sets the mode of the gSPECKL command. Select the desired mode from the menu or type its
abbreviation. Type “D” and [RETURN] for “Delete” or type “F” and [RETURN] for “Fill”.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Select the area of the drawing to be processed with the “Window”, “PWindow” or “View” option.
All of the speckles or holes of the designated size or smaller in the window will be highlighted.
Note: CAUTION: Set the speckle size smaller than punctuation marks such as the period (.)
and colon (:). If your speckle size is larger than these, they will be erased and valuable
information could be lost!
With large drawings, memory demands can be great for this command. If you have
problems, despeckle portions of the drawing, saving in between (gSAVE).
In the “Select” mode, the “window” option only adds speckles that are entirely inside the
window and “PWindow” selects speckles that are entirely or partially inside the area. In the
“Remove” mode, either window option removes data up to the window boundary.
Continue to create a selection set using “Add” and “Remove” to define the area to process. When
you are satisfied with the area selections, press [RETURN]. The highlighted speckles or holes in
the display will be processed.
gTCONFIG
Convert Toolbar:
Convert Menu: Text Config
Command Line: GTCFG or GTCONFIG
Function:
gTCONFIG sets up parameters for text IOP and the text conversion commands, gTCONVRT and
gTRAIN.
Instructions:
Text Configuration dialog has four panes: Raster Input, Character Recognition, Word Recognition,
and Text Output. This is the order in which GTX Intelligent Character Recognition (ICR)
functions:
ICR analyzes the selected raster text, filters out raster that is too large or small to be text, and
gathers string formation information to assist in the detection of space characters.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 409
If a piece of raster appears to be two or more touching characters, that raster is broken down into
its component characters. Raster text is compared to samples recorded in character recognition
(.ICR) files. A guess is made as to each character’s identity. Each guessed character is assigned a
confidence level.
If only character recognition is being performed, characters with a confidence above the AutoConvert Threshold are automatically converted into text. Characters with a confidence below that
threshold are presented in the Character Verification dialog.
When Word Recognition is performed, the Auto-Convert Threshold is not used. Instead,
characters are formed into strings which are then compared to words and patterns in the dictionary
files (.DCT). These files contain words and patterns that are likely to appear in converted
drawings.
If a recognized word is close to one found in the dictionary, but a character is missing or perhaps
incorrectly recognized, that character can be changed so the word matches the one found in the
dictionary. One threshold, Force Fit, controls how close a word has to be to a dictionary term for it
to be changed. Another threshold, Verify, determines how likely the user will be interrupted
When using character recognition (not word recognition), gTCONVRT displays ambiguous
characters in a font that allows you to easily discern between ambiguous characters (0 and O, 1 and
I, 5 and S), however, the command generates text entities using the font settings of the current text
style.
Raster Input
The Raster Input pane contains parameters that control the interpretation of incoming raster text
characters and space recognition.
IOP
Sets the minimum and maximum size raster text “blobs” that textwin or textline IOP methods are
allowed to select. Text IOP separates raster text from touching raster geometry (i.e., text with a
touching or intersecting raster underline). Text IOP needs to know the typical size of text
characters so it can tell them apart from their surroundings. Also selects the minimum and
maximum size raster that gTCONVRT will attempt to recognize as text. Entities larger or smaller
than these values are will not be selected by text IOP or will be ignored by text conversion if
another selection method was used.
Min Char Size
Sets the smallest size of raster that text IOP will select or that gTCONVRT will attempt to
recognize. The default value is set by the CharMinSize parameter in GTXRAST.CFG.
410 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Max Char Size
Sets the largest size or raster that text IOP will select or that gTCONVRT will attempt to
recognize. The default value is set by the CharMaxSize parameter in GTXRAST.CFG.
Note: Set the Min Char Size between the sizes of speckles and of typical period/full stop
raster characters (“.”). That way, speckles are not converted but small text characters are.
If there are many “touching” Characters, you may want to double or triple the Max Char
Size so that gTCONVRT doesn’t ignore touching raster text.
String Formation
Controls how gTCONVRT merges separated raster strings by inserting spaces in recognized text,
how it breaks colinear text into separate text entities.
Space Size
Sets the distance between two characters (in terms of the percentage of a character’s width)
required before a space character is inserted between the two text strings.
Max # Spaces
Sets the maximum number of the above-mentioned space characters allowed before gTCONVRT
separates the text into separate text entities. If two text strings are far enough apart, they will
exceed this “breaking point” and be portrayed by two separate text entities.
Alignment Offset
Sets the minimum vertical distance (relative to both of the text strings’ orientations) between
separate lines of text in terms of a percentage of a typical character’s height. By default, this
parameter is set to 0%, meaning that the top of one character could be level with the bottom of
another and they would still be merged, into the same text string.
Character Recognition
Recognition Files
Lists the .ICR files being used by gTCONVRT to recognize raster
text.
Open/New
Opens a recognition file or creates a new recognition file and sets it for
training.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 411
Close
Closes a recognition file.
Train
Sets an opened recognition file for training.
Save
Saves a trained recognition file.
Word Recognition
Text Output
Text recognition works on one orientation of text at a time. The default orientation is zero degrees.
To recognize at 90 degrees, Delete 0 from the orientation list box, type 90 in the orientation text
box and press [RETURN].
To use a pre-trained recognition file (suffix is .ICR) select Open. The Open Character
Recognition/Training File dialog appears. Choose the .ICR recognition file and select OK.
If you want to train this or any other opened recognition file on the new drawing, select TRAIN.
The letter “T” will appear to the left of the training file.
412 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Note: When you train a character recognition file, you will need to save it afterwards! To
save, go back into the text configuration dialog, select the Character Recognition pane, and
Save. THE FILE IS SAVED ONLY AFTER YOU CLOSE OUT OF THE TEXT
CONFIGURATION DIALOG! After selecting SAVE, select OK to make the dialog save the
file.
If training a new recognition file, set the Auto-Convert Threshold to 100 to force the
Character Validation dialog to appear for every character. If working with an existing
recognition file, a value of 70 to 90 will be preferable so the dialog only appears for uncertain
characters.
Set the values for IOP minimum and maximum character size to limit the raster selected with Text
IOP.
The String Formation parameters should work well at the default settings.
Leave the Save Raster button un-selected to keep raster text as it is being converted to text
entities.
Select OK.
Orientation
Sets the text orientations allowed to be recognized from raster text characters.
The default list is established by the CharOrient parameter in GTXRAST.CFG.
Ambiguous Characters
Lists characters that could be easily misrecognized for another (i.e., the letter “O” could easily be
drawn the same way as the numeral “0”. Therefore, it is common for each of these characters to be
included in this list).
Auto-Convert Threshold
This is a simple but important parameter. Determines how frequently the gTCONVRT command
asks you to validate its guess at characters. If the confidence level of a recognized character is
below this Auto-Convert Threshold, then the Character Verification dialog will appear, letting
you see the character for yourself and override the program’s attempt at recognizing the character.
Note: The Auto-Convert Threshold is the Confidence Level above which a character must be
recognized for it to be automatically converted to text without using the verification dialog.
This is set by the CharThreshold parameter in GTXRAST.CFG.
With a trained recognition file, gTCONVRT should accurately recognize legible characters.
Recognition of text in messy drawings may be unreliable.
gTCONVRT assigns a Confidence Level from 0 to 100 to each character. Confidence
measures the degree to which a raster character matches those on which the recognition file
has trained.
Text Sizes Lists the sizes allowed for text entities resulting from raster text recognition during
gTCONVRT. Resulting text will be snapped to the nearest perceived text size. The default list is
established by the TextHeight parameter in GTXRAST.CFG.
Save Raster If deactivated, gTCONVRT will delete raster text as it is converted to text entities.
We recommend you normally leave this parameter on so the original raster text remains for final
text checking purposes/QA.
gTCONVRT
Convert Toolbar:
Convert Menu: Text Convert
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 413
Command Line: GTC or GTCONVRT
Function:
Use this command to convert raster text to text entities. Invokes the text editor window, allowing
you to systematically check the results of the recognition process. This command can perform two
tasks:
It converts selected raster text to text entities.
Warning: The Character Verification dialog is actually a separate windows application.
Because of this, if you happen to click somewhere within GTXImage CAD PLUS’s window, it
will appear to disappear and lock up GTXImage CAD PLUS. Use [ALT-TAB] to return to
the Character Verification application if this happens.
If a recognition file is set for training it can train it on new text characters.
gTCONVRT command, illustrated
Character Recognition Instructions:
Invoke gTCONVRT.
If gTCONFIG has not yet been invoked during the GTXImage CAD PLUS session, gTCONVRT
invokes it before beginning.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Use the best IOP method for selecting the desired raster text. TextWin and TextLine were
especially designed for this command, though Fence, Inside and Window also work.
gTCONVRT recognizes and assigns a confidence level to each separate raster “blob” selected in
step 3.
Two kinds of characters will appear in the Character Verification dialog; (a) those that were
recognized at a confidence below the Auto-Convert Threshold or (b) those that were listed as
“Ambiguous” in the gTCONFIG dialog.
Character Validation: character recognition thought this “D” was an “O”.
Depending on the results of character recognition, accept or correct the character.
Using the Character Validation Dialog
Program’s Guess
Correct
Wrong
“Spurious”
(The raster is not
really a character)
Action
Press Return
Type the correct
character(s) and press
[RETURN]
Select Ignore.
Character will not be
trained and will be
recognized as a character.
Characters whose confidence is above the Auto-Convert Threshold are automatically converted to
text entities, bypassing the Character Validation dialog.
414 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
gTCONVRT ends. To edit or change resulting text, use the Modify/Properties or Change
commands.
Options:
Ignore Ignores the current character. Use this if a single character is represented by two separate
pieces of raster - ignore one half and correct the other so the correct text is written.
Cancel Ends recognizing all raster in the selection set. Returns to command prompt. No text
entities result.
Train CR
Setting a recognition file for training in gTCONFIG activates a “Train CR”
section in the lower left corner of the Character Verification dialog.
If training a recognition file, the Character Verification dialog will train on each character that
appears. If the raster that appears is a poor representation of that character (for example, a
character that was scanned poorly and is either missing a part or is attached to some geometry),
select No before accepting or correcting it. This way character recognition is not trained on
misleading raster text.
Word Recognition Instructions:
To recognize words rather than individual characters, set the mode switch to Word on the Text
Output pane of the text configuration dialog (see gTCONFIG, page 60).
Word recognition otherwise works very similarly to character recognition, except that a word
verification dialog appears instead of the character verification dialog. You are given the
opportunity to change the word before it is converted into text.
You can set a dictionary file to train during conversion. This adds new words to the training
dictionary, which is really just an ASCII text list of words that are likely to be in your drawings.
Open BASE.DCT or USER.DCT in Notepad for an example.
gTRACE
??? Toolbar:
???
Convert Menu: Trace Vectors
Command Line: GT or GTRACE
Function:
Use this command to trace over raster objects with vector entities. For a straight line, two points
are picked to determine the extents of the raster line. Circles and arcs can also be copied to vector
by picking three points.
Note: If vectorizing raster geometry depicted in a special linetype, you might want to
establish a current drawing layer with that linetype first. The resulting vector geometry is
placed on the current drawing layer and is rendered in its linetype.
Vector entities will be created using the current image and linetype settings.
Options:
Line
Default option. Trace a raster line or series of lines with one vector line. Intersections are
preserved. If points are picked beyond the endpoints of a line it will not be extended.
Circle Trace a raster circle or series of arcs with a vector circle. A raster circle or arc selected
with the “circle” option will be traced as a vector circle.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 415
Arc
Trace a raster arc or series of arcs with a vector arc. If points are picked on a portion of a
line or raster arc, only the portion between the points will be traced. You can use the “arc” option
to trace part of a circle, part of an arc or a whole arc.
Instructions:
Select gTRACE.
Select raster <LINE>:
The default mode begins as “line”. Select another from the menu or type the first letter of the name
and press [RETURN]. You will be prompted to select points.
Using Line
Select the first point at one end of the line or line segments to be traced.
Select other end of reference line:
Select the second point on the opposite end of the line or line segments that you are tracing.
Continue to trace another line or select another option. Press [RETURN] to exit the command.
Using Circle
At the prompt, select “circle” or type it followed by [RETURN]. You will be prompted to select
three points to define the circle to be copied.
Select point on circumference of circle:
Select a point on the circumference of the circle.
Select second point for circle:
Select another point on the circumference on the circle.
Select third point for circle:
Select a third point on the circumference of the circle. The circle will be overlaid with a vector
circle on the current drawing layer. Continue to trace another circle or select another option. Press
[RETURN] to exit from the command.
Using Arc
At the prompt, select “arc” or type it followed by [RETURN]. You will be prompted to select
three points as if you were drawing a three-point arc.
Select start point of reference arc:
Select a point at one end of the arc.
Select point on arc:
Select a point near the midpoint of the arc.
Select end of reference arc:
Rubber-band the arc so that it overlays the arc to be traced and select the point.
Select raster <ARC>:
The arc will be overlaid with a vector arc. Continue to trace another arc or select another option.
Press [RETURN] to exit from the command.
gTRAIN
Convert Toolbar:
Convert Menu: Text Train
Command Line: GTR or GTRAIN
416 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Function:
While training files in gTCONVRT, mistakes can be made. gTRAIN searches through a
recognition file and lets you correct or delete mistakes made during training.
Warning:
The Character Verification dialog is actually a separate windows
application. Because of this, if you happen to click somewhere outside this dialog in the
drawing window it will seem to disappear and lock up GTXImage CAD PLUS. If this
happens, use [CTRL-ESC] or [ALT-TAB] to return to the Character Verification
application. The dialog is still out there waiting for your input and the program has not
locked up!
gTRAIN searches through a training recognition file for specified characters or orientations of
characters and displays these in the Character Verification dialog. It displays each raster text
sample, allowing you to keep, change or discard each character sample. Changes are stored to the
recognition file when it is saved and closed within gTCONFIG.
Note: If you select both of these options gTRAIN will search for the specified characters at
the specified orientations.
Search Options:
Training Characters
Searches for specified characters.
Orientations
Searches for characters at specified orientations.
Editing Options:
Correct Replace the identity displayed by the Character Verification dialog with a new character
identity (an “F” was trained as “P”; typing F will correct the typo).
Keep
Accepts the character evaluation of the sample raster text.
Discard Discards the current sample raster text.
Cancel Cancels the gTRAIN command, making no further changes. Changes before
selecting Cancel are made to the .ICR file.
Instructions:
Select gTCONFIG.
The Text Configuration dialog appears.
Open a recognition file or select one that is already loaded.
Set the file to Train. “ON” appears below the Train button.
Select OK.
Invoke gTRAIN. The Text Training dialog appears:
Text Training dialog
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 417
If you leave the “Training Characters” and “Orientations” check boxes empty, gTRAIN will
display every character in the training recognition file. The characters to be displayed can be
limited to certain characters or orientations.
To limit the search to only certain characters select Training Characters and select Edit List.... The
Text Training Characters dialog appears:
Text Training Characters dialog
Build a list of individual characters to observe with gTRAIN. Enter characters separately.
Note: If you enter a multi-character string the command will search for raster characters
that have been recognized as that string (i.e., you could type the unicode \U+2205 to search
for the unicode text diameter symbol if you had previously trained that using gTCONVRT).
To limit the search to characters at specific orientations check the Orientations box and select
Edit list.... The Text Orientations dialog appears:
Text Orientations dialog
Add each required orientation to the list, then select OK.
418 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Back in the Text Training dialog, verify that the lists are correct, then select OK. The Character
Verification dialog appears:
Character Verification dialog
The dialog will present each raster text sample, its trained identity and its orientation (i.e., In 104,
the raster is displayed in the top half of the dialog and the character is recognized as the number
“7” at 45 degrees in the lower half).
If the evaluation is correct, as with gTCONVRT, press [RETURN] or select KEEP to accept the
identity of the raster text sample and proceed to the next sample.
If the evaluation is incorrect, but is still a good example of that character at its orientation, make
the necessary corrections to the text id and its orientation, then press [RETURN] or select KEEP
to make the change and proceed to the next sample.
If the evaluation is incorrect and is also a bad example (unidentifiable or at least very messy) select
Discard to remove the text sample from the recognition file.
To cancel the gTRAIN command, select [CANCEL]. All changes made prior to cancelling the
command will have been saved in memory.
To Keep Your Changes
gTRAIN does not automatically save changes to the recognition file. To write the changes to the
file invoke gTCONFIG and save the training recognition file. If you choose to keep the
recognition file as it was when it was first loaded, you can close it without saving changes.
gTURN
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Turn
Command Line: GTU or GTURN
Function:
Use this command to quickly rotate raster data in the active image by a multiple of 90 degrees.
This also swaps the image’s X and Y raster limits.
Note: This can be automatically done by gATTACH when attaching raster files that have
accompanying .REF files by setting the RefRotate to 2 for TURN.
This command is useful when you are working with images that have been scanned sideways and
appear sideways when attached within GTXImage CAD PLUS.
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 419
Options:
90
Rotate the raster data counterclockwise 90 degrees.
180
Rotate the raster data counterclockwise 180 degrees.
270
Rotate the raster data counterclockwise 270 degrees.
Instructions:
Select gTURN.
Specify rotation angle <90>/180/270:
Enter the angle or press [RETURN] for the default. The image raster data is rotated.
gVECTOR
Convert Menu: Draw Vectors
Command Line: GV or GVECTOR
Function:
Traces raster with lines, arcs or circles like gTRACE. Unlike gTRACE, gVECTOR erases
originating raster data.
gVSKEW
Vector Cleanup Toolbar:
VClean Menu: Draw Vectors
Command Line: GVS or GVSKEW
Function:
Straightens skewed lines so they become orthogonal (at a 0 or 90 degree angle).
Instructions:
Select objects:
Select lines to deskew.
Enter tolerance angle (1-10)<1.00>:
Enter the degrees of tolerance for deskewing lines.
Lines within that tolerance of 0 or 90 degrees are straightened.
gWARP
Enhance Toolbar:
Enhance Menu: Warp
Command Line: GW or GWARP
Function:
gWARP corrects distortion in a raster image by stretching the image data between source and
destination points.
420 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Options:
The Image Warp dialog establishes warp source and destination point pairs. These point pairs
define the way the image is to be stretched.
Add Point Pairs creates one pair at a time.
Generate Grid creates a lower left corner, an upper right corner, and intermediate grid points.
Instructions:
Warping requires the definition of source and destination point pairs. When CMDDIA is set to 1,
the Image Warp dialog allows the creation of individual point pairs or an entire array of them.
When CMDDIA is set to 0, a series of prompts gathers the same information.
Add Point Pairs
The Add Point Pairs button lets you add individual pairs of source and destination points.
Source point on the drawing (1):
Type or select a point on the image representing a known coordinate.
Warp point (#.###,#.###):
Type or select the real location to which the source point is to be warped or displaced.
Source point on the drawing (2):
Enter another source point or press [RETURN] to go back to the Image Warp dialog.
The specified points appear in the Coordinate List Table.
Generate Grid
The Generate Grid button lets you create a rectangular grid of destination points and then for each
point, enter the source points. This is backwards from the prompts for Add Point Pairs, but it
provides a convenient way of generating a list of known real coordinates and then provide the
location of each of those features in the raster image.
Select base point of grid:
This point may be the lower left corner of the image, or one corner of a grid of known coordinates.
Select opposite corner of grid:
Select the corner opposite the base point. This defines the total area the grid will occupy.
Select first corner for cell size:
Select one corner to define the cell size. This might be the same point as the base point.
Select opposite corner for cell size:
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Raster Command Reference 421
Select the other corner of the cell to define its overall size. The grid will fill up with cells whose
size is defined by the first and opposite corners.
For each grid point generated by steps 1-4, the following prompt will appear:
New source point on the drawing (#.###,#.###):
A line will be rubber-banding from one of the grid points. Select the raster point nearby that is
supposed to be representing this real point in space.
When all the grid (destination) points have prompted for their respective source points, the Image
Warp dialog will re-appear showing the entire list of point pairs in the Coordinate List Table.
Save List
The Save List button saves the list of point pairs in an ASCI text file. The default filename is
warp.txt.
Delete Point Pair
Deletes the selected point pair in the Coordinate List Table.
Modify Point Pair
Re-enters the selected point pair in the Coordinate List Table.
Clear All Points
Erases ALL point pairs in the Coordinate List Table.
422 Raster Command Reference
GTX Corporation GTXImage CAD 2000
Getting Started
Using the Tutorials
To get the most from these lessons you should be familiar with the GTXImage CAD
PLUS Image commands. Browse through the • Command Reference and the Raster
Command Reference sections of this manual. Experiment with the gATTACH and Image
commands to attach (load) images: ImageAdjust, ImageQuality, Transparency; basic
drawing and property-modifying commands (entity drawing commands, the ddmodify
command, Object Snapping modes).
Following the Lessons
Try performing these exercises twice. The first time, follow the instructions literally to
learn how each command and feature works. The second time, try to accomplish the same
results as fast as possible, using the options and techniques with which you are most
comfortable.
The toolbar icon and keyboard shortcut for each command and feature have been
provided in the left margin.
Standardizing Your Environment for the Tutorials
The lessons invoke most commands from menus.
The System variables CMDDIA and FILEDIA control whether dialog boxes are used in
certain commands. If set to 1, dialog boxes are used. If set to 0, command line prompts
will be used. The lessons will describe the commands as they run with these variables set
to “1”.
Editing a Raster File
Begin work on an image beginning with enhancement commands. Some of these will
operate the entire drawing, others, such as gSPECKL, on specified areas. To make more
detailed changes, use edit commands such as gMOVE, gERASE, or gCOPY. If
converting raster to intelligent vector, use convert commands such as gCONVRT with
raster geometry or gTCONVRT with raster text. Finally, the vector clean (vclean)
commands will help clean up conversion results.
Lesson 1: Raster Cleanup
In this lesson you will load a raster file and clean it using raster enhancement commands.
You will then save the edited file.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 423
Load a Raster File
GTXImage CAD PLUS displays a vector CAD drawing in front of scanned raster images.
You can edit the vector file in the foreground using the raster backdrop as a guide. You
can use File Open Raster File… (gATTACH) to open raster files.
1. Start GTXImage CAD PLUS.
2. Select File New to set up a new drawing.
3. Select the tutorial template file C:\Program Files\GTX\Image CAD PLUS
2000\Sample\GTXARCH.DWT. This template contains limits and views set up to
standardize this exercise.
4. Select OK.
5. Note that in the upper
left corner of the screen
the filename is listed as
Drawing.dwg. To
change this, select File
Save Vector File.
6. Select OK.
Open an Image
1. Select File Open Raster File
2. Select the tutorial drawing, C:\Program Files\GTX\Image CAD
PLUS\Sample\gtxarch.cg4 and click Open.
3. Make sure that the Insertion Point, Scale and Rotation “specify on screen”
checkboxes are empty.
4. Type “0,0” for Insertion
Point, type “1” for Scale
and type “0” for Rotation.
5. Select OK.
6. The image is attached.
Zoom ALL to view the
entire drawing
7. Select File Save Vector
File to save the drawing,
now with the image
attached. Call this drawing <Your Name>.DWG.
8. Zoom to the drawing’s limits (Zoom, All).
In the second tutorial you will
learn a faster way to open
a raster image.
Rename an Attached
Image
Select File Save Raster File.
Save the raster image with
your name as the filename
(C:\Program Files\GTX\Image
CAD PLUS\Sample\<Your
424 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Name>.cg4).
The file has been saved under the new filename.
Enhance the Raster Image
Now you will use raster enhancements
commands to clean up the raster
drawing.
Use gDESKEW to Straighten
the Drawing
This drawing is slightly
rotated (skewed). You will
use the gDESKEW
command to straighten it.
This command requires
two points to define a
reference line that should
become either vertical or
horizontal. You will use the
vertical dimension line
along the left of the image.
1. To see this area more
clearly, you will use the
tutorial view named “deskew”. Select View Named Views.
2. Select the view named DESKEW, then Set Current and OK. The view will zoom
closer to the image.
3. To edit this raster image, it must be prepared using the gACTIVE command. Select
Tools Image Control Active Image. gACTIVE automatically sets gtxarch.cg4,
the only attached image, as the active image.
4. Select Enhance Deskew.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
5. Type All to select the entire drawing for deskewing. The entire drawing will be
highlighted.
6. Press [RETURN] to stop selecting raster.
Select one end of reference line:
The reference line follows a line that would become exactly horizontal or vertical
after the image is deskewed. For the first point, you will use a raster-snap mode to
select the lower left corner of the drawing.
7. Select Edit Raster Snaps Intersection.
8. Select a point on the intersection of the dimension lines at the lower left. The
reference line is anchored to the selected raster intersection.
Select other end of reference line:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 425
9. Again, use the Intersection raster snapping option to select the point at the upper left
corner. Intersection IOP can also be obtained by typing ‘rint, from the pop-up menu
(by holding [Control] while
clicking the right mouse
button) or through stacked
IOP icon on the edit toolbar.
Deskewing 4.016183 degrees.
After a moment, the image will be
straightened.
10. Zoom Extents to see the
results.
Use gCROP to Clean Up
Borders
Often drawings are darkened, torn or speckled at the edges. The Enhance Crop
command is a quick way to delete the unwanted raster around the outside of the drawing
by letting you window the raster you want to keep. All raster outside the window is
erased. gCROP decreases the size of the file, freeing memory.
1. Select Enhance Crop.
Select first corner of window:
2. Select a point near the lower left corner of the drawing, just below and to the left of
any significant objects.
Select opposite corner
of window:
3. Stretch the window up
and to the right until it
encloses all the
meaningful raster
geometry, leaving only
speckles outside.
All speckles outside the
window are deleted.
4. If you made a mistake,
select Undo and repeat
the above steps.
Use gSPECKL to Remove Speckles
Scanned drawings often contain unwanted smudges, gaps, stray lines and speckles. The
gCROP command removed the speckles at the drawing’s edge, but there are still many
speckles in the middle. The gSPECKL command can be used to filter speckles from the
image without removing meaningful geometry such as decimal points. It can also be used
to fill in small gaps in solid raster.
First, indicate the maximum size for the speckles (or holes) to be affected, then indicate
whether you want to delete speckles or fill in holes.
Then window the areas where the speckles or holes are located. If punctuation marks or
other significant objects are highlighted, Remove them from the pick list. The advantage
of gSPECKL over gERASE is that you can make windows quite large since only objects
426 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
fitting the speckle size will be affected. If unwanted speckles remain after the first pass,
you can change to a larger speckle size for another pass just in the areas of the speckles.
1. It will be easier to see the speckles you are going to filter out of the image if you
zoom into an area. Use the View command to set as current the view named
“SPECK” to enlarge the rooms at upper left.
2. Select Enhance Speckle.
Command: gSPECKL
Speckle size<0.00>/Box/Pick:
3. Type: P for Pick
Select raster speckle:
4. Select a small speckle.
Mode<Delete speckle>/Fill hole:
5. This time you are removing speckles, not filling in holes. Press [RETURN] to accept
“Delete Speckle”.
Select raster<WINDOW>:
6. Type: V
The View option selects the current display. All of the speckles smaller than the
selected speckle size will be highlighted on the screen. Pressing [RETURN] would
delete all highlighted raster, but some
of this is data. Despeckling can delete
raster text characters such as “.”.
7. To avoid erasing text, type R for
Remove and window around the
meaningful raster to remove from the
selection set. The Remove icon looks
like a minus sign “-”, while the Add
icon looks like a plus sign “+”.
Remove raster<WINDOW>:
“Remove raster” instead of “Select
raster”. Window areas of text until
only speckles are highlighted. Press [RETURN] to end raster selection. The
highlighted speckles will disappear from the screen. If you spent a long time
removing useful information from the selection, then you chose too large a speckle
when setting speckle size. Next time you can select a smaller speckle or use the Box
feature while selecting speckle size to specify a smaller speckle filter.
8. PAN one screen to the right by clicking to the right of the slider at the bottom of the
screen. Start gSPECKL again. If the speckle size was adequate, you can use the same
speckle size by pressing [RETURN] at the “Speckle size” prompt. Continue this step
by despeckling the rest of the drawing.
Save Your Changes
After spending time editing the drawing you will want to save the changes. You will want
to save the image to a different name to preserve the original tutorial image.
Select File Save Raster File. This will save both the vector drawing and the raster
image.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 427
Edit Raster Geometry
You are ready to use the raster editing commands to change the drawing.
Use gCOPY to Copy Raster Geometry
1. Zoom in on the upper-left room, including some of the empty space to its left.
2. Select Modify Copy Raster.
Select raster<WINDOW>:
3. Use the Window option to select the room.
4. You will not want to copy everything, however, so type R for Remove. Note that the
prompt changes to Remove Raster:
Remove raster <WINDOW>:
5. Type L for Line.
Select one end of reference line:
You will remove the horizontal dimension line just below the top wall of the room.
6. Select a point beyond the left end of the line.
Select other end of reference line:
7. Select a point beyond the right end of the line. The line will be removed from the
selection set.
Remove raster <LINE>:
8. Likewise, remove the vertical
line just inside the left wall.
9. Press [RETURN] to finish
selecting raster geometry.
Base point or displacement:
10. Select a point near the lower
right corner of the room.
Second point of displacement:
11. Select the point for the copy placement. It should be to the left of the drawing, so the
results appear as shown in the figure below. The copy of the room will appear.
Use gERASE to Remove Raster Geometry
You will use gERASE to remove the text, the vertical line and the little box where the
lines intersected.
1. Select Modify Erase
Raster.
Select raster<LINE>:
2. Type I for the Inside picking
method.
3. Window around the text:
“OFFICE”, the little box
containing “125”, and the
small square in the upper
left corner.
428 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
4.
Press [RETURN]. All clear!
Use gSCALE to Resize Raster Geometry
1. Select Modify Scale Raster.
Select raster<INSIDE>:
2. Select the copy of the room and press [RETURN]. You will need to draw a rectangle
that completely encloses the copy of the room with no part of it extending outside of
your window because the Inside selection
method is still being used. To do this you
may have to pan or zoom.
Base point:
3. Select the lower right corner of the room.
Scale factors<1.0,1.0>/Fit:
4. Type: 1.5,1.5
The room will be enlarged. You may need
to Zoom out to see it.
5. In the scaled copy of the room, draw a vector rectangle and a circle to represent a
desk and chair. Keep some space in between the table and the top wall as shown in
the illustration below:
Use gRASTER to Rasterize Vector Geometry
Now you can incorporate these vector entities into
the raster drawing with the gRASTER command.
1. Now select Convert Rasterize.
Select objects:
2. Select the rectangle and circle representing the
chair and desk.
3. Press [RETURN]. The Rasterize Setup dialog
will appear.
4. Select the Table radio button and the Table Setup
button. The Line Width Configuration table will
appear, showing line widths of raster entities
to be generated from each color of vector
entity.
5. Note the color of the vector entities drawn
and the color’s corresponding raster width
and select OK. Select OK again in the
Rasterize Setup dialog to accept the
parameters.
Rasterize in progress .. 2 segments
Percent complete = 100.0
The entities will be converted to raster with a
width corresponding to .04 inches, assuming the
entities were Color 7 = “White” (or black if your background color is white).
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 429
6. Suppose the raster was too thick. Select Undo
to return the raster and vector to the way it
was before rasterizing.
7
Select gRASTER and again select the entities.
8. Type: .02 in the Fixed Width text field.
Entering .02 specifies the absolute width for
all entities, regardless of color. This absolute
value will be the default width for subsequent
commands.
Use gCUT to Save Selected Raster
Geometry
You could add furniture to the other rooms in the layout if you scale it down. You can
copy, scale and even rotate all with the gPASTE command. First you have to gCUT the
raster before it can be pasted. Raster is selected and written to a separate raster file or
buffer and can be pasted elsewhere. The gCUT and gPASTE combination allows you to
create standard images that can be placed repeatedly in one drawing or in different
drawings even if the scale is not the same.
1. Select Edit Cut/Copy Raster.
Mode <Copy>/Erase:
2. Press [RETURN] to select Copy.
Select raster<INSIDE>:
3. Window around the desk and chair. They will be highlighted. Press [RETURN].
Select lower left corner of raster limits:
4. The lower left corner becomes
the “insertion point” when
pasting the image. Select a point
below and to the left of the
highlighted objects as if you
were picking the first point for a
window.
Select upper right corner of
raster limits:
5. Select the second point near and
above and to the right of the desk.
Destination File/<Buffer>:
6. Type F to copy the selected raster to a file.
7. Save the file as C:\Program Files\Gtx\Image CAD PLUS\Sample\desk.cg4.
Replacing Raster Text with Vector Text
1. Zoom in on the lower right office.
2. Create some vector text over the raster text.
3. Move the vector text to the lower left corner of the room.
4. Select Modify Erase Raster.
Select raster<WINDOW>:
430 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
5. Type IN to select Inside a rectangular box.
6. Draw a rectangle around the raster text in the lower right room.
7. Press [RETURN].
The text is erased.
Use gPASTE to Insert Cut Raster Geometry
You will next paste the desk first into the room at the lower left.
1. Zoom in on the room in the lower-left office in the drawing.
2. Select Edit Paste Raster.
Source File/<Buffer>:
3. Type F to paste data from a raster file.
4. Select the desk.cg4 file you just saved.
5. Select a point inside the room near
lower left corner. It does not have
to be in the exact spot as you can
adjust the location later.
Loading raster -- DESK.XXX ...
Move/Rotate/Scale:
6. The data will appear with its lower
left corner at the insertion point.
Obviously the scale is too large.
Type S to select the Scale option, highlighting the pasted raster.
Base point:
7. Select a point at the lower left corner of the desk-chair arrangement.
Scale factors <1.0,1.0>/Fit:
8. Type 2/3,2/3
The data will be made smaller and the highlighting will disappear.
Move/Rotate/Scale:
9. Select Move.
Base point or displacement:
10. Select the upper left corner of the desk. A line will rubber-band from this point.
Second point of displacement:
11. Move the box such that the furniture is next to
the door in the wall at the top of the room.
Move/Rotate/Scale:
12. You can keep moving the image around, or
press [RETURN] to exit the command when
you are satisfied.
Use gCOPY to Copy Raster Geometry
1. Zoom ALL
2. Select Modify Copy Raster.
3. Type PR for Previous, highlighting the pasted raster.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 431
4. Press [RETURN].
Base point or displacement:
5. Select the upper left corner of the “desk”.
Second point of displacement:
6. Select a suitable location in the middle of the lower right office, creating a copy of the
image.
7. You can continue to copy the same image to other locations by re-selecting the
command and PRevious and then selecting points.
Use gROTATE to Rotate Raster Geometry
Perhaps you would prefer to have the desk turned a different way in some rooms.
1. Zoom in on the lower right room.
2. Select Modify Rotate Raster from the menu.
Select raster<WINDOW>:
3. Type O to use the Object picking method. Select the left mouse button on the desk
and chair in the lower left office. The desk will be highlighted. Press [RETURN]
when done.
Base point:
4. Select a point in the center of the chair.
Rotation angle <0.0>/Reference:
5. Type: -90
6. Select Yes to delete the original un-rotated desk.
7. Select gMOVE and PRevious to reposition the image to the desired location.
Base point or displacement:
8. Select the upper left corner of the
desk. A line will rubber-band
from this point.
Second point of displacement:
9. Move the furniture to the right.
10. Select File Save Vector File…
to save your changes.
End the Session
You are now finished editing this drawing.
1. SAVE the vector drawing. This will also save the changes made to the raster image.
2. CLOSE the drawing.
432 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Loading Your New Drawing
Use File Open Vector File to open <Your Name>.DWG. The drawing will load just as
you saved it.
What You’ve Learned
Congratulations! You have completed the first lesson on cleaning up a drawing.
You learned to use:
gSAVE to save an attached image to a new filename.
gACTIVE to prepare an image for editing.
gDESKEW to straighten a skewed image.
gCROP and gSPECKL to remove unwanted raster.
gCOPY and gSCALE to enlarge a portion of the image.
gRASTER to incorporate vector elements into the raster image.
gCUT and gPASTE to create images and insert them within other images.
Raster Picking and Raster Snapping methods to select raster for editing.
gERASE and gUNDO to correct mistakes.
gSAVE and gCUT to save raster.
Lesson 2 - Raster Revision
You will load a drawing that has a few errors and needs revision. You will use raster
editing tools to make the necessary changes and selectively vectorize part of the drawing.
You will use two images in one drawing.
Load a Raster File
1. Select File New to start a new drawing. The Create New Drawing dialog will
appear:
2. Use the template, C:\Program
Files\GTX\Image CAD PLUS
2000\Sample\GTXMECH.DWT. Select
OK.
3. Save this drawing to change its name
from Drawing.dwg. Select the File
Save Raster File command:
4. Enter your name with a “2” after it
(C:\Program Files\GTX\Image CAD
PLUS 2000\<Your Name>2.cg4) under
New Drawing Name.
5. You will use the gATTACH command to quickly attach a raster image. Select File
Open Raster File (you can also type GA for short).
6. Select C:\Program Files\GTX\Image CAD PLUS 2000\Sample\gtxmech2.cg4 as the
raster file to load. The raster file is immediately attached at 0,0 at a scale of 1 and an
orientation of 0 degrees.
7. Zoom All. Notice that the raster data is rotated 90 degrees from 0 upgright. If you do
a LIST on the image entity you’ll notice that its rotation angle is 0 degrees. To
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 433
correct this, you will have to rotate the raster 270 (= -90) degrees. Instead of using
the ROTATE command, you will use gTURN.
8. Select the Enhance Turn command.
Specify rotation angle <90>/180/270:
9. Type 270 and press [RETURN]. This rotates the raster data to 0° without rotating the
image object.
Renaming the Raster File
So that you don’t save this raster image over the tutorial drawing, you will save it to
another name:
1. Select File Save Raster File.
2. Give the raster file a new name - name it your name with a “2” after
<Yourname>2.cg4.
3. Invoke gINFO by selecting Tools Inquiry Image Status. This command tells you
about the (new) current raster image. Press [RETURN] to continue.
Scaling the Image
Paper drawings are created “at scale” to fit within the paper’s limits. CAD is typically
created at a 1:1 scale because there is no limit to the distance CAD can represent. The
attached image entity must be scaled so a distance in the raster becomes equivalent to a
real-world distance.
1. Type the VIEW command to
set as current the view
named, “Scale”. The view
will have zoomed in on the
upper half of the drawing, as
shown above. To the left is a
dimension indicating a
horizontal distance of “6.25”.
2. Select the Modify Scale
Raster command.
Select Objects:
3. Select the image by typing ALL.
Base point:
4. Type 0,0.
<Scale factor>/Reference:
5. Type R for “Reference”.
Reference length <1>:
6. Use the ‘rend raster snap to select one end of the horizontal “6.25” dimension line.
Second point:
7. Select the other end of the dimension line.
New length:
8. Type: 6.25 to set the specified distance to 6.25 drawing units.
434 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The scale of the image object will be adjusted so that the distance between the dimension
lines becomes 6.25 units long. You can use the File Inquiry Distance command to
verify this.
Enhance the Raster Image
Note: To start gDESKEW the program needed to prepare the image for editing with the
gACTIVE command. Because there is only one image, it automatically activates it. Most
raster enhancing/editing commands will start gACTIVE if there is no active image!
Now you will use enhancing commands to clean up the raster drawing.
Use gDESKEW to Straighten the Drawing
Because there are few speckles and no border to remove (using gCROP), you can skip
despeckling and start deskewing the drawing.
1. Zoom all.
2. Select the Enhance Deskew command.
No raster image selected. Invoking gACTIVE command
Loading raster -- C:\Program Files\GTX\Image CAD PLUS
2000\Sample\gtxmech2.cg4 ...
Select raster <WINDOW>:
3. Type All to select the entire drawing for deskewing. Press [RETURN] to complete
selecting raster.
Select one end of reference line:
4. Type ‘rint to use the “intersection” raster snap mode. Using the ‘rint raster snapping
method, select two points on the horizontal centerline that bisects the largest circle.
5. Select an intersection on this line on the left side of the image.
Select other end of reference line:
6. Type ‘rint again and select another intersection point on the right side of the same
line.
The selected raster will straighten.
Edit Raster Geometry
Use gCHANGE to Modify a Circle
1. Restore the view named “Change”. The view will zoom to the lower left quarter of
the drawing.
The dimensions on the left side of the drawing show the large hole in the center of the
drawing to have a diameter between 2.2400 and 2.2409 inches.
2. Use the Tools Inquiry Distance command to measure the diameter of the circle. It
appears to be roughly 1.5”, so it is not to scale. You will use the gCHANGE
command to modify the radius to 1.12”, half of the stated diameter, 2.2400”.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 435
3.
ZOOM close to the circle.
4. Select Modify Stretch Raster.
Select raster <LINE>:
5. Type C for Circle.
Select point on circumference of circle:
6. Select a point on the circle.
Select second point for circle:
7. Select another point
on the same circle.
Select third point for
circle:
8. Select a third point,
as far from the other
two as possible. The
raster circle
highlights.
Enter circle radius:
9. A line will rubberband from the center
of the circle. You can
either select a point or enter a value to indicate the new radius. Type: 1.12
The circle will stretch to the specified radius.
Use gCHANGE to Modify a Line
The dimension indicating the circle diameter should be modified. First, extend the
diagonal line that connects the circle with its dimension text, as shown below:
1. Press [RETURN] to reselect the gCHANGE (Stretch Raster) command.
Select raster <CIRCLE>:
2. Type L for Line.
Select one end of reference line:
3. Type ‘rend and select the lower left end of the line that is extending from the circle.
436 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Other end of line:
4. Use ‘rend again to select the present upper-right point of that line.
Select new endpoint:
5. Use ‘rnea to select the point on the circle opposite from where the dimension line
enters it. The line will now be extended across the circle.
Now that the line is fixed, you will use gMOVE to move the small arrowheads to the
edge of the circle.
6. Select Modify Move Raster.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
7. Draw a generous window around the upper-right arrowhead so that you include some
of the line running through it.
8. You will now remove the shaft of the arrow from the selection set. Type R for
Remove.
Remove raster <WINDOW>:
9. Type L for Line.
10. You will select two points on the line on either side of the arrow, removing the line
from the selection set while leaving the triangular arrow.
Select one end of reference line:
11. Select the first point above and to the right of the arrow.
Select other end of reference line:
12. Select the second point on the line below and to the left of the arrow.
Remove raster <LINE>:
13. Press [RETURN] to finish selecting raster.
Base point or displacement:
14. Select a point near the tip of the arrow.
Second point of displacement:
15. Use ‘rint to select the intersection of the line and the
upper right edge of the circle. The arrow will move to
touch the inside of the circle.
16. Now move the other arrow down to the lower left edge of the circle so it appears as
shown below. Be careful in selecting the arrowhead so you do not accidentally move
the nearby leader line:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 437
Converting Raster to Vector
You will now convert some of the raster geometry into vector entities.
Use the “Edge” Raster Snap to Draw a Solid
Zoom in on the circle to see the two large arrowheads.
1.
Select Control-Right Mouse Button. A pop-up menu
appears.
2.
Select Raster AutoSnap ON. This enables AutoSnap to
“object-snap” to raster data.
3.
Use the Control-Right Mouse Button again and select
the OSNAP command.
Select only the NODE object snapping setting.
NODE will snap the cursor to the edges of solid raster areas.
4.
Make sure that Object Snap On is checked.
5.
Use the Draw Polygon Solid command to trace the large arrowheads. Select three
points, then press [RETURN] for the fourth point to complete a solid triangle. (Do
not select a fourth point).
6.
Perform this process for both arrowheads.
Press OK.
Note: You will have drawn two Solid triangular entities representing the arrowheads. If
your raster data is the same color as vector objects, then these arrowheads may be difficult to
see. If this is the case, zoom all, select the raster object by clicking on its frame, and change
its color to red. Then use the REGEN command. The arrowheads will be very visible against
the now red raster data.
Use the “Nearest” Raster Snap to Draw a Polyline
1. Zoom in on the irregular hole in the lower right section of the drawing, as shown
below.
438 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
2. If you performed the AutoSnap steps above, use the OSNAP command and select
NEAREST and END.
3. Use the Draw Polyline command to trace the irregular hole. When you are almost
done digitizing the hole, type C to Close the polyline.
4. If you were using AutoSnap on raster, de-activate it by selecting Osnap Clear All.
Then, use the Control-Right Mouse Button and select Raster AutoSnap OFF.
Use gTRACE to Convert a Raster Line to Vector
1. Select Convert Trace Vectors.
2. Select raster <LINE>:
3. Left-click on the tip of the left arrow that extends out of the irregular hole you just
traced then left-click again to the right end of the arrow’s shaft. GTXImage CAD
PLUS will draw a line over the raster line, but not over the arrowhead itself.
4. Similarly, trace the right-hand dimension arrow shaft.
Use gRUB to Erase all Raster Underlying Vector Entities
Now you will erase the raster under the new vector entities.
1. Zoom All so you can see all the vector entities drawn since step 1.
2. Select Modify Erase Raster Under.
Select objects:
3. Select all the vector entities and press [RETURN].
The raster underlying the entities will be erased.
4. Select File Save to save both the drawing (vector) and raster files.
Combining Raster Drawings
Now you will add another view of this device into the drawing.
Use gPASTE to Insert a Raster Image
You will now paste the new view, called Side, into the raster image. Select Edit Paste
Raster.
Source File/<Buffer>:
1. Type F for File. The file dialog will appear:
2. Select C:\Program Files\GTX\Image
CAD PLUS 2000\Sample\side.cg4.
Insertion point:
3. Type: 20,20
Loading raster -- C:\Program
Files\GTX\Image CAD PLUS
2000\Sample\side.cg4 ...
Move/Rotate/Scale:
The side view will reappear above and to
the right of the detailed top view, but it
is rotated 90 degrees. gPASTE lets you
adjust the pasted data.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 439
4. Type R for Rotate and the pasted image will be highlighted.
Base point:
5. Select a point in the middle of the pasted raster data.
Rotation angle <90.0>/Reference:
6. Enter -90 to rotate the image upright.
Move/Rotate/Scale:
7. Complete the gPASTE command by pressing [RETURN] at the Move/Rotate/Scale
prompt.
Making a Frame
You will now draw a frame around the drawing. A vector line would look rather thin, but
it could be rasterized to make a frame using thicker lines.
1. Draw a Rectangle around the drawing
but inside the raster boundary.
2. Select Convert Rasterize.
Select objects:
3. Select the rectangle. Press [RETURN] to
complete the selection.
4. Select Box.
Select first corner of box:
5. Select a point on the lower edge of any
horizontal line.
Select opposite corner of box:
6. Move the cursor along the line and slightly above it to make a long thin horizontal
window, simulating the line for the frame. The length of the box does not matter; the
shortest side of the box provides the final width of the raster.
Notice that the value in “Fixed Width” has changed; this is the width you specified with
the box.
7. Select OK. The frame will be redrawn in the raster image with thick lines.
Save the Drawing
1. Issue the File Exit command.
2. Select Yes when you are prompted to save the changes.
This saves both the drawing and raster.
Loading Hybrid Drawings
1. Start GTXImage CAD PLUS again
so you can load all the information
together again.
2. Select the File Open Vector File
command:
3. Select C:\Program Files\GTX\Image
CAD PLUS 2000\Sample\<Your Initials>.DWG as the filename.
440 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
The vector file will be loaded and will also display the attached raster image.
What You’ve Learned
Congratulations! You have now
completed the second tutorial lesson. You
have learned to use:
gATTACH to load a drawing.
gCHANGE, gMOVE and gRUB to
modify raster geometry.
gCOORDS to adjust the scale of a
raster drawing.
Raster-snapping to select precise
points in the raster image.
gTRACE to convert raster geometry
to vector entities.
gSAVE to save specific raster
images.
END to save any modified raster images.
Open to load hybrid raster and vector drawing files.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 441
Lesson 3: Raster to Vector
When a drawing needs more than a few minor modifications it can be worthwhile to
convert it entirely to vector format. GTXImage CAD PLUS provides powerful tools for
accomplishing this quickly and accurately.
Summary of GTX Conversion Commands:
COMMAND
ICON
ACTION
gTRACE
None
gVECTOR
None
gECONVRT
gCONVRT
gTCONVRT
Converts specified
raster lines, arcs and
circles to vector.
Leaves raster intact.
Replaces specified
raster lines, arcs and
circles with vector
ones.
Vectorizes the raster
edge created in raster
mode.
Converts selected
raster data into lines,
arcs, circles and
arrowheads or
polylines.
Converts selected
raster text into text
entities.
Loading a Raster File
1. Select File New. The Create
New Drawing dialog will
appear.
2. Select Start from Scratch and
choose English (feet and
inches).
3. Select File Open Raster File.
4. Select Gtxvbelt.cg4 from the
GTX program directory and
press OK. The image was
scanned sideways, so the image
must be turned 90 degrees back
to normal!
5. Is GTXVBELT rotated? If so, select Enhance Turn. Otherwise, skip to step 7.
Specify rotation angle <90>/180/270:
Note: gTURN helps when images are scanned in sideways because it quickly rotates them
to the correct angle.
442 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
6. Press [RETURN] to accept the default 90 degree rotation.
The raster data is rotated 90 degrees while leaving the lower left corner at 0,0 and the
orientation at 0 degrees.
Use gCONVRT to Convert Raster to Vector
First, you will convert the table in the upper right corner to vector lines.
1. Zoom in on the table in the upper right corner of the drawing.
2. Select Convert Vectorize.
Select raster
<WINDOW>:
3. Type F for the Fence
raster picking
method.
First fence point:
4. Draw a short line
across one of the
table grid lines
without touching any raster text.
Undo/<Endpoint of line>:
5. Press [RETURN] to finish drawing the fence line. This will select the entire grid
without selecting the enclosed text.
Select raster <Fence>:
6. Press [RETURN] again to finish selecting
raster. The Raster Convert Setup dialog
will appear
(See gCONVRT ).
7. Make sure the Vector Color/By Width
checkbox is empty. This will ensure that
the resulting vectors are generated with the
current layer’s color and linestyle.
8. Verify that Rectify Ortho is selected. This
will snap nearly orthogonal lines to 0 and
90 degrees.
9. Un-check Save Raster so the original raster
will be replaced with the resulting vector
entities.
10. Select OK.
Processing Image...
The table will be
converted to line
entities.
11. Use the LIST
command to
check a few of
the resulting
lines. Verify that
the raster lines
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 443
were snapped to exactly vertical or horizontal orientations when they were
converted to vectors (“Angle in XY Plane = 90, 180, or 270”).
Converting Raster Text to Text Entities
gTCONVRT converts selected raster text into text entities. If a raster text character is
drawn poorly or if it is ambiguous (i.e.: it looks very much like another character) the
command will require you to verify it, using the Character Verification dialog.
Using gTCONFIG to Configure the Text Recognition
Read the command references for the gCONVRT, gTCONVRT and gTCONFIG
commands.
1. Select Convert Text Convert. Because you have not yet configured text
conversion, the Text Configuration dialog appears. This dialog sets up the details
required to convert raster text into text entities. The dialog contains four panes:
Raster Input, Character Recognition, Word Recognition and Text Output. The
dialog starts on the first pane, Raster Input.
Raster Input Pane
The IOP section limits the range of text
sizes that can be selected using one of
the two text IOP methods. It also limits
the size of distinct raster entities that can
be processed by gTCONVRT as text. Set
the Min Char Size slightly lower than
the size of small punctuation marks
(“.”). This insures that punctuation
marks, but not speckles, will be
converted.
Note: In speckled drawings you should use the
gSPECKL command before doing any conversion. This tutorial skips speckle removal
because this drawing has few speckles.
Because text characters are sometimes touching, it is good to set the Max Char Size
slightly larger than two times the size of a typical large character.
1. Set the Min Char Size to .03 (the default value of .04 will not select all the
decimal points in this table).
2. Leave the Max Char Size at “.4”. This should work fine for this drawing because
most text characters are only about .2” tall (you can use the Distance command to
sample text sizes first).
The String Formation section controls how text entities are formed from individual
raster characters. Space Size represents the distance (in terms of the portion of a
character’s width) between two raster characters required to insert “space character”
between them. Max # Spaces represents the maximum number of space characters
allowed before the characters need to be split into two separate text entities.
Alignment Offset represents the vertical offset allowed between two characters that
are of the same text string.
444 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
3. Looking at the third and fourth columns of the table, you can see that the space
between text strings can be even less than one character’s width. Set the Space
Size to .75.
4. Leave Max # Spaces at “3” so that several space characters can be fit between two
characters. If gTCONVRT finds more than 3 spaces between two characters they
will be separated into separate text entities.
Character Recognition Tab
Select the Character Recognition tab.
The Recognition Files section controls
which recognition files (suffix = ICR) are
being used to recognize the raster text.
Recognition files contain sample raster
text which is compared to the text being
converted, so it is important to choose
file(s) whose samples best match the
raster text being converted. For this
tutorial you will use the file:
TUTORIAL.ICR.
1. Select the button labeled OPEN or NEW. A file dialog appears.
2. Select Tutorial.icr from the GTX program directory and press OK.
The Auto-Convert Threshold determines the confidence level at which a character
must be recognized for gTCONVRT to automatically convert it to a text entity.
Characters recognized at confidence levels below the Auto-Convert Threshold will be
displayed in the Character Verification dialog before they are made into text entities.
The default value for the Auto-Convert Threshold is “100”. Leaving it at this value
would force the Character Verification dialog to appear for every character. Instead,
set this value to 85. Characters recognized at a confidence above 85 will be
automatically converted into text entities.
Text Output Tab
The Orientation list contains all
orientations allowed for resulting text
entities. The default orientation is “0” and
this will work because all the raster
characters in the drawing are upright.
The Ambiguous Characters list on the Text
Output pane displays all characters that,
even when drawn clearly, can be confused
or mistaken as another character. In this
drawing, the letter “O” and the numeral “0”
(zero) or the letter “I” (capital i) and the
numeral “1” (one) appear identically in this
drawing. Adding these to the Ambiguous Characters list will make gTCONVRT
verify these characters with you before it builds them into text strings. This way, if a
“0” is recognized as an “O”, you can prevent gTCONVRT from accidentally
mistaking the letter O as a zero, or a 1 as the letter I.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 445
Click in the small text box (on the left in the Ambiguous Characters section).
3. Type: 0 (zero).
4. Select Add. “0” appear to the right in the Ambiguous Characters list box.
5. Type: O (Capital O).
6. Select Add again. “0” and “O” should be in the list box to the right.
Similarly, add “I” and “1” to the Ambiguous Characters list.
7. Vector text entities will be snapped to the nearest size listed in the Text Sizes list.
Leave the value at its default of .200000. This way only text of height .2” will be
generated.
The Save Raster option preserves the original raster as it is converted to text. Leave
this box checked so you can compare the new text with the original raster text after
the gTCONVRT command is finished.
Set the Convert Method on Char instead of Word.
8. Select OK to finish configuring text recognition.
Now that you have configured text recognition, gTCONVRT will proceed.
Use gTCONVRT to Recognize Raster Text
Select raster <FENCE>:
1. Select Edit Raster Select TextWin to select raster text.
Select first corner of window:
2. Select a point above and to the left of the table.
Select opposite corner of window:
3. Select a point below and to the right of the table.
Select raster <TEXTWIN>:
4. Press [RETURN] to stop
selecting raster.
Processing Image...
5. The Character Verification
dialog will appear for each
ambiguous character and for
each character recognized at a
confidence level below that of
the Auto-Convert Threshold:
6. Each ambiguous character;
“O”, “0”, “1”, and “I”; will
appear for verification.
If a character appears and is correct, press [RETURN] to accept gTCONVRT’s
evaluation of the character.
446 Getting Started
If two characters appear connected together (touching text), type both characters
and press [RETURN]. The raster will be split into the two specified characters.
If the character is not correct, type the correct character (you may want to
activate the [Caps Lock]) and press [RETURN].
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
If non-text raster appears, select Ignore to skip converting this character into text.
Once the Character Verification
dialog has shown each ambiguous or
uncertain character, gTCONVRT
will create text entities in front of the
raster text. This text can be edited
using the Edit/Properties dialog.
Converting Dashed Raster Data
1. Zoom to the extents.
Notice the dashed
arcs in the lower
right corner of the
drawing. We will
selectively convert
the raster arcs to
vector.
2. Select Format
Layers.
3. Create a new layer
named Dashed. Set
the linestyle to
Dashed and set its color to Blue.
4. Set “Dashed” as the current layer. Select OK to exit the Layer dialog.
5. Zoom in on the lower right corner of
the drawing.
6. Select Convert Draw Vectors to
invoke the gVECTOR command.
Select raster <LINE>:
7. Type A for Arc.
Select start point of reference arc:
8. Use the ‘rint raster snap to select the
point at the intersection of the lower
half of the vertical line that bisects the circle and the beginning of the dashed arc.
A rubber-banding line should extend from the intersection to the cursor.
Select point on arc:
9. Use the ‘rnea raster snap to select another point along the middle part of the arc.
Select end of reference arc:
10. Select a point at or beyond the end of the dashed arc (at or beyond the point where
the arc touches the top half of the vertical bisecting line).
11. gVECTOR will draw a arc over the original raster arc. The dashes are too big, so
set the Linetype Scale (ltscale) to .02 to make the vector dashes match the original
raster drawing.
Note: Generally, the conversion command places resulting vector entities on the current
drawing layer, inheriting its properties. The Linewidth Table option assigns specific colors
to vectors resulting from associated raster linewidths. Hatch recognition and dashed line
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 447
recognition place qualifying hatch or dashed line information onto special layers defined in
the GTXRAST.CFG configuration file.
What You’ve Learned
Congratulations! You have now completed the third tutorial lesson. You have learned
to use:
448 Getting Started
gATTACH to load a raster file.
gCONVRT to quickly convert a selection of raster to vector entities.
gVECTOR to convert raster geometry to vector entities.
gTCONFIG to configure text conversion.
gTCONVRT to convert raster text into text entities.
Raster-snapping features to achieve accuracy.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Lesson 4: Using Advanced Conversion Features
GTXImage CAD PLUS allows the following advanced conversion features:
Linestyle recognition
Hatch recognition
Spline recognition
Arrowhead toggle
Gap Jump Setting
This tutorial will teach you to use these advanced features of the gCONVRT
command.
Prepare the drawing
1. gATTACH the tutorial file, gtxarch.cg4.
2. gTURN the image 270°.
Deskew the image as described in Lesson 1.
Zoom close into the lower left corner of the image:
Select Convert Vectorize
Select Raster <WINDOW>:
Type V to select all raster data in the
image.
Select Raster <WINDOW>:
Press [RETURN] to finish selecting
raster.
Select Linestyles. This will cause
gCONVRT to put dashed lines and other
lines with broken linestyles onto a
separate layer. The
LINESTYLE_LAYER_NAME
configuration parameter in the gtxrast.cfg
configuration file provides this layer’s
name. In the default configuration file,
this name is LinestyleLayer, so this layer
will be created when gCONVRT runs.
Select Hatches. This will cause
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 449
gCONVRT to put hatched lines onto a separate layer. The HATCH_LAYER_NAME
configuration parameter in the gtxrast.cfg configuration file
provides this layer’s name. In the default configuration file, this
name is HatchLayer.
Hatch angle? <0.00000>/Pick:
Type P to graphically select the angle from the screen.
First point for snap angle:
Select one end of a longer hatch.
Second point for snap angle:
Select the opposite end of the same hatch line.
Hatch angle? <44.98355>/Pick:
Draw a line between two hatch lines to define the distance
between them.
Hatch angle? <44.98355>/Pick:
If you wanted to convert multiple hatches that were at different
angles, you could continue entering hatch angles at this point.
Because you are converting only one, press [RETURN].
Parallel alignment offset <0.0>:
Press [RETURN]. The gCONVRT dialog appears again.
Press OK to start the conversion.
The drawing is converted.
Send Raster to Back
If the image and the vectors are both the same color, then the vectors may not be
visible.
Select the edge of the image. You may have to zoom out to do this.
When the image is selected, change its color from ByLayer to Blue.
Select Tools Image Control Send Images to Back.
The resulting vectors are now visible.
Looking at the Conversion Results
Select Format Layer to invoke the LAYER command.
The two new layers, HatchLayer and Linestylelayer, appear in the list of layers (these
have been defined in the GTXRAST.CFG configuration file).
Change the color of HatchLayer to Yellow and Linestylelayer to Red.
Change the linestyle of Linestylelayer to Dashed (you may have to LOAD the dashed
linestyle before it becomes available).
450 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Press OK in the Layer & Linetype Properties dialog.
Now the differences between hatched, dashed and continuous geometry is visible.
Note: You can establish layers for raster, dashed geometry and hatched geometry in
advance by creating them in your drawing templates. That way, the items placed on these
layers will appear in different colors and linestyles.
What You’ve Learned
Congratulations! You have now completed the fourth tutorial lesson. You have
learned to use:
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 451
Convert data using Linestyle and Hatch recognition features.
Use the Send Images to Back feature.
Lesson 5: Using Intelligent Character Recognition
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 provides the following advanced character recognition
features:
Touching Text Splitting
Dictionary Lookup
Pattern matching
Word Verification
In Tutorial 3 you learned how to use gTCONVRT/gTCONFIG to convert raster text
into vector text one character at a time. This tutorial will demonstrate how to use
these new features of the gTCONVRT command to convert text word-by-word.
Preparation
gATTACH gtxvbelt.cg4 from the GTX program directory.
ZOOM to the table in the upper right corner of the drawing.
Configuring Text Recognition
Raster Input Tab
Select Convert Text Config to set up
the text recognition parameters.
The Raster Input pane appears first. As
in Tutorial 3, set the Min Char Size to
.03, the Max Char Size to .4, Space
Size to .75, as shown in this illustration:
When done, select the Character
Recognition tab.
Character Recognition Tab
Open g_U_0.ICR and G_N_0.ICR from
the GTX program directory.
The Auto Convert Threshold is not
important because it is not used when
performing Word recognition.
Select the Touching Character Rec
checkbox.
Select the Word Recognition tab.
452 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Word Recognition Tab
The Dictionary Files section loads one
or more dictionaries the same way the
Recognition File section on the
Character Recognition pane loads
recognition files. Dictionaries (suffix =
.DCT) are ASCII text lists of words that
are likely to appear in your drawings.
Load Base.dct and User.dct from the
GTX program directory.
The Force-Fit threshold controls how
hard ICR should try to match
recognized words against dictionary
terms and patterns. The Verify
threshold controls how likely ICR is to show replaced terms to you during
conversion.
Set Verify to 92. This means that most recognized words will appear to the user, but
that perfect matches will not.
Set Force-Fit to 12. This means that most words will be forced to match a dictionary
term, but words that are sufficiently unlike any dictionary terms will be left alone.
Select the Text Output tab.
Text Output Tab
Select the .2 under Text Sizes and press
Delete.
Set the Text Sizes value to .18.
Set the Convert Method to Char.
Press OK.
Touching Character Splitting
In the raster image, the word, “STEEL”
has the letters S and T touching.
Select Convert Text Convert.
Select raster <WINDOW>:
Type INSIDE and draw a win• dow
around the word, “STEEL” in the
raster image. Press [RETURN].
The Text Verification dialog
appears, and the letter “S” appears
separated from the letter “T”.
Continue converting the word and
you will see how the touching text
splitting feature helps recognition.
Word Recognition
Erase the vector text object “STEEL”.
Select Convert Text Config.
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
Getting Started 453
Select the Text Output tab.
Select Word recognition.
Press OK to exit the configuration panel.
Select Convert Text Convert.
Select raster<INSIDE>:
Window around the entire table of raster text. This will highlight the lines as well as
the raster text.
One by one each word will appear in the Word Verification dialog. Correct any
incorrect terms and press [RETURN].
Note where the numbers 101, 102, etc. appear, the ambiguity between I and 1 and the
O and 0 is being handled by GTX ICR’s pattern matching feature. A pattern has been
entered in user.dct that reads: \d\d\d, which ICR interprets as “digit digit digit”.
What You’ve Learned
Congratulations! You have now completed the fifth tutorial lesson. You have learned
to use the Word Recognition features!
454 Getting Started
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000
System Variables
GTXImage CAD 2000 System Variables
GTXImage CAD PLUS 2000 stores the values for its operating environment and some of its
commands in system variables. Each system variable has an associated type: integer, real,
point, switch or text string. You can examine any system variable and change any writable
system variable directly on the command line by entering the system variable name, or by
using the SETVAR command. Many system variables are also accessible through dialog box
options.
Variable
Characteristic
Description
ACADLSPASDOC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
ACADPREFIX
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 40
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Controls whether AutoCAD loads the acad.lsp file into
every drawing or just the first drawing opened in an
AutoCAD session.
0
Loads acad.lsp into just the first drawing
opened in an AutoCAD session
1
Loads acad.lsp into every drawing opened
Stores the directory path, if any, specified by the ACAD
environment variable, with path separators appended if
necessary.
Stores the AutoCAD version number. This variable
differs from the DXF file $ACADVER header variable,
which contains the drawing database level number.
Controls the ACIS version of SAT files created using the
ACISOUT command. Currently, ACISOUT only supports
a value of 15 through 18, 20, 21, 30, and 40.
Sets attribute flags for ATTDEF bitcode. The value is the
sum of the following:
0
No attribute mode selected
1
Invisible
2
Constant
4
Verify
8
Preset
Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS.
ACADVER
ACISOUTVER
AFLAGS
ANGBASE
ANGDIR
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
APBOX
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
APERTURE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
GTXImage CAD 2000
Sets the positive angle direction from angle 0 with
respect to the current UCS.
0
Counterclockwise
1
Clockwise
Turns the AutoSnap{bmct tm.bmp} aperture box on or
off. The aperture box is displayed in the center of the
crosshairs when you snap to an object.
0
Aperture box is not displayed
1
Aperture box is displayed
Sets the display size for the aperture in pixels. The
aperture is the selection tool used in drawing commands.
System Variables 455
AREA
Initial value: 10
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
ATTDIA
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
ATTMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
ATTREQ
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
AUDITCTL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
AUNITS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
AUPREC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 63
AUTOSNAP
BACKZ
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
BINDTYPE
Type: Integer
Not Saved
initial value: 0
BLIPMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
(Read-only)
CDATE
456 System Variables
AREA is both a command and a system variable. The
AREA system variable stores the last area computed by
the AREA command. Because entering AREA at the
Command prompt invokes the AREA command, you
must use the SETVAR command to access the AREA
system variable.
Controls whether the -INSERT command uses a dialog
box for attribute value entry.
0
Issues prompts on the command line
1
Uses a dialog box
Controls display of attributes.
0
Off: Makes all attributes invisible
1
Normal: Retains current visibility of each
attribute: visible attributes are displayed; invisible
attributes are not
2
On: Makes all attributes visible
Determines whether the INSERT command uses default
attribute settings during insertion of blocks.
0
Assumes the defaults for the values of all
attributes
1
Turns on prompts or dialog box for attribute
values, as specified by ATTDIA
Controls whether the AUDIT command creates an audit
report (ADT) file.
0
Prevents writing of ADT files
1
Writes ADT files
Sets units for angles.
0
Decimal degrees
1
Degrees/minutes/seconds
2
Gradians
3
Radians
4
Surveyor’s units
Sets the number of decimal places for angular units
displayed on the status line or in information reported by
the LIST command.
Controls AutoSnap marker, tooltip and magnet. Also
turns on polar and object snap tracking, and controls the
display of polar and object snap tracking tooltips. The
system variable value is the sum of the following bit
values:
0
Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and
magnet. Also turns off polar tracking, object snap
tracking and tooltips for polar and object snap tracking
1
Turns on the AutoSnap marker
2
Turns on the AutoSnap tooltips
4
Turns on the AutoSnap magnet
8
Turns on polar tracking
16
Turns on object snap tracking
32
Turns on tooltips for polar tracking and object
snap tracking
Stores the back-clipping plane offset from the target
plane for the current viewport, in drawing units.
Meaningful only if the back-clipping bit in VIEWMODE is
turned on. The distance of the back-clipping plane from
the camera point can be found by subtracting BACKZ
from the camera-to-target distance.
Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs
or editing xrefs in place.
0
Traditional binding behavior
1
Insert-like behavior
Controls whether marker blips are visible.
0
Turns off marker blips
1
Turns on marker blips
Sets calendar date and time.
GTXImage CAD 2000
CECOLOR
CELTSCALE
CELTYPE
CELWEIGHT
CHAMFERA
CHAMFERB
CHAMFERC
CHAMFERD
CHAMMODE
CIRCLERAD
CLAYER
CMDACTIVE
Type: Real
Not saved
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: BYLAYER
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: “ByLayer”
Type: Integer
Saved In: Drawing
Initial value: "ByLayer"
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.5000
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.5000
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 0.0000
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: “0”
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
CMDECHO
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
CMDNAMES
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
GTXImage CAD 2000
Sets the color of new objects.
Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. Sets the
linetype scaling for new objects relative to the LTSCALE
command setting. A line created with CELTSCALE = 2 in
a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0.5 would appear the
same as a line created with CELTSCALE = 1 in a
drawing with LTSCALE = 1.
Sets the linetype of new objects.
Sets the lineweight of new objects.
-1
Sets the lineweight to "ByLayer."
-2
Sets the lineweight to "ByBlock."
-3
Sets the lineweight to "Default." "Default" is
controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable.
Other valid values entered in millimeters include 0, 5, 9,
13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90,
100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211.
All values must be entered in millimeters. (Multiply a
value by 2.54 to convert values from inches to
millimeters.)
Sets the first chamfer distance.
Sets the second chamfer distance.
Sets the chamfer length.
Sets the chamfer angle.
Sets the input method by which AutoCAD creates
chamfers.
0
Requires two chamfer distances
1
Requires one chamfer distance and an angle
Sets the default circle radius. A zero indicates no default.
Sets the current layer.
Stores the bitcode that indicates whether an ordinary
command, transparent command, script or dialog box is
active. The value is the sum of the following:
1
Ordinary command is active
2
Ordinary command and a transparent
command are active
4
Script is active
8
Dialog box is active
16
AutoLISP is active (only visible to an
ObjectARX-defined command)
Controls whether AutoCAD echoes prompts and input
during the AutoLISP command function.
0
Turns off echoing
1
Turns on echoing
Displays the names of the active and transparent
commands. For example, LINE’ZOOM indicates that the
ZOOM command is being used transparently during the
LINE command.
System Variables 457
This variable is designed for use with programming
interfaces such as AutoLISP, DIESEL and ActiveX
Automation.
The following is a simple example that demonstrates
how to use DIESEL to display the current command at
the status line:
Command: modemacro
New value for MODEMACRO, or . for none <" " >:
$(getvar, cmdnames)
CMLJUST
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
CMLSCALE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
CMLSTYLE
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
"STANDARD"
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
COMPASS
COORDS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
CPLOTSTYLE
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial Value: "ByLayer"
CPROFILE
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: <<Unnamed
Profile>>
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 5
CTAB
CURSORSIZE
CVPORT
458 System Variables
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
Specifies multiline justification.
0
Top
1
Middle
2
Bottom
Controls the overall width of a multiline. A scale factor of
2.0 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style
definition. A zero scale factor collapses the multi-line into
a single line. A negative scale factor flips the order of the
offset lines (that is, the smallest or most negative is
placed on top when the multiline is drawn from left to
right).
Sets the multiline style that AutoCAD uses to draw the
multiline.
Controls whether the 3D compass is on or off in the
current viewport.
0
Turns off the 3D compass
1
Turns on the 3D compass
Controls when coordinates are updated on the status
line.
0
Coordinate display is updated as you specify
points with the pointing device
1
Display of absolute coordinates is updated
continuously
2
Display of absolute coordinates is updated
continuously and distance and angle from last point are
displayed when a distance or angle is requested
Controls the current plot style for new objects. The
AutoCAD defined values are:
"ByLayer"
"ByBlock"
"Normal"
"User Defined"
Displays the name of the current profile. For more
information on profiles, see the OPTIONS command.
Returns the name of the current (model or layout) tab in
the drawing. Provides a means for the user to determine
which tab is active.
Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of
the screen size. Valid settings range from 1 to 100
percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs are full-screen
and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When
less than 100, the ends of the crosshairs may be visible
when the cursor is moved to one edge of the screen.
Sets the identification number of the current viewport.
You can change this value, which changes the current
viewport, if the following conditions are met:
The identification number you specify is that of
an active viewport.
A command in progress has not locked cursor
GTXImage CAD 2000
movement to that viewport.
DATE
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
DBMOD
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
DCTCUST
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: " "
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: varies by
country
DCTMAIN
DEFLPLSTYLE
GTXImage CAD 2000
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Tablet mode is off.
Stores the current date and time represented as a Julian
date and fraction in a real number:
<Julian date>.<Fraction>
For example, on January 29, 1993, at 2:29:35 in the
afternoon, the DATE variable would contain
2446460.603877364.
Your computer clock provides the date and time. The
time is represented as a fraction of a day. To compute
differences in time, subtract the times returned by DATE.
To extract the seconds since midnight from the value
returned by DATE, use AutoLISP expressions:
(setq s (getvar “DATE”))
(setq seconds (* 86400.0 (- s (fix s))))
DATE returns a true Julian date only if the system clock
is set to UTC/Zulu (Greenwich Mean Time). TDCREATE
and TDUPDATE have the same format as DATE, but
their values represent the creation time and last update
time of the current drawing.
Indicates the drawing modification status using bitcode.
The value is the sum of the following:
1
Object database modified
4
Database variable modified
8
Window modified
16
View modified
AutoCAD resets the DBMOD value to 0 when you save
the drawing.
Displays the path and file name of the current custom
spelling dictionary.
Displays the file name of the current main spelling
dictionary. The full path is not shown because this file is
expected to reside in the support directory.
You can specify a default main spelling dictionary using
the SETVAR command. When prompted for a new value
for DCTMAIN, you can enter one of the keywords below.
Keyword Language name
enu
American English
ena
Australian English
ens
British English (ise)
enz
British English (ize)
ca
Catalan
cs
Czech
da
Danish
nl
Dutch (primary)
nls
Dutch (secondary)
fi
Finnish
fr
French (unaccented capitals)
fra
French (accented capitals)
de
German (Scharfes s)
ded
German (Dopple s)
it
Italian
no
Norwegian (Bokmal)
non
Norwegian (Nynorsk)
pt
Portuguese (Iberian)
ptb
Portuguese (Brazilian)
ru
Russian (infrequent io)
rui
Russian (frequent io)
es
Spanish (unaccented capitals)
esa
Spanish (accented capitals)
sv
Swedish
Specifies the default plot style for new layers.
System Variables 459
DEFPLSTYLE
DELOBJ
Initial value: " "
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "ByLayer"
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
DEMANDLOAD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 3
DIASTAT
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
DIMADEC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMALT
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMALTD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 25.4000
DIMALTF
DIMALTRND
DIMALTTD
DIMALTTZ
DIMALTU
460 System Variables
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.00
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
Specifies the default plot style for new objects.
Controls whether objects used to create other objects
are retained or deleted from the drawing database.
0
Objects are retained
1
Objects are deleted
Specifies if and when AutoCAD demand loads a thirdparty application if a drawing contains custom objects
created in that application.
0
Turns off demand loading.
1
Demand loads the source application when
you open a drawing that contains custom objects. This
setting does not demand load the application when you
invoke one of the application'’s commands.
2
Demand loads the source application when
you invoke one of the application'’s commands. This
setting does not demand load the application when you
open a drawing that contains custom objects.
3
Demand loads the source application when
you open a drawing that contains custom objects or
when you invoke one of the application'’s commands.
Stores the exit method of the most recently used dialog
box.
0
Cancel
1
OK
Controls the number of precision places displayed in
angular dimensions.
0–8
Indicates the number of decimal places to
display in angular dimensions.
Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions. See
also DIMALTD, DIMALTF, DIMALTTD, DIMALTTZ,
DIMALTZ, and DIMAPOST.
Off
Disables alternate units
On
Enables alternate units
Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units.
Controls the multiplier for alternate units. If DIMALTF is
turned on, DIMALTF multiplies linear dimensions by a
factor to produce a value in an alternate system of
measurement. The initial value represents the number of
millimeters in an inch.
Rounds off the alternate dimension units.
Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance
values in the alternate units of a dimension.
Toggles suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
0
Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero
inches
1
Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches
2
Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches
3
Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet
To the preceding values, add:
4
Suppresses leading zeros
8
Suppresses trailing zeros
Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension
style family members except angular.
1
Scientific
2
Decimal
3
Engineering
4
Architectural (stacked)
GTXImage CAD 2000
DIMALTZ
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMAPOST
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: " "
DIMASO
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
DIMASZ
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.1800
DIMATFIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 3
DIMAUNIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
GTXImage CAD 2000
5
Fractional (stacked)
6
Architectural
7
Fractional
8
Windows® Desktop (decimal format using
Control Panel settings for decimal separator and number
grouping symbols)
Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit
dimension values. DIMALTZ values 0–3 affect feet-andinch dimensions only.
0
Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero
inches
1
Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches
2
Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches
3
Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet
4
Suppresses leading zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000)
8
Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5)
12
Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for
example, 0.5000 becomes .5)
Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate
dimension measurement for all types of dimensions
except angular.
For instance, if the current units are Architectural,
DIMALT is on, DIMALTF is 25.4 (the number of
millimeters per inch), DIMALTD is 2, and DIMAPOST is
set to "mm," a distance of 10 units would be displayed as
10" [254.00mm].
To turn off an established prefix or suffix (or both), set it
to a single period (.).
Controls the associativity of dimension objects.
Off
Creates no association between the various
elements of the dimension. The lines, arcs, arrowheads,
and text of a dimension are drawn as separate objects.
On
Creates an association between the elements
of the dimension. The elements are formed into a single
object. If the definition point on the object moves, the
dimension value is updated.
DIMASO is not stored in a dimension style.
Controls the size of dimension line and leader line
arrowheads. Also controls the size of hook lines.
Multiples of the arrowhead size determine whether
dimension lines and text should fit between the
extension lines. DIMASZ is also used to scale arrowhead
blocks if set by DIMBLK . DIMASZ has no effect when
DIMTSZ is other than zero.
Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged
when space is not sufficient to place both within the
extension lines.
0
Places both text and arrows outside extension
lines
1
Moves arrows first, then text
2
Moves text first, then arrows
3
Moves either text or arrows, whichever fits
best
AutoCAD adds a leader to moved dimension text when
DIMTMOVE is set to 1.
Sets the units format for angular dimensions.
0
Decimal degrees
1
Degrees/minutes/seconds
2
Gradians
3
Radians
DIMAUNIT sets this value when entered on the
command line or when set from the Primary Units area in
the Annotation dialog box.
System Variables 461
DIMAZIN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMBLK
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: " "
DIMBLK1
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: " "
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: " "
DIMBLK2
DIMCEN
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0900
DIMCLRD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMCLRE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
DIMCLRT
DIMDEC
462 System Variables
Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions.
0
Displays all leading and trailing zeros
1
Suppresses leading zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000)
2
Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5)
3
Suppresses leading and trailing zeros (for
example, 0.5000 becomes .5)
Sets the arrowhead block displayed at the ends of
dimension lines or leader lines. To turn off arrowheads,
enter a single period (.). Arrowhead block entries and the
names used to select them in the New, Modify and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes are shown
below. You can also enter the names of user-defined
arrowhead blocks.
" " closed filled
"_DOT" dot
"_DOTSMALL"
dot small
"_DOTBLANK"
dot blank
"_ORIGIN"
origin indicator
"_ORIGIN2"
origin indicator 2
"_OPEN" open
"_OPEN90"
right angle
"_OPEN30"
open 30
"_CLOSED"
closed
"_SMALL"
dot small blank
"_NONE" none
"_OBLIQUE"
oblique
"_BOXFILLED"
box filled
"_BOXBLANK"
box
"_CLOSEDBLANK" closed blank
"_DATUMFILLED" datum triangle filled
"_DATUMBLANK" datum triangle
"_INTEGRAL"
integral
"_ARCHTICK"
architectural tick
Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line
when DIMSAH is on. To turn off arrowheads, enter a
single period (.). For a list of arrowheads, see DIMBLK .
Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension
line when DIMSAH is on. To turn off arrowheads, enter a
single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see
DIMBLK.
Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and
centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and
DIMRADIUS commands. For DIMDIAMETER and
DIMRADIUS, the center mark is drawn only if you place
the dimension line outside the circle or arc.
0
No center marks or lines are drawn
<0 Centerlines are drawn
>0 Center marks are drawn
The absolute value specifies the size of the center mark.
Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads and
dimension leader lines. Also controls the color of leader
lines created with the LEADER command. The color can
be any valid color number. Integer equivalents for the
BYBLOCK and BYLAYER properties are 0 and 256,
respectively.
Assigns colors to dimension extension lines. The color
can be any valid color number. See DIMCLRD.
Assigns colors to dimension text. The color can be any
valid color number. See DIMCLRD.
Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the
primary units of a dimension. The precision is based on
GTXImage CAD 2000
DIMDLE
DIMDLI
DIMDSEP
DIMEXE
DIMEXO
DIMFIT
DIMFRAC
DIMGAP
DIMJUST
DIMLDRBLK
DIMLFAC
GTXImage CAD 2000
Initial value: 4
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.3800
the units or angle format you have selected.
Sets the distance at which the dimension line extends
beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are
drawn instead of arrowheads.
Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline
dimensions. Each dimension line is offset from the
previous one by this amount, if necessary, to avoid
drawing over it. Changes made with DIMDLI are not
applied to existing dimensions.
Type: Single character
Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use
Saved in: Drawing
when creating dimensions whose unit format is decimal.
Initial value: Decimal point When prompted, enter a single character at the
command line. If dimension units is set to Decimal, the
DIMDSEP character is used instead of the default
decimal point. If DIMDSEP is set to NULL (default value,
reset by entering a period), AutoCAD uses the decimal
point as the dimension separator.
Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond
Type: Real
the dimension line.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.1800
Type: Real
Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin
Saved in: Drawing
points. If you point directly at the corners of an object to
Initial value: 0.0625
be dimensioned, the extension lines do not touch the
object.
Type: Integer
Obsolete. Has no effect in AutoCAD 2000 except to
Saved in: Drawing
preserve the integrity of pre-AutoCAD 2000 scripts and
Initial value: 3
AutoLISP routines. In AutoCAD 2000, DIMFIT is
replaced by DIMATFIT and DIMTMOVE.
Type: Integer
Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4
Saved in: Drawing
(Architectural) or 5 (Fractional).
Initial value: 0
0
Horizontal
1
Diagonal
2
Not stacked (for example, 1/2)
Type: Real
Sets the distance around the dimension text when the
Saved in: Drawing
dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text.
Initial value: 0.0900
Also sets the gap between annotation and a hook line
created with the LEADER command. If you enter a
negative DIMGAP value, AutoCAD places a box around
the dimension text.
AutoCAD also uses DIMGAP as the minimum length for
pieces of the dimension line. When calculating the
default position for the dimension text, it positions the
text inside the extension lines only if doing so breaks the
dimension lines into two segments at least as long as
DIMGAP. Text placed above or below the dimension line
is moved inside only if there is room for the arrowheads,
dimension textand a margin between them at least as
large as DIMGAP: 2 * (DIMASZ + DIMGAP). DIMGAP
also sets the gap between a tolerance symbol and its
feature control frame.
Type: Integer
Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
Saved in: Drawing
0
Centered along the dimension line between
Initial value: 0
the extension lines
1
Next to the first extension line
2
Next to the second extension line
3
Above and aligned with the first extension line
4
Above and aligned with the second extension
line
Specifies the arrow type for leaders. To turn off
Type: String
arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of
Saved in: Drawing
arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK
Initial value: 0
Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements.
Type: Real
All linear dimension distances, including radii, diameters
Saved in: Drawing
and coordinates, are multiplied by DIMLFAC before
Initial value: 1.0000
being converted to dimension text.
System Variables 463
DIMLIM
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMLUNIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMLWD
Type: Enum
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: BYBLOCK
Type: Enum
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: BYBLOCK
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: " "
DIMLWE
DIMPOST
DIMRND
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMSAH
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMSCALE
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
464 System Variables
DIMLFAC has no effect on angular dimensions, and is
not applied to the values held in DIMRND, DIMTMor
DIMTP.
If you create a dimension in paper space and DIMLFAC
is not set to zero, AutoCAD multiplies the distance
measured by the absolute value of DIMLFAC. In model
space, negative values for DIMLFAC are ignored, and
the value 1.0 is used instead.
AutoCAD computes a value for DIMLFAC if you try to
change DIMLFAC from the Dim prompt while in paper
space and you select the Viewport option.
Dim: dimlfac
Current value <1.0000> New value (Viewport): v
Select viewport to set scale:
AutoCAD calculates the scaling of model space to paper
space and assigns the negative of this value to
DIMLFAC.
Generates dimension limits as the default text. Setting
DIMLIM to on turns DIMTOL off.
Off
Dimension limits are not generated as default
text.
On
Dimension limits are generated as default text.
Sets units for all dimension types except Angular.
1
Scientific
2
Decimal
3
Engineering
4
Architectural
5
Fractional
6
Windows desktop
Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. Values are
standard lineweight (BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, integer
representing 100th of mm).
Assigns lineweight to extension lines. Values are
standard lineweight (BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, integer
representing 100th of mm).
Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension
measurement. For example, to establish a suffix for
millimeters, set DIMPOST to mm; a distance of 19.2
units would be displayed as 19.2 mm.
If tolerances are turned on, the suffix is applied to the
tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Use <> to indicate placement of the text in relation to the
dimension value. For example, enter <>mm to display a
5.0 millimeter radial dimension as “5.0mm.” If you
entered mm <>, the dimension would be displayed as
“mm 5.0.” Use the <> mechanism for angular
dimensions.
Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified
value. For instance, if DIMRND is set to 0.25, all
distances round to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you set
DIMRND to 1.0, all distances round to the nearest
integer. Note that the number of digits edited after the
decimal point depends on the precision set by DIMDEC.
DIMRND does not apply to angular dimensions.
Controls the display of dimension line arrowhead blocks.
Off
Use arrowhead blocks set by DIMBLK
On
Use arrowhead blocks set by DIMBLK1and
DIMBLK2
Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning
variables that specify sizes, distances or offsets. Also
affects the scale of leader objects created with the
LEADER command.
0.0
AutoCAD computes a reasonable default
value based on the scaling between the current model
space viewport and paper space. If you are in paper
GTXImage CAD 2000
DIMSD1
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMSD2
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMSE1
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
DIMSE2
DIMSHO
DIMSOXD
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMSTYLE
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
DIMTAD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMTDEC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 4
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
DIMTFAC
DIMTIH
GTXImage CAD 2000
Type: Switch
space or model space and not using the paper space
feature, the scale factor is 1.0.
>0
AutoCAD computes a scale factor that leads
text sizes, arrowhead sizes and other scaled distances
to plot at their face values.
DIMSCALE does not affect tolerances or measured
lengths, coordinates or angles.
Controls suppression of the first dimension line.
When turned on, suppresses the display of the
dimension line and arrowhead between the first
extension line and the text.
Controls suppression of the second dimension line.
When turned on, suppresses the display of the
dimension line and arrowhead between the second
extension line and the text.
Suppresses display of the first extension line.
Off
Extension line is not suppressed
On
Extension line is suppressed
Suppresses display of the second extension line.
Off
Extension line is not suppressed
On
Extension line is suppressed
Controls redefinition of dimension objects while
dragging. Associative dimensions recompute
dynamically as they are dragged. On some computers,
dynamic dragging can be very slow, so, set DIMSHO to
off to drag the original image instead. DIMSHO is not
stored in a dimension style.
Suppresses drawing of dimension lines outside the
extension lines.
Off
Dimension lines are not suppressed
On
Dimension lines are suppressed
If the dimension lines would be outside the extension
lines and DIMTIX is on, setting DIMSOXD to on
suppresses the dimension line. If DIMTIX is off,
DIMSOXD has no effect.
DIMSTYLE is both a command and a system variable.
The DIMSTYLE system variable shows the current
dimension style. To display the DIMSTYLE system
variable, use the SETVAR command. The DIMSTYLE
system variable is read-only; you cannot change its
value on the command line. To change the current
dimension style, use the DIMSTYLE command.
Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the
dimension line.
0
Centers the dimension text between the
extension lines.
1
Places the dimension text above the
dimension line except when the dimension line is not
horizontal and text inside the extension lines is forced
horizontal (DIMTIH = 1). The distance from the
dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is
the current DIMGAP value.
2
Places the dimension text on the side of the
dimension line farthest away from the defining points.
3
Places the dimension text to conform to
Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS).
Sets the number of decimal places to display in
tolerance values for the primary units in a dimension.
Sets a scale factor used to calculate the height of text for
dimension fractions and tolerances. GTXImage CAD
PLUS multiplies DIMTXT by DIMTFAC to set the
fractional or tolerance text height.
Controls the position of dimension text inside the
System Variables 465
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
DIMTIX
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMTM
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.000
DIMTMOVE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DIMTOFL
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMTOH
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
DIMTOL
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
DIMTOLJ
DIMTP
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMTSZ
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
466 System Variables
extension lines for all dimension types except ordinate.
Off
Aligns text with the dimension line
On
Draws text horizontally
Draws text between extension lines.
Off
Varies with the type of dimension. For linear
and angular dimensions, AutoCAD places text inside the
extension lines if there is sufficient room. For radius and
diameter dimensions that do not fit inside the circle or
arc, DIMTIX has no effect and always forces the text
outside the circle or arc.
On
Draws dimension text between the extension
lines even if AutoCAD ordinarily places it outside those
lines.
Sets the minimum (or lower) tolerance limit for dimension
text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. GTXImage CAD
PLUS accepts signed values for DIMTM. If DIMTOL is
on and DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value,
AutoCAD draws a tolerance value.
If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance
is drawn above the lower, and a plus sign is added to the
DIMTP value if it is positive.
For DIMTM, AutoCAD uses the negative of the value you
enter (adding a minus sign if you specify a positive
number and a plus sign if you specify a negative
number).
Sets dimension text movement rules.
0
Moves the dimension line with dimension text
1
Adds a leader when dimension text is moved
2
Allows text to be moved freely without a leader
Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the
extension lines even when the text is placed outside. For
radius and diameter dimensions (when DIMTIX is off),
draws a dimension line inside the circle or arc and
places the text, arrowheads and leader outside.
Off
Does not draw dimension lines between the
measured points when arrowheads are placed outside
the measured points
On
Draws dimension lines between the measured
points even when arrowheads are placed outside the
measured points
Controls the position of dimension text outside the
extension lines.
Off
Aligns text with the dimension line
On
Draws text horizontally
Appends tolerances to dimension text. Setting DIMTOL
to on turns DIMLIM off.
Sets the vertical justification for tolerance values relative
to the nominal dimension text.
0
Bottom
1
Middle
2
Top
Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for
dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. AutoCAD
accepts signed values for DIMTP. If DIMTOL is on and
DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, AutoCAD
draws a tolerance value.
If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance
is drawn above the lower and a plus sign is added to the
DIMTP value if it is positive.
Specifies the size of oblique strokes drawn instead of
arrowheads for linear, radius and diameter dimensioning.
0
Draws arrowheads.
>0
Draws oblique strokes instead of arrowheads.
The size of the oblique strokes is determined by this
GTXImage CAD 2000
DIMTVP
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
DIMTXSTY
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
"STANDARD"
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.1800
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
DIMTXT
DIMTZIN
DIMUNIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
DIMUPT
Type: Switch
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off
DIMZIN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DISPSILH
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
DISTANCE
(Read-only)
GTXImage CAD 2000
value multiplied by the DIMSCALE value.
Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or
below the dimension line. AutoCAD uses the DIMTVP
value when DIMTAD is off. The magnitude of the vertical
offset of text is the product of the text height and
DIMTVP. Setting DIMTVP to 1.0 is equivalent to setting
DIMTAD to on. AutoCAD splits the dimension line to
accommodate the text only if the absolute value of
DIMTVP is less than 0.7.
Specifies the text style of the dimension.
Specifies the height of dimension text, unless the current
text style has a fixed height.
Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
DIMTZIN stores this value when you enter it on the
command line or set it under Primary Units in the
Annotation dialog box. DIMTZIN values 0–3 affect feetand-inch dimensions only.
0
Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero
inches
1
Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches
2
Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches
3
Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet
4
Suppresses leading zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000)
8
Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5)
12
Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for
example, 0.5000 becomes 0.5)
Obsolete. Has no effect in AutoCAD 2000 except to
preserve the integrity of pre-AutoCAD 2000 scripts and
AutoLISP routines. In AutoCAD 2000, DIMUNIT is
replaced by DIMLUNIT and DIMFRAC.
Controls options for user-positioned text.
Off
Cursor controls only the dimension line
location
On
Cursor controls both the text position and the
dimension line location
Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit
value. DIMZIN stores this value when you enter it on the
command line or set it under Primary Units in the
Annotation dialog box. DIMZIN values 0–3 affect feetand-inch dimensions only.
0
Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero
inches
1
Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches
2
Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches
3
Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet
4
Suppresses leading zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000)
8
Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal
dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5)
12
Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for
example, 0.5000 becomes 0.5)
DIMZIN also affects real-to-string conversions performed
by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions.
Controls display of silhouette curves of solid objects in
Wireframe mode. Also controls whether mesh is drawn
or suppressed when a solid object is hidden.
0
Off
1
On
Stores the distance computed by the DIST command.
System Variables 467
DONUTID
DONUTOD
Type: Real
Not saved
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 0.5000
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
DRAGMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
DRAGP1
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 10
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 25
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
DRAGP2
DWGCHECK
DWGCODEPAGE
DWGNAME
DWGPREFIX
DWGTITLED
EDGEMODE
ELEVATION
EXPERT
468 System Variables
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
Initial value: 0.0000
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.
Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. The
value must be nonzero. If DONUTID is larger than
DONUTOD, the two values are swapped by the next
command.
Controls the display of objects being dragged.
0
Does not display an outline of the object as
you drag it
1
Displays the outline of the object as you drag it
only if you enter drag on the command line after
selecting the object to drag
2
Auto; always displays an outline of the object
as you drag it
Sets the regen-drag input sampling rate.
Sets the fast-drag input sampling rate.
Determines whether a drawing was last edited by a
product other than AutoCAD. At zero, the dialog box
display is suppressed. Changing the value to 1 will
display the dialog box, if warranted.
Stores the same value as SYSCODEPAGE (for
compatibility reasons).
Stores the drawing name as entered by the user. If the
drawing has not been named yet, DWGNAME defaults
to “Drawing.dwg.” If the user specified a drive/directory
prefix, the prefix is stored in DWGPREFIX.
Stores the drive/directory prefix for the drawing.
Indicates whether the current drawing has been named.
0
Drawing has not been named
1
Drawing has been named
Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands
determine cutting and boundary edges.
0
Uses the selected edge without an extension
1
Extends or trims the selected object to an
imaginary extension of the cutting or boundary edge.
Lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, rays and polylines are objects
eligible for natural extension. The natural extension of a
line or ray is an unbounded line (xline), an arc is a circle,
and an elliptical arc is an ellipse. A polyline is broken
down into its line and arc components, which are
extended to their natural boundaries.
Stores the current elevation relative to the current UCS
for the current viewport in the current space.
Controls whether certain prompts are issued.
0
Issues all prompts normally.
1
Suppresses "About to regen, proceed?" and
"Really want to turn the current layer off?"
2
Suppresses the preceding prompts and "Block
already defined. Redefine it?" BLOCK and "A drawing
with this name already exists. Overwrite it?" SAVE or
WBLOCK.
3
Suppresses the preceding prompts and those
issued by the LINETYPE command if you try to load a
GTXImage CAD 2000
EXPLMODE
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
EXTMAX
(Read-only)
Type: 3D Point
Saved in: Drawing
EXTMIN
(Read-only)
Type: 3D Point
Saved in: Drawing
EXTNAMES
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
FACETRATIO
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial Value: 0
FACETRES
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.5
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value:
FILEDIA
FILLETRAD
FILLMODE
FONTALT
GTXImage CAD 2000
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.5000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
Type: String
linetype that is already loaded or create a new linetype in
a file that already defines that linetype.
4
Suppresses the preceding prompts and those
issued by UCS Save. VPORTS Save if the name you
supply already exists.
5
Suppresses the prompt, "That name is already
in Use, redefine it?" issued by the – DIMSTYLE Save
option when you supply the name of an existing
dimension style.
When a prompt is suppressed by EXPERT, the
operation in question is performed as though you
entered y at the prompt. Setting EXPERT can affect
scripts, menu macros, AutoLISP and the command
functions.
Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports
non-uniformly scaled (NUS) blocks.
0
Does not explode NUS blocks
1
Explodes NUS blocks
Stores the upper-right point of the drawing extents.
Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only
with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world
coordinates for the current space.
Stores the lower-left point of the drawing extents.
Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only
with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world
coordinates for the current space.
Sets the parameters for named object names (such as
linetypes and layers) stored in symbol tables.
0
Uses Release 14 parameters, which limit
names to 31 characters in length. Names can include the
letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, and the special
characters, dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen ().
1
Uses AutoCAD 2000 parameters. Names can
be up to 255 characters in length, and can include the
letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, spaces, and any
special characters not used by Microsoft Windows and
AutoCAD for other purposes.
Controls the aspect ratio of faceting for cylindrical and
conic ACIS solids. A setting of 1 increases the density of
the mesh to improve the quality of rendered and shaded
models.
0
Creates an N by 1 mesh for cylindrical and
conic ACIS solids
1
Creates an N by M mesh for cylindrical and
conic ACIS solids
Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects,
and objects with hidden lines removed. Valid values are
from 0.01 to 10.0.
Suppresses display of the file dialog boxes.
0
Does not display dialog boxes. You can still
request a file dialog box to appear by entering a tilde (~)
in response to the command’s prompt. The same is true
for AutoLISP and ADS functions.
1
Displays file dialog boxes. However, if a script
or AutoLISP/ObjectARX{bmct tm.bmp} program is
active, AutoCAD displays an ordinary prompt.
Stores the current fillet radius.
Specifies whether multilines, traces, solids, all hatches
(including solid-fill), and wide polylines are filled in.
0
Objects are not filled
1
Objects are filled
Specifies the alternate font to be used when the
System Variables 469
Saved in: Registry
Initial value:
"simplex.shx"
FONTMAP
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "acad.fmp"
specified font file cannot be located. If an alternate font is
not specified, AutoCAD displays the Alternate Font
dialog box. The dialog box is displayed in the following
cases:
1.
A Release 13 drawing is opened; FONTALT is
not set or not found; and a TrueType®, SHX, or
PostScript font is not found for a defined text style.
2.
A Release 14 drawing is opened, FONTALT is
not set or not found, and an SHX or PostScript font is not
found for a defined text style. For missing TrueType
fonts in Release 14 drawings, AutoCAD automatically
substitutes the closest TrueType font available.
3.
The Browse button is pressed in the Options
dialog box when you specify an alternate font.
AutoCAD validates the alternate font specified for
FONTALT. If the font name or font file name is not found,
the message "Font not found” is displayed. Enter either a
TrueType font name (for example, Times New Roman
Bold) or a TrueType file name (for example, timebd.ttf).
When a TrueType file name is entered for FONTALT,
AutoCAD returns the font name in place of the file name
if the font is registered with the operating system.
Specifies the font mapping file to be used. A font
mapping file contains one font mapping per line; the
original font used in the drawing and the font to be
substituted for it are separated by a semicolon (;). For
example, to substitute the Times TrueType font for the
Roman font, the line in the mapping file would read as
follows:
romanc.shx;times.ttf
FRONTZ
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
FULLOPEN
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.5000,0.5000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
GRIDMODE
GRIDUNIT
GRIPBLOCK
GRIPCOLOR
GRIPHOT
GRIPS
470 System Variables
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 5
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
If FONTMAP does not point to a font mapping file, if the
FMP file is not found, or if the font file name specified in
the FMP file is not found,AutoCAD uses the font defined
in the style. If the font in the style is not found, AutoCAD
substitutes the font according to substitution rules.
Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target
plane for the current viewport, in drawing units.
Meaningful only if the front clipping bit in VIEWMODE is
on and the front-clip-not-at-eye bit is also on. The
distance of the front clipping plane from the camera point
is found by subtracting FRONTZ from the camera-totarget distance.
Indicates whether the current drawing is partially open.
0
Indicates a partially open drawing
1
Indicates a fully open drawing
Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off.
0
Turns the grid off
1
Turns the grid on
Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current
viewport.
Controls the assignment of grips in blocks.
0
Assigns a grip only to the insertion point of the
block
1
Assigns grips to objects within the block
Controls the color of nonselected grips (drawn as box
outlines). The valid range is 1 to 255.
Controls the color of selected grips (drawn as filled
boxes). The valid range is 1 to 255.
Controls the use of selection set grips for the Stretch,
GTXImage CAD 2000
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
GRIPSIZE
HANDLES
HIDEPRECISION
HIGHLIGHT
HPANG
HPBOUND
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 3
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: On
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial Value: 0
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 1
HPDOUBLE
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
HPNAME
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "ANSI31"
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: " "
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
HPSCALE
HPSPACE
HYPERLINKBASE
IMAGEHLT
Move, Rotate, Scale and Mirror Grip modes.
0
Turns off grips
1
Turns on grips
To adjust the size of the grips and the effective selection
area used by the cursor when you snap to a grip, use
GRIPSIZE.
Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. The valid range is
1 to 255.
Reports whether object handles can be accessed by
applications.
Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can
be calculated in double precision or single precision.
Setting HIDEPRECISION to 1 produces more accurate
hides by using double precision, but this setting also
uses more memory and can affect performance,
especially when hiding solids.
0
Single precision; uses less memory
1
Double precision; uses more memory
Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects
selected with grips.
Specifies the hatch pattern angle.
Controls the object type created by the BHATCH and
BOUNDARY commands.
0
Creates a region
1
Creates a polyline
Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined
patterns.
0
Turns off hatch pattern doubling
1
Turns on hatch pattern doubling
Sets a default hatch pattern name of up to 34 characters
without spaces. Returns " " if there is no default. Enter a
period (.) to set no default.
Specifies the hatch pattern scale factor, which must be
nonzero.
Specifies the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined
simple patterns, which must be nonzero.
Specifies the path used for all relative hyperlinks in the
drawing. If no value is specifed, the drawing path is
used for all relative hyperlinks.
Controls whether the entire raster image or only the
raster image frame is highlighted.
0
Highlights only the raster image frame
1
Highlights the entire raster image
Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created
and saved in drawing files.
0
No indexes are created
1
Layer index is created
2
Spatial index is created
3
Layer and spatial indexes are created
Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER
command and the Browse the Web dialog box.
INDEXCTL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
INETLOCATION
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value:
"www.autodesk.com/acad
user"
Stores the insertion base point set by BASE, which gets
Type: 3D point
expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
INSBASE
GTXImage CAD 2000
System Variables 471
INSNAME
INSUNITS
0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: " "
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
INSUNITSDEFSOURC Type: Integer
E
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
INSUNITSDEFTARGET Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
ISAVEBAK
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value:
ISAVEPERCENT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 50
ISOLINES
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 4
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
Type: 3D point
Not saved
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
(Read-only)
Type: String
LASTANGLE
LASTPOINT
LASTPROMPT
472 System Variables
Sets a default block name for the INSERT command.
The name must conform to symbol naming conventions.
Returns " " if no default is set. Enter a period (.) to set no
default.
When you drag a block from AutoCAD DesignCenter,
specifies a drawing units value as follows:
0
Unspecified (No units)
1
Inches
2
Feet
3
Miles
4
Millimeters
5
Centimeters
6
Meters
7
Kilometers
8
Microinches
9
Mils
10
Yards
11
Angstroms
12
Nanometers
13
Microns
14
Decimeters
15
Decameters
16
Hectometers
17
Gigameters
18
Astronomical Units
19
Light Years
20
Parsecs
Sets source content units value. Valid range is 0 to 20.
Sets target drawing units value. Valid range is 0 to 20.
Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for
large drawings. ISAVEBAK controls the creation of a
backup file (BAK). In Windows, copying the file data to
create a BAK file for large drawings takes a major
portion of the incremental save time.
0
No BAK file is created (even for a full save)
1
A BAK file is created
WARNING In some cases (such as a power failure in the
middle of a save), it's possible that drawing data can be
lost.
Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a
drawing file. The value of ISAVEPERCENT is an integer
between 0 and 100. The default value of 50 means that
the estimate of wasted space within the file does not
exceed 50 percent of the total file size. Wasted space is
eliminated by periodic full saves. When the estimate
exceeds 50 percent, the next save will be a full save.
This resets the wasted space estimate to 0. If
ISAVEPERCENT is set to 0, every save is a full save.
Specifies the number of isolines per surface on objects.
Valid integer values are from 0 to 2047.
Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to
the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space.
Stores the last point entered, expressed as a UCS
coordinate for the current space; referenced by the at
symbol (@) during keyboard entry.
Stores the last string echoed to the command line. This
string is identical to the last line seen at the command
GTXImage CAD 2000
LENSLENGTH
LIMCHECK
LIMMAX
LIMMIN
LISPINIT
LOCALE
LOGFILEMODE
LOGFILENAME
LOGFILEPATH
LOGINNAME
LTSCALE
LUNITS
Not saved
Initial value: " "
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
12.0000,9.0000
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "enu"
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
"C:\ACAD2000\acad.log"
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value:
"C:\ACAD2000\acad.log"
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1.0000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2
LUPREC
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 4
LWDEFAULT
Type: Enum
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 25
GTXImage CAD 2000
line and includes any user input.
Stores the length of the lens (in millimeters) used in
perspective viewing for the current viewport.
Controls the creation of objects outside the drawing
limits.
0
Objects can be created outside the limits
1
Objects cannot be created outside the limits
Stores the upper-right drawing limits for the current
space, expressed as a world coordinate. LIMMAX is
read-only when paper space is active and the paper
background or paper margins are displayed.
Stores the lower-left drawing limits for the current space,
expressed as a world coordinate. LIMMIN is read-only
when paper space is active and the paper background or
paper margins are displayed.
When single-document interface is enabled, specifies
whether AutoLISP-defined functions and variables are
preserved when you open a new drawing or whether
they are valid in the current drawing session only.
0
AutoLISP functions and variables are
preserved from drawing to drawing
1
AutoLISP functions and variables are valid in
the current drawing only
When SDI is set to 0, AutoLISP always behaves as if
LISPINIT were set to 1.
Displays the International Standards Organization (ISO)
language code of the current AutoCAD version you are
running.
Specifies whether the contents of the text window are
written to a log file.
0
Log file is not maintained
1
Log file is maintained
Specifies the path and name of the log file for the current
drawing. The initial value varies depending on where you
installed AutoCAD.
Specifies the path for the log files for all drawings in a
session. You can also specify the path by using the
OPTIONS command. The initial value varies depending
on where you installed AutoCAD.
Displays the user's name as configured or as input when
AutoCAD is loaded. The maximum length for a login
name is 30 characters.
Sets the global linetype scale factor. The linetype scale
factor cannot equal zero.
Sets linear units.
1
Scientific
2
Decimal
3
Engineering
4
Architectural
5
Fractional
Sets the number of decimal places displayed for linear
units in commands (except dimensioning commands),
variables, and output. This includes coordinate display,
and the AREA, DIST, ID, LIST, PROPERTIES, and
UNITS commands.
Sets the value for the default lineweight. The default
lineweight can be set to any valid lineweight value in
millimeters, including: 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35,
System Variables 473
LWDISPLAY
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
LWUNITS
Type: Integer
Saved In: Registry
Initial value: 1
MAXACTVP
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 64
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 200
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 1
MAXSORT
MBUTTONPAN
MEASUREINIT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: varies by
country
MEASUREMENT
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
MENUCTL
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
MENUECHO
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
MENUNAME
(Read-only)
474 System Variables
40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200,
and 211.
All values must be entered in millimeters. (Multiply a
value by 2.54 to convert values from inches to
millimeters.)
Controls whether the lineweight is displayed on the
Model or Layout tab. The setting is saved with each tab
in the drawing.
0
Lineweight is not displayed
1
Lineweight is displayed
Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches
or millimeters.
0
Inches
1
Millimeters
Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be
active at one time in the display. MAXACTVP has no
effect on the number of viewports that are plotted.
Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block
names sorted by listing commands. If the total number of
items exceeds this value, no items are sorted.
Controls the behavior of the third button or wheel on the
pointing device.
0
Supports the action defined in the AutoCAD
menu (.mnu) file.
1
Supports panning by holding and dragging the
button or wheel.
Sets the initial drawing units as English or metric.
Specifically, MEASUREINIT controls which hatch pattern
and linetype files an existing drawing uses when it’s
opened. It also controls which template is used.
0
English; AutoCAD uses the hatch pattern file
and linetype file designated by the ANSIHatch and
ANSILinetype registry settings.
1
Metric; AutoCAD uses the hatch pattern file
and linetype file designated by the ISOHatch and
ISOLinetype registry settings.
Sets drawing units as English or metric for the current
drawing only. Specifically, MEASUREMENT controls
which hatch pattern and linetype files an existing drawing
uses when it is opened.
0
English; AutoCAD uses the hatch pattern file
and linetype file designated by the ANSIHatch and
ANSILinetype registry settings.
1
Metric; AutoCAD uses the hatch pattern file
and linetype file designated by the ISOHatch and
ISOLinetype registry settings.
The drawing units for new drawings are controlled by
MEASUREINIT. (MEASUREINIT uses the same values
as MEASUREMENT). The MEASUREMENT setting of a
drawing always overrides the MEASUREINIT setting.
Controls the page switching of the screen menu.
0
Screen menu does not switch pages in
response to keyboard command entry
1
Screen menu does switch pages in response
to keyboard command entry
Sets menu echo and prompt control bits. The value is
the sum of the following:
1
Suppresses echo of menu items (^P in a menu
item toggles echoing)
2
Suppresses display of system prompts during
menu
4
Disables ^P toggle of menu echoing
8
Displays input/output strings; debugging aid
for DIESEL macros
Stores the menu file name, including the path for the file
GTXImage CAD 2000
MIRRTEXT
MODEMACRO
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: " "
MTEXTED
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "Internal"
NOMUTT
Type: Short
Not Saved
Initial Value: 0
OFFSETDIST
Type: Real
Not saved
Initial value: 1.000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
OFFSETGAPTYPE
OLEHIDE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
OLESTARTUP
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
OLEQUALITY
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
ORTHOMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
OSMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 4133
GTXImage CAD 2000
name.
Controls how the MIRROR command reflects text.
0
Retains text direction
1
Mirrors the text
Displays a text string on the status line, such as the
name of the current drawing, time/date stamp, or special
modes.
Use MODEMACRO to display a string of text, or use
special text strings written in the DIESEL macro
language to have AutoCAD evaluate the macro from
time to time and base the status line on user-selected
conditions.
Sets the primary and secondary text editors to use for
multiline text objects. The default setting is Internal,
which calls the internal MTEXT editor. If the mtext object
is fewer than 80 characters you can specify :lisped to
use the lisp editor.
Suppresses the message display (muttering) when it
wouldn’t normally be suppressed. Displaying messages
is the normal mode of AutoCAD, but message display is
suppressed during scripts, AutoLISP routines, and so on.
0
Resumes normal muttering behavior
1
Suppresses muttering indefinitely
Sets the default offset distance.
<0
Offsets an object through a specified point
>0
Sets the default offset distance
Controls how to offset polylines when a gap is created as
a result of offsetting the individual polyline segments.
0
Extends the segments to fill the gap
1
Fills the gaps with a filleted arc segment (the
radius of the arc segment is equal to the offset distance)
2
Fills the gaps with a chamfered line segment
Controls the display of OLE objects in AutoCAD.
0
All OLE objects are visible
1
OLE objects are visible in paper space only
2
OLE objects are visible in model space only
3
No OLE objects are visible
OLEHIDE affects both screen display and printing.
Controls whether the source application of an embedded
OLE object loads when plotting. Loading the OLE source
application may improve the plot quality.
0
Does not load the OLE source application
1
Loads the OLE source application when
plotting
Controls the default quality level for embedded OLE
objects.
0
Line art quality, such as an embedded
spreadsheet
1
Text quality, such as an embedded Word
document
2
Graphics quality, such as an embedded pie
chart
3
Photograph quality
4
High quality photograph
Constrains cursor movement to the perpendicular. When
ORTHOMODE is turned on, the cursor can move only
horizontally or vertically relative to the UCS and the
current grid rotation angle.
0
Turns off Ortho mode
1
Turns on Ortho mode
Sets running Object Snap modes using the following
bitcodes.
0
NONe
1
ENDpoint
System Variables 475
2
MIDpoint
4
CENter
8
NODe
16
QUAdrant
32
INTersection
64
INSertion
128
PERpendicular
256
TANgent
512
NEArest
1024
QUIck
2048
APParent Intersection
4096
EXTension
8192
PARallel
To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of
their values. For example, entering 3 specifies the
Endpoint (bitcode 1) and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object
snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all object snaps.
OSNAPCOORD
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
PAPERUPDATE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
PDMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
PDSIZE
PERIMETER
PFACEVMAX
PICKADD
476 System Variables
(Read-only)
Type: Real
Not saved
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
When object snaps are switched off using the Osnap
button on the status bar, a bitcode of 16384 (0x4000) is
returned, in addition to the normal value of OSMODE.
With this additional value, developers can write
applications for AutoCAD and distinguish this mode from
Object Snap modes that have been turned off from
within the Drafting Settings dialog box. Setting this bit
toggles running object snaps off. Setting OSMODE to a
value with this bit off toggles running object snaps on.
Controls whether coordinates entered on the command
line override running object snaps.
0
Running object snap settings override
keyboard coordinate entry
1
Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings
2
Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings
except in scripts
Controls the display of a warning dialog when attempting
to print a layout with a paper size different from the
paper size specified by the default for the plotter
configuration file.
0
Displays a warning dialog box if the paper size
specified in the layout is not supported by the plotter
1
Sets paper size to the configured paper size of
the plotter configuration file
Controls how point objects are displayed. For information
about values to enter, see the POINT command.
Sets the display size for point objects.
0
Creates a point at 5 percent of the drawing
area height
>0
Specifies an absolute size
<0
Specifies a percentage of the viewport size
Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA,
DBLIST, or LIST commands.
Sets the maximum number of vertices per face.
Controls whether subsequent selections replace the
current selection set or add to it.
0
Turns off PICKADD. The objects most recently
selected become the selection set. Previously selected
objects are removed from the selection set. Add more
objects to the selection set by pressing SHIFT while
selecting.
1
Turns on PICKADD. Each object selected,
either individually or by windowing, is added to the
GTXImage CAD 2000
PICKAUTO
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PICKBOX
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 3
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value:
PICKDRAG
PICKFIRST
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PICKSTYLE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PLATFORM
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
PLINEGEN
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
PLINETYPE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2
PLINEWID
GTXImage CAD 2000
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
current selection set. To remove objects from the set,
press SHIFT while selecting.
Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects
prompt.
0
Turns off PICKAUTO
1
Draws a selection window (for either a window
or a crossing selection) automatically at the Select
Objects prompt
Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
0
Draws the selection window using two points.
Click the pointing device at one corner then click to
select another corner.
1
Draws the selection window using dragging.
Click one corner and drag the pointing device; release
the button at the other corner.
Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb
selection) or after you issue a command.
0
Turns off PICKFIRST; you select objects after
you issue a command
1
Turns on PICKFIRST; you select objects
before you issue a command
Controls the use of group selection and associative
hatch selection.
0
No group selection or associative hatch
selection
1
Group selection
2
Associative hatch selection
3
Group selection and associative hatch
selection
Indicates which AutoCAD platform is in use. One of the
following strings may appear:
"Microsoft Windows NT Version 4.00 (x86)"
"Microsoft Windows Version 4.00 (x86)"
Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices
of a 2D polyline. Does not apply to polylines with tapered
segments.
0
Generates polylines to start and end with a
dash at each vertex
1
Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern
around the vertices of the polyline
Specifies whether AutoCAD uses optimized 2D
polylines. PLINETYPE controls both the creation of new
polylines with the PLINE command and the conversion
of existing polylines in drawings from previous releases.
0
Polylines in older drawings are not converted
when opened; PLINE creates old-format polylines
1
Polylines in older drawings are not converted
when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines
2
Polylines in older drawings are converted
when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines
For more information on the two formats, see the
CONVERT command.
PLINETYPE also controls the polyline type created with
the following commands: BOUNDARY (when object type
is set to Polyline), DONUT, PEDIT(when selecting a line
or arc), POLYGON, and SKETCH (when SKPLOY is set
to 1).
Stores the default polyline width.
System Variables 477
PLOTID
PLOTLEGACY
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: " "
Type: Integer
Saved in Registry
Initial Value: 0
PLOTROTMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PLOTTER
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
PLQUIET
POLARADDANG
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: null
POLARANG
Type: Real
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 90
Type: Real
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0.0000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
POLARDIST
POLARMODE
POLYSIDES
POPUPS
478 System Variables
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 4
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
Obsolete. Has no effect in AutoCAD 2000 except to
preserve the integrity of pre-AutoCAD 2000 scripts and
LISP routines.
Controls whether plot scripts from previous AutoCAD
releases are compatible with AutoCAD 2000.
0
AutoCAD 2000 command line interaction;
many pre-AutoCAD 2000 plot scripts will be ignored.
1
Pre-AutoCAD 2000 Plot command line
behavior that assigns plot styles by object color. Many
pre-AutoCAD 2000 plot scripts can run.
Controls the orientation of plots.
0
Rotates the effective plotting area so the
corner with the Rotation icon aligns with the paper at the
lower left for 0, top left for 90, top right for 180, and lower
right for 270.
X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to
the lower-left corner.
1
Aligns the lower-left corner of the effective
plotting area with the lower-left corner of the paper.
2
Works the same as 0 value except that the X
and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the rotated
origin position.
Obsolete. Has no effect in AutoCAD 2000 except to
preserve the integrity of pre-AutoCAD 2000 scripts and
LISP routines.
Controls the display of optional dialog boxes and
nonfatal errors for batch plotting and scripts.
0
Displays plot dialog boxes and nonfatal errors
1
Logs nonfatal errors and does not display plotrelated dialog boxes
Contains user-defined polar angles. You can add up to
10 angles. Each angle can be up to 25 characters,
separated with semicolons (;). AutoCAD displays angles
in the format set in the AUNIT system variable.
Sets the polar angle increment. Values are 90, 45, 30,
22.5, 18, 15,10, and 5.
Sets the snap increment when the SNAPSTYL system
variable is set to 1 (polar snap).
Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking. The
value is the sum of four bitcodes:
Polar angle measurements
0
Measure polar angles based on current UCS
(absolute)
1
Measure polar angles from selected objects
(relative)
Object snap tracking
0
Track orthogonally only
2
Use polar tracking settings in object snap
tracking
Use additional polar tracking angles
0
No
4
Yes
Acquire object snap tracking points
0
Acquire automatically
8
Press SHIFT to acquire
Sets the default number of sides for the POLYGON
command. The range is 3 to 1024.
Displays the status of the currently configured display
driver.
0
Does not support dialog boxes, the menu bar
and icon menus
1
Supports these features
GTXImage CAD 2000
PRODUCT
PROGRAM
PROJECTNAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "AutoCAD"
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "acad"
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: " "
PROJMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PROXYGRAPHICS
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
PROXYNOTICE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PROXYSHOW
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PSLTSCALE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
GTXImage CAD 2000
Returns the product name.
Returns the program name.
Assigns a project name to the current drawing. Used
when an xref or image is not found in its original path.
The project name points to a section in the registry that
can contain one or more search paths for each project
name defined. Project names and their search
directories are created from the Files tab of the Options
dialog box.
Project names make it easier for users to manage xrefs
and images when drawings are exchanged between
customers, or if users have different drive mappings to
the same location on a server.
If the xref or image is not found at the original path, the
project paths associated with the project name are
searched. If the xref or image is not found there, the
AutoCAD search path is searched.
Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or
extending.
0
True 3D mode (no projection)
1
Project to the XY plane of the current UCS
2
Project to the current view plane
Specifies whether images of proxy objects are saved in
the drawing.
0
Does not save image with the drawing; a
bounding box is displayed instead
1
Saves image with the drawing
Displays a notice when a proxy is created. A proxy is
created when you open a drawing containing custom
objects created by an application that is not present. A
proxy is also created when you issue a command that
unloads a custom object’s parent application.
0
No proxy warning is displayed
1
Proxy warning is displayed
Controls the display of proxy objects in a drawing.
0
Proxy objects are not displayed
1
Graphic images are displayed for all proxy
objects
2
Only the bounding box is displayed for all
proxy objects
Controls paper space linetype scaling.
0
No special linetype scaling. Linetype dash
lengths are based on the drawing units of the space
(model or paper) in which the objects were created.
Scaled by the global LTSCALE factor.
1
Viewport scaling governs linetype scaling. If
TILEMODE is set to 0, dash lengths are based on paper
space drawing units, even for objects in model space. In
this mode, viewports can have varying magnifications,
yet display linetypes identically. For a specific linetype,
the dash lengths of a line in a viewport are the same as
the dash lengths of a line in paper space. You can still
control the dash lengths with LTSCALE.
When you change PSLTSCALE or use a command such
as ZOOM with PSLTSCALE set to 1, objects in
viewports are not automatically regenerated with the new
linetype scale. Use the REGEN or REGENALL
System Variables 479
PSPROLOG
PSQUALITY
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: " "
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 75
PSTYLEMODE
Read Only
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
PSTYLEPOLICY
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
PSVPSCALE
Type: Real
Not Saved
Initial Value: 0
PUCSBASE
Type: String
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: “ ”
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
QTEXTMODE
RASTERPREVIEW
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
REFEDITNAME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not Saved
Initial value: " "
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1
Type: Integer
Not saved
Initial value: 0
REGENMODE
RE-INIT
RTDISPLAY
480 System Variables
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1
commands to update the linetype scales in each
viewport.
Assigns a name for a prolog section to be read from the
acad.psf file when you use the PSOUT command.
Controls the rendering quality of PostScript images and
whether they are drawn as filled objects or as outlines.
0
Turns off PostScript image generation.
<0
Sets the number of pixels per AutoCAD
drawing unit for the PostScript resolution.
>0
Sets the number of pixels per drawing unit but
uses the absolute value. Causes AutoCAD to show the
PostScript paths as outlines and does not fill them.
Indicates whether the current drawing is in a ColorDependent or Named Plot Style mode.
0
Uses color-dependent plot style tables in the
current drawing
1
Uses named plot style tables in the current
drawing
Controls whether an object's color property is associated
with its plot style.
0
No association is made between color and plot
style. The plot style for new objects is set to the default
defined in DEFPLSTYLE. The plot style for new layers is
set to the default defined in DEFPLSTYLE.
1
An object's plot style is associated with its
color.
Sets the view scale factor for all newly created
viewports. The view scale factor is defined by comparing
the ratio of units in paper space to the units in newly
created model space viewports. The view scale factor
you set is used with the VPORTS command. A value of
0 means the scale factor is Scaled to Fit. A scale must
be a positive real value.
Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and
orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space
only.
Controls how text is displayed.
0
Turns off Quick Text mode; displays
characters
1
Turns on Quick Text mode; displays a box in
place of text
Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with
the drawing.
0
No preview image is created
1
Preview image created
Indicates whether a drawing is in a reference-editing
state. Also stores the reference file name.
Controls automatic regeneration of the drawing.
0
Turns off the REGENAUTO command
1
Turns on the REGENAUTO command
Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer port, and acad.pgp file
by using the following bitcodes:
1
Digitizer input/output port reinitialization
4
Digitizer reinitialization
16
PGP file reinitialization (reload)
To specify more than one reinitialization, enter the sum
of the bitcode values. For example, enter 5 to specify
both digitizer port (1) and digitizer reinitialization (4).
Controls the display of raster images during Realtime
ZOOM or PAN.
0
Displays raster image content
1
Displays raster image outline only
GTXImage CAD 2000
SAVEFILE
SAVEFILEPATH
SAVENAME
SAVETIME
(Read-only)
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "auto.sv$"
Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: "C:\TEMP\"
(Read-only)
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: " "
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 120
SCREENBOXES
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
SCREENMODE
(Read-only)
Type: Integer
Not saved
SCREENSIZE
(Read-only)
Type: 2D point
Not saved
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0
SDI
SHADEDGE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 3
SHADEDIF
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 70
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 11
SHORTCUTMENU
GTXImage CAD 2000
RTDISPLAY is saved in the current profile.
Stores the current automatic save file name.
Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save
files for the AutoCAD session. You can also change the
path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box.
Stores the file name and directory path of the current
drawing after you save it.
Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
0
Turns off automatic saving
>0
Saves the drawing at intervals specified by the
nonzero integer automatically
The SAVETIME timer starts as soon as you make a
change to a drawing. It is reset and restarted by a
manual OSAVE, SAVE, or SAVEAS. The current
drawing is saved to auto.sv$.
Stores the number of boxes in the screen menu area of
the drawing area. If the screen menu is turned off,
SCREENBOXES is zero. On platforms that permit the
drawing area to be resized or the screen menu to be
reconfigured during an editing session, the value of this
variable might change during the editing session.
Stores a bitcode indicating the graphics/text state of the
AutoCAD display. It is the sum of the following bit values:
0
Text screen is displayed
1
Drawing area is displayed
2
Dual-screen display is configured
Stores current viewport size in pixels (X and Y).
Controls whether AutoCAD runs in single- or multipledocument interface. Helps third-party developers update
applications to work smoothly with the AutoCAD
multiple-drawing mode.
0
Turns on multiple-drawing interface.
1
Turns off multiple-drawing interface.
2
(Read-only) Multiple-drawing interface is
disabled because AutoCAD has loaded an application
that does not support multiple drawings. SDI setting 2 is
not saved.
3
(Read-only) Multiple-drawing interface is
disabled because the user has set SDI to 1 and
AutoCAD has loaded an application that does not
support multiple drawings. (SDI was set to 1 before the
application was loaded.) SDI setting 3 is not saved.
If SDI is set to 3, AutoCAD switches it back to
1 when the application that does not support multiple
drawings is unloaded.
Controls the shading of edges in rendering.
0
Faces shaded, edges not highlighted
1
Faces shaded, edges drawn in background
color
2
Faces not filled, edges in object color
3
Faces in object color, edges in background
color
Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light in
percentage of diffuse reflective light, when SHADEDGE
is set to 0 or 1.
Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode
shortcut menus are available in the drawing area.
SHORTCUTMENU uses the following bitcodes:
System Variables 481
SHPNAME
SKETCHINC
SKPOLY
Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: " "
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.1000
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
SNAPANG
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
SNAPBASE
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000
SNAPISOPAIR
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
SNAPMODE
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0
Type: Integer
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0
SNAPSTYL
SNAPTYPE
SNAPUNIT
Type: 2D point
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value:
0.5000,0.5000
SOLIDCHECK
Type: Integer
Saved in: Not Saved
Initial value: 1
SORTENTS
Type: Integer
482 System Variables
0
Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode
shortcut menus, restoring R14 legacy behavior.
1
Enables Default mode shortcut menus.
2
Enables Edit mode shortcut menus.
4
Enables Command mode shortcut menus. In
this case, the Command mode shortcut menu is
available whenever a command is active.
8
Enables Command mode shortcut menus only
when command options are currently available from the
command line.
To enable more than one type of shortcut menu at once,
enter the sum of their values. For example, entering 3
enables both Default (1) and Edit (2) mode shortcut
menus.
Sets a default shape name that must conform to symbol
naming conventions. If no default is set, it returns " ".
Enter a period (.) to set no default.
Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command.
Determines whether the SKETCH command generates
lines or polylines.
0
Generates lines
1
Generates polylines
Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current
viewport. The angle you specify is relative to the current
UCS.
Changes to this variable are not reflected in the grid until
the display is refreshed. AutoCAD does not redraw
automatically when system variable settings are
changed.
Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current
viewport relative to the current UCS.
Changes to this variable are not reflected in the grid until
the display is refreshed. AutoCAD does not redraw
automatically when system variable settings are
changed.
Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport.
0
Left
1
Top
2
Right
Turns the Snap mode on and off.
0
Snap off
1
Snap on for the current viewport
Sets the snap style for the current viewport.
0
S